DNeither system has any application in civil engineering
Answer is hidden
Question 51 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
A preliminary (approximate) estimate is typically prepared:
AOnly after construction is complete
BIn the early planning stage, based on unit rates or historical cost data, for budgeting/approval
COnly from complete detailed drawings
DOnly for legal dispute resolution
Answer is hidden
Question 52 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
A detailed estimate is prepared from:
AOnly a rough sketch with no measurements
BComplete drawings and specifications, calculating exact quantities and applying corresponding rates
COnly historical cost data with no drawings
DOnly the client's verbal description
Answer is hidden
Question 53 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
A revised estimate becomes necessary when:
AThe project finishes exactly on the original budget
BThe original sanctioned estimate is exceeded beyond a permissible limit
CNo changes occur during construction
DThe project is cancelled entirely
Answer is hidden
Question 54 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
The plinth area method of estimating is best classified as:
AA highly precise, item-wise detailed method
BAn approximate method used for quick preliminary estimates
CA method used only for material testing
DA method exclusively for property valuation
Answer is hidden
Question 55 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
Rate analysis for a construction item determines:
AOnly the labor cost, ignoring materials
BThe cost per unit of that item, accounting for materials, labor, equipment, overheads, and profit
COnly the market value of the finished building
DOnly the dimensions of the item
Answer is hidden
Question 56 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
Specifications in a construction project primarily describe:
AOnly the project's overall budget
BThe quality, quantity, and workmanship of materials and construction methods to be used
COnly the site's legal boundary
DOnly the contractor's company history
Answer is hidden
Question 57 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
General specifications, as distinct from detailed (particular) specifications, typically provide:
AAn item-by-item description with exact quantities for each component
BA broad description of materials/workmanship standards for the whole project, without exact quantities
CNo information at all about materials
DOnly cost figures with no material description
Answer is hidden
Question 58 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
A key purpose of well-prepared specifications is to:
AEliminate the need for any drawings
BServe as a reference for quality control/inspection and dispute resolution
CReplace the need for a cost estimate entirely
DApply only after construction is finished, with no use during construction
Answer is hidden
Question 59 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
Valuation of a property is the process of estimating:
AOnly its original construction cost with no adjustment
BIts fair present market (or other defined) value, considering location, condition, age, and market rates
COnly its physical dimensions
DOnly the number of rooms it contains
Answer is hidden
Question 60 of 4146Ch 1 · Estimating, Costing, and Valuation
Which of the following is NOT typically a factor considered in property valuation?
ALocation and condition of the property
BAge of the property and construction cost
CPrevailing market rates and income potential
DThe property owner's favourite colour
Answer is hidden
Question 61 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is fastest to react with water?
ATricalcium silicate
BDicalcium silicate
CTricalcium aluminate
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 62 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
To retard the initial setting time of cement, the compound responsible is ______.
ATricalcium silicate
BGypsum
CDicalcium silicate
DTricalcium aluminate
Answer is hidden
Question 63 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
For construction of structures in seawater, the cement preferred is ______.
APortland pozzolana cement (PPC)
BQuick-setting cement
CLow heat Portland cement
DRHPC
Answer is hidden
Question 64 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
To find which of the following is consistency test performed?
AFineness of cement
BTensile strength
CCompressive strength
DCorrect water-cement ratio
Answer is hidden
Question 65 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
IS 4031: Part 3: 1988 deals with ______.
ASoundness test
BConsistency test
CSetting time test
DCompressive strength test
Answer is hidden
Question 66 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In CBR test, the rate of penetration of plunger is ______.
A1.25 mm/min
B0.25 mm/min
C2.50 mm/min
D3.50 mm/min
Answer is hidden
Question 67 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Bulking of sand is ______.
ACompaction of sand
BSegregation of sand of particular size
CIncrease in volume of sand due to presence of moisture up to certain extent
DType of sand
Answer is hidden
Question 68 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Bulking of aggregate does not depend upon ______.
AShape of aggregate
BSpecific gravity of aggregate
CGrading of aggregate
DSize and shape of container
Answer is hidden
Question 69 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Bulking of sand is maximum at water content of approximately ______.
A2%
B4%
C6%
D7%
Answer is hidden
Question 70 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Bulking is maximum for ______.
ACoarse gravel
BFine gravel
CCoarse sand
DFine sand
Answer is hidden
Question 71 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
An aggregate is said to be flaky if its least dimension is less than ______.
A1/3 mean dimension
B3/4mean dimension
C2/3 mean dimension
D1/2 mean dimension
Answer is hidden
Question 72 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The bulking effect of coarse-grained aggregate is ______.
AGreater than fine sand
BLess than fine sand
CEqual to fine sand
DNegligible
Answer is hidden
Question 73 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is not a type of non-destructive test?
ACompression test
BVisual testing
CUltrasonic testing
DEddy current testing
Answer is hidden
Question 74 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The tensile test of steel helps in finding ______.
AElastic modulus
BYield strength
CPoisson's ratio
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 75 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What is the deformation per unit length called?
AStrain
BStress
CToughness
DResilience
Answer is hidden
Question 76 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Ductility is indicated by ______.
APercentage elongation
BPercentage of expansion
CPoisson's ratio
DElasticity
Answer is hidden
Question 77 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
A type of brick masonry work with alternate courses of stretchers and headers is called ______.
AFlemish bond
BEnglish bond
CStretcher bond
DHeader bond
Answer is hidden
Question 78 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The type of bond used to construct a 10 cm partition wall is ______.
AEnglish bond
BFlemish bond
CStretcher bond
DHeader bond
Answer is hidden
Question 79 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The bond in which headers and stretchers are laid in alternate courses and every stretcher course is started with a three-fourth brick is called ______.
AEnglish cross bond
BDutch bond
CMonk bond
DEnglish bond
Answer is hidden
Question 80 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The type of bond in which every course contains both headers and stretchers is called ______.
AEnglish bond
BFlemish bond
CRussian bond
DMixed bond
Answer is hidden
Question 81 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
When the face of brick masonry depicts the breadth and the length with breadth as the base, the orientation is called ______.
AShiner
BRowlock
CSoldier
DSailor
Answer is hidden
Question 82 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The piece of a brick cut with one corner equivalent to half the length and half the width of a full brick is known as ______.
AQueen closer
BBevelled closer
CKing closer
DHalf king closer
Answer is hidden
Question 83 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The piece of a brick cut along the centre of width in such a way that its length is equal to that of a full brick is called ______.
AHalf brick
BQueen closer
CKing closer
DBevelled closer
Answer is hidden
Question 84 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Queen closer may be placed ______.
AIn header course
BIn stretcher course
CIn header course next to first brick
DIn stretcher course next to first brick
Answer is hidden
Question 85 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The nominal thickness of half-brick partition wall in mm is ______.
A100 mm
B150 mm
C200 mm
D75 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 86 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The thickness of joints in header course as compared to stretcher course should be ______.
ALess
BMore
CEqual
DEqual or more
Answer is hidden
Question 87 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The standard size of a modular brick is ______.
A8 cm × 9 cm × 9 cm
B8 cm × 9 cm × 4.5 cm
C19 cm × 9 cm × 9 cm
D19 cm × 9 cm × 4 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 88 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
As compared to English bond, double Flemish bond is ______.
AStronger
BMore compact
CCostly
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 89 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The nominal thickness of an expansion joint in brick walls is kept more than ______.
A5 mm
B10 mm
C15 mm
D20 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 90 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The cement mortar used in brick masonry work should not be leaner than ______.
A1:3
B1:4
C1:5
D1:6
Answer is hidden
Question 91 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The minimum strength of mortar used in load-bearing brick masonry is ______.
A50 N/cm²
B100 N/cm²
C150 N/cm²
D200 N/cm²
Answer is hidden
Question 92 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Brick nogging for partition wall is constructed by ______.
ALaying bricks as stretchers in cement mortar masonry
BLaying bricks as headers in cement mortar
CReinforcing brick wall with iron straps
DConstructing brickwork within a wooden framework
Answer is hidden
Question 93 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The minimum number of brick samples used in compressive strength test of brick is ______.
A3
B4
C5
D6
Answer is hidden
Question 94 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
For water absorption test on brick, the brick sample should be immersed in water for ______.
A12 h
B24 h
C48 h
D72 h
Answer is hidden
Question 95 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The water absorption of first-class brick should not exceed ______.
A5%
B20%
C22%
D25%
Answer is hidden
Question 96 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
How is the hardness of brick tested?
AUsing fingernail
BUsing hardness apparatus
CUsing hammer
DUsing chisel
Answer is hidden
Question 97 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In absorption test on brick, how many hours does it have to be soaked in cold water?
A6 hours
B12 hours
C24 hours
D48 hours
Answer is hidden
Question 98 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Compressive strength of second-class brick is ______.
A10.5 N/mm²
B7 N/mm²
C3.5 N/mm²
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 99 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Why are bricks soaked in water before using in brick masonry?
AFor removing dust
BFor reducing air voids
CFor preventing depletion of moisture from mortar
DFor reducing efflorescence
Answer is hidden
Question 100 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The compressive strength of first-class brick is ______.
A10.5 N/mm²
B7 N/mm²
C3.5 N/mm²
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 101 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which machine is used to measure compressive strength?
AUniversal Testing Machine
BImpact Testing Machine
CFatigue Testing Machine
DErichsen Machine
Answer is hidden
Question 102 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
For compressive test of brick, which mortar ratio is placed in the frog?
A1:2
B1:3
C1:4
D1:5
Answer is hidden
Question 103 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In the soundness test, the whole assembly is immersed in water for ______.
A20 minutes
B1 hour
C24 hours
D48 hours
Answer is hidden
Question 104 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In compressive strength test, the minimum strength developed by the cube of M20 concrete in 7 days is ______.
A10 MPa
B12.5 MPa
C15 MPa
D20 MPa
Answer is hidden
Question 105 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
A stone is rejected if it absorbs water more than ______%.
A5
B10
C15
D20
Answer is hidden
Question 106 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Area of specimen used for compressive strength test of cement is ______.
A50 mm²
B500 mm²
C5000 mm²
D50000 mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 107 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The ratio of cement and sand in mortar used during compressive strength test of brick is ______.
A1:2
B1:3
C1:4
D1:5
Answer is hidden
Question 108 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The size of Vicat's plunger used for consistency test of cement is ______.
A5 mm
B8 mm
C10 mm
D12 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 109 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Curvature correction is ______ times the refraction correction.
A6
B7
C8
D9
Answer is hidden
Question 110 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In chain surveying the lines are primarily provided ______.
Ato check the accuracy of the survey
Bto take offsets for detail survey
Cto avoid long offsets from chain lines
Dto increase the number of chain lines
Answer is hidden
Question 111 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
If the smallest division of the vernier is shorter than the smallest division of main scale, then the vernier is known as ______.
ADirect vernier
BSimple vernier
CDouble vernier
DRetrograde vernier
Answer is hidden
Question 112 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
An angle of 45° with a chain line may be set out with ______.
AOptical square
BOpen cross staff
CFrench cross staff
DPrismatic square
Answer is hidden
Question 113 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Handles are connected to link by ______.
AFlexible joint
BSwivel joint
CRigid joint
DBall and socket joint
Answer is hidden
Question 114 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The radius of curvature of the arc of the bubble tube is generally kept ______.
A10 m
B25 m
C50 m
D100 m
Answer is hidden
Question 115 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Axis of level tube means ______.
ALine at its highest point
BHorizontal line
CLine of sight
DLine tangential to the arc at its highest point
Answer is hidden
Question 116 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Permanent adjustment of level is done by ______.
ACentering
BLevelling
CTwo peg test
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 117 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Removal of parallax may be achieved by focusing ______.
AThe objective
BThe eyepiece
CThe objective and the eye-piece
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 118 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The line of collimation method of reduction of levels does not provide a check on ______.
AIntermediate sights
BFore sights
CBack sights
DReduced levels
Answer is hidden
Question 119 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Inverted staff is used for ______.
ACeiling
BUnderside of bridge
CBoth of the above
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 120 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Prismatic compass is considered more accurate than a surveyor's compass, because ______.
AIt is provided with a better magnetic needle
BIt is provided with a sliding glass in the object vane
CIts graduations are in whole circle bearings
DIt is provided with a prism to facilitate reading of its graduated circle
Answer is hidden
Question 121 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The zero of the graduated circle of a prismatic compass is located at ______ end.
AN
BS
CE
DW
Answer is hidden
Question 122 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
If the focal length of the object glass is 25 cm and the distance from object glass to the trunnion axis is 15 cm, the additive constant is ______.
A0.1
B0.4
C0.6
D0.8
Answer is hidden
Question 123 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The total change in level along the line is equal to total back sights ______.
Aminus total fore sights
Bthe total rises minus total falls
Cthe reduced level of last point minus reduced level of the first point
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 124 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The back staff reading on a B.M. of R.L. 500.000 m is 2.685 m. If foresight reading on a point is 1.345 m, the reduced level of the point is ______.
A502.685 m
B501.345 m
C501.340 m
D601.345 m
Answer is hidden
Question 125 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
If (i) is the stadia distance, (f) is the focal length and (d) is the distance between the objective and vertical axis of the tacheometer, the multiplying constant is ______.
Af/i
Bi/f
Cf+d
Df/d
Answer is hidden
Question 126 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
During levelling if back sight is more than foresight ______.
Athe forward staff is at lower point
Bthe back staff is at lower point
Cthe difference in level cannot be ascertained
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 127 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The rise and fall method of reduction of levels provides a check on ______.
ABack sights
BFore sights
CIntermediate sights
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 128 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Station in levelling refers to ______.
AInstrument station
BStaff station
CAny of the above
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 129 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In case of levelling by level pipe, level is indicated by ______.
AUpper face
BMiddle face
CLower face
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 130 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The method of finding out the difference in elevation between two points for eliminating the effect of curvature and refraction is ______.
AReciprocal levelling
BPrecise levelling
CDifferential levelling
DFlying levelling
Answer is hidden
Question 131 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Question 132 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
If in a closed traverse, the sum of north latitudes is more than the sum of south latitudes and also the sum of west departures is more than the sum of east departures, the bearing of the closing line is in the ______.
ANE direction
BNW direction
CSE direction
DSW direction
Answer is hidden
Question 133 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
If the angular measurements of a traverse are more precise than its linear measurements, balancing of the traverse is done by ______.
ABowditch's rule
BTransit rule
CEmpirical rule
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 134 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The orthographical projection of a traverse leg upon the reference meridian is known as ______.
ADeparture of leg
BLatitude of the leg
CCo-ordinate of the leg
DBearing of the leg
Answer is hidden
Question 135 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The orthographical projection of a traverse leg upon the reference meridian is known as ______.
ADeparture of leg
BLatitude of the leg
CCo-ordinate of the leg
DBearing of the leg
Answer is hidden
Question 136 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Bowditch rule is applied to ______.
AAn open traverse for graphical adjustment
BA closed traverse for adjustment of closing error
CDetermine the effect of local attraction
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 137 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Elimination of parallax belongs to ______ adjustment.
ATemporary
BPermanent
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 138 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Size of a theodolite is specified by ______.
AThe length of telescope
BThe diameter of vertical circle
CThe diameter of lower plate
DThe diameter of upper platE
Answer is hidden
Question 139 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The smallest horizontal angle between the true meridian and survey line is known as ______.
ADeclination
BBearing
CAzimuth
DDip
Answer is hidden
Question 140 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The length of a traverse leg may be obtained by multiplying the latitude and ______
ASecant of its reduced bearing
BSine of its reduced bearing
CCosine of its reduced bearing
DTangent of its reduced bearing
Answer is hidden
Question 141 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Diaphragm of a surveying telescope is held inside ______.
ATelescope tube at its mid-point
BTelescope at end nearer the eye-piece
CEye-piece
DObjective
Answer is hidden
Question 142 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The center of mass and center of gravity of a rigid body ________
AAlways coincide
BNever coincide
CMay or may not coincide
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 143 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
he center of gravity of a semi-circle lies at a distance of ______ from its base measured along the vertical radius.
A4r/3π
B3r/4π
C3r/8π
D8r/3π
Answer is hidden
Question 144 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The center of gravity of hemisphere is ______
A3π/4r
B4r/5π
C5r/3π
D8/3r
Answer is hidden
Question 145 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The CG of a semi-circular plate of 66 cm diameter, from its base, is ______
A33π/8 cm
B1/14 cm
C14 cm
D63/8 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 146 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Where the center of gravity of a circle lies?
AAt its centre
BAnywhere on its circumference
CAnywhere on its radius
DAnywhere on its diameter
Answer is hidden
Question 147 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Where will be the centre of gravity of a uniform rod lies?
AAt its end
BAt its middle point
CAt its centre of cross-sectional area
DAt its end points
Answer is hidden
Question 148 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The CG of plane lamina is not at its geometrical centre, if it is a ______
ACircle
BSquare
CRectangle
DRight-angled triangle
Answer is hidden
Question 149 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The C.G. of uniform rod lies at its ______
AEnd
BMiddle point
CCenter of cross-sectional area
DDepends upon its materials
Answer is hidden
Question 150 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The C.G. of a right circular cone lies on its axis of symmetry at a height of ______
Ah/2
Bh/3
Ch/4
Dh/5
Answer is hidden
Question 151 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The CG of a thin hollow cone of height h, above its base lies on the axis, at a height of ______
Ah/3
Bh/4
Ch/5
Dh/6
Answer is hidden
Question 152 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The CG of a triangular section is located at the point of ______
AIntersection of its altitudes
BIntersection of bisector of angles
CIntersection of diagonals
DConcurrence of the medians
Answer is hidden
Question 153 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The center of gravity of a circular ring will be a ______
ALine which acts as axis of the ring
BPoint anywhere in its inner circumference
CPoint at center of ring
DPoint on centroid of cross section of ring
Answer is hidden
Question 154 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The centre of gravity of a triangle is at the point where three ______
AMedians of the triangle meet
BPerpendicular bisectors of the sides of the triangle meet
CBisectors of the angle of the triangle meet
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 155 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The point through which the whole weight of the body acts is called ______
AInertial point
BCenter of gravity
CCentroid
DCentral point
Answer is hidden
Question 156 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What will be the radius of gyration of a circular plate of diameter 10 cm?
A1.5 cm
B4.5 cm
C2.5 cm
D3.5 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 157 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The radius of gyration along x and y axis are 30 mm and 40 mm respectively, the radius of gyration along the axis perpendicular to given axis is ______
A70 mm
B60 mm
C50 mm
D80 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 158 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The radius of gyration of rectangular section of base 'b' and height 'd' is ______
Ad/√8
Bd/√12
Cd/√6
Dd/√2
Answer is hidden
Question 159 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The ratio of square root of moment of inertia to area of the materials is ______
AEqual to 1
BLess than 1
CEqual to radius of gyration
DEqual to diameter of gyration
Answer is hidden
Question 160 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The radius of gyration for a triangular section having base b and height h is ______
Ah/√2
Bh/(3√2)
Ch/(2√3)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 161 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What is the unit of radius of gyration?
Am
Bm²
Cm³
Dm⁴
Answer is hidden
Question 162 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The radius of gyration of a rectangular section is inversely proportional to ______
ASquare root of the moment of inertia
BSquare root of the area
CSquare root of the moment of inertia divided by area of the section
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 163 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The perpendicular axis theorem is used to calculate the MOI of ______
ACircular lamina
BSemi-circular lamina
CTriangle lamina
DSquare lamina
Answer is hidden
Question 164 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The moment of inertia of any geometrical section about its centroidal axis is ______
AAlways least
BAlways maximum
CMay be minimum or maximum or any value
DZero
Answer is hidden
Question 165 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The ratio of MOI of a circular plate of diameter same as that of a side of square plate is ______
AEqual to 3/(16π)
BEqual to 3π/4
CEqual to 1
DEqual to 3π/16
Answer is hidden
Question 166 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The moment of inertia of any geometrical section, ______ from its centroidal axis.
AIncreases by Ah
BDecreases by Ah
CIncreases by Ah²
DDecreases by Ah 2
Answer is hidden
Question 167 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The unit of Moment of Inertia of a body, is ______
Am
Bm²
Cm³
Dm⁴
Answer is hidden
Question 168 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The moment of inertia of a plane area with respect to an axis ______ to the plane is called polar moment of inertia.
AParallel
BPerpendicular
CEqual
DOpposite
Answer is hidden
Question 169 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Moment of inertia (MOI) is also known as ______
ASecond moment of area
BSecond moment of mass
CSecond moment of force
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 170 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The moment of inertia of a triangular section of base a and height b about its base is expressed as ______
Aab³/12
Bab³/36
Cab³/6
Dab³/2
Answer is hidden
Question 171 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The polar moment of inertia of a solid shaft is ______
Aπd⁴/32
Bπd⁴/64
Cπd⁴/3
Dπd⁴/2
Answer is hidden
Question 172 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The moment of inertia of a circular section about its diameter d is ______
Aπd³/16
Bπd⁴/6
Cπd⁴/4
Dπd⁴/64
Answer is hidden
Question 173 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What is used in rainwater gutter in roof?
ACement
BSand
CBitumen
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 174 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Gable band in the house is provided at ______
APlinth level
BSill level
CFloor level
DRoof level
Answer is hidden
Question 175 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In ordinary residential and public buildings, the damp proof course is generally provided at ______
AGround level
BPlinth level
CWater table level
DMidway ground level and water table level
Answer is hidden
Question 176 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The flooring in which the small pieces of broken tiles or marble are arranged in definite pattern is called ______
ATerrazzo flooring
BMuram flooring
CMosaic flooring
DCork flooring
Answer is hidden
Question 177 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Pick up the correct statement from the following:
ADPC should be continuous
BDPC should be of good impervious material
CDPC may be horizontal or vertical
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 178 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Dampness causes ______
AGrowth of termites
BBleaching of paints
CCrumbling of plaster
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 179 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
For DPC at plinth level, which grade of concrete is used?
AM10
BM20
CM25
DM15
Answer is hidden
Question 180 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The organization that prepares the Nepal standards is ______
AMinistry of Science and Technology
BDepartment of Urban Development and Building Construction
CNepal Bureau of Standards and Metrology
DDepartment of Roads
Answer is hidden
Question 181 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which property category includes density, porosity, and water absorption of a material?
AChemical properties
BMechanical properties
CPhysical properties
DThermal properties
Answer is hidden
Question 182 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The first edition of National Building Code have ______
A18 volumes
B20 volumes
C70 volumes
D30 volumes
Answer is hidden
Question 183 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The rules set forth by the government authorities to regulate the architectural and construction aspect of building is called ______
ABuilding codes
BBuilding guidelines
CBuilding regulations
DBuilding by laws
Answer is hidden
Question 184 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
NBC has categorized the buildings in Nepal in ______ categories
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 185 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The FAR of building is the ratio of total floor area of the building with ______
AArea of ground floor
BPlot area
CGround coverage of building
DHalf of the ground floor area
Answer is hidden
Question 186 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Height of boundary walls to be provided is ______
A5 feet
B4 feet
C2 feet
D1 feet
Answer is hidden
Question 187 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The building by laws are prepared by ______
ALocal people
BNEC
CLocal authority
DSONA
Answer is hidden
Question 188 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The maximum ground coverage for School building is ______
A70%
B20%
C40%
D90%
Answer is hidden
Question 189 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
. As per by laws, the floor height maintained in hilly region is ______
A3.6 m
B3.2 m
C3.8 m
D3.1 m
Answer is hidden
Question 190 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Generally structural design of building is not necessary for approval if ______
APlinth area less than 1000 sq. ft
BUp to 3 floor including ground floor
CStructural span less than 4.5 m
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 191 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The law that governs the standards of construction of structural and non-structural buildings in Nepal is ______
ABuilding bylaws
BBuilding code
CBuilding specification
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 192 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The number of mirror line that can be drawn in rhombus is ______
A0
B1
C2
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 193 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The number of axis of symmetry for square shape is ______
A1
B2
C4
D8
Answer is hidden
Question 194 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
An imaginary straight line that divides a geometric shape into two identical mirror images is called ______
ANeutral axis
BAxis of CG
CReference lines
DAxis of symmetry
Answer is hidden
Question 195 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The number of axis of symmetry for scalene triangle is ______
A0
B1
C2
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 196 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The point, where the total volume of the body is assumed to be concentrated is ______
ACenter of area
BCentroid of volume
CCentroid of mass
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 197 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The point at which the total area of a plane figure is assumed to be concentrated is called ______
ACentroid
BCentre of gravity
CCentral point
DInertial point
Answer is hidden
Question 198 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The axis about which moment of area is taken is known as ______
AAxis of area
BAxis of moment
CAxis of reference
DAxis of rotation
Answer is hidden
Question 199 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The centroid of semicircular arc lies at ______ distance from the base.
A0
B2r/3
C2r/π
D4r/(3π)
Answer is hidden
Question 200 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The centroid of quarter circle from the base lies at ____
A4r/(3π)
B4r/(2π)
C2r/(3π)
D6r/(3π)
Answer is hidden
Question 201 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The centroid of the right angle triangle with base b and height h lies at ______ distance from the apex.
Ab/3, h/3
Bb/3, 2h/3
C2h/3, 2b/3
DBoth (b) and (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 202 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
. One of the uses of the centroid is, as in the simplification of the loading system, the net force acts at the ______ of the loading body.
ACentroid
BThe centre axis
CThe corner
DThe base
Answer is hidden
Question 203 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Section modulus of a hollow circular section is ______
Aπ(D⁴−d⁴)/(32D)
Bπ(D⁴−d⁴)/(16D)
Cπ(D⁴−d⁴)/(64D)
D8π(D⁴−d⁴)/D
Answer is hidden
Question 204 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Moment of inertia of a triangular section of base and height about an axis passing through its vertex and parallel to the base is ______ than that passing through its C.G. and parallel to the base.
A2 times
B3 times
C6 times
D9 times
Answer is hidden
Question 205 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The section modulus of hollow circular section having external diameter D and internal diameter d is ______
Aπ(D⁴−d⁴)/(32D)
Bπ(D⁴−d⁴)/(16D)
Cπ(D⁴−d⁴)/(64D)
D8π(D⁴−d⁴)/D
Answer is hidden
Question 206 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The section modulus of circular section is given by ______
AπD³/16
BπD³/32
CπD³/64
DπD³/3
Answer is hidden
Question 207 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The section modulus of hollow rectangular section is ______
A(BD³ − bd³)/(6D)
B(BD³ − bd³)/(12D)
C(BD³ − bd³)/(32D)
D(BD³ − bd³)/(62D)
Answer is hidden
Question 208 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What is the formula of theorem of parallel axis?
AI=I G +Ah 2
BI=I G - Ah 2
CI=I G *Ah 2
DI=I G +Ah
Answer is hidden
Question 209 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What is the formula of theorem of perpendicular axis?
AI z =I x - I y
BI z =I x + I y
CI z =I x * I y
DI z =I x + I
Answer is hidden
Question 210 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The product of mass and velocity of a moving body is called ______
AMoment
BMomentum
CPower
DImpulse
Answer is hidden
Question 211 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Surveys which are carried out to provide a national grid of control for preparation of accurate maps of large areas, are known as ______
APlane surveys
BGeodetic surveys
CGeographical surveys
DTopographical surveys
Answer is hidden
Question 212 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Surveys which are carried out to depict mountains, rivers, water bodies, wooded areas and other cultural details, are known as ______
ACadastral surveys
BCity surveys
CTopographical surveys
DGuide map surveys
Answer is hidden
Question 213 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The surveying used to determine additional details such as boundaries of fields, is called ______
ACity surveying
BLocation surveying
CCadastral surveying
DTopographical surveying
Answer is hidden
Question 214 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The boundary of water of a still lake represents ______
ALevel surface
BHorizontal surface
CContour line
DA concave surface
Answer is hidden
Question 215 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
When the map has shrunk and needs to be reproduced, the scale that suits best is ______
AEngineers scale
BPlain scale
CGraphical scale
DFractional scale
Answer is hidden
Question 216 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Systematic errors are those errors ______
AWhich cannot be recognized
BWhose character is understood
CWhose effects are cumulative and can be eliminated
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 217 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The tension at which the effects of pull and sag for a tape are neutralized is called ______
AInitial tension
BSurface tension
CAbsolute tension
DNormal tension
Answer is hidden
Question 218 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
A surveyor made an error which is despite his skill and vigilance. Which type of error has this surveyor committed?
AMistake
BRandom error
CSystematic error
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 219 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
If the tape is too short, correction is ______
ANegative
BPositive
CAny of the above
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 220 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The accuracy of chain surveying depends more upon ______
ALeader
BFollower
CBoth of the above
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 221 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Discrepancy means difference between ______
ATrue value and error
BMeasured value and actual value
CTwo measured values of the same physical quantity
DAny of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 222 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
For indirect ranging, minimum number of ranging rods required is ______
A1
B3
C2
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 223 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Direct ranging is possible only when the end stations are ______
AClose to each other
BNot more than 100 m apart
CLocated at highest points
DMutually inter-visible
Answer is hidden
Question 224 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Metric chains are generally available in ______
A10 m and 20 m length
B15 m and 20 m length
C20 m and 30 m length
D20 m and 60 m length
Answer is hidden
Question 225 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The angle between two plane mirrors of an optical square is ______
A45°
B5°
C4°
D25°
Answer is hidden
Question 226 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The construction of optical square is based on the principle of optical ______
AReflection
BRefraction
CDouble refraction
DDouble reflection
Answer is hidden
Question 227 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The sensitiveness of a level tube decreases if ______
ARadius of curvature of its inner surface is increased
BDiameter of the tube is increased
CLength of the bubble is increased
DBoth viscosity and surface tension are increased
Answer is hidden
Question 228 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Sensitiveness of a level tube is designated by ______
ARadius of level tube
BLength of level tube
CLength of bubble of level tube
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 229 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The vertical angle between the longitudinal axis of a freely suspended magnetic needle and a horizontal line at its pivot is known as ______
ADip
BDeclination
CAzimuth
DBearing
Answer is hidden
Question 230 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
If the image of an object does not lie in the plane of cross hairs, the error is called ______
ACollimation error
BParallax
CLeveling error
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 231 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In quadrantal bearing system, back bearing of a line may be obtained from its forward bearing by ______
AAdding 180°, if the given bearing is less than 180°
BSubtracting 180°, if the given bearing is more than 180°
CChanging the cardinal points, i.e. substituting N for S and E for W and vice-versa
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 232 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
If the reduced bearing of a line AB is N60°W and length is 100 m, then the latitude and departure respectively of the line AB will be ______
A+50 m, +86.6 m
B+86.6 m, −50 m
C+50 m, −86.6 m
D+70.7 m, −50 m
Answer is hidden
Question 233 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The magnetic bearing of a line is 32° and the magnetic declination is 10°15′ W. The true bearing is ______
A42°15′
B42°15′ W
C21°45′ W
D21°45′
Answer is hidden
Question 234 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The reduced bearing (RB) of a whole circle bearing (WCB) 160° is ______
A30° N
B20° SE
C20° SW
D45° NW
Answer is hidden
Question 235 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Calculate right face zenith angle if Left Face zenith angle is 98°30′30″.
A261°29′30″
B261°29′3″
C261°9′30″
D21°29′30″
Answer is hidden
Question 236 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which country developed GPS?
AUSA
BUK
CRussia
DChina
Answer is hidden
Question 237 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The minimum number of satellites needed for a GPS to determine the position accurately is ______
A4
B2
C3
D9
Answer is hidden
Question 238 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The principle of GPS is ______
ATrilateration
BTriangulation
CBoth
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 239 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
How many satellites are used for GPS by the US Department of Defense?
A18
B20
C22
D8
Answer is hidden
Question 240 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following doesn't determine the capability of GIS?
ADefining a map
BRepresenting cartographic features
CRetrieving data
DTransferring data
Answer is hidden
Question 241 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The ‘point of curve’ of a simple circular curve, is ______
APoint of tangency
BPoint of commencement
CPoint of intersection
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 242 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Sharpness of the curve is designated by ______
ADegree of curve
BRadius
CBoth
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 243 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The chord of a curve smaller than peg interval, is known as ______
ASmall chord
BSub-chord
CNormal chord
DShort chord
Answer is hidden
Question 244 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
. If the long chord and tangent length of a circular curve of radius R are equal the angle of deflection, is ______
A120°
B20°
C160°
D10°
Answer is hidden
Question 245 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The cross-sections for a highway is taken at ______
ARight angle to the centre line
B30 meters apart
CIntermediate points having abrupt change in gradient
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 246 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Contours of different elevations may cross each other only in the case of ______
AAn overhanging cliff
BA vertical cliff
CA saddle
DAn inclined plane
Answer is hidden
Question 247 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The angle of intersection of a contour and a ridge line, is ______
A30°
B80°
C40°
D90°
Answer is hidden
Question 248 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Find the suitable contour interval on a map on scale 1:10,000.
A2.5 m
B2.58 m
C2.9 m
D25 m
Answer is hidden
Question 249 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Area of field is 45000 m². The length and breadth of this field measured on map are 9 cm × 8 cm. The R.F. for the map is ______
A1 : 2500
B1 : 2
C1 : 500
D4 : 2500
Answer is hidden
Question 250 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following methods of contouring is most suitable for a hilly terrain?
ADirect method
BSquare method
CCross-sections method
DTachometric method
Answer is hidden
Question 251 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
When the ground is very steep, taping is done by ______
AStepping method
BIndirect method
CBoth
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 252 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
If a topographic map is prepared with 5 m contour interval, then index contour is generally shown at ______
AEvery 5th contour
BEvery 3rd contour
CEvery 8th contour
DEvery 6th contour
Answer is hidden
Question 253 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Contour lines of different elevations can unite to form one line, only in the case of ______
AA vertical cliff
BA saddle
CA water shed line
DA hill top
Answer is hidden
Question 254 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The process of arriving at the rough cost of a project is called ______
ADetailed cost
BEstimation
CAbstract cost
DRough cost
Answer is hidden
Question 255 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
______ is prepared on the basis of plinth area of the building, the rate being deducted from the cost of a similar building having similar specifications, heights, and construction in the locality.
ACube rate estimate
BSupplementary estimate
CMaintenance estimate
DPlinth area estimate
Answer is hidden
Question 256 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The plinth area of a building not includes ______
AArea of the walls at the floor level
BInternal shaft for sanitary installations up to 2 sq. m in area
CLift and wall including landing
DArea of cantilevered porch
Answer is hidden
Question 257 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Carpet area does not include the area of ______
AThe walls along with doors and other openings
BBath room and lavatory
CKitchen and pantry
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 258 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Open areas, courtyard and balconies are NOT included in which area of valuation ______
APlinth area
BPlot area
CCarpet area
DFloor area
Answer is hidden
Question 259 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The most reliable estimate is ______
ADetailed estimate
BPreliminary estimate
CPlinth area estimate
DCube rate estimate
Answer is hidden
Question 260 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
While preparing a detailed estimate ________.
ADimension should be measured correct to 0.01 m
BArea should be measured correct to 0.01 sq. m
CVolume should be measured correct to 0.01 cu. m
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 261 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The 'centre line method' is specially adopted for estimating ________.
ACircular buildings
BHexagonal buildings
COctagonal buildings
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 262 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Due to change in price level, a revised estimate is prepared if the sanctioned estimate exceeds ________.
A5.0%
B2.0%
C1.0%
D3.0%
Answer is hidden
Question 263 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The main factor to be considered while preparing a detailed estimate is ________.
AQuantity of the materials
BAvailability of materials
CTransportation of materials
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 264 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The estimated cost should not be greater than ________ of actual cost of project.
A10%
B20%
C30%
D40%
Answer is hidden
Question 265 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The carpet area of a residential building is generally ______ percent of its plinth area.
A50 to 65
B40 to 65
C50 to 60
D30 to 65
Answer is hidden
Question 266 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What percentage of plinth area is provided for horizontal circulation area?
A10 to 15%
B5 to 15%
C15 to 25%
D5 to 25%
Answer is hidden
Question 267 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
As per regulations, the plinth area should have occupied about ________ of total plot area.
A50 to 60%
B20 to 60%
C10 to 60%
D10 to 20%
Answer is hidden
Question 268 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Pick up the correct reason for making conceptual (or preliminary) estimate
ATo have a check on a definitive cost estimate
BTo check quotations from contractors and/or sub-contractors
CTo compute target estimate for the owner while drawing and specifications are in initial stage
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 269 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which method is adopted to develop an approximate or conceptual estimate for perimeter works for buildings?
ABase unit method
BCost per function method
CCost per square meter method
DCost per linear meter method
Answer is hidden
Question 270 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following relation is/are correct?
AFloor area = Plinth area + Area of wall
BPlinth area = Carpet area + circulation area + wall area
CBuilt up area = Plot area + setback area
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 271 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The expected out turn of 12 mm plastering with cement mortar is ________.
A4.0 sq. m
B6.0 sq. m
C8.0 sq. m
D7.0 sq. m
Answer is hidden
Question 272 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The expected out turn of 2.5 cm cement concrete floor per mason per day ________.
A2.0 sq. m
B5.0 sq. m
C3.0 sq. m
D7.0 sq. m
Answer is hidden
Question 273 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The expected out turn of cement concrete 1:2:4 per mason per day is ________.
A2.5 m³
B5.0 m³
C2.0 m³
D9.0 m³
Answer is hidden
Question 274 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The quantity of brickwork with mortar in foundation used per mason per day is ________.
A1.5 m³
B2.5 m³
C1.5 m³
D4.5 m³
Answer is hidden
Question 275 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In case of cavity walls where both walls are load bearing, the effective thickness is ________.
ASum of both walls
BThickness of stronger wall
C2/3 of sum of thickness of both walls
DLarger of (b) and (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 276 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In long and short wall method of estimation, the length of long wall is the centre-to-centre distance between the walls and ________.
ABreadth of the wall
BHalf breadth of wall on each side
COne fourth breadth of wall on each side
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 277 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In long wall-short wall method, the length of the long wall is the sum of center line and ________.
Ab
B2b
C3b
Db/2
Answer is hidden
Question 278 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
While estimating a reinforced cement structure, the omitted cover of concrete is assumed ________.
AAt the end of reinforcing bar, not less than 25 mm or twice the diameter of the bar
BIn thin slabs, 12 mm minimum or diameter of the bar whichever is more
CFor reinforcing longitudinal bar in a beam, 25 mm minimum or diameter of the largest bar whichever is more
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 279 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The order of booking dimensions is ________.
ALength, breadth, height
BBreadth, length, height
CHeight, breadth, length
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 280 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The item of the brick structure measured in sq. m is ________.
AReinforced brick work
BBroken glass coping
CBrick edging
DBrick work in arches
Answer is hidden
Question 281 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Pick up the correct statement from the following.
APointing is measured in sq. m
BPlastering is measured in sq. m
CGlazing is measured in sq. m
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 282 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The brick work is not measured in cu. m in case of ________.
AOne or more than one brick wall
BHalf brick wall
CReinforced brick work
DBrick work in arches
Answer is hidden
Question 283 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The measurement is not made in square meters in case of ________.
AD.P.C. (Damp Proof Course)
BR.C. Chhajja
CConcrete Jeffries
DForm works
Answer is hidden
Question 284 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The measurement is made in square metre in case of ________.
ACement concrete in foundation
BR.C.C structure
CHollow concrete block wall
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 285 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Brick walls are measured in sq. m if the thickness of the wall is ________.
A10 cm
B20 cm
C30 cm
D40 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 286 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The amount of binding wire required for 1 quintal of reinforcement work is ________.
A1 kg
B2 kg
C10 kg
D6 kg
Answer is hidden
Question 287 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The number of handmade bricks required to make a brick masonry of 1 cu. m ________.
A500
B550
C450
D580
Answer is hidden
Question 288 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is not measured in cu. m?
AOne and half brick wall
BBrickwork in arches
CReinforced brick works
DHalf brick wall
Answer is hidden
Question 289 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
For 1 m³ volume of 1 : 1.5 : 3 PCC how many bags of cement are required?
A8 bags
B6 bags
C2 bags
D4 bags
Answer is hidden
Question 290 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The surface dressing is measured in ________.
Asq. m
Bcubic meter
CR m
Dmetric tonne
Answer is hidden
Question 291 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Pick up the excavation where measurements are made in square meters for payment.
AOrdinary cuttings up to 1 m
BSurface dressing up to 15 cm depths
CSurface excavation up to 30 cm depths
DBoth (b) and (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 292 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Water retentivity for brick masonry should not be less than ______.
A70%
B60%
C50%
D40%
Answer is hidden
Question 293 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
For masonry work with solid bricks, consistency of mortar should be ______.
A9 to 13 cm
B9 to 12 cm
C8 to 13 cm
D7 to 13 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 294 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
A wall may be defined as that component of a building whose width is ______ times its thickness.
A2
B4
C6
D8
Answer is hidden
Question 295 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
To obtain good bonding in brick masonry ______.
AFirst class bricks are used
BVertical joints in alternate courses are kept in plumb line
CBats are used where necessary
DAll the above
Answer is hidden
Question 296 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Non-load bearing (e.g. compound wall) is generally constructed using stones in ______.
AAshlar fashion
BCoursed rubble
CUncoursed rubble
DChamfered ashlar
Answer is hidden
Question 297 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The masonry in which the edges of the stones are trimmed at an angle of 45° is called ______.
ARandom rubble masonry
BQuarry faced ashlar masonry
CChamfered ashlar masonry
DAshlar facing masonry
Answer is hidden
Question 298 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The type of stone masonry in which stones of same height are laid in layers is called ______.
ARandom rubble masonry
BCourse rubble masonry
CUncoursed rubble masonry
DAshlar masonry
Answer is hidden
Question 299 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which type of masonry requires the highest level of skill and skilled labor for laying?
ACoursed rubble masonry
BAshlar fine masonry
CAshlar chamfered masonry
DDry rubble masonry
Answer is hidden
Question 300 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
An arch constructed with finely dressed stones is known as ______.
AAshlar arch
BRubble arch
CGauged arch
DAxed arch
Answer is hidden
Question 301 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The type of ashlar masonry in which stones are finely chisel dressed and thickness of joint does not exceed 3 mm, is ______.
AChamfered ashlar masonry
BAshlar facing masonry
CRandom coursed ashlar masonry
DCoursed ashlar masonry
Answer is hidden
Question 302 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
When stones are placed right across the wall at regular intervals is known as ______.
ABacking
BHearting
CThrough stone
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 303 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which statement is false? Stone is ______.
AStronger than brick
BMore durable than brick
CMore weather resisting than brick
DMore resistant to fire than brick
Answer is hidden
Question 304 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which material were the traditional monuments in Nepal primarily made from?
ARCC
BMasonry
CTimber
DStone
Answer is hidden
Question 305 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The type of stone used for the construction of retaining walls must be ______.
ASoft
BHard
CLight
DHeavy
Answer is hidden
Question 306 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Monuments are made from ______.
AMarble
BGranite
CBrass
DBronze
Answer is hidden
Question 307 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is not the type of inorganic building materials?
AMud
BGypsum
CWood
DLime
Answer is hidden
Question 308 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What is the most common type of sawing timber?
AFlat sawing
BQuarter sawing
CRadial sawing
DTangential sawing
Answer is hidden
Question 309 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The wood mostly used for boat construction is ______.
AShisham wood
BSal wood
CTeak wood
DWillow
Answer is hidden
Question 310 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The following hammer is used for striking as well as for pulling the nails from the wood ______.
ACross peen hammer
BClaw hammer
CMallet
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 311 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What is the wooden member called which is used as a beam in the floor?
AFloor plank
BFloor panel
CFloor timber
DFloor joist
Answer is hidden
Question 312 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The joint in which the interlocking pins are of trapezoidal shape and used mostly in the parts that are being pulled apart is called ______ joint.
AButt joint
BMortise joint
CDowel joint
DDovetail joint
Answer is hidden
Question 313 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Clamping vice is used for ______.
ASawing
BJoining
CCutting
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 314 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Market form of timber which is rough squared shaped is ______.
ALog
BPosts
CPlanks
DBaulk
Answer is hidden
Question 315 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Spokeshave is used for smoothing ______.
APlane surfaces
BInterior surfaces
CCurved surfaces
DRough surfaces
Answer is hidden
Question 316 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Wood surface requires ______ coats of plastering.
A2
B3
C4
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 317 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What is the process of covering the knots during painting called?
ACleaning
BKnotting
CPriming
DCoating
Answer is hidden
Question 318 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is used as drier in paint?
ALinseed oil
BLead acetate
CWhite lead
DTurpentine
Answer is hidden
Question 319 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following paints is mostly used in auditoriums?
ACellulose paint
BPlastic paint
CSilicate paint
DLuminous paint
Answer is hidden
Question 320 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The amount of water used for one kg of distemper is ______.
A0.4 liter
B0.2 liter
C0.3 liter
D0.1 liter
Answer is hidden
Question 321 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Terracotta is used in buildings for ______.
AOrnamental work
BInsulation
CStorage
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 322 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The process of filling hollow spaces of walls before plastering is known ______.
AHacking
BDubbing out
CBlistering
DPeeling
Answer is hidden
Question 323 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The process of making the background rough before plastering is ______.
ADubbing
BBlistering
CHacking
DPeeling
Answer is hidden
Question 324 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The local swelling of a finished plaster is termed ______.
ACracking
BDubbing
CBlistering
DHacking
Answer is hidden
Question 325 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
For plastering the exposed brick walls, the cement-sand mortar should be ______.
A1 : 2
B1 : 3
C1 : 4
D1 : 5
Answer is hidden
Question 326 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
______ are used to press mortar and spread it uniformly.
ATrowel
BAluminum rod
CFloats
DBrush
Answer is hidden
Question 327 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
For plastering the exposed brick walls, the cement-sand mortar should be ______.
A1 : 2
B1 : 3
C1 : 4
D1 : 5
Answer is hidden
Question 328 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
______ are used to press mortar and spread it uniformly.
ATrowel
BAluminum rod
CFloats
DBrush
Answer is hidden
Question 329 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The type of pointing in which upper side of mortar joints is kept about 12 mm inside the face of the masonry and bottom is kept flushed with face of wall, is ______.
AStuck pointing
BRecessed pointing
CWeathered pointing
DGrooved pointing
Answer is hidden
Question 330 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The type of pointing in which a V-shaped projection outside the wall surface is provided, is called ______.
ARecessed pointing
BWeather pointing
CV-pointing
DTuck pointing
Answer is hidden
Question 331 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
. The apex line of a pitched roof is known as ______.
APurlin
BRidge
CHip
DValley
Answer is hidden
Question 332 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which roofs are preferred in areas having heavy rainfall?
APitched roofs
BFlat roofs
CTerraced roofs
DCurved roofs
Answer is hidden
Question 333 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Pick up the correct statement from the following:
ABricks are paid per thousand
BCement is paid per 50 kg bag
CLime is paid per quintal
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 334 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
In rate analysis, the cost of tool and equipment is taken as ______ % of cost of unskilled labor.
A3
B2
C1
D10
Answer is hidden
Question 335 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Using the straight line method, annual depreciation is ______.
ALife in year − scrap value / original cost
BScrap value − life in year / original cost
COriginal cost − life in year / scrap value
DOriginal cost − scrap cost / life in year
Answer is hidden
Question 336 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The method used for the valuation of open land is ______.
ARental method
BDevelopment method
CComparative method
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 337 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
When a property is purchased with an idea to sell it off at a profit is termed as ______.
AMonopoly value
BSentimental value
CSpeculative value
DReversionary value
Answer is hidden
Question 338 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Distress value is ______.
AWhen the property is sold at a higher value than market value
BWhen the property is sold at a lower value than market value
CWhen the property is sold at the current market value
DWhen the property remains unsold at any price due to some reasons
Answer is hidden
Question 339 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Salvage value is defined as ______.
AValue of dismantled materials of a property at the end of its utility period
BEstimated value of a built-up property at the end of its useful life without being dismantled
CValue of the property shown in the account book in that particular year
DPresent value of a property considering it to be replaced at the current market rates
Answer is hidden
Question 340 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The value of demolished material is known as ______.
AScrap value
BSalvage value
CResultant value
DMaterial value
Answer is hidden
Question 341 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The process of determining fair price or value of a property is known as ______.
ADepreciation
BInflation
CValuation
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 342 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The value of the property during its useful life based on subtraction of original cost and depreciation, etc. is ______.
AJunk value
BSalvage value
CScrap value
DBook value
Answer is hidden
Question 343 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The technique of finding the fair price of an existing building or property is known as ______.
APricing
BEstimation
CValuation
DCosting
Answer is hidden
Question 344 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
A fixed stipulated sum of penalty payable by the contractor having no relationship with real damage is known as ______.
ACompensatory payment
BLiquidated damage
CFixed penalty
DDamage charge
Answer is hidden
Question 345 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The process that ensures uniform supply of water during hydration of cement is known as ______.
AFinishing of concrete
BCuring of concrete
CPlacing of concrete
DCompaction of concrete
Answer is hidden
Question 346 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The most commonly used lime for civil engineering work is ______.
AFat lime
BLean lime
CHydraulic lime
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 347 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The thin pourable form of lime formed by adding excess water to hydrated lime is called ______.
AQuick lime
BHydrated lime
CLump lime
DMilk of lime
Answer is hidden
Question 348 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Surkhi is added to lime mortar to ______.
APrevent shrinkage
BDecrease setting time
CImpart hydraulicity
DIncrease bulk
Answer is hidden
Question 349 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Very strong lime mortar is obtained from ______.
AQuick lime
BSemi-hydraulic lime
CHydrated lime
DHydraulic lime
Answer is hidden
Question 350 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Plaster of Paris is obtained by the calcination of ______.
AGypsum
BCalcium oxide
CCalcium carbonate
DQuick lime
Answer is hidden
Question 351 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which lime is used in lime mortar?
AQuick lime
BFat lime
CHydraulic lime
DLimp lime
Answer is hidden
Question 352 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following does not belong to endogenous tree?
APalm
BBamboo
CTeak
DCane
Answer is hidden
Question 353 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is not soft wood?
ADeodar
BWalnut
CSisham
DKail
Answer is hidden
Question 354 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Plywood is made from ______
ACommon timber
BTeak wood only
CBamboo fiber
DAsbestos fiber
Answer is hidden
Question 355 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
A freshly felled timber may contain moisture upto ______ of dry weight.
A12%
B20%
C30%
D100%
Answer is hidden
Question 356 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
A well-seasoned timber has moisture upto ______.
A10–12%
B10–42%
C10–18%
D10–15%
Answer is hidden
Question 357 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The natural seasoning of timber requires ______.
A60 to 70 days
B60 to 80 days
C60 to 100 days
D60 to 90 days
Answer is hidden
Question 358 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Defects in wood due to hardening is ______.
AKnots
BRing galls
CBurls
DChecks
Answer is hidden
Question 359 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The defect in timber caused by formation of small hairline crack is ______.
ABlistering
BCrazing
CCracking
DChalking
Answer is hidden
Question 360 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The defect of timber in which the new tissues grow around the wounded part is called ______.
ACallus
BRing gall
CStar shake
DFoxiness
Answer is hidden
Question 361 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The seasoning of timber is done for ______.
AIncreasing moisture content
BDecreasing moisture content
CReducing knots
DDetermining age of timber
Answer is hidden
Question 362 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The minimum density of medium-density fiberboard is ______.
A100 to 1200 kg/m³
B1000 to 1300 kg/m³
C1000 to 1400 kg/m³
D1000 to 1200 kg/m³
Answer is hidden
Question 363 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following alloys does not contain copper?
ASolder
BGerman silver
CMonel metal
DGun metal
Answer is hidden
Question 364 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Stainless steel contains ______.
A18% chromium and 8% nickel
B8% chromium and 18% nickel
C12% chromium and 36% nickel
D36% chromium and 12% nickel
Answer is hidden
Question 365 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Steel containing up to 0.25% carbon content is known as ______.
ALow carbon steel
BHigh carbon steel
CMedium carbon steel
DDead steel
Answer is hidden
Question 366 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Metallurgy is the process of ______.
ARoasting the ore
BExtracting metals from the ore
CExtracting minerals from the ore
DAdding carbon to the ore in blast furnace
Answer is hidden
Question 367 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The percentage of carbon content present in steel is ______
A0.15% to 1.5%
B0.15% to 2.5%
C0.15% to 3.5%
D0.15% to 4.5%
Answer is hidden
Question 368 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The operation of removal of impurities of clay adhering to iron ore is known as ______.
ACalcination
BPurification
CDressing
DRefining
Answer is hidden
Question 369 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is the most fire-resisting paint?
ACement paint
BBronze paint
CRed lead
DAsbestos paint
Answer is hidden
Question 370 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The liquid medium used in the enamel paint is called ______.
ALinseed oil
BRed lead
CVarnish
DSodium acetate
Answer is hidden
Question 371 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Pigment used for corrosion resistance in paint is ______.
AWhite lead
BFerrous oxide
CZinc white
DRed lead
Answer is hidden
Question 372 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Small areas on painted surface enclosed by hairline cracks are called ______.
ACrazing
BCrocodiling
CChalking
DBlistering
Answer is hidden
Question 373 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Linseed oil is ______.
ABase
BFiller
CCarrier
DNone of above
Answer is hidden
Question 374 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The type of cement used for painting is ______.
AQuick setting cement
BWhite cement
CRapid hardening
DOrdinary Portland cement
Answer is hidden
Question 375 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Red lead on paint acts as ______.
ABase
BVehicle
CPigment
DDrier
Answer is hidden
Question 376 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Lacquer is ______.
AOil paints
BDistemper
CSpirit varnish
DEnamel paints
Answer is hidden
Question 377 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is NOT a drier in paints?
ALetharge
BLead oxide
CRed lead
DCopper sulphate
Answer is hidden
Question 378 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Plastic bitumen is generally used for ______.
ARoad pavements
BExpansion joints
CCrack fillings
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 379 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is the most viscous form of bitumen?
AVG 10
BVG 20
CVG 25
DVG 40
Answer is hidden
Question 380 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The form of bitumen in which the small bitumen particles are dispersed in water is called ______.
APenetration grade bitumen
BCutback bitumen
CBitumen emulsion
DPlastic bitumen
Answer is hidden
Question 381 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Corrosion is the type of ______ property of engineering materials.
APhysical
BChemical
CMechanical
DThermal
Answer is hidden
Question 382 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The property of a material that enables it to be drawn out or elongated to an appreciable extent is called ______.
AMalleability
BDuctility
CBrittle
DPlasticity
Answer is hidden
Question 383 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Rocks formed by cooling of magma at shallow depth below the surface are called ______.
AExtrusive rocks
BIntrusive rocks
CHypabyssal rocks
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 384 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Kaolin is chemically classified as ______.
AMetamorphic rock
BArgillaceous rock
CCalcareous rock
DSilicious rock
Answer is hidden
Question 385 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Limestone is not a ______.
ASedimentary rock
BStratified rock
CAqueous rock
DMetamorphic rock
Answer is hidden
Question 386 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Quartzite is a ______ type of rock.
AIgneous
BBasalt
CSedimentary
DMetamorphic
Answer is hidden
Question 387 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The tendency of a mineral to split along a certain plane is ______.
AStratification
BFoliation
CCleavage
DStreak
Answer is hidden
Question 388 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Good quality stone absorbs water less than ______.
A5%
B10%
C15%
D20%
Answer is hidden
Question 389 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which test is used to determine the presence of clay or dirt in building stone?
AAttrition test
BAbsorption test
CAcid test
DSmith test
Answer is hidden
Question 390 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The maximum acceptable range of moisture absorption of building stone is ______.
A0 to 5%0 to 5%
B5 to 10%
C10–12%
D15%
Answer is hidden
Question 391 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following rock has high crushing strength?
AGranite
BGneiss
CQuartz
DDiamond
Answer is hidden
Question 392 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following is an aqueous type of rock?
ALimestone
BSandstone
CQuartzite
DBasalt
Answer is hidden
Question 393 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The type of building stone used for masonry retaining structure should be ______.
ALight
BSoft
CHard
DHeavy
Answer is hidden
Question 394 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The dressing of stone is done ______.
AImmediately after quarrying
BAfter seasoning
CAfter three months of quarrying
DJust before construction
Answer is hidden
Question 395 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following types of aggregate is not available in Nepal?
ABasalt
BSandstone
CLimestone
DGranite
Answer is hidden
Question 396 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The hardness of quartzite in Moh's scale is ______.
A2
B5
C7
D8
Answer is hidden
Question 397 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The hardness coefficient is maximum for ______.
AConglomerate
BGranite
CSlate
DLimestone
Answer is hidden
Question 398 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Indentation on the surface of a brick is called ______.
AFrog
BStrike
CSpike
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 399 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
As per NBC, the minimum crushing strength of brick should be ______.
A10 N/mm²
B7.5 N/mm²
C5 N/mm²
D3.5 N/mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 400 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The property of metals because of which they can be drawn into small wires is called ______.
ABrittleness
BHardness
CDuctility
DMalleability
Answer is hidden
Question 401 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The ability of materials to develop a characteristic behavior under repeated loading is known as ______.
AToughness
BResilience
CCreep
DFatigue
Answer is hidden
Question 402 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The compressive strength of 1st class brick is ______.
A3 N/mm²
B5.5 N/mm²
C7.5 N/mm²
D10.5 N/mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 403 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The number of bricks required for 1 m³ brickwork is ______.
A450
B500
C550
D600
Answer is hidden
Question 404 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The portion of a brick cut across the width is called ______.
ACloser
BHalf brick
CBed
DBat
Answer is hidden
Question 405 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Squint brick is the brick in which the two cutting planes intersect at an angle of ______ degrees in the plane of brick.
A30°
B45°
C60°
D90°
Answer is hidden
Question 406 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
What is the standard brick size in Nepal according to NBC?
A240 × 115 × 55 mm
B230 × 115 × 55 mm
C230 × 115 × 57 mm
D240 × 115 × 57 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 407 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The mould of brick is made from ______.
ATeak wood
BShisham wood
CSal wood
DCast wood
Answer is hidden
Question 408 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The dry mixing of the ingredients of brick is called ______.
ABlending
BTempering
CMoulding
DWeathering
Answer is hidden
Question 409 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The average out-turn of brick from clamp burning is ______.
A50%
B60%
C70–80%
D80–90%
Answer is hidden
Question 410 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The phenomenon of providing impervious surface to the tiles is called ______.
AWaterproofing
BGlazing
CSanding
DGalvanizing
Answer is hidden
Question 411 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The maximum allowable percentage of warping along sides of tiles is ______.
A2%
B4%
C6%
D8%
Answer is hidden
Question 412 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The percentage content of silica in cement is ______.
A60–65%
B17–25%
C3–8%
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 413 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The initial setting is caused by the action of ______.
AC₂S
BC₃S
CC₃A
DC₄AF
Answer is hidden
Question 414 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Ultimate strength to cement is provided by ______.
ATricalcium silicate
BDicalcium silicate
CTricalcium aluminate
DTetracalcium aluminoferrite
Answer is hidden
Question 415 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
Which of the following compounds makes cement more resistant to chemical attack?
ATricalcium silicate
BDicalcium silicate
CTricalcium aluminate
DTetracalcium aluminoferrite
Answer is hidden
Question 416 of 4146Ch 1 · Basic Civil Engineering
The most undesirable properties of cement are due to formation of ______.
ADicalcium silicate
BTricalcium silicate
CTricalcium aluminate
DTetracalcium aluminate
Answer is hidden
Question 417 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
The direct shear test and triaxial test are primarily used to determine:
APermeability coefficient
BShear strength parameters (cohesion and angle of internal friction)
CAtterberg limits
DSpecific gravity of soil solids
Answer is hidden
Question 418 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
The falling head permeability test is generally used for:
ACoarse-grained, highly permeable soils
BFine-grained soils with lower permeability
COnly rock samples
DDetermining Atterberg limits
Answer is hidden
Question 419 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
The one-dimensional consolidation (oedometer) test is used to determine:
AShear strength parameters
BCompressibility characteristics, such as the compression index and coefficient of consolidation
CPermeability coefficient directly
DGrain size distribution
Answer is hidden
Question 420 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
USCS (Unified Soil Classification System) classifies soil based primarily on:
AOnly visual colour description
BGrain size distribution and Atterberg limits (plasticity chart)
COnly the soil's origin/geological history
DOnly its permeability coefficient
Answer is hidden
Question 421 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
A boring log primarily records:
AOnly the final foundation design
BSubsurface strata, SPT N-values, sample locations, and groundwater level encountered during exploration
COnly the surface topography
DOnly laboratory test results performed off-site
Answer is hidden
Question 422 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
Sieve analysis is used to determine:
AThe plasticity index of fine-grained soil
BThe particle size distribution of coarse-grained soil
CThe shear strength of soil
DThe soil's water content only
Answer is hidden
Question 423 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
The uniformity coefficient (Cu) and coefficient of curvature (Cc), derived from a gradation curve, are used to assess:
AThe soil's plasticity index
BWhether a soil is well-graded or poorly graded/uniform
CThe soil's permeability directly
DThe soil's shear strength
Answer is hidden
Question 424 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
The liquid limit (LL) of a soil is defined as the water content boundary between:
ASemi-solid and solid states
BLiquid and plastic states
CPlastic and semi-solid states
DSaturated and dry states
Answer is hidden
Question 425 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
The plasticity index (PI) of a soil is calculated as:
ALL + PL
BLL − PL
CPL − SL
DLL × PL
Answer is hidden
Question 426 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Properties and Laboratory Tests
The shrinkage limit (SL) is defined as the water content below which:
AThe soil becomes liquid
BFurther drying causes no further reduction in soil volume
CThe soil reaches its liquid limit
DThe soil's plasticity index increases
Answer is hidden
Question 427 of 4146Ch 2 · Stresses on Soil and Seepage
Effective stress is related to total stress and pore water pressure by:
Aσ′ = σ + u
Bσ′ = σ − u
Cσ′ = u − σ
Dσ′ = σ × u
Answer is hidden
Question 428 of 4146Ch 2 · Stresses on Soil and Seepage
Capillary rise above the groundwater table occurs due to:
AIncreased pore water pressure
BSurface tension in the soil's fine voids, creating negative pore pressure (suction)
CDownward seepage flow only
DComplete saturation of the entire soil profile
Answer is hidden
Question 429 of 4146Ch 2 · Stresses on Soil and Seepage
A quick sand condition occurs when:
ADownward seepage force exceeds the soil's submerged weight
BUpward seepage force equals or exceeds the submerged weight of the soil, reducing effective stress to zero
CThe soil is completely dry with no water content
DEffective stress reaches its maximum possible value
Answer is hidden
Question 430 of 4146Ch 2 · Stresses on Soil and Seepage
Seepage pressure in a soil mass arises from:
AThe soil's dry unit weight only
BFrictional drag between flowing water and soil particles, acting in the direction of flow
COnly capillary action above the water table
DThe soil's compaction energy
Answer is hidden
Question 431 of 4146Ch 2 · Stresses on Soil and Seepage
A flow net is a graphical tool consisting of:
AOnly contour lines showing ground elevation
BAn orthogonal grid of flow lines and equipotential lines
CA stress-strain curve for soil
DA grain-size distribution curve
Answer is hidden
Question 432 of 4146Ch 2 · Stresses on Soil and Seepage
Flow nets are commonly applied in the design of:
AOnly pavement thickness design
BDams, sheet pile walls, and other hydraulic structures, to assess seepage-related risks
COnly brick masonry walls
DOnly Atterberg limit determination
Answer is hidden
Question 433 of 4146Ch 2 · Stresses on Soil and Seepage
The compression index (Cc) represents:
AThe slope of the void ratio versus log(pressure) curve in the virgin compression range
BThe soil's permeability coefficient
CThe soil's plasticity index
DThe maximum dry density achievable by compaction
Answer is hidden
Question 434 of 4146Ch 2 · Stresses on Soil and Seepage
BReducing hydrostatic/pore pressure buildup behind the wall, improving stability
CEliminating the need for any base width
DIncreasing the wall's overturning risk
Answer is hidden
Question 457 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
The primary function of a foundation is to:
AIncrease the architectural aesthetics of a building only
BTransmit the structure's loads safely to the underlying soil/rock without excessive settlement or shear failure
CServe only as a decorative base
DReplace the need for structural columns
Answer is hidden
Question 458 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
A shallow foundation is generally characterized by:
ADepth much greater than width, transferring load via skin friction
BDepth comparable to (typically less than) its width, transferring load primarily by bearing at shallow depth
CAlways requiring pile driving equipment
DBeing usable only for high-rise buildings
Answer is hidden
Question 459 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
A deep foundation, such as a pile foundation, transfers load to supporting strata primarily via:
AOnly end bearing, with no skin friction contribution
BA combination of end bearing at the tip and skin friction along the shaft
COnly lateral earth pressure
DOnly surface bearing at ground level
Answer is hidden
Question 460 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
Which of the following is NOT typically a factor influencing foundation type selection?
AMagnitude and nature of structural loads
BSubsurface soil profile and bearing capacity
CGroundwater level
DThe architect's preferred paint colour for the building facade
Answer is hidden
Question 461 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
Site investigation for foundation design primarily establishes:
AOnly the building's architectural layout
BSoil profile, strength/compressibility parameters, and groundwater conditions
COnly the contractor's schedule
DOnly the structure's aesthetic finish requirements
Answer is hidden
Question 462 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
A spread (isolated) footing is used to:
ASupport the entire structure's footprint as one continuous slab
BSpread/distribute a single column's load over an enlarged base area
CTransfer load entirely via skin friction along a deep shaft
DReplace the need for any foundation soil investigation
Answer is hidden
Question 463 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
A mat (raft) foundation is typically chosen when:
ASoil bearing capacity is very high and footings are small
BSoil bearing capacity is low, individual footings would overlap, or differential settlement must be minimized
CThe structure has no columns at all
DOnly a single small point load must be supported
Answer is hidden
Question 464 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
A mat/raft foundation is best classified as:
AA deep foundation type
BA large, continuous shallow foundation slab supporting the structure over its full footprint
CA type of pile foundation
DA type of retaining wall
Answer is hidden
Question 465 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
Foundation depth in a deep foundation, compared to a shallow foundation, is:
AComparable to or less than its width
BMuch greater than its width
CAlways exactly equal to its width
DIrrelevant to classification
Answer is hidden
Question 466 of 4146Ch 2 · Fundamentals of Foundation
A key function of a foundation, besides load transfer, is to:
AMaximize differential settlement between adjacent columns
BMinimize differential settlement and provide stability against sliding/overturning/uplift
CEliminate the need for any structural columns above it
DIncrease soil pressure beyond safe limits
Answer is hidden
Question 467 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
Ultimate bearing capacity (qu) is defined as:
AThe pressure that limits settlement to a tolerable value
BThe maximum gross pressure a foundation soil can support before shear failure occurs
CThe bearing capacity divided by a factor of safety
DThe overburden pressure at foundation level only
Answer is hidden
Question 468 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
Allowable bearing capacity/pressure used for foundation design is:
AAlways equal to the ultimate bearing capacity with no reduction
BThe smaller of the safe bearing capacity and the pressure that limits settlement to a tolerable value
CAlways greater than the ultimate bearing capacity
DIndependent of settlement considerations
Answer is hidden
Question 469 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
A high groundwater table generally has what effect on bearing capacity?
AIncreases bearing capacity significantly
BReduces bearing capacity, since it reduces effective stress in the soil
CHas no effect on bearing capacity under any condition
DOnly affects bearing capacity in cohesionless soils
Answer is hidden
Question 470 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
General shear failure of a foundation is characteristic of:
ALoose/soft soils, with vertical punching and no bulging
BDense/stiff soils, with a well-defined continuous failure surface and sudden collapse
COnly saturated clay under undrained loading
DOnly foundations with zero applied load
Answer is hidden
Question 471 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
Punching shear failure is characteristic of:
ADense, stiff soils
BLoose or soft soils, where the footing penetrates vertically with no visible bulging or defined failure surface
COnly rock foundations
DOnly foundations on saturated clay with high plasticity
Answer is hidden
Question 472 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
Terzaghi's general bearing capacity equation for a strip footing is:
Aqu = c + q + γB
Bqu = cNc + qNq + 0.5γBNγ
Cqu = c × q × γB
Dqu = Nc + Nq + Nγ only
Answer is hidden
Question 473 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
For a purely cohesive (saturated clay, φ=0) soil under undrained conditions, Terzaghi's equation simplifies to approximately:
Aqu = 0.5γBNγ only
Bqu = cNc + q
Cqu = qNq only
Dqu = 0 always
Answer is hidden
Question 474 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
Consolidation of saturated fine-grained soil is best described as:
AAn instantaneous elastic process with no time dependency
BA time-dependent volume reduction as excess pore water pressure dissipates under sustained load
CA process that only occurs in dry, cohesionless sand
DA process unrelated to pore water pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 475 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
Secondary consolidation (secondary compression) is best described as: rearrangement
AThe dominant, pore-pressure-dissipation-controlled phase of settlement
BLong-term creep-type settlement continuing after excess pore pressure has fully dissipated, due to particle
CA type of immediate elastic settlement occurring instantly upon loading
DA process that only occurs in cohesionless sand
Answer is hidden
Question 476 of 4146Ch 2 · Bearing Capacity and Foundation Settlements
Immediate (elastic) settlement is most significant in:
AOnly saturated clay under long-term consolidation
BSands, and to a lesser degree in undrained clay, occurring quickly upon loading
COnly rock foundations
DOnly foundations with zero applied load
Answer is hidden
Question 477 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A sand has e = 0.8 and another clay has e = 1.2; which is more pervious?
ASand
BClay
CBoth
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 478 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The soil which contains finest grain particles is ______.
Acoarse sand
Bsand
Csilt
Dclay
Answer is hidden
Question 479 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The maximum size of grains of silt is about ______.
A0.06 mm
B0.02 mm
C0.07 mm
D0.09 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 480 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Stoke's law does not hold good if the size of the particle is smaller than ______.
A0.0002 mm
B0.0004 mm
C0.0006 mm
D0.0008 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 481 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In Stokes law, terminal velocity of particle is ______.
Aproportional to the radius of particle
Bproportional to the square of the radius of particle
Cinverse to the radius
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 482 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Stokes law is used to determine ______.
Aspecific gravity of soil solids
Bdensity of soil suspension
Cgrain size distribution of soil finer than 0.075 mm
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 483 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following statements is true for Hydrometer method of sedimentation Analysis?
ACorrection for meniscus is always positive whereas correction for dispersing agent is always negative.
BCorrection for meniscus and dispersing agent both are always negative
CCorrection for meniscus and dispersing agent both are always negative.
DCorrection for meniscus is always negative whereas correction for dispersing agent is always positive.
Answer is hidden
Question 484 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The degree of saturation for fully saturated soil is ______.
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 485 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A soil sample is having a specific gravity of 2.60 and a void ratio of 0.78. The water content in percentage required to fully saturate the soil at that void ratio will be ______.
A30
B10
C20
D40
Answer is hidden
Question 486 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What will be the degree of saturation of a soil sample whose specific gravity G = 2.7, void ratio e = 0.66 and water content w = 20%?
A81.81%
B91.81%
C71.81%
D61.81%
Answer is hidden
Question 487 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The water content of soil is defined as the ratio of ______.
Avolume of water to volume of given soil
Bvolume of water to volume of voids in soil
Cweight of water to weight of air in voids
Dweight of water to weight of solids of given mass of soil
Answer is hidden
Question 488 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What is it called, if increases in water content because of an increase in the volume of voids?
Acompression
Bcompressibility
Cswelling
Dconsolidation
Answer is hidden
Question 489 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Critical gradient of a soil is normally ______.
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 490 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The critical gradient of the seepage of water in a soil medium is ______.
A(G − 1)/(1 + e)
B(G + 1)/(1 + e)
C(G − 1)/(1 - e)
D(G − 1)*(1 + e)
Answer is hidden
Question 491 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A uniform collapsible sand stratum, 2.5 m thick, has specific gravity of 2.65, with a neutral void ratio of 0.65. The hydraulic head required to cause quick collapsible sand condition is ______.
A2.50 m
B2.90 m
C5.50 m
D3.50 m
Answer is hidden
Question 492 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The rise in water table position to the ground surface causes ______.
Aincrease in effective stress
Bdecrease in effective stress
Cincrease in total stress
Ddecrease in total stress
Answer is hidden
Question 493 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The rise of water table above the ground surface causes ______.
Aequal increase in pore water pressure and total stress
Bequal increase in pore water pressure and effective stress
Cequal increase in total stress and effective stress
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 494 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The decrease in pore water pressure per unit increase in pressure is called ______.
Acoefficient of permeability
Bcoefficient of compressibility
Ccoefficient of volume compressibility
Dcoefficient of curvature
Answer is hidden
Question 495 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If the water table rises above ground level, the effective stress ______.
Aincreases
Bremains unchanged
Cremains unchanged
Ddata insufficient
Answer is hidden
Question 496 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The first rational approach to the problem of seepage through soils was ______
AArchimedes
BPoiseuille
CDarcy
DTerzaghi
Answer is hidden
Question 497 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The seepage medium can be replaced by ______ electric model having the same geometric ______.
Apotential
Binsulator
Celectric conductor
Dpotentiometer
Answer is hidden
Question 498 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
During seepage through a soil, direction of seepage is always ______.
Aparallel to equipotential lines
Bperpendicular to stream lines
Cperpendicular to equipotential lines
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 499 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The seepage pressure always acts ______.
Ain the direction of flow
Bopposite to direction of flow
Cperpendicular to direction of flow
Dtangential to direction of flow
Answer is hidden
Question 500 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The seepage force in a soil is ______.
Aperpendicular to the equipotential lines
Bproportional to the exit gradient
Cproportional to the head loss
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 501 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Seepage analysis is done on the assumption of ______.
Aflow is laminar and Darcy's law is valid
Bseepage of water
Cnone of the above
Dboth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 502 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Seepage force is the energy transfer between ______.
Aair and water
Bwater and soil
Cair and soil
Dearth and air
Answer is hidden
Question 503 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Flow between any two points in a soil depends only on the difference in ______.
Apressure head
Btotal head
Cvelocity head
Ddatum head
Answer is hidden
Question 504 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Flow net can be drawn if the flow is ______.
Aturbulent
Brotational
Cdistortion
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 505 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The portion between two successive flow lines is known as ______.
Afield channel
Bflow channel
Copen channel
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 506 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A flow net is drawn to obtain ______.
Aseepage, coefficient of permeability and uplift pressure
Bcoefficient of permeability, uplift pressure and exit gradient
Cuplift pressure, exit gradient and seepage quantity
Dexit gradient, seepage and coefficient of permeability
Answer is hidden
Question 507 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A flow net can be used for which of the following purpose?
Adetermination of seepage
Bdetermination of seepage pressure
Cdetermination of hydrostatic pressure
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 508 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A flow line in seepage through a soil medium is defined as the ______.
Apath of particles of water through a saturated soil mass
Bline connecting points of equal head of water
Cflow of movement of fine particles of soil
Ddirection of the flow particle
Answer is hidden
Question 509 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Who was the first to give a graphical method of flow net construction?
ACasagrande
BDarcy
CForchheimer
DKozeny
Answer is hidden
Question 510 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In homogeneous soil, every transition in the shape of curves drawn in flow net must be ______.
Asmooth
Bsharp
Crough
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 511 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The pressure exerted by the fluids in a pore to its surrounding soil mass is ______.
Aeffective pressure
Bpore pressure
Ctotal pressure
Dlateral pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 512 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The falling head permeability test is used for ______.
Asandy soil
Bclayey soil
Csilty sand
Dsandy gravel
Answer is hidden
Question 513 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The constant head permeability test is used for ______.
Afine-grained soil
Bcoarse-grained soil
Cclay soil
Dsaturated soil
Answer is hidden
Question 514 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The permeability of a soil sample depends upon ______.
Asize of the particles
Bshape of the particles
Cvoid ratio
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 515 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The coefficient of compressibility of soil is the ratio of ______.
Astress to strain
Bstrain to stress
Cstress to settlement
Drate of loading to that of settlement
Answer is hidden
Question 516 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
By the following factor, the liquefaction of clay is caused ______.
Achanges in salinity
Bion exchange
Cthe expulsion of the double layer water from among the grains
Dswelling of clay
Answer is hidden
Question 517 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compression of soils occurs rapidly if voids are occupied by ______.
Aair
Bwater
Cpartly air and partly water
Dcan't decide
Answer is hidden
Question 518 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What is the compression called that resulting from a long-term static load and consequent escape of pore water?
ACompression
BCompressibility
CTension
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 519 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Who is known as the father of Soil Mechanics?
AKarl Terzaghi
BCasagrande
CProctor
DFellenius
Answer is hidden
Question 520 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The property of soil which allows water to flow through the soil is known as:
ACapillarity
BPermeability
CFluidity
DViscosity
Answer is hidden
Question 521 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The velocity of percolation is defined as:
ADischarge per unit gross cross-sectional area
BDischarge per unit net cross-sectional area
CDischarge per unit total cross-sectional area
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 522 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which soil has the largest permeability?
ASand
BGravel
CSilt
DClay
Answer is hidden
Question 523 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Permeability of soil varies:
AInversely as the square of grain size
BAs square of grain size
CAs grain size
DInversely as grain size
Answer is hidden
Question 524 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Select the correct statement. The permeability is:
ADirectly proportional to unit weight, inversely proportional to viscosity
BDirectly proportional to viscosity and inversely proportional to unit weight
CDirectly proportional to viscosity and unit weight
DInversely proportional to both viscosity and unit weight
Answer is hidden
Question 525 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Coefficient of permeability of soil:
AIncreases with decrease in temperature
BIncreases with increase in temperature
CDoes not depend upon temperature
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 526 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Direct measurement of permeability of specimen at any stage of loading can be made:
AOnly in fixed-ring type consolidometer
BOnly in floating-ring type consolidometer
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 527 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The constant of proportionality between seepage velocity and hydraulic gradient is called:
ACoefficient of permeability
BCoefficient of percolation
CCoefficient of transmissibility
DSeepage coefficient
Answer is hidden
Question 528 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A soil which doesn't permit the passage or seepage of any permeant through its voids is known as:
ASolid soil
BHard soil
CImpermeable soil
DHoneycomb soil
Answer is hidden
Question 529 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The coefficient of percolation and coefficient of permeability are related by:
AK = Kₚ/n
BK = Kₚn
CKₚ = K/n
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 530 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Soil is considered as:
ASingle phase system
BTwo phase system
CThree phase system
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 531 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
When the degree of saturation is zero, the soil mass represents:
AOne phase system
BTwo phase system with soil and air
CTwo phase system with soil and water
DThree phase system
Answer is hidden
Question 532 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
When the degree of saturation is one, the soil mass represents:
AOne phase system
BTwo phase system with soil and air
CTwo phase system with soil and water
DThree phase system
Answer is hidden
Question 533 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Soils containing organic matters are:
ASpongy in nature
BShrink with increase of moisture content
CSwell with decrease of moisture
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 534 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Darcy's Law is applicable if the soil is:
AHomogeneous
BIncompressible
CIsotropic
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 535 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The Reynolds number for laminar flow through soil is:
ALess than 1000
BLess than 100
CLess than 10
DLess than 1
Answer is hidden
Question 536 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In most practical flow problems in soil mechanics, the flow is:
ALaminar
BTurbulent
CSupersonic
DSubsonic
Answer is hidden
Question 537 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The law which states that velocity of flow through porous medium is directly proportional to hydraulic gradient is:
ANewton's Law
BStoke's Law
CDarcy's Law
DReynolds' Law
Answer is hidden
Question 538 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Valid range for percentage air content is:
A0<na<100
B0≤na≤100
Cn a >0
Dn a ≤0
Answer is hidden
Question 539 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The correct range of density index ID is:
AID>0
BI D >0
C0<ID<1
D0≤ID≤1
Answer is hidden
Question 540 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Valid range for degree of saturation S of soil in percentage is:
AS>0
BS<0
C0<S<100
D0≤S≤100
Answer is hidden
Question 541 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If water content of fully saturated soil is 100%, then the void ratio of the sample is:
ALess than the specific gravity of soil
BEqual to the specific gravity of soil
CGreater than specific gravity of soil
DIndependent of specific gravity of soil
Answer is hidden
Question 542 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The ratio of volume of voids to total volume of soil mass is called:
AWater content
BPorosity
CVoid ratio
DDegree of saturation
Answer is hidden
Question 543 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The void ratio of saturated soil is equal to the ______ of water content and specific gravity:
ASum
BDifference
CProduct
DRatio
Answer is hidden
Question 544 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The ratio of the unit weight of soil solids to that of water is called:
AVoid ratio
BPorosity
CSpecific gravity
DDegree of saturation
Answer is hidden
Question 545 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which relationship is true?
Ae+S=w+G
BSe=wG
Ce/S = w/G
D(S + e) = w(G + e)
Answer is hidden
Question 546 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The presence of entrapped air in soil will:
AIncrease the permeability
BDecrease the permeability
CHave no effect on permeability
DCan't say
Answer is hidden
Question 547 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Water content of soil can:
ANever be greater than 100%
BTake values only from 0% to 100%
CBe less than 0%
DBe greater than 100%
Answer is hidden
Question 548 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The presence of organic matter in soil mechanics:
AIncrease the permeability
BDecrease the permeability
CNo effect on permeability
DDifficult to guess
Answer is hidden
Question 549 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Void ratios of two soils A and B are 0.80 and 1.20 respectively. Which one is more pervious?
ASoil A
BSoil B
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 550 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A sand hase=0.8 and clay has e=1.2 Which is more pervious?
ASand
BClay
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 551 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The soil which contains finest grain particles is:
ACoarse sand
BFine sand
CSilt
DClay
Answer is hidden
Question 552 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The maximum size of grains of silt is about:
A0.06 mm
B0.2 mm
C0.5 mm
D1 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 553 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Stoke's law does not hold if the size of the particle is smaller than:
A0.0002 mm
B0.002 mm
C0.02 mm
D0.2 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 554 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In Stokes' law, terminal velocity of particle is:
AProportional to radius of particle
BProportional to square of radius of particle
CInverse to radius
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 555 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Stokes' law is used to determine:
ASpecific gravity of soil solids
BDensity of soil suspension
CGrain size distribution of soil finer than 0.075 mm
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 556 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which statement is true for hydrometer method?
ACorrection for meniscus is always positive whereas correction for dispersing agent is always negative
BBoth corrections are always negative
CBoth corrections are always positive
DMeniscus correction is always negative whereas dispersing-agent correction is always positive
Answer is hidden
Question 557 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Degree of saturation for fully saturated soil is:
A0.25
B0.2
C0.25
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 558 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A soil sample has G=2.60 and e=0.78. Water content required for full saturation is:
A10%
B20%
C30%
D60%
Answer is hidden
Question 559 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
G=2.7, e=0.66, w=20%. Degree of saturation is:
A81.81%
B92.92%
C92%
D97%
Answer is hidden
Question 560 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Water content of soil is defined as the ratio of:
AVolume of water to volume of given soil
BVolume of water to volume of voids in soil
CWeight of water to weight of air in voids
DWeight of water to weight of solids of given mass of soil
Answer is hidden
Question 561 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What is it called if an increase in water content causes an increase in the volume of voids?
ACompression
BCompressibility
CSwelling
DConsolidation
Answer is hidden
Question 562 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Maximum dry density up to which soil can be compacted depends upon:
AWater content only
BAmount of compactive effort only
CBoth water content and compactive effort
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 563 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Effective size of soil is:
AD 10
BD 20
CD 30
DD 40
Answer is hidden
Question 564 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Uniformity coefficient is:
AD60/D10
BD60/D20
CD70/D10
DD50/D10
Answer is hidden
Question 565 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A soil having uniformity coefficient more than 10 is called:
AUniform soil
BPoor soil
CWell-graded soil
DCoarse soil
Answer is hidden
Question 566 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For a well-graded sand, coefficient of curvature should be:
ABetween 1 and 3
BMore than 3
CLess than 1
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 567 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If soil stays at the place above the parent rock where it is produced, it is called:
AStationary soil
BStatic soil
CResidual soil
DImmobile soil
Answer is hidden
Question 568 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
When products of rock weathering are not transported but remain at the place of formation, the soil is called:
AAlluvial soil
BTalus
CResidual soil
DAeolian soil
Answer is hidden
Question 569 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Glacial soils are those soils which are:
ADeposited in sea water
BDeposited in lakes
CTransported by running water
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 570 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The following type of soil is not glacier-deposited:
ADrift
BTill
COutwash
DBentonite
Answer is hidden
Question 571 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Residual soils are formed by:
AGlaciers
BWind
CWater
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 572 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Colluvial soils (talus) are transported by:
AWater
BWind
CGravity
DIce
Answer is hidden
Question 573 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Water-transported soils are termed:
AAeolian
BAlluvial
CColluvial
DTill
Answer is hidden
Question 574 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Soil transported by running water is called:
AAeolian soil
BMarine soil
CAlluvial soil
DLacustrine soil
Answer is hidden
Question 575 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Loess is:
AOver-consolidated clay
BFine sand
CWind-borne soil
DMarine soil
Answer is hidden
Question 576 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Cohesionless soils are formed due to:
AOxidation
BHydration
CPhysical disintegration
DChemical decomposition
Answer is hidden
Question 577 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
According to Indian Standard, in a 2-mm sieve:
AThere are two holes
BEach sieve is circular and its diameter is 2 mm
CEach sieve is square and its side is 2 mm
DThere are two holes per cm length of mesh
Answer is hidden
Question 578 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The smallest sieve according to Indian Standard is:
A0.0045 mm
B0.045 mm
C0.45 mm
D45 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 579 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What is the maximum percentage of fines in clean gravel according to USCS?
A5%
B4%
C6%
D8%
Answer is hidden
Question 580 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A soil having particles of nearly the same size is known as:
AUniform soil
BPoor soil
CWell-graded soil
DCoarse soil
Answer is hidden
Question 581 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The shear strength of a soil:
AIs directly proportional to the compression index of the soil
BDecreases with an increase in initial void ratio
CIs directly proportional to the depth of the compressible soil mass
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 582 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The shear strength of cohesionless soil is due to:
AInternal friction
BCohesion
CIntergranular friction
DInterparticle force
Answer is hidden
Question 583 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Shear strength of cohesionless soil doesn't depend on:
ARate of loading
BStress history
CConfining pressure
DForce
Answer is hidden
Question 584 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Major principal stress in a soil is represented by:
Aσ 1
Bσ 2
Cσ 3
Dσ 4
Answer is hidden
Question 585 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The normal stresses acting on planes of the soil are known as:
AMajor principal stresses
BPrincipal stresses
CMinor principal stresses
DPrincipal planes
Answer is hidden
Question 586 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The circle obtained from a two-dimensional stress system is known as:
APrincipal stress circle
BMohr circle
CShearing stress circle
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 587 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which stress does not have any influence on the strength of a material?
AMajor principal stress
BMinor principal stress
CIntermediate principal stress
DShearing stress
Answer is hidden
Question 588 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Maximum shear stress for a soil mass is equal to:
A(2σ₁ − σ₃) /2
B(σ₁ + σ₃)/2
C(σ₁σ₃)/2
D(2σ₃ − σ₁)
Answer is hidden
Question 589 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The angle between two planes on which shearing stress is zero is:
A90∘
B9∘
C60∘
D50∘
Answer is hidden
Question 590 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The Mohr-Coulomb theory can be expressed algebraically by:
AS=c+σtanϕ
Bτ=S=f(σ)
CS=f(ϕ)
Dτ=f(ϕ)
Answer is hidden
Question 591 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Mohr envelope can be considered to be straight if the angle of internal friction φ is assumed:
A90∘
B60∘
C50∘
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 592 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Question 593 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The curve obtained by plotting normal and shear stress is called:
AMohr's envelope
BStrength envelope
CCoulomb envelope
DStress envelope
Answer is hidden
Question 594 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The shape of plot between shear and normal stresses according to Mohr's theory is:
AStraight line
BCurve
CElliptical
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 595 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The angle made by failure envelope with horizontal in Mohr's circle gives:
ACohesion
BAngle of internal friction
CAngle of wall friction
DSurcharge angle
Answer is hidden
Question 596 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A plane inclined at an angle to the horizontal at which soil is expected to stay without sliding is:
AF-line
BRepose line
CNatural slope line
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 597 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In active stress, the major principal stress σ₁ acts in the:
AVertical plane
BHorizontal plane
CInclined plane
DZero plane
Answer is hidden
Question 598 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The X and Y axes of Mohr's circle represent:
ANormal stress and shear stress
BShear stress and normal stress
CPrincipal normal stress and principal shear stress
DPrincipal shear stress and principal normal stress
Answer is hidden
Question 599 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Mohr's circle is a graphical representation of plane stress problems showing:
AMaximum shear stress
BMinimum shear stress
CMaximum normal stress
DMaximum and minimum normal stresses
Answer is hidden
Question 600 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Shearing resistance of a soil is constituted by:
AStructural resistance and frictional resistance
BShearing strength
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 601 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Shear deformation of soil in a building can cause:
ASinking of footing
BSlide in an earth embankment
CMovement of wedge
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 602 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Significant depth is assumed up to a level at which net increase in vertical pressure becomes:
A10%–20%
B10%–30%
C10%–40%
DLess than 10%
Answer is hidden
Question 603 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For finding active earth pressure with sloping surface, Rankine's theory makes additional assumption of:
AVertical stresses are normal to surcharge
BVertical and lateral stresses are normal to surcharge
CVertical and lateral stresses are conjugate
DVertical and lateral stresses are negligible
Answer is hidden
Question 604 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The coefficient of active earth pressure is ______ the coefficient of passive earth pressure.
ALess than
BGreater than
CEqual to
DInsufficient data
Answer is hidden
Question 605 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For an angle of internal friction of 30^\circ, values of active and passive earth pressures are:
A1/3, 3
B1/3, 5
C1/5, 3
D1/3, 6
Answer is hidden
Question 606 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compute active pressure intensity when gamma=18 ,kN/m³, height = 6 m and phi=30 °
A36 kN/m²
B3 kN/m²
C6 kN/m²
D46 kN/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 607 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What will be the coefficient of passive earth pressure at a depth of 8 m in cohesionless soil with φ = 30°, water rises to ground level?
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 608 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The height of fill Ze, equivalent to uniform surcharge intensity q, is:
AZe=q/γ
BZe=q
CZe=γ
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 609 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Originally, Rankine's theory of lateral earth pressure can be applied to only:
ACohesionless soil
BCohesive soil
CFine-grained soil
DCoarse-grained soil
Answer is hidden
Question 610 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Based on the assumptions of Rankine's theory, the soil mass is:
AStratified
BSubmerged
CHomogeneous
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 611 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compared to dry backfill, submerged backfill will exert:
ASame earth pressure
BLess earth pressure
CMore earth pressure
DDifficult to tell
Answer is hidden
Question 612 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which cases for cohesionless backfill in Rankine's theory are considered?
ASubmerged backfill
BMoist backfill with no surcharge
CBackfill with sloping surface
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 613 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The wedge-shaped portion of backfill tending to move with the wall is called:
AWedge fall
BActive fall
CFailure wedge
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 614 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The material retained or supported by the retaining structure is called:
ASurcharge
BSupport wall
CBackfill
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 615 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A retaining wall is 10 m high, soil unit weight is 19 kN/m³ and φ = 35°. Total active thrust will be:
A257 kN
B25 kN
C27 kN
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 616 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The factor responsible for inclination of resultant pressure to the retaining wall is:
AFrictional force
BSurcharge
CEarth pressure
DWeight of wall
Answer is hidden
Question 617 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Select the incorrect statement:
ASheet piles in retaining walls can be installed for increasing stability of soil slopes
BTranslational failures may occur along slopes of layered materials
CFor increasing stability of a slope, densification can be done in case of cohesionless soils
DProper drainage along a slope reduces the stability of a soil slope
Answer is hidden
Question 618 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The choice of a particular shape for a well depends on:
ADimension of base and cost of sinking
BType of soil condition
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 619 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Foundations can be broadly classified under:
AShallow foundation and deep foundation
BPile foundation
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 620 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The object of providing foundation to a structure is to:
ADistribute the load of superstructure over a large bearing area
BPrevent the lateral movement of the supporting material
CIncrease the stability of structure
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 621 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A foundation is said to be shallow if its depth is:
AEqual to and less than its width
BGreater than its width
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 622 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which is a type of shallow footing?
ASpread footing
BPile foundation
CPier foundation
DWell foundation
Answer is hidden
Question 623 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Shallow footing is one whose depth is:
AAlways equal to width
BLess than the width
CMore than the width
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 624 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which is NOT a preliminary consideration for building a foundation?
ABearing capacity of soil
BGroundwater condition
CSettlement control
DSoil organisms
Answer is hidden
Question 625 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which is a type of shallow footing?
ASpread footing
BPile foundation
CPier foundation
DWell foundation
Answer is hidden
Question 626 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
______ footing is used in load-bearing masonry construction.
AIsolated
BStrap
CStrip
DPile
Answer is hidden
Question 627 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
According to Terzaghi, a foundation is said to be shallow if its depth is:
AEqual to width
BLess than its width
CGreater than its width
DEither (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 628 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For the design of strap footing, which assumption is NOT made?
AThe strap is perfectly rigid
BThe soil pressure varies linearly
CThe interior footing is centrally loaded
DThe strap is not subjected to any direct soil pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 629 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If the independent spread footing of two columns are connected by a beam, it is called:
AIsolated footing
BCombined footing
CStrap footing
DRaft footing
Answer is hidden
Question 630 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For a number of columns constructed in a row, the type of foundation provided is:
AFooting
BRaft
CStrap
DStrip
Answer is hidden
Question 631 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A footing which supports two or more columns is termed as:
ACombined footing
BRaft footing
CStrap footing
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 632 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A combined footing is provided when:
ABearing capacity of soil is less
BEnd column is near a property line
CColumns are very near to each other so their footing overlap
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 633 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A combined footing may be:
ATrapezoidal
BSquare
CCircle
DEither (a) or (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 634 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Trapezoidal combined footings are required when:
AThe space outside the exterior column is limited
BThe exterior column is heavier
CBoth (a) and (b)
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 635 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The type of footing if two columns have unequal loading
ARectangular combined
BTrapezoidal combined
CRaft footing
DStrip footing
Answer is hidden
Question 636 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which is the most commonly used shallow foundation?
AStrap footing
BSpread footing
CCombined footing
DRaft footing
Answer is hidden
Question 637 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
When two column loads are unequal, which of the following can be provided?
AStrap footing
BRaft footing
CTrapezoidal combined footing
DMat footing
Answer is hidden
Question 638 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A combined footing may be rectangular in shape if both columns carry:
AUnequal loads
BEqual loads
CNo load
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 639 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The foundation that is used when the soil mass is sufficiently erratic is:
AStrap footing
BCombined footing
CMat footing
DRectangular combined footing
Answer is hidden
Question 640 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Strap dom footings are used in foundation:
ATo transfer load of an isolated column
BDistance between the columns are long
CTwo column loads are unequal
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 641 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Influence factor If for rigid rectangular footing with L/B = 1.5 is:
A1.06
B1
C2.06
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 642 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The design procedure of strap footing is essentially that of:
ADirect method
BTrial and error method
CGraphical method
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 643 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The design of rigid rectangular combined footing consists in determining:
APressure distribution
BLocation of center of gravity of column
CShear force
DSafe bearing pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 644 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In designing rectangular combined footing, ______ should be adopted as the design value.
AStress distribution
BCompression index
CMaximum bending moment
DSafe bearing pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 645 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Generally combined footing is assumed to rest on:
ACohesive soil
BHomogeneous soil
CCohesionless soil
DNon-homogeneous soil
Answer is hidden
Question 646 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If independent spread footings of two columns are connected by a beam, it is called:
ACombined footing
BTrapezoidal combined footing
CStrap footing
DRaft footing
Answer is hidden
Question 647 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
When allowable soil pressure is low or building loads are heavy, the footing used is:
ARaft footing
BStrap footing
CTrapezoidal combined footing
DRectangular combined footing
Answer is hidden
Question 648 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which statement is true regarding transfer of load from strap to soil used in strap footing?
ATransfer load to soil
BDoes not transfer load to soil
CPartially transfer load to soil
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 649 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Raft is subdivided into a series of beams to establish:
AShear force and moment diagrams
BPressure distribution
CNone of the above
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 650 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A raft foundation is preferred for:
AColumns of industrial structures
BLoad-bearing walls of multistoried buildings
CColumns of a building which are closely spaced
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 651 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
When the area of all the footings covers more than 50% of total area of the structure, the foundation preferred is:
AIsolated foundation
BCombined footings
CRaft foundation
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 652 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In raft footing, if C.G. of load coincides with centroid of raft, the upward load is considered as:
ANon-uniform pressure
BUniform pressure
CExcess pressure
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 653 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Usually, rafts are designed as:
AReinforced slabs
BReinforced concrete flat slabs
COrdinary concrete slab
DInverted flat slabs
Answer is hidden
Question 654 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The weight of raft is not considered in structural design because:
AWeight is carried by subsoil
BRaft does not remain in contact with soil
CWeight is transferred to column
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 655 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The net pressure can be calculated for raft having width greater than:
A4 m
B6 m
C8 m
D10 m
Answer is hidden
Question 656 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A pile foundation is used when:
AThe loads are heavy
BThe soil stratum near ground surface is weak
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNONE
Answer is hidden
Question 657 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The most economical shape of a well for construction of a large pier is:
ATwin circular
BDouble-D
CRectangular
DSingle circular
Answer is hidden
Question 658 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
______ forms the most common type of deep foundation for bridges:
APile foundation
BWell foundation
CShallow foundation
DPier foundation
Answer is hidden
Question 659 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following gives actual description of bi-axial test?
AIts result is very precise
BIt is very economical
CHandling of sampling of soil is easy
DShear strength cannot be determined
Answer is hidden
Question 660 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following is an advantage of using triaxial test?
AAccurate result is not possible
BThe plane of shear failure is predetermined
CStress conditions are complex
DPrecise measurement of pore pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 661 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The ratio of the unconfined compressive strength of undisturbed soil to the unconfined compressive strength of soil in the remoulded state is called ______.
ASensitivity
BThixotropy
CRelative density
DBulk density
Answer is hidden
Question 662 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The factor of safety of slopes is defined as ______.
AEffective stress / Overturning moment
BResisting moment / Overturning moment
COverturning moment / Resisting moment
DShear stress / Normal stress
Answer is hidden
Question 663 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Analysis of stability of slopes is used for determining ______.
AShearing strength and stressed internal surface
BProperties of the soil
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 664 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The failure of slopes may take place due to ______.
AForces between the soil particle and high water content
BAction of gravitational force
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 665 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Failure of the stability of slopes, generally occurs along ______.
ASlip plane
BA horizontal surface
CA curved surface
DAll the surfaces
Answer is hidden
Question 666 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If the failure of the finite slope occurs through the toe, it is called ______.
ASlope failure
BFace failure
CBase failure
DToe failure
Answer is hidden
Question 667 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following is an example of slopes extending to infinity?
AInclined face of Earth dams
BEmbankments
CCuts
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 668 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Who is known as the father of Soil Mechanics?
ACasagrande
BProctor
CKarl Von Terzaghi
DFellenius
Answer is hidden
Question 669 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In the limiting case of stability, the angle of slope is referred to as ______.
AAngle of deviation
BAngle of slope
CAngle of unstable slope
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 670 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If the soil properties for all identical depths below the surface are constant, it is a ______.
AFinite slope
BInFinite slope
CPlanar failure surface
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 671 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
. A long natural slope of cohesionless soil is inclined at 12° to the horizontal. What will be the factor of safety if φ = 30°?
A2.7
B2
C1
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 672 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The shearing force acting along the slice of a curved surface of slippage causes the soil to slide ______.
ADown at the centre
BDown at the toe
CUpward at the centre
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 673 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For a base failure, the depth factor Df is ______.
Azero,
B1
C2
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 674 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The factor of safety with respect to height is given by ______ equation.
AFc = Hc / H
BFC = C / Cm
CFC = H / Hc
DFC = HFc
Answer is hidden
Question 675 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For a clay slope of height 35 m, stability number 0.08, bulk density 20 kN/m³ and cohesion 25 kN/m², the critical height of the slope will be ______.
A10.0 m
B20.0 m
C5.0 m
D1.0 m
Answer is hidden
Question 676 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
An infinite slope is made with sand having an internal friction angle of 36°. What should be the maximum slope angle for a factor of safety of 1.5?
A54°
B26°
C2°
D6°
Answer is hidden
Question 677 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The following option is NOT made for the friction circle method of slope stability analysis.
AThe resultant passes through the centre of friction circle
BFriction is fully mobilized
CThe resultant is tangential to the friction circle
DTotal stress analysis is applicable
Answer is hidden
Question 678 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following doesn't contribute to the stability of a slope?
ASurface drainage
BSub-surface drainage
CRetaining wall
DIncreased slope angle
Answer is hidden
Question 679 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The presence of organic matter in the soil will ______.
Aincrease the permeability
Bdecrease the permeability
Cno effect on the permeability
Ddifficult to guess
Answer is hidden
Question 680 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following is an assumption made in Bishop's theory of slope stability analysis?
AThe failure surface is assumed to be non-circular
BThe inter-slice forces are neglected entirely
CThe soil mass is divided into horizontal layers
DMoment equilibrium is considered around the center of the circular arc
Answer is hidden
Question 681 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Pick up the correct statement from the following:
ACoefficient of compressibility is the decrease in void ratio per unit increase of pressure
BThe percent settlement at any time is called degree of consolidation
CTime factor is a dimensionless quantity
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 682 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What is the compression of the soil, under the short duration of moving or vibratory loads?
ASaturation
BCompressibility
CSwelling
DCompaction
Answer is hidden
Question 683 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What is the coefficient of volume change mv?
ACoefficient of compressibility
BCoefficient of volume compressibility
CCompression index
DExpansion index
Answer is hidden
Question 684 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In the semi-logarithmic plot, what does the virgin compression curve become?
AStraight line
BParabolic curve
CHyperbolic curve
DElliptical curve
Answer is hidden
Question 685 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What is the decrease in the volume of soil mass under stress called?
ACompression
BCompressibility
CTension
DConsolidation
Answer is hidden
Question 686 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The oedometer is used for ______.
ACompaction
BConsolidation
CPermeability
DVoid ratio
Answer is hidden
Question 687 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A clay is subjected to pressure in excess of its present overburden, is said to be ______.
APre-compressed
BPre-consolidated
COver-consolidated
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 688 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Standard Proctor test is used for determining ______.
AOptimum moisture content (OMC)
BVoid ratio
CCoefficient of consolidation
DPavement thickness
Answer is hidden
Question 689 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Standard Proctor test is used for ______.
ADetermining optimum moisture content (OMC)
BVoid ratio
CCoefficient of consolidation
DPavement thickness
Answer is hidden
Question 690 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Void ratios of two soil ‘A’ and ‘B’ are 0.80 and 1.20 respectively. Which one is more pervious?
ASoil A
BSoil B
CBoth
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 691 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In light compaction, the weight of the rammer recommended for Standard Proctor test is ______.
A2.6 kg
B2kg
C6 kg
D6 kg
Answer is hidden
Question 692 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compaction of soil is aimed at ______.
ADecreasing dry density
BIncreasing porosity
CDecreasing void ratio
DDecreasing shear strength
Answer is hidden
Question 693 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The process of compaction of a soil involves ______.
AExpulsion of pore water
BExpulsion of air voids
CExpulsion of both pore water and air voids
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 694 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For the same soil, increase in compaction effort ______.
ADoes not affect OMC
BIncreases OMC
CDecreases OMC
DDecreases dry density
Answer is hidden
Question 695 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compaction of a soil ______.
AIncreases dry density
BDecreases porosity
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 696 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compaction process may be accompanied by ______.
ARolling
BTamping
CVibration
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 697 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compaction depends on ______.
ANumber of repetitions
BWeight of roller
CSpeed of roller
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 698 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The soil involved in the compaction is ______.
APerfectly saturated soil
BPartly saturated soil
CSubmerged soil
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 699 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The example of modification of soil property with the help of admixtures is ______.
ACompaction
BDrainage
CMechanical stabilization
DParticle size distribution
Answer is hidden
Question 700 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The important factor that governs the engineering behavior of soil is ______.
ADensification
BStabilization
CTensile strength
DParticle size distribution
Answer is hidden
Question 701 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
With increase in the amount of compaction energy ______.
AOMC increases but maximum dry density decreases
BOMC decreases but maximum dry density increases
CBoth OMC and maximum dry density increase
DBoth OMC and maximum dry density decrease
Answer is hidden
Question 702 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The most effective method for compacting sand is by using ______.
APneumatic rollers
BSheep-foot rollers
CSteel-tyred rollers
DVibration
Answer is hidden
Question 703 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The ratio of dry density obtained in the field to Proctor's maximum dry density is called ______.
ACompaction energy
BRelative compaction
CCompactive effort
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 704 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compaction is a process in which change in volume is due to ______.
ARemoval of water
BRemoval of air
CRemoval of soil particles
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 705 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which roller is used for compacting clayey soils?
AVibratory roller
BSmooth-wheeled roller
CSheep-foot roller
DPneumatic-tyred roller
Answer is hidden
Question 706 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The densification of a soil by means of mechanical manipulation is called ______.
ACompressibility
BSoil stabilization
CCompression
DCompaction
Answer is hidden
Question 707 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which type of roller should be selected for effective compaction of coarse-grained soil?
ASheep-foot roller
BSmooth-wheeled roller
CVibratory roller
DPneumatic-tyre roller
Answer is hidden
Question 708 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Pneumatic-tyred rollers are suitable for compacting ______.
ASilty soils
BSilty and clayey soils
CClayey soils
DNon-plastic silts and fine sands
Answer is hidden
Question 709 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In compaction, each layer of soil thickness should be ______.
A200 mm
B100 mm
C20 mm
D300 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 710 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The process in which pore water from soil escapes when a load is applied is known as ______.
ACompaction
BConsolidation
CEffective stress distribution
DBoiling
Answer is hidden
Question 711 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which parameter affects the rate of compaction?
AType of soil
BMoisture content
CWeight of roller
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 712 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Relative compaction is defined as ______.
Aγd,max / γd
Bγd / γd,min
Cγd / γd,max
Dγd,min / γd
Answer is hidden
Question 713 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What are the methods used for general exploration?
ASubsurface penetration
BGround-water exploration
CRock cuttings
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 714 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
General exploration gives information about which features?
ADepth of rock
BComposition of soil strata
CGroundwater level
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 715 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Methods of site investigation are dependent upon ______.
AClimatic condition
BNature of engineering project
CLocal topography
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 716 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In detailed exploration, the field test is conducted to determine ______.
ATensile strength
BRigidity
CPermeability
DWater content
Answer is hidden
Question 717 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Depending upon the details, site exploration may be classified as ______.
AGeneral and detailed
BComplex
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 718 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Various methods of site exploration can be grouped under which of the following?
AOpen excavations and borings
BSoil strata
CNone of the above
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 719 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The depth of exploration for isolated spread footing is ______.
A3/2 times the width
B1/2 times the width
C6/2 times the width
D1/8 times the width
Answer is hidden
Question 720 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For pile foundations, the depth of exploration at the start of the work is ______.
A10 m
B20 m
C1m
D100 m
Answer is hidden
Question 721 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In rotary boring ______ is forced down the hollow drill rods.
AGlycerin
BWater solution of bentonite
CDextrin
DPhenyl
Answer is hidden
Question 722 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Auger is suitable for ______.
ASoft to stiff clays
BVery stiff clays
CSandy soils
DHard clays
Answer is hidden
Question 723 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In hand-operated rings in “auger and shell boring,” the depth can be used up to ______.
A30 m
B70 m
C50 m
D3 m
Answer is hidden
Question 724 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Exploratory borings in general exploration are carried out by using ______.
AAuger
BBore equipment
CWell curb
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 725 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If sand filled behind a retaining wall is saturated with water, the possible lateral pressure is ______.
ALateral pressure due to submerged weight and lateral pressure due to water
BLateral pressure due to retaining wall
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 726 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The resultant active pressure for dry backfill with no surcharge acts at ______ above the base.
AH/3
BH/2
CH/4
DH/6
Answer is hidden
Question 727 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Lateral earth pressure exerted when the retaining wall moves into the backfill is called ______.
AEarth pressure at rest
BActive earth pressure
CPassive earth pressure
DTotal earth pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 728 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Earth pressure at rest is the lateral pressure exerted by soil ______.
AWhen it is at rest
BWhen the retaining wall has no movement relative to the backfill
CWhen the retaining wall tends to move away from the backfill
DWhen the retaining wall moves into the soil
Answer is hidden
Question 729 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Active earth pressure is the lateral pressure exerted by soil ______.
AWhen it is at rest
BWhen wall has no movement
CWhen retaining wall tends to move away from backfill
DWhen wall moves into soil
Answer is hidden
Question 730 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Earth pressure at rest exerted on a retaining structure can be calculated using ______.
ATheory of plasticity
BTheory of elasticity
CMohr's theory of rupture
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 731 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For earth pressure at rest, there will be no ______.
AVertical stress
BShear stress
CHorizontal stress
DBoth vertical and horizontal stress
Answer is hidden
Question 732 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The coefficient of earth pressure at rest is ______.
ALess than coefficient of active pressure
BGreater than coefficient of active pressure
CEqual to coefficient of active pressure
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 733 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The pressure distribution diagram for earth pressure at rest is ______.
ACircular
BTriangular
CRectangular
DSquare
Answer is hidden
Question 734 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Coefficient of earth pressure at rest is given by ______.
Aμ/1 − μ
Bμ/1
C1/1 − μ
Dμ2/1 − μ
Answer is hidden
Question 735 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If K₀ = 0.4, find the value of μ.
A0.286
B0.6
C0.2
D0.9
Answer is hidden
Question 736 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If Poisson's ratio of soil is 0.4, its coefficient of earth pressure at rest is ______.
A0.67
B1
C0.8
D0.9
Answer is hidden
Question 737 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The value of K₀ for loose sand is _______.
A0.5
B0.9
C0.8
D0.7
Answer is hidden
Question 738 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
cohesionless soil with φ = 45°, find K₀.
A0.293
B0.8
C0.9
D0.5
Answer is hidden
Question 739 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What is K₀ for φ = 26°?
A0.5616
B0.9
C0.7
D0.2
Answer is hidden
Question 740 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If the angle of internal friction decreases, then K₀ ______.
ADecreases
BIncreases
CBecomes zero
DDoes not change
Answer is hidden
Question 741 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The coefficient of active earth pressure for cohesionless granular soils is given by ______.
A(1 - sin φ) / (1 +sin φ)
B(1 + sin φ) / (1 − sin φ)
C(1 − cos φ) / (1 + cos φ)
D(1 +cos φ) / (1 -cos φ)
Answer is hidden
Question 742 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The coefficient of passive earth pressure for cohesionless granular soils is given by ______.
A(1 + sin φ) / (1 − sin φ)
B(1 -sin φ) / (1 +sin φ)
C(1 +cos φ) / (1 -cos φ)
D(1 cos φ) / (1 + cos φ)
Answer is hidden
Question 743 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The position of backfill lying above the horizontal plane at the top of wall is called ______.
AActive state
BPlasticity
CSurcharge
DSlip lines
Answer is hidden
Question 744 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In site exploration, depth up to which increase in pressure is likely to cause shear failure is known as ______.
AFailure depth
BSignificant depth
CPressure depth
DDepth of exploration
Answer is hidden
Question 745 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compute passive pressure intensity when γ = 18 kN/m³, wall height = 6 m and Kₐ = 1/3.
A324 kN/m²
B324 kN/m
C32kN/m²
D34 kN/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 746 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A 6 m high wall retains submerged sand with saturated unit weight 20 kN/m³ and φ = 30°. Total active earth pressure is _______.
A240 kN/m
B24kN/m
C20 kN/m
D29 kN/m
Answer is hidden
Question 747 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Negative skin friction on a pile develops when ______.
ASoil in which it is driven is sandy soil
BSurrounding soil settles more than pile
CGroundwater table rises
DSoil near tip is clay
Answer is hidden
Question 748 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Pier foundation is also called ______.
ACaisson
BBox
CBridge
DGirder
Answer is hidden
Question 749 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What are the types of caissons that can be used as a foundation?
ABox caissons and open caissons
BClosed caissons
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 750 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Steining is a component of which type of foundation?
APile
BStrap
CIsolated
DWell
Answer is hidden
Question 751 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Common types of well shape are ______.
ARectangular
BDumb-bell
CSingle circular
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 752 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Well foundations are also called ______.
AOpen caissons
BShell sunk
CCaissons
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 753 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which caisson permits excavation in dry?
APneumatic caissons
BBox caissons
COpen caissons
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 754 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A disadvantage of using circular shape of well foundation is ______.
AMinimum perimeter
BSkin friction is maximum
CDiameter of well is more than required
DSinking is more uniform
Answer is hidden
Question 755 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Sinking of the dredge is uniform in which shape of well?
ADouble-D
BRectangular
CCircular
DDumb-bell
Answer is hidden
Question 756 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Components considered in designing a well foundation include ______.
AShape of the well
BSand filling
CBottom plug
DDredge hole
Answer is hidden
Question 757 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
When a pile hammer hits the pile, total driving energy is equal to ______.
AWeight of hammer × height of drop
BWeight of ram × height of stroke
CSum of impact of ram
DSum of impact of ram plus energy delivered by explosion
Answer is hidden
Question 758 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The greatest objection to pile-driving formulae is ______.
AUncertainty in relation between dynamic and static resistance
BShear strength of soil
CUncertainty in allowable pressure
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 759 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The maximum load which can be carried by a pile is defined as its ______.
AUltimate load carrying capacity
BUltimate bearing resistance
CUltimate bearing capacity
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 760 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Penetration resistance N for designing a raft should be taken at ______ intervals.
A75 cm
B5 cm
C7 cm
D76 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 761 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For mechanically stabilized bases, liquid limit should not exceed ______.
A0.25
B0.2
C0.7
D0.3
Answer is hidden
Question 762 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Pressure intensity beneath the footing depends upon ______.
ARigidity of footing
BSoil type
CCondition of soil
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 763 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Once the pressure distribution is known in reinforced concrete footing, ______ can be calculated.
ABending moment and shear force
BBearing pressure
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 764 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In cohesive soil, pressure distribution beneath the footing is ______.
ALinear
BNon-linear
CZero
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 765 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If resultant of soil pressure coincides with resultant of loads, the soil pressure is assumed to be ______.
ANon-uniformly
BUniformly distributed
CZero
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 766 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Analytical methods for finding bearing capacity of footing are based on ______.
AShear failure
BEffective pressure
COverburden pressure
DSize of footing
Answer is hidden
Question 767 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Safe bearing capacity of soil can be defined as ______.
AMaximum pressure soil can safely carry without shear failure
BUltimate load on bearing area
CPressure at which settlement will not exceed allowable settlement
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 768 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
State of equilibrium is fully developed in which bearing-capacity failure?
ALocal shear failure
BGeneral shear failure
CPunching shear failure
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 769 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Analysis of complete bearing-capacity failure is usually termed as ______.
AGeneral shear failure
BTerzaghi's analysis
CBearing failure
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 770 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The value of factor of safety used for finding safe bearing capacity is ______.
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 771 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Net bearing pressure used for design of foundation is ______.
AGross safe bearing pressure
BUltimate bearing capacity
CNet safe settlement pressure
DNet allowable bearing pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 772 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Bearing capacity of soil doesn't depend upon ______.
AApplied load
BSize of footing
CShear parameters of soil
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 773 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Terzaghi's bearing-capacity factors are a function of ______.
AInternal friction angle
BCohesion
CFriction angle between footing and soil
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 774 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
According to assumptions in Terzaghi's analysis, the soil is ______.
AHomogeneous and isotropic
BNon-homogeneous
CNone of the above
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 775 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In presence of water table, Terzaghi's ultimate bearing-capacity equation is modified as ______.
Aqult = cNc + γDNq + 0.5γBNγ
Bqult = cNc − γDNq − 0.5γBNγ
Cqult = cNc − γDNqRw1 − 0.5γBNγRw2
Dqult = cNc − γDNqRw1 + 0.5γBNγRw2
Answer is hidden
Question 776 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which is a limitation of assumptions in Terzaghi's analysis?
Aφ changes when soil is compressed and strip footing has a rough base.
BSoil is homogeneous
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 777 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
According to Terzaghi's theory, ultimate bearing capacity for a strip footing at ground surface on purely cohesive soil is ______.
A5C
B14C
C4C
D5.14C
Answer is hidden
Question 778 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For purely cohesive soil, bearing capacity is given by which equation?
Aqf = 5.7c + q̄
Bqf = c + q̄
Cqf = 5.7c
Dall
Answer is hidden
Question 779 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Reduction factors Rw1 and Rw2, when water table is at a depth equal to or greater than the width of footing, are _______.
A1.0 and 0.5
B1.0 and 0.2
C2.0 and 0.5
D2.0 and 0.5
Answer is hidden
Question 780 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Reduction factors Rw1 and Rw2, when water table is at the base of footing, are ______.
A1.0 and 0.5
B1.0 and 0.3
C0 and 0.5
D4 and 0.5
Answer is hidden
Question 781 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The value of mobilized cohesion will be ______.
A2C/3
B2C/4
CC/3
D4C/3
Answer is hidden
Question 782 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Parameters Nc, Nq, Nγ are known as _______.
AConstant head
BBearing-capacity factors
CEffective pressure
DLoad intensity
Answer is hidden
Question 783 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Terzaghi suggested mobilized cohesion and mobilized angle of friction for ______.
AGeneral shear failure
BLocal shear failure
CPunching shear failure
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 784 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In general shear failure, continuous failure is developed between ______.
AGround surface and footing
BEdge of footing and ground surface
CFoundation and ground surface
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 785 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which is a characteristic of general shear failure?
AFailure accompanied by compressibility of soil
BFailure is sudden
CBulging of shearing mass of soil
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 786 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For purely cohesive soil, local shear failure may be assumed when soil is ______.
AMedium to soft
BSoft to medium
CHard
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 787 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which is NOT a characteristic of local shear failure?
AFailure is defined by large settlements
BFailure surface does not reach ground surface
CFailure is sudden
DUltimate bearing capacity is not well defined
Answer is hidden
Question 788 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In local shear failure, development of plastic equilibrium is ______.
AFull
BPartial
CZero
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 789 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Local shear failure generally occurs in ______.
ADense sand
BNon-cohesive soil
CLoose sand
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 790 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Local shear failure is associated with soils having ______.
AHigh compressibility
BLow compressibility
CHigh pore pressure
DLow pore pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 791 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Punching shear may occur in loose sand with density less than ______.
A0.3
B0.2
C0.4
D0.5
Answer is hidden
Question 792 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Terzaghi's equation for ultimate bearing capacity of a square footing of size B is ______.
Aqu = 1.2cNc + γDNq + 0.3γBNγ
Bqu = 1.2cNc + γDNq + 0.4γBNγ
Cqu = 1.2cNc + γDNq + 0.5γBNγ
Dqu = cNc + γDNq + 0.5γBNγ
Answer is hidden
Question 793 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Terzaghi's equation for ultimate bearing capacity of a circular footing of diameter B is ______.
Aqu = 1.2cNc + γDNq + 0.3γBNγ
Bqu = 1.2cNc + γDNq + 0.4γBNγ
Cqu = 1.2cNc + γDNq + 0.5γBNγ
Dqu = cNc + γDNq + 0.5γBNγ
Answer is hidden
Question 794 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Terzaghi's equation for a strip footing of width B is ______.
Aqu = 1.2cNc + γDNq + 0.3γBNγ
Bqu = 1.2cNc + γDNq + 0.4γBNγ
Cqu = 1.2cNc + γDNq + 0.5γBNγ
Dqu = cNc + γDNq + 0.5γBNγ
Answer is hidden
Question 795 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The two commonly used penetration tests are ______.
AStandard penetration test
BCone penetration test
CBoth
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 796 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Total blow required for the second and third 15 cm penetration in SPT is taken as ______.
ASeating drive
BPenetration resistance
COverburden pressure
DDilatancy/submergence
Answer is hidden
Question 797 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Bearing plate used in plate-load test is in the shape of ______
ASquare
BRectangular and circular
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 798 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Seating pressure of ______ is applied before starting the load test.
A40 g/cm²
B50 g/cm²
C60 g/cm²
D70 g/cm²
Answer is hidden
Question 799 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The split tube used in static cone penetration test is commonly known as ______.
ASplit spoon sampler
BSplit tube sampler
CTube sampler
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 800 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Plate-load test is essentially a ______.
ALaboratory test
BField test
CGraphical method analysis
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 801 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Values derived from penetration tests can be used for finding ______.
ADepth of hard stratum and strength of soil
BSoil saturation
CBoth
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 802 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The observed value of N in static cone penetration test is corrected by ______.
AOverburden and dilatancy/submergence
BEffective pressure
CNone of the above
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 803 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Vane shear test is used for ______.
ASaturated clay
BSoft clay
CUnsaturated clay
DStiff clay
Answer is hidden
Question 804 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For testing a saturated clay for shear strength, the test recommended is ______.
ADirect shear test
BTriaxial compression test
CUnconfined compression test
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 805 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Coulomb's equation for shear strength is given by ______.
Ac = s + σ tan φ
Bs = σ + c tan φ
Cs = σ - c tan φ
Dc = s - σ tan φ
Answer is hidden
Question 806 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Pick up the correct statement.
AFailure plane carries maximum shear stress
BFailure plane doesn't carry maximum shear stress
CFailure plane carries shear stress equal to maximum shear stress only on special condition
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 807 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The failure condition for a soil can be expressed in terms of limiting shear stress, called ______.
APrincipal stresses and shear strength
BShearing resistances
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 808 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Theory of failure was first proposed by ______.
ACoulomb
BMohr
CCasagrande
DDarcy
Answer is hidden
Question 809 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For an undisturbed sample, area ratio of the samples should be ______.
AZero
B10% or less
C10%
D20% or less
Answer is hidden
Question 810 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Standard penetration is useful to measure ______.
AShear strength of clays
BShear strength of sands
CConsistency of clays
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 811 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The useful method of finding the shear strength of very plastic cohesive soil is by means of ______.
ACone test
BPenetration test
CVane shear test
DTorsional shear test
Answer is hidden
Question 812 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If pore pressure is measured during the undrained stage of the test, the result can be expressed in terms of ______.
Ac' and φ'
Bcu
CNone of the above
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 813 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The change in pore pressure during an undrained shear can be explained by ______.
ALateral pressure
BEffective stress
CPore pressure parameter
DMohr's circle
Answer is hidden
Question 814 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Factor affecting pore pressure parameters is ______.
AType of shear
BTemperature
CNature of the fluid
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 815 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Negative pore pressure in clay or sand is developed due to ______.
AExpansion on loading
BOver loading
CLoose structure
DCompaction
Answer is hidden
Question 816 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In an undrained test on saturated clays, both σ1' and σ3' are independent of ______.
APore pressure
BShear strength
CCell pressure
DEffective pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 817 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The direct shear test can also be called as ______.
ASimple shear test
BStress test
CStrain controlled shear box test
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 818 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Direct shear test is not generally used for ______.
ASand
BSilt
CClay
DTrees
Answer is hidden
Question 819 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For testing saturated clay for shear strength, the test recommended is ______.
ADirect shear test
BTriaxial compression test
CUnconfined compression test
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 820 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Unconfined compressive strength test is ______.
ADrained test for clay
BUndrained test for sand
CDrained test for clay
DUndrained test for clay
Answer is hidden
Question 821 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A major difference between the direct shear test and triaxial shear test is ______
AControl on the drainage level
BStress condition
CNone of the above
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 822 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In direct shear test, the soil load is subjected to more stress at ______.
ACentre
BEdges
CTop and bottom
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 823 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following strength test is commonly used in the laboratory?
ADirect shear test
BConfined compression test
CTriaxial shear test
DUnconfined shear test
Answer is hidden
Question 824 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The commonly used apparatus used for performing shear box test is ______.
AShear-box apparatus
BBishop's pore pressure apparatus
CTriaxial shear test apparatus
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 825 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following shear test is developed based on drainage conditions?
AQuick test and consolidated undrained test
BDirect shear test
CNone of the above
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 826 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The drained test is also known as ______.
ADirect shear test
BSlow test
CVane shear test
DQuick test
Answer is hidden
Question 827 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following is a disadvantage of the shear box test?
AStress condition of soil is complex
BThe test cannot be used for coarse-grained soil
CNo control on the drainage of soil
DThe shear box test is more complex test
Answer is hidden
Question 828 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
To conduct undrained test, which of the following is used?
ASlope grids
BPerforated grids
CPlain grids
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 829 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The undrained test is carried out on sample of clay, silt, and peat to determine ______.
AShear strength of natural ground and sensitivity
BPore pressure
CNone of the above
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 830 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The consolidated-undrained test can be performed in ______ methods.
A2
B1
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 831 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In an undrained plastic clay, the shear strength is due to ______.
AInternal friction
BCohesion
CInter-granular friction
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 832 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following cannot be obtained by using undrained test?
AEffective stress failure envelope
BShear strength
CSensitivity
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 833 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The shearing of cohesive soil in drained test requires ______ days.
A2 to 10
B2 to 5
C2 to 7
D2 to 8
Answer is hidden
Question 834 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The plate load test consists in loading a rigid plate at the ______.
ABase of the footing
BBottom of the construction
CFoundation level
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 835 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The size of bearing plate used in plate load test varies from ______.
A300 to 750 mm
B30 to 750 mm
C30 to 75 mm
D30 to 70 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 836 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The ratio of settlement at any time (t) to the final settlement is known as ______.
ACompression index
BCoefficient of consolidation
CDegree of consolidation
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 837 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
What is the secondary consolidation called?
AEffective pressure
BLoad increment
CCompaction
DSecondary time effect
Answer is hidden
Question 838 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The coefficient of consolidation of a soil is affected by ______.
ACompressibility
BPermeability
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 839 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
In a consolidation test, load changes from 50 kN/m² to 100 kN/m² and void ratio changes from 0.80 to 0.60. The coefficient of compressibility is ______.
A0.004 m²/kN
B0 m²/kN
C0.04 m²/kN
D0.4 m²/kN
Answer is hidden
Question 840 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The effect of settlement on structure depends upon its ______.
AMagnitude and uniformity
BSize
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 841 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The maximum allowable settlement for warehouses is ______.
A5mm
B9mm
C50 mm
D8m
Answer is hidden
Question 842 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The allowable pressure that should be selected for a maximum settlement is ______.
A40 mm
B25 mm
C2 mm
D5 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 843 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For simple spread footing on clayey soil, differential settlement should not exceed ______.
A1/300
B1/40
C1/5
D1/9
Answer is hidden
Question 844 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
If a maximum settlement of 50 mm is permitted for a raft, the differential settlement must not exceed ______.
A2mm
B70 mm
C90 mm
D20 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 845 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The depth up to which increase in pressure due to structural loading is likely to cause perceptible settlement is ______.
AInsignificant depth
Bsignificant depth
CTrifling depth
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 846 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
With what is the total settlement of the layer equal, in numerical integration of an equation?
AProduct of individual settlements of various thin layers
BSum of individual settlements of various thin layers
CDifference of individual settlements
DDivision of individual settlements
Answer is hidden
Question 847 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Significant depth is assumed up to a level at which net increase in vertical pressure becomes ______ of initial overburden pressure.
ALess than 10%
B10%
Cmore than 10%
D20%
Answer is hidden
Question 848 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For finding active earth pressure for backfill with sloping surface, Rankine's theory makes an additional assumption of ______.
AVertical and lateral stresses are normal to surcharge
BVertical and lateral stresses are tangential to surcharge
CVertical and lateral stresses are conjugate
DVertical and lateral stresses are negligible
Answer is hidden
Question 849 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Coefficient of active earth pressure is ______ than coefficient of passive earth pressure.
ALess than
BGreater than
CEqual to
DInsufficient data
Answer is hidden
Question 850 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
. For angle of internal friction of 30°, the values of coefficients of active and passive earth pressures are respectively ______ and ______.
A1/3, 3
B1/3, 2
C1/2, 3
D1/3, 5
Answer is hidden
Question 851 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compute active pressure intensity when unit weight = 18 kN/m³, wall height = 6 m and φ = 30°.
A6 kN/m²
B36 kN/m²
C3 kN/m²
D26 kN/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 852 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
. What will be the coefficient of passive earth pressure at a depth of 8 m in cohesionless soil with φ = 30° when water rises to ground level?
A4
B5
C3
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 853 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The height of fill Ze equivalent to uniform surcharge intensity is ______.
Aq/γ
Bq - γ
Cq + γ
Dq × γ
Answer is hidden
Question 854 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Originally, Rankine's theory of lateral earth pressure can be applied to only ______.
ACohesionless soil
BCohesive soil
CFine-grained soil
DCoarse-grained soil
Answer is hidden
Question 855 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Based on assumptions of Rankine's theory, the soil mass is ______.
AStratified
BSubmerged
CHomogeneous
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 856 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Compared to dry backfill, submerged backfill will exert ______.
ASame earth pressure
BLess earth pressure
CMore earth pressure
DDifficult to tell
Answer is hidden
Question 857 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which cases for cohesionless backfill in Rankine's theory are considered?
ASubmerged backfill
BMoist backfill with no surcharge
CBackfill with sloping surface
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 858 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The wedge-shaped portion of backfill tending to move with the wall is called ______.
AWedge fall
BActive fall
CFailure wedge
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 859 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The material retained or supported by the retaining structure is called ______.
ASurcharge
BSupport wall
CBackfill
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 860 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A retaining wall is 10 m high, soil φ = 35°, and unit weight = 19 kN/m³. Using Rankine's theory, total active thrust is ______.
A257 kN
B27 kN
C25 kN
D57 kN
Answer is hidden
Question 861 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The factor responsible for inclination of resultant pressure to the retaining wall is ______.
AFrictional force
BSurcharge
CEarth pressure
DWeight of the wall
Answer is hidden
Question 862 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Select the incorrect statement.
ASheet piles and retaining walls can be installed for increasing the stability of soil slopes.
BTranslational failures may occur along slopes of layered materials.
CFor increasing stability of a slope, densification can be done in cohesionless soils.
DProper drainage along a slope reduces the stability of a soil slope.
Answer is hidden
Question 863 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The choice of a particular shape for a well depends on ______.
ADimension of the base and cost of sinking
BType of soil condition
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 864 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Foundations can be broadly classified under ______.
AShallow foundation and deep foundation
BPile foundation
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 865 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
The object of providing foundation to a structure is to ______.
ADistribute the load of superstructure over a large bearing area
BPrevent lateral movement of supporting material
CIncrease the stability of structure
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 866 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
A foundation is said to be shallow if its depth is ______ than its width.
AEqual to and less than
BGreater than
CNone of the above
DBoth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 867 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following is a type of shallow footing?
ASpread footing
BPile foundation
CPier foundation
DWell foundation
Answer is hidden
Question 868 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Shallow footing is one whose depth is ______.
AAlways equal to width
BLess than the width
CMore than the width
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 869 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following is NOT a preliminary consideration for building a foundation?
ABearing capacity of soil
BGroundwater condition
CSettlement control
DSoil organisms
Answer is hidden
Question 870 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
Which of the following is a type of shallow footing?
ASpread footing
BPile foundation
CPier foundation
DWell foundation
Answer is hidden
Question 871 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
______ footing is used in load-bearing masonry construction.
AIsolated
BStrap
CStrip
DPile
Answer is hidden
Question 872 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
According to Terzaghi, a foundation is said to be shallow if its depth is ______.
AEqual to width
BLess than its width
CGreater than its width
DEither (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 873 of 4146Ch 2 · Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering
For the design of strap footing, the following assumption is NOT made ______.
AThe strap is perfectly rigid
BThe soil pressure varies linearly
Cstrap
Dstip
Answer is hidden
Question 874 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
An ideal fluid, as a theoretical idealization, is characterized by:
AHigh viscosity and high compressibility
BZero viscosity and incompressibility
CVariable viscosity with shear rate
DDensity that changes strongly with pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 875 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
A Newtonian fluid is defined by:
AShear stress directly proportional to the rate of shear strain, giving constant viscosity
BViscosity that varies unpredictably with shear rate
CZero shear stress under any flow condition
DDensity that varies strongly with temperature only
Answer is hidden
Question 876 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
Specific weight (γ) of a fluid is related to mass density (ρ) by:
Aγ = ρ/g
Bγ = ρg
Cγ = ρ + g
Dγ = g/ρ
Answer is hidden
Question 877 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
Kinematic viscosity (ν) is related to dynamic viscosity (μ) by:
Aν = μ × ρ
Bν = μ/ρ
Cν = ρ/μ
Dν = μ + ρ
Answer is hidden
Question 878 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
Capillarity (capillary rise/depression) in a narrow tube results from:
AGravity alone, with no role for surface tension
BThe combined effect of surface tension and adhesive/cohesive forces between liquid and tube
CFluid compressibility only
DTurbulent flow conditions only
Answer is hidden
Question 879 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
Surface tension causes a liquid surface to behave like:
AA completely rigid solid
BA stretched elastic membrane, due to intermolecular cohesive forces
CA gas with no cohesive forces
DA fluid with zero density
Answer is hidden
Question 880 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
Cavitation occurs when local fluid pressure drops to or below:
AThe fluid's boiling point at standard atmospheric pressure
BThe fluid's vapour pressure at the prevailing temperature
CTwice the fluid's normal operating pressure
DZero absolute pressure only
Answer is hidden
Question 881 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
A key damaging effect of cavitation on hydraulic machinery is:
AImproved efficiency and smoother operation
BNoise, vibration, and pitting damage to surfaces
CElimination of all fluid friction
DA permanent increase in fluid viscosity
Answer is hidden
Question 882 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
Compressibility of a fluid is related to its bulk modulus of elasticity such that:
AA higher bulk modulus means the fluid is more compressible
BA higher bulk modulus means the fluid is less compressible
CBulk modulus has no relationship to compressibility
DCompressibility is independent of pressure change
Answer is hidden
Question 883 of 4146Ch 3 · Fluids and Their Properties
Specific gravity of a liquid is defined relative to which reference fluid?
AAir, for all fluids without exception
BWater, for liquids (air is used as the reference for gases)
CMercury, for all fluids
DThere is no reference fluid used
Answer is hidden
Question 884 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
Pascal's law states that pressure applied to an enclosed, incompressible fluid is:
AAbsorbed entirely at the point of application
BTransmitted equally and undiminished to every point of the fluid and container walls
CReduced proportionally with distance from the point of application
DOnly transmitted in the vertical direction
Answer is hidden
Question 885 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
The pressure-depth relationship in a static fluid of constant density is given by:
Ap = γ/h
Bp = γh
Cp = h/γ
Dp = γ + h
Answer is hidden
Question 886 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
A U-tube manometer, compared to a simple piezometer tube, is generally used to measure:
AOnly very small positive pressures of the same fluid
BLarger pressures/pressure differences, using a heavier manometric liquid such as mercury
COnly pressure at a single point with no reference
DOnly atmospheric pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 887 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
The total pressure force on a submerged plane surface is calculated as:
AF = γ/A
BF = γhA, where h is the depth of the surface's centroid
CF = A/h
DF = γ + h + A
Answer is hidden
Question 888 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
The centre of pressure on an inclined/vertical submerged plane surface is located:
AAbove the surface's centroid
BBelow the surface's centroid, since pressure increases with depth
CExactly at the centroid in all cases
DAt the free surface, regardless of submergence
Answer is hidden
Question 889 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
For a curved submerged surface, the vertical component of the resultant pressure force equals:
AThe force on the vertical projection of the surface
BThe weight of the real or virtual fluid volume above/below the surface up to the free surface
CZero in all cases
DThe horizontal component multiplied by two
Answer is hidden
Question 890 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
Archimedes' principle states that a submerged/floating body experiences a buoyant force equal to:
AThe body's own weight
BThe weight of fluid displaced by the body
CZero, regardless of submergence
DThe pressure at the body's deepest point only
Answer is hidden
Question 891 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
A floating body is considered stable when:
AThe metacentre (M) is below the centre of gravity (G)
BThe metacentre (M) is above the centre of gravity (G), giving a positive metacentric height
CThe centre of buoyancy (B) coincides exactly with G at all times
DThe body has zero buoyant force
Answer is hidden
Question 892 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
For a fully submerged body such as a submarine, stability depends on:
AThe metacentric height exclusively, as with floating bodies
BThe centre of gravity (G) being below the centre of buoyancy (B)
CThe body having zero weight
DThe body's colour
Answer is hidden
Question 893 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrostatics
A pressure diagram for a submerged surface of constant depth-based linear pressure variation is typically:
ARectangular in shape
BTriangular in shape
CA single point with no area
DCircular in shape
Answer is hidden
Question 894 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
Steady flow is characterized by:
AFlow properties at a point changing with time
BFlow properties at a point NOT changing with time
CVelocity varying along the flow direction at a given instant
DChaotic, mixing flow patterns
Answer is hidden
Question 895 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
Laminar flow is generally associated with:
AHigh Reynolds number and dominant inertial forces
BLow Reynolds number and dominant viscous forces, with smooth parallel layers
CChaotic, mixing flow patterns
DZero viscosity
Answer is hidden
Question 896 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
The continuity equation for steady, incompressible flow through a pipe is expressed as:
AA₁+V₁ = A₂+V₂
BA₁V₁ = A₂V₂
CA₁/V₁ = A₂/V₂
DA₁ = A₂ only, regardless of velocity
Answer is hidden
Question 897 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
The momentum equation, derived from Newton's second law, is primarily used to determine:
AThe fluid's density at a point
BForces exerted by flowing fluid on pipe bends, nozzles, and vanes
CThe fluid's viscosity
DThe fluid's vapour pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 898 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
Bernoulli's equation, in its standard form along a streamline, states that which sum is constant?
APressure head, velocity head, and elevation head
BOnly velocity head
COnly pressure and density
DReynolds number and viscosity
Answer is hidden
Question 899 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
Bernoulli's equation is derived under which key assumptions?
AUnsteady, compressible, viscous flow
BSteady, incompressible, inviscid (frictionless) flow along a streamline
COnly for flow through a venturi meter
DOnly for flow in open channels
Answer is hidden
Question 900 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
A venturi meter measures flow rate by relating flow to:
AThe pipe's total length
BThe pressure drop at the throat (reduced area, higher velocity), via Bernoulli's equation
CThe fluid's vapour pressure only
DThe pipe's outer diameter only
Answer is hidden
Question 901 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
Compared to a venturi meter, an orifice meter generally causes:
ALower head loss due to gradual area change
BGreater head loss, due to abrupt contraction and expansion of flow
CNo head loss at all
DIdentical head loss in all cases
Answer is hidden
Question 902 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
A pitot tube measures local flow velocity based on:
AThe pipe's cross-sectional area alone
BThe difference between stagnation (total) pressure and static pressure
CThe fluid's viscosity alone
DThe pipe's roughness coefficient
Answer is hidden
Question 903 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydro-kinematics and Hydro-dynamics
Irrotational flow is defined as flow in which fluid particles:
ARotate about their own axes as they move
BTranslate without any net rotation about their own axes
CMove only in a circular path
DHave zero velocity everywhere
Answer is hidden
Question 904 of 4146Ch 3 · Pipe Flow
The Reynolds number for pipe flow is calculated as:
ARe = μ/(ρVD)
BRe = ρVD/μ
CRe = V/D
DRe = ρ + V + D + μ
Answer is hidden
Question 905 of 4146Ch 3 · Pipe Flow
Major (friction) head loss in a pipe is calculated using:
AThe Hardy Cross method directly
BThe Darcy–Weisbach equation, hf = fLV²/(2gD)
COnly the minor loss coefficient K
DThe continuity equation alone
Answer is hidden
Question 906 of 4146Ch 3 · Pipe Flow
Minor (local) head losses at fittings, bends, and valves are generally expressed as:
Ahₗ = fLV²/(2gD)
Bhₗ = KV²/2g, where K is an empirical loss coefficient
Chₗ = Re/K
Dhₗ = μV/D
Answer is hidden
Question 907 of 4146Ch 3 · Pipe Flow
The Hydraulic Grade Line (HGL) represents:
APressure head + velocity head + elevation head
BPressure head + elevation head only (p/γ + z)
COnly the velocity head
DOnly the elevation head
Answer is hidden
Question 908 of 4146Ch 3 · Pipe Flow
The Total Energy Line (TEL), compared to the HGL, is:
AAlways below the HGL
BAlways above the HGL by the velocity head (V²/2g)
BA rapid change in flow velocity, such as sudden valve closure or pump trip
COnly steady-state laminar flow
DOnly flow through a venturi meter
Answer is hidden
Question 911 of 4146Ch 3 · Pipe Flow
Unmitigated water hammer pressure surges can potentially cause:
AImproved pipe efficiency
BPipe damage or rupture
CA permanent reduction in flow rate to zero with no other effect
DIncreased pipe diameter automatically
Answer is hidden
Question 912 of 4146Ch 3 · Pipe Flow
Which of the following is a relief device used to mitigate water hammer effects?
AA venturi meter
BA surge tank or air vessel
CA pitot tube
DA manometer
Answer is hidden
Question 913 of 4146Ch 3 · Pipe Flow
Pipe design generally balances:
AOnly aesthetic considerations
BConstruction cost against pumping/operating cost, for a required flow rate and acceptable head loss/pressure
COnly the pipe's colour
DOnly the pipe material's country of origin
Answer is hidden
Question 914 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
Hydraulic radius of an open channel section is defined as:
AWetted perimeter divided by flow area
BFlow area divided by wetted perimeter
CTop width divided by flow area
DFlow depth multiplied by top width
Answer is hidden
Question 915 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
The Froude number for open channel flow is defined as:
AFr = √(gDh)/V
BFr = V/√(gDh)
CFr = V × gDh
DFr = g/V
Answer is hidden
Question 916 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
Subcritical open channel flow (Fr < 1) is characterized by:
AFlow control from upstream only
BTranquil flow, controlled from downstream
CAlways being unstable and undefined
DFlow velocity exceeding the wave celerity
Answer is hidden
Question 917 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
Specific energy in open channel flow is defined as:
AE = y × V
BE = y + V²/2g
CE = V/y
DE = y − V²/2g
Answer is hidden
Question 918 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
For a given specific energy above the minimum, an open channel flow section generally has:
AOnly one possible depth
BTwo possible depths, called alternate depths (subcritical and supercritical)
CNo possible depth at all
DExactly three possible depths
Answer is hidden
Question 919 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
A hydraulic jump is best described as:
AA gradual, smooth transition from subcritical to supercritical flow
BAn abrupt transition from supercritical to subcritical flow, with significant energy dissipation
CA condition where flow depth remains perfectly constant
DA phenomenon that conserves energy exactly across the transition
Answer is hidden
Question 920 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
The depths before and after a hydraulic jump (sequent depths) are related using:
AThe energy equation, since energy is conserved across the jump
BThe momentum equation, since energy is dissipated (not conserved) across the jump
CThe continuity equation alone, with no other relation needed
DThe Reynolds number only
Answer is hidden
Question 921 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
Gradually varied flow (GVF) profiles, such as M1/M2/M3, are classified based on:
AOnly the channel's construction material
BChannel slope type and the actual depth's position relative to normal and critical depth
COnly the water's temperature
DOnly the pipe diameter
Answer is hidden
Question 922 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
A mobile boundary (alluvial) channel is characterized by:
AA rigid, non-erodible bed and banks
BA bed/banks composed of erodible sediment that can be scoured or deposited
CThe complete absence of any flow
DZero sediment transport under any condition
Answer is hidden
Question 923 of 4146Ch 3 · Open Channel Flow
The Shield diagram is used to assess:
AThe friction factor for pipe flow
BThe threshold (inception) of sediment motion in a mobile boundary channel
CThe Atterberg limits of soil
DThe bearing capacity of a foundation
Answer is hidden
Question 924 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
The hydrologic cycle describes:
AA one-way flow of water from ocean to atmosphere only
BThe continuous circulation of water between atmosphere, land, and oceans
CA process that occurs only during flood events
DOnly the process of groundwater recharge
Answer is hidden
Question 925 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
A water balance equation for a catchment generally accounts for:
AOnly precipitation, with no other terms
BPrecipitation as the sum of runoff, evapotranspiration, infiltration/recharge, and change in storage
COnly runoff and evapotranspiration, ignoring precipitation
DOnly groundwater recharge
Answer is hidden
Question 926 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
A rating curve at a gauging station relates:
ARainfall intensity to duration
BRiver stage (water level) to discharge
COnly flood return period to magnitude
DOnly aquifer permeability to porosity
Answer is hidden
Question 927 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
On a typical flood hydrograph, the rising limb, peak, and falling limb represent:
AOnly baseflow contribution with no rainfall response
BThe discharge response over time to a rainfall event
COnly groundwater recharge over a year
DThe catchment's rainfall intensity curve
Answer is hidden
Question 928 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
A unit hydrograph represents the direct runoff hydrograph resulting from:
AAny arbitrary amount of rainfall over any duration
BOne unit depth of effective rainfall occurring uniformly over a catchment in a unit time
COnly baseflow with no rainfall involved
DA single flood event of unknown magnitude
Answer is hidden
Question 929 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
A synthetic unit hydrograph is used when:
AExtensive observed rainfall-runoff data is available
BA catchment lacks sufficient observed data to derive an observed unit hydrograph directly
COnly for catchments with no rainfall at all
DGroundwater data is unavailable
Answer is hidden
Question 930 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
Flood frequency analysis typically involves fitting a probability distribution such as Gumbel or Log-Pearson Type III to:
ADaily rainfall data only
BHistorical annual maximum flood series
COnly groundwater level records
DOnly pipe flow velocity data
Answer is hidden
Question 931 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
The design flood for a hydraulic structure such as a spillway or bridge is determined based on:
AAn arbitrary fixed value with no statistical basis
BA flood frequency analysis result associated with an appropriate return period/risk level
COnly the structure's construction cost
DOnly the local rainfall intensity on the day of design
Answer is hidden
Question 932 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
Groundwater flow through an aquifer is fundamentally governed by:
ABernoulli's equation exclusively
BDarcy's law
CThe Hardy Cross method
DThe Shield diagram
Answer is hidden
Question 933 of 4146Ch 3 · Hydrology
A 'cone of depression' in groundwater hydrology refers to:
AA landform feature unrelated to pumping
BThe drawdown pattern in the water table/piezometric surface around a pumping well
CA type of aquifer classification
DA rainfall measurement device
Answer is hidden
Question 934 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Two pipes, each of diameter d, converge to form a pipe of diameter D. What should be the relation between d and D so that flow velocity in the third pipe becomes double the velocity in each of the two pipes?
AD = 2d
BD = d
CD = 6d
DD = 8d
Answer is hidden
Question 935 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
When pipes of the same material are connected in parallel, the total loss of head:
AIs equal to the sum of head losses in each pipe
BIs same as in each pipe
CIs equal to the reciprocal of the sum of head losses
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 936 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
When three pipes are connected in series, which statement is true?
AHead loss is the same through each pipe
BDischarge is the same through each pipe
CHead loss increases through each successive pipe
DDischarge decreases through each successive pipe
Answer is hidden
Question 937 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
. Moody's diagram for estimating head loss was originally developed for:
ACircular pipes
BRectangular pipes
CTrapezoidal pipes
DSemi-circular pipes
Answer is hidden
Question 938 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The Moody's chart is a logarithmic chart plotted against Darcy-Weisbach friction factor and:
ADensity of fluid
BReynolds number
CViscosity of fluid
DSlope of inclination of fluid
Answer is hidden
Question 939 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In the Moody diagram, ε/D is a parameter. What is represented by it?
AViscosity
BKinematic viscosity
CSurface roughness height
DBoundary-layer thickness
Answer is hidden
Question 940 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For a fluid flow in a hydrodynamically smooth pipe, friction factor depends on:
AReynolds number for laminar flow and relative smoothness for turbulent flow
BReynolds number for both laminar and turbulent flow
CRelative smoothness for both laminar and turbulent flow
DRelative smoothness for laminar flow and Reynolds number for turbulent flow
Answer is hidden
Question 941 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The boundary is known as hydrodynamically smooth if ε/D ratio is:
A< 0.25
B< 0.2
C< 0.5
D< 0.7
Answer is hidden
Question 942 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The knocking sound in the pipe is due to:
APipe friction
BCavitation in pipe
CWater-hammer effect
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 943 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The magnitude of water hammer depends upon:
ALength of pipe line
BElastic properties of pipe material
CElastic properties of liquid
DDiameter of pipe line
EALL
Answer is hidden
Question 944 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The maximum vacuum created at the summit of the siphon pipe is equal to:
A10.3 m of water
B1.3 m of water
C20.3 m of water
D10.8m of water
Answer is hidden
Question 945 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Which parameter determines the efficiency of a channel?
AHydraulic depth
BHydraulic radius
CWetted perimeter
DNormal depth
Answer is hidden
Question 946 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For the most economical channel section, which parameter should be minimum?
AWetted perimeter
BHydraulic depth
CFreeboard
DHydraulic radius
Answer is hidden
Question 947 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For a most economical rectangular channel of depth y and width B:
AB = 2y
BB = y
CB = 3y²
DB = y²
Answer is hidden
Question 948 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For a rectangular channel with the given dimensions, bed slope and Manning coefficient, the discharge is:
A680 m³/s
B700 m³/s
C70 m³/s
D900 m³/s
Answer is hidden
Question 949 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The discharge through a rectangular channel is maximum when:
AR = 2y
BR = y
CR = 6y
DR = 9y
Answer is hidden
Question 950 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic radius of a wide rectangular channel is approximately:
Ay/2
By/3
Cy
D9y
Answer is hidden
Question 951 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic radius of the most economical triangular channel:
Ay/(2√2)
By/(2√6)
Cy/(2√5)
Dy(2√2)
Answer is hidden
Question 952 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The most economical and efficient section is:
ATrapezoidal
BTriangular
CRectangular
DSquare
Answer is hidden
Question 953 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For a hydraulically efficient trapezoidal section, hydraulic radius is:
Ay
By/√2
Cy/2
Dy/√3
Answer is hidden
Question 954 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In the most economical trapezoidal section, top width is:
A2 × sum of side slopes
BBottom width
CSum of side slopes
D2 × flow depth
Answer is hidden
Question 955 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Discharge through a trapezoidal channel is maximum when:
Ad = 3
Bd = 2
Cd = 7d
Dd = 3d
Answer is hidden
Question 956 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic radius for the most economical trapezoidal section is:
A3 m
B34 m
C83 m
D3 0m
Answer is hidden
Question 957 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
At the vertex of a channel, the water level at the centre is:
AHigher than circumference
BLower than circumference
CSame as circumference
DAny of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 958 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Depth of flow changes over a short length of channel. It is:
ANon-steady flow
Bsteady flow
CRapidly varied flow
DGradually varied flow
Answer is hidden
Question 959 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Depth changes along the channel but does not change with time. This is:
AUniform flow
BSteady flow
CUniform flow
DNon-uniform steady flow
Answer is hidden
Question 960 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A steady uniform flow occurs through:
ALong pipe at decreasing rate
BLong pipe at constant rate
CLong pipe at increasing rate
DNONE
Answer is hidden
Question 961 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Which is NOT a condition for uniform flow?
AZ₁ = Z₂
By₁ = y₂
CS₀ = Sf
DV₁ = V₂
Answer is hidden
Question 962 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Open-channel flow becomes transitional when Reynolds number is:
A500–2000
B500–20000
C50–2000
D500–1000
Answer is hidden
Question 963 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For open-channel flow, the range around Re = 500–2000 is commonly treated as transitional.
ASub-critical
Bcritical
CSuper-critical
DNONE
Answer is hidden
Question 964 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic gradient line for open-channel flow is:
ABelow water level
BSame as water level
CAbove water level
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 965 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic gradient is equal to:
ADifference in water surface / total channel length
BTotal friction loss / total channel length
CWetted perimeter / total channel length
DArea / total channel length
Answer is hidden
Question 966 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Condition for critical flow is:
AQ/g = A/T
BQ²/g = A³/T
CQ/g = A/T²
DQ²/g = T³/A
Answer is hidden
Question 967 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In critical flow, velocity head is:
A2 times hydraulic depth
B1.5 times hydraulic depth
CEqual to hydraulic depth
D0.5 times hydraulic depth
Answer is hidden
Question 968 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Find critical depth of a rectangular channel having width 3 m and discharge 15 m³/s.
A1.36 m
B236 m
C136 m
D2.36 m
Answer is hidden
Question 969 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Maximum velocity in an open channel occurs:
AAt the bottom
BAt half the depth
CSlightly below the free surface
DAt the free surface
Answer is hidden
Question 970 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If water depth is less than critical depth, flow is:
ACritical
BTurbulent
CTranquil
DTorrential
Answer is hidden
Question 971 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
When depth is greater than critical depth, velocity is:
ALess than critical velocity
BGreater than critical velocity
CIndependent of critical velocity
DNONE
Answer is hidden
Question 972 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Chezy's formula is used to determine:
AHead loss due to friction in pipe
BVelocity of flow in pipe
CVelocity of flow in open channel
DNONE
Answer is hidden
Question 973 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For the same specific force, the two depths are called:
AAlternate depths
BConjugate depths
CCritical depths
DNormal depths
Answer is hidden
Question 974 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Alternate depths in open-channel flow are associated with:
ABeginning and end of hydraulic jump
BBeginning and end of GVF profile
CEnding of GVF profile
DEnding hydraulic jump
Answer is hidden
Question 975 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The depth at which specific energy is minimum is called:
ANormal depth
BCritical depth
CAlternate depth
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 976 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
. A rectangular channel has width 5 m, discharge 10 m³/s and depth 2 m. Specific energy is:
A2.05 m
B1.05 m
C205 m
D2.85 m
Answer is hidden
Question 977 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In a specific-energy curve, the plot of pressure head is:
AStraight line
BParabolic line
CHyperbolic line
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 978 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Specific-energy curve is a graph of ______ versus specific energy:
AVelocity of flow
BDensity of flow
CDepth of flow
DSum of pressure and velocity head
Answer is hidden
Question 979 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Specific energy for the most economical trapezoidal channel in the given problem is:
A2m
B14 m
C2.14 m
D28 m
Answer is hidden
Question 980 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Which statement about specific energy is correct?
AIt increases with depth in supercritical flow
BIt increases with depth in subcritical flow
CIt decreases with depth in supercritical flow
DBoth b and c
Answer is hidden
Question 981 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Energy per unit weight of water measured with respect to datum is:
ATotal energy
BSpecific energy
CVelocity head
DDatum head
Answer is hidden
Question 982 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Channel depth = 1.2 m and specific energy = 1.24 m. Find velocity.
A0.6 m/s
B0.9 m/s
C0.6 m
D0.6 s
Answer is hidden
Question 983 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Alternate depths have:
ASame specific force
BSame velocity
CSame specific energy
DCritical depth
Answer is hidden
Question 984 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
At critical depth, discharge is:
AMaximum for a given specific energy
BMaximum for a given specific force
CMinimum for a given specific energy
DMinimum for a given specific force
Answer is hidden
Question 985 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
At critical depth, specific energy is:
AMinimum
BMaximum
CAverage of maximum and minimum
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 986 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Formula for sequent depth in a rectangular channel:
Ay₂/y₁ = 0.5[√(1+8Fr₁²) − 1]
By₂/y₁ = 0.5[√(1+8Fr₁²) + 1]
Cy₂/y₁ = 0.5[√(1+8Fr₁²) +
Dy₂/y₁ = √(1+8Fr₁²) + 1]
Answer is hidden
Question 987 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Sequent-depth ratio is 16.48. Find Froude number of supercritical stream
A12
B1
C3
D24
Answer is hidden
Question 988 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Sequent depth ratio = 16.48. Approximate Froude number
A12
B23
C45
D2
Answer is hidden
Question 989 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Sequent depths in a hydraulic jump are 0.25 m and 1.25 m. Energy loss:
A0.8 m
B1.8 m
C8 m
D7.8 m
Answer is hidden
Question 990 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For a given discharge, two depths having the same specific energy are:
AAlternate depths
BCritical depths
CNormal depths
DSequent depths
Answer is hidden
Question 991 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For subcritical flow in an open channel, the most important control section for gradually varied flow profile is:
AUpstream end
BDownstream end
CBoth
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 992 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Rising water profile on the upstream side of a dam is called
ABackwater curve
BForth-water curve
CNormal-water curve
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 993 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic jump can occur:
AAt the foot of a spillway
BWhere a steep slope changes to a flat slope
CWhen shooting flow enters deeper water
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 994 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic jump is a:
ASteady non-uniform flow
BNon-steady uniform flow
CNon-steady non-uniform flow
DNon-steady uniform flow
Answer is hidden
Question 995 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Rise of water level transforming unstable supercritical flow to stable subcritical flow is:
AHydraulic jump
BHydraulic oscillation
CRise of water level
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 996 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic jump is classified based on:
AWeber number
BFroude number
CMach number
DReynolds number
Answer is hidden
Question 997 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For rectangular channels, hydraulic-jump length is approximately:
A3–5 times jump height
B5–7 times jump height
C5–9 times jump height
D5–4 times jump height
Answer is hidden
Question 998 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Oscillating hydraulic jump occurs when Froude number is:
A2.5–4.5
B2.9–4.5
C2.5–4.9
D2.5–4.7
Answer is hidden
Question 999 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic jump is considered steady when:
AFr₁ = 4.5 to 9
BFr₁ = 4.5
CFr₁ = 9
DFr₁ = 4
Answer is hidden
Question 1000 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic jump for Froude number greater than 5.5 is:
AUndular
BWeak
CSteady
DStrong
Answer is hidden
Question 1001 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Height of hydraulic jump in rapidly varied flow is:
Ay₂ − y₁
By₂ − 2y₁
C2y₂ − y₁
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 1002 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Height of hydraulic jump is ______ of conjugate depth.
A5 times
B1 times
C2 times
D3 times
Answer is hidden
Question 1003 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Froude number of a triangular channel with side slope 2H:1V is:
AV/√(gy/2)
BV/√(gy/4)
C√(gy/2)
DV/√(y/2)
Answer is hidden
Question 1004 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Critical-flow condition is:
AQ²T/(gA³) = 1
BQ²T/(gA³) = 0
CQ²T/(gA³) = 5
DQT/(gA³) = 1
Answer is hidden
Question 1005 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Water cushion is used to:
ASit in the channel
BDestroy energy
CProduce energy
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 1006 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If channel-bottom slope is greater than critical slope, it is:
ACritical slope
BMild slope
CSteep slope
DAdverse slope
Answer is hidden
Question 1007 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A non-sustaining channel is one whose slope:
AIs zero
BFalls in direction of flow
CRises in direction of flow
DBoth a and c
Answer is hidden
Question 1008 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Supercritical flow occurs in:
ANormal slope
BMild slope
CSteep slope
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 1009 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
When slope changes from mild to steep, the profile formed is:
AM₂S₂
BM₂S
CMS₂
DMS
Answer is hidden
Question 1010 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In an M1 profile of gradually varied flow:
Ay > y₀ > y
By > y₀ > yc
Cy > y > yc
Dy > y₀
Answer is hidden
Question 1011 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Whose equation is associated with bed-load transport rate?
ADu-Boys empirical formula
BShields' formula
CMeyer-Peter equation
DEinstein equation
Answer is hidden
Question 1012 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Incipient motion means particles:
AAre already moving
BJust start to move
CAre at rest
DAre about to stop
Answer is hidden
Question 1013 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Tractive force in a mobile-boundary channel is:
ADirectly proportional to particle diameter
BInversely proportional to diameter
CIndependent of diameter
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1014 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Which is NOT a formation normally seen in an alluvial channel with sediment movement?
ARapids
BMeandered
CDuned
DAntiduned
Answer is hidden
Question 1015 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Basic mechanism behind sediment transport is:
ADrag force opposite to flow
BDrag force in direction of flow
CFree motion of particles
DVertical force by water
Answer is hidden
Question 1016 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If critical shear stress is τc, average shear stress required to move grains is:
Aτc
B2τc
C0.2τc
D6τc
Answer is hidden
Question 1017 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Formula for tractive force at bottom of channel:
Aτ = γwRS
Bτ = γwR
Cτ = γRS
Dτ = γwRS/2
Answer is hidden
Question 1018 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Curve obtained by plotting shear Reynolds number on x-axis and tractive force parameter on y-axis is:
AShields curve
BMass curve
CTractive-force curve
DReynolds curve
Answer is hidden
Question 1019 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In a Moody diagram, e/D represents:
ASurface roughness height
BViscosity
CBoundary-layer thickness
DKinematic viscosity
Answer is hidden
Question 1020 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Branch of science dealing with occurrence, circulation and distribution of Earth's water:
APrecipitation
BClimatology
CHydrology
DMeteorology
Answer is hidden
Question 1021 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydrology helps in:
APredicting maximum discharge
BDeciding reservoir capacity
CForecasting floods
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1022 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Area draining into a stream at a given location is called:
ACatchment area
BDrainage basin
CWatershed
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1023 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Average annual rainfall in Nepal is approximately:
A1890 m
B1890 mm
C189mm
D190 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1024 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
All forms of water reaching Earth from atmosphere are called:
ARainfall
BPrecipitation
CWaterfall
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1025 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Interception losses are mainly due to:
AEvaporation
BTranspiration
CBoth
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1026 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Compared with a fan-shaped catchment, a fern-shaped catchment generally has:
AShorter streams
BLonger streams
CAlmost equally long streams
DLong or short depending on catchment
Answer is hidden
Question 1027 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Correct statement about stream length in fan-shaped and fern-shaped catchments:
AFan-shaped stream length is more
BFern-shaped stream length is more
CBoth are same
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1028 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Farm pond is used for:
AErosion control
BFlood control
CWater storage
DRunoff control
Answer is hidden
Question 1029 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Precipitation caused by lifting an air mass due to pressure difference is
ACyclonic precipitation
BConvective precipitation
COrographic precipitation
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1030 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Precipitation caused by upward movement of warmer air compared with surrounding air:
ACyclonic
BConvective
COrographic
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1031 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Cold-frontal precipitation generally occurs over:
ASmall catchment with heavy precipitation
BSmall catchment with moderate precipitation
CLarge catchment with heavy precipitation
DLarge catchment with moderate precipitation
Answer is hidden
Question 1032 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Cold-frontal precipitation is formed because:
ACold fronts move faster than warm fronts
BCold air meets advancing warmer air
CBoth fronts cause cyclonic precipitation
DCold fronts occur only in winter
Answer is hidden
Question 1033 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Standard rain-gauge height:
A3 cm
B0 cm
C30 cm
D20 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 1034 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Symon's rain gauge is:
ATipping-bucket gauge
BWeighing-type gauge
CFloat recording gauge
DNon-recording gauge
Answer is hidden
Question 1035 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Commonly used recording rain gauge:
AWeighing-bucket type
BTipping-bucket type
CFloat type
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1036 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Which recording rain gauge does not produce a mass curve directly?
ASymon's rain gauge
BTipping-bucket type
CNatural siphon type
DWeighing-bucket type
Answer is hidden
Question 1037 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A rainfall hyetograph shows:
ACumulative rainfall with time
BRainfall intensity with time
CRainfall depth over area
DRainfall intensity against cumulative rainfall
Answer is hidden
Question 1038 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Instrument used to measure evaporation:
AHygrometer
BEvaporimeter
CLysimeter
DLuxmeter
Answer is hidden
Question 1039 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Evaporation depends on:
ATemperature
BHumidity
CSalinity of water
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1040 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Chemical suitable for reducing evaporation from water surface:
AMethyl alcohol
Bethyl alcohol
CCetyl alcohol
DBetyl alcohol
Answer is hidden
Question 1041 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Rain simulators are used for determination of:
AEvaporation
BPrecipitation
CRunoff
DInfiltration capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 1042 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Infiltration capacity depends upon:
ANumber of voids in soil
BShape and size of soil particles
CArrangement of soil particles
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1043 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Wind speed is measured with:
AWind vane
BHeliometer
CStevenson box
DAnemometer
Answer is hidden
Question 1044 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Mass curve of rainfall is a plot of:
ARainfall depth for various equal periods
BRainfall intensity versus time
CAccumulated rainfall intensity versus duration
DAccumulated precipitation versus time
Answer is hidden
Question 1045 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Double-mass curve technique is used to:
ACheck consistency of rain-gauge records
BFind average rainfall over years
CFind number of rain gauges
DEstimate missing rainfall
Answer is hidden
Question 1046 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Plot of cumulative discharge against time in chronological order is:
AFlow mass curve
BRating curve
CFlow-duration curve
DShields curve
Answer is hidden
Question 1047 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Total rainfall is 16 cm over 1200 km² during a 6-hour storm. Surface runoff is 1.2 × 10⁸ m³. Find runoff rate.
A0.1 cm/h
B0.1 cm
C0.1 h
DCannot estimate from given data
Answer is hidden
Question 1048 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Rain gauges outside a catchment can be considered in:
AArithmetic method
BThiessen polygon method
CIsohyetal method
DBoth b and c
Answer is hidden
Question 1049 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The less accurate method for estimating average rainfall over an area is:
AArithmetic method
BThiessen polygon method
CIsohyetal method
DMass curve
Answer is hidden
Question 1050 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Best method for average annual precipitation in a catchment basin:
AArithmetic method
BThiessen polygon method
CIsohyetal method
DNONE
Answer is hidden
Question 1051 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Thiessen polygon is:
APolygon obtained by joining adjacent rain-gauge stations
BRepresentative area for weighing observed precipitation
CArea used to construct DAD curve
DDescriptive term for hydrograph
Answer is hidden
Question 1052 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Lines joining points having equal rainfall depth for a given duration are:
AIsohyets
BIsogonic lines
CIsoclinic lines
DAgonic lines
Answer is hidden
Question 1053 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Most accurate method for average rainfall in a hilly catchment:
AIsohyetal method
BNormal-ratio method
CArithmetic mean
DThiessen polygon method
Answer is hidden
Question 1054 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Isohyets are imaginary lines joining points having equal:
APressure
BHeight
CHumidity
DRainfall
Answer is hidden
Question 1055 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Instrument used to measure velocity of river water:
AAnemometer
BCurrent meter
CPitot tube
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1056 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Surface runoff is the quantity of water:
AAdsorbed by soil
BIntercepted by vegetation
CThat reaches stream channels
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1057 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The indirect method for discharge measurement is:
AVelocity-area method
BDilution techniques
CSlope-area method
DUltra-sonic method
Answer is hidden
Question 1058 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If the stage-discharge relationship at a gauging section is constant with time, the control is called:
APermanent control
BTemporary control
CShifting control
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1059 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
To determine discharge from a stream rating curve, the required data are:
ASlope of water surface
BStage at the section
CCurrent-meter readings
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1060 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If a gauging section has shifting control due to backwater effects, then:
AA loop rating curve results
BThe section is useless for stream gauging
CDischarge is determined by area-velocity method
DA secondary gauge is installed downstream
Answer is hidden
Question 1061 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Backwater curve is caused if there is:
AFriction head loss greater than bed slope
BObstruction due to weir in the channel
CIncrease in channel width
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1062 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Water-surface elevation measured above a datum in a river is known as:
APondage level
BStage
CFlood level
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1063 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The curve obtained by plotting discharge versus stage is called:
AHydrograph
BShields curve
CRating curve
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1064 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Average mean velocity of a stream of depth h may be obtained by averaging current-meter readings at:
A0.2h and 0.8h
B0.2h and 03h
C0.2h and 0.5h
D0.4h and 0.8h
Answer is hidden
Question 1065 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A triangular channel has top width 2.0 m and depth 0.9 m; velocities at 0.18 m and 0.72 m below the surface are 0.6 m/s and 0.4 m/s respectively; find discharge.
A0.6cumecs
B0.45 cumecs
C0.95 cumecs
D1.45 cumecs
Answer is hidden
Question 1066 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A stream is 10 m deep and velocities at depths 2 m and 8 m are 0.7 m/s and 0.3 m/s; discharge per unit width is:
A5
B1
C2
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 1067 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
As the duration of a unit hydrograph increases:
ATotal discharge increases
BBase period increases
CPeak ordinate increases
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1068 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The ordinate of a unit hydrograph is obtained by dividing the ordinate of DRH by:
ARunoff depth
BArea of catchment
CRunoff volume
DRunoff length
Answer is hidden
Question 1069 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A hydrograph representing one unit of runoff from a rainfall of specified duration and distribution is called:
AHyetograph
BFlood hydrograph
CUnit hydrograph
DS-hydrograph
Answer is hidden
Question 1070 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A unit hydrograph has one unit of:
ARainfall duration
BRainfall excess
CTime base of direct runoff
DDischarge
Answer is hidden
Question 1071 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A graph showing variation of discharge with time at a particular point of a stream is:
AMass inflow curve
BLogistic curve
CHydrograph
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1072 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The shape of the recession limb of a hydrograph depends on:
ABasin characteristics only
BStorm characteristics only
CBoth basin and storm characteristics
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1073 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Variation in peak discharge in a hydrograph is acceptable up to:
A±10%
B60%
C±20%
D±50%
Answer is hidden
Question 1074 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Variation in the hydrograph base is acceptable up to:
A±10%
B±20%
C20%
D±40%
Answer is hidden
Question 1075 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Point of inflection in a hydrograph represents the condition of:
AMaximum storage
BMinimum storage
CDeficit
DSurplus
Answer is hidden
Question 1076 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The time required by rainfall to reach the outlet of a drainage basin is generally:
ATime of concentration
BTime of overall fall
CConcentration time of overall flow
DDuration of rainfall
Answer is hidden
Question 1077 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Time required for water to flow from the most remote point in a watershed outlet is called:
ATime of overland flow
BTime of travel
CTime of concentration
DRainfall duration
Answer is hidden
Question 1078 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
When a watershed changes from rural to urban, the effect of urbanization on the storm-runoff hydrograph is to:
ADecrease runoff volume
BIncrease time to peak discharge
CDecrease the time base
DDecrease peak discharge
Answer is hidden
Question 1079 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A mean annual runoff of 1 m³/s from a catchment of 31.54 km² represents an effective rainfall of:
A100 cm
B10 cm
C0 cm
D200 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 1080 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A triangular direct-runoff hydrograph has a time base of 80 hours and peak flow of 50 m³/s; catchment area is 144 km²; rainfall excess is:
A5 cm
B5 m
C51 cm
D15 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 1081 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If two 2-hour hydrographs are staggered by 2 hours and added graphically, the resulting hydrograph will be:
A2-hour unit hydrograph
B4-hour unit hydrograph
C2-hour unit hydrograph with 2 cm runoff
D4-hour unit hydrograph with 2 cm runoff
Answer is hidden
Question 1082 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
What happens to the probability of annual damage if the design flood is increased?
ADecreases
BIncreases
CRemains constant
DDepends on location
Answer is hidden
Question 1083 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In the WECS/DHM method, the formula used for flood forecasting for a return period of 2 years is:
A1.8767(A₃₀₀₀ + 1)⁰.7342
B12.8767(A₃₀₀₀ + 1)⁰.7342
C21.8767(A₃₀₀₀ + 1)⁰.7342
D1.8767(A₃₀₀₀ + 1)⁰.8783
Answer is hidden
Question 1084 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For estimating high floods in fan-shaped catchments, the formula used is:
ADicken's formula
BRyve's formula
CInglis formula
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1085 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Rational formula is applicable only to:
ALarge catchments greater than 100 km²
BSmall catchments having area less than 50 km²
CMedium catchments between 50–100 km²
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1086 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For annual flood series arranged in descending order, the return period for the magnitude listed at position m in N entries by Weibull formula is:
A(N + 1)/m
B(N + 1)
C(N + 2)/m
DN
Answer is hidden
Question 1087 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The probability that a 100-year flood may not occur during 50 years is:
A05
B0.05
C0.605
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 1088 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A saturated earth formation that stores water and yields it in sufficient quantity is called:
AAquifer
BAquitard
CAquiclude
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1089 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A geological formation that is essentially impermeable to the flow of water is called:
AAquitard
BAquiclude
CAquifer
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1090 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The volume of water that can be extracted by gravity from a unit volume of aquifer material is called:
ASpecific retention
BSpecific yield
CSpecific storage
DSpecific capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 1091 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The quantity of water retained by soil against gravity is known as:
AYield
BPorosity
CSpecific yield
DSpecific retention
Answer is hidden
Question 1092 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
An ephemeral stream:
ACarries some flow
BDoes not have any base-flow contribution
CCarries significant groundwater flow in wet season
DCarries only snowmelt water
Answer is hidden
Question 1093 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Groundwater table is observed by:
AVane shear test
BObservation well
CPenetration test
DSieve analysis
Answer is hidden
Question 1094 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A substance which deforms continuously under shear stress is called:
AFluid
BLiquid
CSolid
DGas
Answer is hidden
Question 1095 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
When an external force is applied to a solid, it undergoes:
AZero deformation
BFinite deformation
CContinuous deformation
DPlastic deformation
Answer is hidden
Question 1096 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A fluid of volume 200 m³ weighs 1060 N. If acceleration due to gravity is 6.625 m/s², find its mass density.
A0.8 kg/m³
B0.4 kg/m³
C0.2 kg/m³
D0.7 kg/m³
Answer is hidden
Question 1097 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If shear stress is 0.03 N/m² and velocity gradient is 0.15 s^-1, find the viscosity.
A2 N·s/m²
B0.2 N·s/m²
C0.8 N·s/m²
D9 N·s/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 1098 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A fluid will undergo ______ under the action of shearing stress.
Azero deformation
Bfinite deformation
Ccontinuous deformation
Dcan't say
Answer is hidden
Question 1099 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
On increasing the temperature, the density of water ______.
Adecreases
Bincreases
Cincreases up to 4°C then decreases
Ddecrease up to 4°C then increases
Answer is hidden
Question 1100 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
On increasing the pressure, the density of the fluid ______.
Adecreases
Bincreases
Cremains the same
Dmay increase or decrease
Answer is hidden
Question 1101 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The density of fluid at Earth's equator is ______ than at the pole.
Agreater
Blesser
Cequal
Dcan't say
Answer is hidden
Question 1102 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The specific gravity of water at 20°C and 1 atmospheric pressure is ______.
A0.998
B1
C2
D0.6
Answer is hidden
Question 1103 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If the volume of a liquid weighing 3000 kg is 4 cubic meters, then 0.75 is its ______.
Aspecific weight
Bspecific mass
Cspecific gravity
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1104 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The maximum density of water occurs at ______ Celsius.
A4 degree Celsius (4°C)
B100 degree
C10 degree
D8 degree
Answer is hidden
Question 1105 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The cohesion of the liquid molecules ______ with the rise in temperature.
Aincreases
Bdecreases
Cconstant
Dalways zero
Answer is hidden
Question 1106 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hooke's law for solid is analogous to ______.
ANewton's law of viscosity
BPascal's law
CBoundary layer theory
DContinuity equation
Answer is hidden
Question 1107 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Viscosity is defined as ______.
Aresistance to flow of an object
Bresistance to flow of air
Cresistance to flow of fluid
Dresistance to flow of heat
Answer is hidden
Question 1108 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The SI unit of viscosity is ______.
Apoise
Bcentipoise
CN s/m²
Dboth (a) and (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 1109 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
What is the SI unit of kinematic viscosity?
Am²/s
Bs/m²
Cm³/s
Dunit less
Answer is hidden
Question 1110 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Stoke is the unit of ______.
Asurface tension
Bviscosity
Ckinematic viscosity
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1111 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
With increase in temperature, viscosity ______.
Aincrease
Bdecreases
Cremains same
Dcannot be said
Answer is hidden
Question 1112 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Viscosity of gases is mainly due to:
ACohesion
BMolecular collision
CRise in temperature
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1113 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Viscosity of gases varies with temperature:
ADirectly
BInversely
CConstantly
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1114 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Kinematic viscosity of air is approximately how many times that of water at 20°C?
AEqual
B5 times
C15 times
D4 times
Answer is hidden
Question 1115 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A fluid has kinematic viscosity 0.1 stokes. Its value in m²/s is:
A10⁻³
B10⁻⁴
C10
D10⁻⁵
Answer is hidden
Question 1116 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Question 1176 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Center of pressure lies ______ the center of gravity for a vertical surface
ASame horizontal axis
BSame point
CAbove
DBelow
Answer is hidden
Question 1177 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For stable equilibrium of a completely submerged body:
ABuoyancy = weight, CB below CG
BBuoyancy = weight, CB above CG
CBuoyancy < weight
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1178 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Buoyant force is:
AResultant force on floating body
BResultant force on a body due to surrounding fluid
CEqual to displaced volume
DForce needed for equilibrium
Answer is hidden
Question 1179 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Buoyant force always acts:
AVertically upward
BVertically downward
CHorizontally
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 1180 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Principle of flotation is based on:
AMetacentre
BNewton's first law
CNewton's law of viscosity
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1181 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Metacentre is:
APoint where line of buoyancy meets normal axis after angular displacement
BIntersection of lines through CG and CB
CPoint of oscillation
DAll of these
Answer is hidden
Question 1182 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If a disturbed body settles at a new position without returning to the original position, it is:
AStable equilibrium
BUnstable equilibrium
CNeutral equilibrium
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1183 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For a completely/partially immersed body to be stable, its weight should be distributed:
AAround lower part
BAround upper part
CIndependent of distribution
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1184 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Relation between centroid G and center of pressure P:
AG always below P
BP always below G
CG is at or below P
DP is at or below G
Answer is hidden
Question 1185 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A wooden block has length > breadth > height. For stable floating:
ALength partially immersed vertically
BBreadth partially immersed horizontally
CHeight partially immersed
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1186 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For a floating body at equilibrium, weight is:
AEqual to buoyant force
BGreater
CLesser
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1187 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Cylinder diameter = 4.5 m, height = 2.5 m, SG = 0.45. Find metacentric height.
A1.9 m
B9 m
C19 m
D5.7 m
Answer is hidden
Question 1188 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A floating body is stable when metacentre is:
AAt centroid
BAbove centroid
CBelow centroid
DAnywhere
Answer is hidden
Question 1189 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Positive metacentric height indicates:
AStable equilibrium
BUnstable equilibrium
CNeutral equilibrium
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1190 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A floating body displaces liquid whose ______ equals the body's weight.
AWeight
BVolume
CSubmerged weight
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1191 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Ice density = 900 kg/m³ and water density = 1000 kg/m³. Fraction of ice volume submerged:
A0.3
B0.9
C0.2
D0.7
Answer is hidden
Question 1192 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A flow in which fluid properties and velocity change with time at a fixed location is:
ASteady flow
BUniform flow
CNon-uniform flow
DNon-steady flow
Answer is hidden
Question 1193 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If velocity, pressure and density change with time at a point, flow is:
AUniform
BCompressible
CUnsteady
DIncompressible
Answer is hidden
Question 1194 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If velocity, pressure and density do not change with time at a point, flow is:
AUniform
BIncompressible
CNon-uniform
DSteady
Answer is hidden
Question 1195 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If velocity changes along the direction of flow, it is:
AUnsteady flow
BCompressible flow
CRotational flow
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1196 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If particle velocity varies from point to point and from instant to instant, the flow is:
ALaminar
BTurbulent
CUniform
DNon-uniform
Answer is hidden
Question 1197 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Uniform flow occurs when:
ACross-section size and shape remain constant along length
BCross-section changes along length
CFriction loss is greater than elevation dro
DFriction loss is less than elevation drop
Answer is hidden
Question 1198 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Laminar flow occurs when particles:
AMove randomly
BHave Reynolds number > 4000
CMove in layers parallel to the boundary
DMove randomly in all directions
Answer is hidden
Question 1199 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For incompressible flow, Mach number should generally be less than:
A0.3
B0.2
C0.4
D0.5
Answer is hidden
Question 1200 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Water flows through a frustum at constant rate. The flow is:
AUniform steady
BNon-uniform steady
CUniform non-steady
DNon-uniform non-steady
Answer is hidden
Question 1201 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
An imaginary line tangent to velocity direction is called:
APath line
BStreamline
CPotential line
DStreak line
Answer is hidden
Question 1202 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A tangent drawn at a point on a fluid path gives:
APath line
BStreamline
CStreak line
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 1203 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Locus of different fluid particles passing through a fixed point is:
AStreamline
BPath line
CStreak line
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1204 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Flow in which paths of individual fluid particles cross is:
AUniform flow
BTurbulent flow
CStreamline flow
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1205 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Path line is based on:
AEuler approach
BLagrangian approach
C1-D flow
D3-D flow
Answer is hidden
Question 1206 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Continuity equation represents conservation of:
AMass
BMomentum
CEnergy
DForce
Answer is hidden
Question 1207 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Bernoulli equation is derived from:
AKepler
BLaplace
CEuler
DPoisson
Answer is hidden
Question 1208 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Venturimeter is used to measure:
ARate of flow
BVelocity only
CDepth of flow
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1209 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In a venturimeter, divergent cone is:
AShorter than convergent cone
BEqual to convergent cone
CLonger than convergent cone
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1210 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Orientation of venturimeter during discharge measurement:
AMay increase
BMay decrease
CMay increase or decrease
DNo change
Answer is hidden
Question 1211 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Minimum head loss occurs in:
AOrifice meter
BVenturimeter
CNozzle meter
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1212 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Mouthpiece is used to measure:
AVelocity
BPressure
CHead
DRate of flow
Answer is hidden
Question 1213 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If a Pitot tube faces downstream, liquid:
ADoes not rise
BRises to V²/2g
CFalls to V²/2g
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1214 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If a Pitot tube faces sideways:
ARises
BFalls
CNeither rises nor falls
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 1215 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
When a water jet strikes a stationary vertical plate, the jet moves:
AOpposite the plate
BAlong the plate
CNormal to the plate
DDepending on material
Answer is hidden
Question 1216 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Momentum principle is not applicable to:
AForce on plate
BForce on bend
CForce on moving plate
DVenturimeter
Answer is hidden
Question 1217 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Jet velocity V strikes a plate moving with velocity u. Force is:
AρA(V-u)²
BρA(V-u)
CρA(V-u)3
DρA(V-u)4
Answer is hidden
Question 1218 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Force of water jet on stationary vertical plate:
AρAV²
BρAV
CρA
DAV²
Answer is hidden
Question 1219 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
At vena-contracta, jet area is minimum, so velocity is:
AMinimum
BMaximum
CAverage
DCritical
Answer is hidden
Question 1220 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The minimum-area section of an orifice jet is called:
AOrifice meter
BVenturimeter
CMouthpiece
DVena-contracta
Answer is hidden
Question 1221 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Relation among hydraulic coefficients:
ACd = Cc × Cv
BCc = 1 + Cv
CCd = Cv + Cc
DCc = Cv/Cd
Answer is hidden
Question 1222 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Vena-contracta lies approximately:
AHalf the diameter of orifice from it
BTwice the diameter
CThree times diameter
DOne diameter
Answer is hidden
Question 1223 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Orifice used for low discharge:
ARectangular
BCircular
CSquare
DTriangular
Answer is hidden
Question 1224 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Large orifice criterion:
ALess than 5
BLess than 2
CLess than 4
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 1225 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Discharge through a small orifice:
ACd a√(2gH)
B(2/3)Cd a√(2gH)
Ca√(2gH)
DLarge-orifice expression
Answer is hidden
Question 1226 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
An orifice is called large when water head is approximately:
A2 times pipe diameter
B3 times
C2 times
D5 times
Answer is hidden
Question 1227 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Velocity of approach is:
ADischarge / area of notch
BDischarge / area of channel
CDischarge / head × width
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1228 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If crest height is S, head is H, channel width is L and discharge is Q, velocity of approach:
A√(Hg)
BQ/[L(H-S)]
CQ/[L(H+S)]
DL(H+S)/Q
Answer is hidden
Question 1229 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Upper surface of a notch over which water flows is called:
AVein
BNappe
CSill
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1230 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
V-notch gives maximum discharge when angle is:
A20°
B50°
C70°
D90°
Answer is hidden
Question 1231 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Discharge through a V-notch varies as:
AH
B√H
CH³/²
DH⁵/²
Answer is hidden
Question 1232 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Head = 75 cm and measurement error = 0.15. Percentage error in discharge:
A20%
B50%
C70%
D7%
Answer is hidden
Question 1233 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A weir whose crest is below downstream water level is:
ASubmerged weir
BCipolletti weir
CTriangular weir
DSharp-crested weir
Answer is hidden
Question 1234 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Maximum discharge over a broad-crested weir occurs when middle water depth is:
AEqual to water height above weir
B1.5 times water height
CHalf the water height
D2.5 times
Answer is hidden
Question 1235 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A weir is broad-crested when crest width is:
A> H
B> 3H/2
C> H/2
D> 3H/4
Answer is hidden
Question 1236 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Sharp-crested weir thickness is kept less than:
AOne-third of water height
BOne-half of water height
CTwo-thirds
DThree-fourths
Answer is hidden
Question 1237 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
A 1% error in measuring H produces what error in rectangular-notch discharge?
A1%
B1.5%
C15%
D2.5%
Answer is hidden
Question 1238 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Side slope H:V of triangular portion should be:
A1:1
B1:2
C1:3
D1:4
Answer is hidden
Question 1239 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
According to Francis formula, end contraction on each side is:
A0.1H
B0.2H
C0.3H
D0.4H
Answer is hidden
Question 1240 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Discharge for depressed nappe is approximately:
A6–7% greater
B20–30% greater
C2–3% greater
D5–6% greater
Answer is hidden
Question 1241 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Excess discharge with a clinging nappe is:
A25–30%
B25–40%
C15–30%
D25–38%
Answer is hidden
Question 1242 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Flow in a pipe is laminar when Reynolds number is:
A< 2000
B< 200
C< 20
D< 2
Answer is hidden
Question 1243 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Find diameter of pipe carrying 35 m³/s at velocity 1.4 m/s.
A5 m
B5.64 m
C3 m
D7.64 m
Answer is hidden
Question 1244 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Friction factor for laminar pipe flow:
A64/Re
B4/Re
C6/Re
D63/Re
Answer is hidden
Question 1245 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Frictional resistance of a pipe varies approximately with:
APressure
BVelocity
CSquare of velocity
DCube of velocity
Answer is hidden
Question 1246 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Friction factor when flow becomes fully turbulent:
AReaches maximum
BReaches minimum value
CBecomes zero
DBecomes zero
Answer is hidden
Question 1247 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Basic head loss in a long pipe is due to:
AFriction
BFittings
CSudden increase in diameter
DSudden decrease in diameter
Answer is hidden
Question 1248 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For a long pipe, head losses:
AEntrance ignored
BOutlet ignored
CEntrance and outlet both ignored
DFriction ignored
Answer is hidden
Question 1249 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Formula h = fLQ²/(12.1D⁵) is associated with:
ADarcy-Weisbach
BHazen-Williams
CChezy
DManning's
Answer is hidden
Question 1250 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Head loss equation for the parallel pipe arrangement:
A4fLV²/(2gD)
B4fV/(gD)
CfV²/(2gD)
D3fLV/(2gD)
Answer is hidden
Question 1251 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Darcy-Weisbach head-loss formula:
AfLV²/gD
BfLV²/(2gD)
C4fLV²/(2gD)
D16fLV²/(2gD)
Answer is hidden
Question 1252 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Head loss in a pipe increases with:
AIncrease in velocity
BDecrease in velocity
CDecrease in pipe length
DIncrease in pipe length
Answer is hidden
Question 1253 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Flow between laminar and turbulent regions is called:
ALaminar flow
BCritical flow
CTurbulent flow
DTransition flow
Answer is hidden
Question 1254 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Minor head losses are caused by:
ABends
BEntrance and exit
CSudden expansion/contraction
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1255 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Exit loss for a submerged pipe discharging into a reservoir:
AV²/(2g)
BV²/(e4g)
CV²/(7g)
DV²/(9g)
Answer is hidden
Question 1256 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Head loss at entrance is ______ that at exit.
AEqual
BHalf
CTwice
DFour times
Answer is hidden
Question 1257 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Head loss at a 90° pipe elbow:
A9V²/(2g)
B0.2V²/(2g)
C0.9V²/(2g)
D0.7V²/(2g)
Answer is hidden
Question 1258 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Minor head loss due to a sharp 90° bend is approximately:
A0.5 velocity head
B1.2 velocity heads
C1.5 velocity heads
D2.2 velocity heads
Answer is hidden
Question 1259 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Head loss due to sudden enlargement:
A(V1-V2)²/(2g)
B(V1-V2)²/(g)
C(V1-V2)²/(8g)
D(V1-V2)²/(7g)
Answer is hidden
Question 1260 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Head loss due to sudden contraction:
AKV²/(g)
BV²/(2g)
CKV²/(2g)
DK/(2g)
Answer is hidden
Question 1261 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Minor loss due to sudden contraction is mainly due to:
AFlow contraction
BBoundary friction
CExpansion of flow after contraction
DFlow construction
Answer is hidden
Question 1262 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Line joining points to which liquid rises in piezometer tubes is:
AHydraulic gradient
BPiezometric line
CPressure grade line
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 1263 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Hydraulic grade line is:
AAlways above pipe centerline
BNever above energy grade line
CAlways slopes downward
DAll
Answer is hidden
Question 1264 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Difference between total hydraulic gradient line and total energy line represents:
AKinetic head
BPressure head
CDatum head
DLoss of head
Answer is hidden
Question 1265 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Total Energy Line represents:
APressure head + kinetic head
BKinetic head only
CPressure head + datum head
DPressure head + kinetic head + datum head
Answer is hidden
Question 1266 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Difference between energy line and hydraulic grade line represents:
APiezometric head
BPressure head
CElevation head
DVelocity head
Answer is hidden
Question 1267 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Difference between EGL and HGL is:
APressure head
BPotential energy
CVelocity head
DEnergy slope
Answer is hidden
Question 1268 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For uniform flow in an open channel:
ATEL, HGL and channel bottom are parallel
BTEL and water surface horizontal
CTEL, water surface and bottom are parallel
DNone
Answer is hidden
Question 1269 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Head loss is minimum in:
ABroad-crested weir
BNarrow-crested weir
COgee-shaped weir
DSharp-crested weir
Answer is hidden
Question 1270 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Pick out the correct statement about energy gradient and hydraulic grade line.
AEnergy gradient represents total head at different sections of a pipeline
BVertical distance between energy line and hydraulic grade line equals velocity head
CVertical distance between energy line and energy gradient represents head loss
DALL
Answer is hidden
Question 1271 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The pressure in a pipe flow is normally:
ALess than atmospheric pressure
BEqual to atmospheric pressure
CMore than atmospheric pressure
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1272 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
The discharge through a channel of circular section will be maximum when the depth of water is:
A0.81 times the diameter of section
B0.1 times the diameter of section
C0.7 times the diameter of section
D1.81 times the diameter of section
Answer is hidden
Question 1273 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
For laminar flow through a circular pipe, the maximum velocity is:
A1.5 times the average velocity
B2 times the average velocity
C1.75 times the average velocity
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1274 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In pipe flow, the point where local velocity is equal to mean velocity is:
Ar = 7R
Br =4R
Cr = 0.9R
Dr = 0.7R
Answer is hidden
Question 1275 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In which of the following cases is it possible for flow to occur from low pressure to high pressure?
AFlow through a converging section
BAdiabatic flow in a horizontal pipe
CFlow of air downward in a pipe
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1276 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
In which of the following cases is it possible for flow to occur from low pressure to high pressure?
AFlow of liquid upward in a vertical pipe
BFlow through a converging section
CFlow of air downward in a pipe
DImpossible in a constant cross-section conduit
Answer is hidden
Question 1277 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If the pipe network is connected in parallel, then:
ADischarge in each pipe is same
BHead loss in each pipe is same
CDischarge will be constant and pressure will be high
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1278 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If three pipes are connected in series, then:
AHead loss is same for all
BDischarge is same for all
CFriction factor is same for all
DVelocity is same for all
Answer is hidden
Question 1279 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
If three pipes of different diameters, lengths and friction factors are connected in parallel, then:
AQ = Q₁ + Q₂ + Q₃
BV₁ = V₂ = V₃
CQ₁ = Q₂ = Q₃
Df = f₁ + f₂ + f₃
Answer is hidden
Question 1280 of 4146Ch 3 · Basic Water Resources Engineering
Two pipes of equal length L, diameter D and friction factor f are connected in parallel between two points. If a single pipe of diameter D and the same friction factor f is used, its length should be:
A4L
B2L
C1L
D5L
Answer is hidden
Question 1281 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
The internal force that tends to bend or curve a beam at a section is called the:
AAxial force
BShear force
CBending moment
DTorque
Answer is hidden
Question 1282 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
The rate of change of shear force with respect to distance along a beam equals:
AThe bending moment
BThe negative of the distributed load intensity, -w(x)
CThe axial force
DZero, always
Answer is hidden
Question 1283 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
The bending moment in a beam is maximum (or minimum) at a section where:
AThe shear force is maximum
BThe shear force is zero or changes sign
CThe axial force is zero
DThe deflection is zero
Answer is hidden
Question 1284 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
An applied concentrated moment (couple) at a point along a beam produces:
AA sudden jump in the shear force diagram
BA sudden jump (discontinuity) in the bending moment diagram, with no effect on the shear force diagram
CNo effect on either diagram
DA parabolic shear force diagram
Answer is hidden
Question 1285 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
For a cantilever beam carrying a point load at its free end, the bending moment diagram is:
AConstant along the span
BParabolic, maximum at the free end
CLinear, zero at the free end and maximum (hogging) at the fixed support
DZero everywhere
Answer is hidden
Question 1286 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
For a simply supported beam under a uniformly distributed load, the bending moment diagram is:
ALinear
BParabolic, with maximum sagging moment at mid-span where SF = 0
CConstant
DTriangular with a discontinuity at mid-span
Answer is hidden
Question 1287 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
A point of contraflexure in a beam's bending moment diagram is a location where:
AThe shear force is maximum
BThe bending moment changes sign (BM = 0), indicating a reversal of curvature
CThe axial force is maximum
DThe applied load is a couple
Answer is hidden
Question 1288 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
The principle of superposition for internal forces in a linear elastic beam states that:
AOnly the largest single load needs to be considered
BThe combined effect of several loads equals the algebraic sum of the effects of each load acting separately
CLoads cannot be combined mathematically
DSuperposition applies only to axial forces
Answer is hidden
Question 1289 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
The change in bending moment between two sections of a beam equals:
AThe change in axial force between those sections
BThe area under the shear force diagram between those sections
CThe area under the load diagram between those sections
DZero, always
Answer is hidden
Question 1290 of 4146Ch 4 · Shear Forces and Bending Moments
A uniformly varying load (UVL), such as a triangular load distribution, is characterized by:
AConstant intensity along its length
BIntensity varying linearly from zero (or some value) to a maximum over its length
CActing only at a single point
DProducing no shear force
Answer is hidden
Question 1291 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
Principal planes at a point in a stressed body are defined as the planes on which:
AShear stress is maximum and normal stress is zero
BShear stress is zero and normal stress is maximum or minimum
CBoth normal and shear stress are maximum
DBoth normal and shear stress are zero
Answer is hidden
Question 1292 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
The maximum shear stress at a point, in terms of the principal stresses σ1 and σ2, is given by:
Aτmax = σ1 + σ2
Bτmax = (σ1 - σ2)/2
Cτmax = σ1 × σ2
Dτmax = σ1/σ2
Answer is hidden
Question 1293 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
Mohr's circle is a graphical technique used to determine:
AOnly the modulus of elasticity
BPrincipal stresses, maximum shear stress, and stresses on any inclined plane at a point
COnly the yield strength of a material
DOnly the torsional rigidity of a shaft
Answer is hidden
Question 1294 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
On the stress-strain curve of a ductile material such as mild steel, the yield point represents:
AThe point of fracture
BThe stress at which the material begins to deform plastically with little or no increase in stress
CThe maximum stress the material can sustain (ultimate strength)
DThe point where Hooke's law is most accurate
Answer is hidden
Question 1295 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
A key distinguishing feature of brittle material behaviour (e.g. cast iron, concrete) compared to ductile behaviour is:
AA pronounced yield plateau before fracture
BLarge plastic deformation before fracture
CFracture occurring with little or no plastic deformation and no distinct yield point
DIdentical stress-strain response to ductile materials
Answer is hidden
Question 1296 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
The torsion formula for a circular shaft, relating torque T, polar moment of inertia J, shear stress τ, and radius r, is:
AT/J = τ/r = Gθ/L
BT = τ + r
CT/J = r/τ
DT = GθL only
Answer is hidden
Question 1297 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
In a circular shaft subjected to torsion, the shear stress distribution across the cross-section is:
AUniform (constant) across the entire section
BZero at the outer surface and maximum at the centre
CZero at the centre and increasing linearly to a maximum at the outer surface
DIndependent of the applied torque
Answer is hidden
Question 1298 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
A hollow circular shaft is generally more efficient in resisting torsion than a solid shaft of the same cross-sectional area because: area constant by increasing outer radius) increases efficiency
AHollow shafts have lower polar moment of inertia
BMaterial near the centre of a solid shaft contributes little to torsional resistance, so removing it (while keeping
CHollow shafts cannot twist at all
DTorsion formula does not apply to hollow shafts
Answer is hidden
Question 1299 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
The proportional limit on a stress-strain curve corresponds to:
AThe stress beyond which the material fractures immediately
BThe stress up to which stress is directly proportional to strain, i.e. Hooke's law applies
CThe maximum stress a material can withstand
DThe stress at which necking begins
Answer is hidden
Question 1300 of 4146Ch 4 · Stress and Strain Analysis
The ultimate tensile strength of a ductile material, on its stress-strain curve, corresponds to:
AThe proportional limit
BThe yield point
CThe maximum stress reached, corresponding to the onset of necking
DThe fracture point, which occurs at the same stress
Answer is hidden
Question 1301 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
Pure (co-planar) bending of a beam segment is characterized by:
AConstant shear force and varying bending moment
BConstant bending moment and zero shear force over the segment
CZero bending moment throughout
DOnly axial force acting on the segment
Answer is hidden
Question 1302 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
The flexure formula relating bending moment M, second moment of area I, bending stress σ, and distance y from the neutral axis is:
AM/I = σ/y = E/R
BM = σ + y
CM/I = y/σ
DM = EI only, independent of σ and y
Answer is hidden
Question 1303 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
In elastic bending of a beam, the bending stress distribution across the depth of the section is:
AUniform (constant) across the entire depth
BZero at the extreme fibres and maximum at the neutral axis
CZero at the neutral axis and varying linearly to a maximum at the extreme fibres
DIndependent of the applied bending moment
Answer is hidden
Question 1304 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
The curvature (1/R) of a beam's elastic curve at a section is related to the bending moment M by:
A1/R = M/(EI)
B1/R = EI/M
C1/R = M × EI
D1/R is independent of M
Answer is hidden
Question 1305 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
Macaulay's method is primarily used to: discontinuous loading
ACalculate axial stresses only
BDetermine beam slope and deflection conveniently using a single expression, even for beams with
CDetermine torsional shear stress in shafts
DCalculate principal stresses at a point
Answer is hidden
Question 1306 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
A long (slender) column under axial compressive load typically fails by:
ADirect material crushing at yield stress
BBuckling (sudden lateral instability) at a stress below the material's crushing strength
CTorsional failure only
DPure shear failure
Answer is hidden
Question 1307 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
Euler's critical buckling load for a long column is given by:
APcr = π²EI/Le²
BPcr = EI/Le
CPcr = σA only
DPcr = πEA/Le
Answer is hidden
Question 1308 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
For a column with both ends fixed, the effective length Le in terms of the actual length L is:
ALe = L
BLe = 2L
CLe = L/2
DLe = 0.7L
Answer is hidden
Question 1309 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
For a column with one end fixed and the other end free, the effective length Le is:
ALe = L
BLe = 2L
CLe = L/2
DLe = 0.7L
Answer is hidden
Question 1310 of 4146Ch 4 · Theory of Flexure and Columns
The slenderness ratio of a column is defined as:
Aλ = Le × r
Bλ = Le/r, where r is the radius of gyration
Cλ = A/I
Dλ = E/σ
Answer is hidden
Question 1311 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
The degree of static determinacy of a plane truss is given by the formula:
ADs = m + r - 2j
BDs = 3m + r - 3j
CDs = m - r + j
DDs = 2m + r - j
Answer is hidden
Question 1312 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
If the degree of static determinacy Ds of a structure is negative, the structure is:
AStatically determinate
BStatically indeterminate
CAn unstable mechanism (insufficient members/supports)
DAlways a stable truss
Answer is hidden
Question 1313 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
Castigliano's theorem states that the displacement at a load's point of application, in its direction, equals:
AThe total strain energy U directly
BThe partial derivative of the total strain energy with respect to that load, ∂U/∂P
CThe bending moment at that point
DThe product of load and length
Answer is hidden
Question 1314 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
In the virtual (unit load) method for computing beam deflection, the deflection at a point is given by: at that point
Aδ = ∫(mM/EI)dx, where M is the real bending moment and m is the bending moment due to a virtual unit load
Bδ = M/EI directly, with no integration
Cδ = ∫M dx only
Dδ = m/M
Answer is hidden
Question 1315 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
For a bending member, the strain energy U stored due to bending is expressed as:
AU = ∫M²dx/(2EI)
BU = M × L
CU = ∫M dx
DU = EI/M
Answer is hidden
Question 1316 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
The virtual unit load in the unit load method is applied:
AAt a random location unrelated to the desired displacement
BAt the point and in the direction of the desired displacement or rotation
COnly at the structure's supports
DOnly as a distributed load
Answer is hidden
Question 1317 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
For a plane frame, the degree of static determinacy formula 3m + r - 3j - c includes the term c, which accounts for:
AThe number of members only
BAdditional condition equations introduced by internal hinges or rollers
CThe total applied load
DThe material's modulus of elasticity
Answer is hidden
Question 1318 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
The unit load method is applied to portal frame deflection analysis by: results
AIgnoring all members except the columns
BIntegrating the product of real and virtual moment diagrams (mM/EI) over each member and summing the
CUsing only Euler's buckling formula
DApplying Pascal's law to each joint
Answer is hidden
Question 1319 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
Energy methods (such as Castigliano's theorem) are particularly useful for analysing structures because they: using scalar energy quantities
ARequire no knowledge of material properties
BProvide a systematic way to compute deflections and forces in both determinate and indeterminate structures
CApply only to statically determinate trusses
DEliminate the need for equilibrium equations entirely
Answer is hidden
Question 1320 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-1
A statically determinate structure, by definition, can have its support reactions and internal forces determined using:
AOnly material stress-strain relationships
BThe equations of static equilibrium alone, without needing compatibility/deformation conditions
COnly energy methods
DOnly the moment distribution method
Answer is hidden
Question 1321 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
An influence line diagram (ILD) for the bending moment at a section shows:
AThe bending moment along the entire structure for one fixed load position
BThe value of the bending moment at that fixed section as a unit load moves across the structure
COnly the maximum shear force in the structure
DThe deflection of the structure under a fixed load
Answer is hidden
Question 1322 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
For a simply supported beam, the influence line for a support reaction is:
AParabolic
BA straight line, equal to 1 at that support and 0 at the other support
CTriangular with peak at mid-span
DConstant along the entire span
Answer is hidden
Question 1323 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
For a simply supported beam, the influence line for bending moment at a section is:
AA straight horizontal line
BTriangular, with maximum ordinate ab/L at the section (a, b = distances to the two supports)
CBilinear with a jump of 1 at the section
DParabolic with zero ordinate at the section
Answer is hidden
Question 1324 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
To find the maximum response due to a moving uniformly distributed load using an influence line, the load should be positioned: length
AOnly at the peak ordinate as a point load
BOver the portion(s) of the ILD having the same sign, to maximize the net area under the ILD over the loaded
COver the entire structure regardless of ILD sign
DAt the support only
Answer is hidden
Question 1325 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
A two-hinged arch, with hinges only at its two supports and a continuous rib, is statically:
ADeterminate
BIndeterminate to the first degree
CIndeterminate to the second degree
DAn unstable mechanism
Answer is hidden
Question 1326 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
The redundant force in the analysis of a two-hinged arch is typically taken as:
AThe vertical reaction at one support
BThe horizontal thrust H at the supports
CThe bending moment at the crown
DThe applied load itself
Answer is hidden
Question 1327 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
For a two-hinged parabolic arch of span L and rise h under a uniformly distributed load w over the full span, the horizontal thrust H equals:
AH = wL/8h
BH = wL²/(8h)
CH = wLh/8
DH = w/(8Lh)
Answer is hidden
Question 1328 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
The bending moment at any section of a two-hinged arch, once the horizontal thrust H is known, is computed as: section
AThe simple-beam bending moment at that section only, ignoring H
BThe simple-beam bending moment at that section minus H times the arch rise above the springing line at that
CH multiplied by the span length only
DZero at every section
Answer is hidden
Question 1329 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
The shear force influence line at a section of a simply supported beam is characterized by:
AA smooth continuous curve with no discontinuity
BA bilinear shape with a jump (discontinuity) of magnitude 1 as the unit load crosses the section
CA single constant value across the whole span
DBeing identical to the bending moment ILD
Answer is hidden
Question 1330 of 4146Ch 4 · Determinate Structures-2
Compared to a three-hinged arch, a two-hinged arch's analysis requires additionally applying:
AOnly the three equations of static equilibrium
BA compatibility (energy) condition, since equilibrium alone is insufficient due to static indeterminacy
CNo analysis at all, since it behaves identically to a beam
DOnly the flexure formula
Answer is hidden
Question 1331 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
The flexibility (force) method for analysing indeterminate structures proceeds by: solve for the redundants
AIgnoring compatibility conditions entirely
BRemoving redundant forces to form a determinate primary structure, then applying compatibility equations to
CDirectly assembling a global stiffness matrix
DApplying only equilibrium equations, with no additional conditions
Answer is hidden
Question 1332 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
In the slope-deflection method, member end moments are expressed in terms of:
AOnly the applied loads, with no reference to joint rotations
BJoint rotations, chord rotation (due to sidesway), and fixed-end moments
COnly the cross-sectional area of the member
DOnly the support reactions
Answer is hidden
Question 1333 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
In the moment distribution (Hardy Cross) method, the distribution factor at a joint for a given member is defined as:
AThe member's length divided by total length
BThe member's relative stiffness divided by the sum of stiffnesses of all members meeting at that joint
CA fixed value of 1/2 for every member
DThe applied load on that member
Answer is hidden
Question 1334 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
In the moment distribution method, the carry-over factor from the near end to a far end that is fixed is:
A0
B1/2
C1
D2
Answer is hidden
Question 1335 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
The stiffness (matrix displacement) method solves an indeterminate structure by: displacements, then recovering member forces
AAssembling a global stiffness matrix relating joint displacements to applied loads, solving for the
BUsing only graphical Mohr's circle constructions
CIgnoring joint displacements entirely
DApplying the flexure formula directly to every joint
Answer is hidden
Question 1336 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
The Müller-Breslau principle is used to construct influence lines for indeterminate (continuous) beams by: restraint and applying a unit displacement/rotation there
ADirectly measuring strains in a physical model only
BRecognizing that the ILD shape matches the deflected shape obtained by releasing the corresponding
CIgnoring the structure's indeterminacy entirely
DUsing only the flexibility method with no releases
Answer is hidden
Question 1337 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
A plastic hinge forms at a section of a beam once:
AThe bending moment reaches the section's elastic yield moment only
BThe bending moment reaches the section's full plastic moment capacity, Mp = σyZ
CThe shear force reaches its maximum value
DThe axial force becomes zero
Answer is hidden
Question 1338 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
The shape factor of a cross-section, S = Zp/Ze, represents:
AThe ratio of member length to depth
BThe reserve strength beyond first yield due to plastic stress redistribution across the section
CThe modulus of elasticity of the material
DThe degree of static indeterminacy
Answer is hidden
Question 1339 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
Elementary plastic collapse (mechanism) analysis determines the ultimate load of a structure by: hinges forming a mechanism
AUsing only elastic stress-strain relationships
BApplying virtual work, equating external work done by the collapse load to internal work absorbed by plastic
CIgnoring the formation of plastic hinges
DUsing only the moment distribution method
Answer is hidden
Question 1340 of 4146Ch 4 · Indeterminate Structures
Compared to the flexibility method, the slope-deflection and moment distribution methods are classified as:
AForce (flexibility-based) methods
BDisplacement (stiffness-based) methods, since the primary unknowns are joint displacements/rotations
CGraphical methods only
DMethods applicable only to determinate structures
Answer is hidden
Question 1341 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
How do points and UDL be represented in SFD?
Asimple lines and curved lines
Bcurved lines and inclined lines
Csimple lines and inclined lines
Dboth curved lines
Answer is hidden
Question 1342 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When shear force diagram is parabolic curve between two points, it indicates that there is ________.
Apoint loads at two points
Bno loading at two points
CUDL between points
DUVL between points
Answer is hidden
Question 1343 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What is the maximum shear force, when a cantilever beam is loaded with UDL throughout?
Aw × l
Bw
Cw/l
Dw+l
Answer is hidden
Question 1344 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In purely bending, stress distribution in the beam is ________.
Alinear
Bparabolic
Celliptical
Dconstant
Answer is hidden
Question 1345 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Where is the absolute maximum shear force in simply supported beam with UDL?
ANear support
BCenter of beam
CAt 1/4 span from support
DAt 1/3 span from support
Answer is hidden
Question 1346 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If point load w(x) = sin(x/L) is acted on a beam, then shear force diagram is?
Alinear
Bparabolic curve
Csine curve
Dcosine curve
Answer is hidden
Question 1347 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The rate of change of shear force is called ________.
Abending moment
Bpoint load
Cintensity of load
Dslope
Answer is hidden
Question 1348 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If the shear force along a section of a beam is zero, the bending moment at the section is ________.
Azero
Bmaximum
Cminimum
Daverage of maximum-minimum
Answer is hidden
Question 1349 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If shear force is constant throughout the section, then BM is ________.
Aconstant
Blinear
Cparabolic
Dcubic
Answer is hidden
Question 1350 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When the bending moment is constant over the beam the Shear Force will be?
AMaximum at support
BZero over the entire span
CMinimum at the mid-point
DMaximum over the entire span
Answer is hidden
Question 1351 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The relation between Shear force and Bending moment is ________.
AS = dM/dx
BM = dS/dx
CdM/dS = x
DdS/dM = x
Answer is hidden
Question 1352 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If the shear force diagram of a simply supported beam is parabolic, then the load on the beam is ________.
Auniformly distributed load
Bconcentrated load at mid span
Cexternal moment acting at mid span
Dlinearly varying distributed load
Answer is hidden
Question 1353 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In simple bending, ________ is constant.
Ashear force
Bloading
Cdeformation
Dbending moment
Answer is hidden
Question 1354 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A beam of uniform strength has constant ________.
Ashear force
Bbending moment
Ccross-sectional area
Ddeflection
Answer is hidden
Question 1355 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Bending moment is ________ at a hinged support.
Aalways maximum
Balways zero
Calways minimum
Deither minimum or max
Answer is hidden
Question 1356 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The maximum B.M. of a cantilever beam lies at ________.
Athe free end
Bthe fixed end
Cmiddle of its length
D1/4 from fixed end
Answer is hidden
Question 1357 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Two people weighing W each are sitting on plank of length L floating on water at L/4 from either end. Neglecting the weight of the plank, the bending moment at the centre of the plank is ________.
AWL/8
BWL/16
CWL/32
Dzero
Answer is hidden
Question 1358 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The concavity produced on the beam section about the centre line when downward force acts on it is called as ________.
Ahogging or positive bending moment
Bhogging or negative bending moment
Csagging or positive bending moment
Dsagging or negative bending moment
Answer is hidden
Question 1359 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
At the point of contra flexure, the bending moment is ________.
Aequal to zero
Bchanges sign
Cmaximum
Dminimum
Answer is hidden
Question 1360 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The point of contraflexure is the point where ________.
Abending moment is maximum
Bbending moment is minimum
Cshear force is zero
Dbending moment changes sign
Answer is hidden
Question 1361 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Bending moment in a beam is not a function of ________.
Aposition of the load
Btype of beam
Ccross section of the beam
Dspan of the beam
Answer is hidden
Question 1362 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The bending moment in a beam does not depend upon its ________.
Aload intensity
Bspan
Ctype of support
Dmoment of inertia
Answer is hidden
Question 1363 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Abrupt change in BMD if ________ is applied.
Acouple
Bimpact load
Cshear force
Daxial force
Answer is hidden
Question 1364 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In a B.M. diagram vertical line at a section indicates, ________.
Aconcentrated load
Bmoment
Cuniformly distributed load
Duniformly varying load
Answer is hidden
Question 1365 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The slope of the curve of B.M. diagram gives ________.
AS.F. at the section
BB.M. at the section
CUDL at the section
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1366 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The B.M. diagram for a cantilever beam carrying uniformly distributed load is ________.
Aa triangle
Ba parabola
Ca cubic parabola
Da rectangle
Answer is hidden
Question 1367 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The B.M. at the fixed end of a cantilever beam subjected to UDL throughout span is ________.
Awl
Bwl²/2
Cwl²/4
Dwl²/8
Answer is hidden
Question 1368 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A fixed beam is subjected to a uniformly distributed load over its entire span. The points of contra-flexure will occur on either side of the centre at a distance of ________ from the centre.
AL/√3
BL/3
CL/(2√3)
D4L/√3
Answer is hidden
Question 1369 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The shape of bending moment for a simple supported beam with point load at the mid-span is ________.
Arectangle
Btriangle
Cparabolic
Dhyperbolic
Answer is hidden
Question 1370 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When a beam is subjected to simple bending, ________ is the same in both tension and compression for the material.
Amodulus of rigidity
Bmodulus of elasticity
CPoisson's ratio
Dmodulus of section
Answer is hidden
Question 1371 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If a beam is subjected to pure bending, then the deformation of the beam is ________.
Aarc of circle
Btriangular
Ctrapezoidal
Drectangular
Answer is hidden
Question 1372 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The shear stress distribution over a rectangular cross-section of a beam follows ________.
Aa straight line path
Ba circular path
Ca parabolic path
Dan elliptical path
Answer is hidden
Question 1373 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The shear stress intensity is minimum at ________.
Aaxis of shaft
Bsurface of the shaft
Cany inside layer of the shaft
Dall the above are correct
Answer is hidden
Question 1374 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The stress which acts in a direction perpendicular to the area is called ________.
Ashear stress
Bnormal stress
Cthermal stress
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1375 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When a body is subjected to a direct tensile stress (σ) in one plane, then the normal stress on an oblique section of a body inclined at angle (θ) to the normal of the section is equal to ________.
Aσ sin θ
Bσ cos θ
Cσ sin² θ
Dσ cos² θ
Answer is hidden
Question 1376 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When a body is subjected to a direct tensile stress (σ) in one plane, then maximum normal stress occurs at a section inclined at ________ to the normal section.
A0°
B30°
C45°
D90°
Answer is hidden
Question 1377 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The maximum shear stress in a thin cylindrical shell subjected to internal pressure p is ________.
Apd/2t
Bpd/4t
Cpd/6t
Dpd/8t
Answer is hidden
Question 1378 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The transverse shear stress acting in a beam of rectangular cross-section, subjected to a transverse shear load, is ________.
Avariable with maximum at the bottom of the beam
Bvariable with maximum at the top of the beam
Cuniform
Dvariable with maximum on the neutral axis
Answer is hidden
Question 1379 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a rectangular section the ratio of maximum shear stress to the average shear stress is ________.
A2
B1.5
C1.25
D1.75
Answer is hidden
Question 1380 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a circular section the ratio of maximum shear stress to average shear stress is ________.
A1.13
B1.23
C1.33
D1.43
Answer is hidden
Question 1381 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The shear centre of a section is defined as that point ________.
Athrough which the load must be applied to produce zero twisting moment on the section
Bat which shear force is zero
Cat which shear force is maximum
Dat which the shear force is minimum
Answer is hidden
Question 1382 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For RCC structure, the shape of shear stress diagram is ________.
Arectangular
Bparabolic
Cparabolic above neutral axis and rectangular below neutral axis
Drectangular above neutral axis and parabolic below neutral axis
Answer is hidden
Question 1383 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The maximum shear stress induced in a member which is subjected to an axial load is equal to ________.
Amaximum normal stress
Bhalf of maximum normal stress
Ctwice the maximum normal stress
Dthrice the maximum normal stress
Answer is hidden
Question 1384 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
On principal plane, the value of shear stress is ________.
A(σx + σy)/2
Bzero
Cmaximum
D(σx − σy)/2
Answer is hidden
Question 1385 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The angle between major principal plane and minor principal plane will be always ________.
Agreater than 90°
Bless than 90°
Cequal to 90°
Dequal to 180°
Answer is hidden
Question 1386 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The plane of maximum shear stress has normal stress that is ________.
Amaximum
Bminimum
Czero
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1387 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
On the Principal plane, shear stress is ________.
Azero
Bmaximum
Cminimum
Dinfinity
Answer is hidden
Question 1388 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Principal stress on the plane of maximum shear stress is ________.
Amaximum
Bzero
Cminimum
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1389 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The magnitude of direct stress, across a principal plane is known as ________.
Abending stress
Bprincipal stress
Cshear stress
Dnormal stress
Answer is hidden
Question 1390 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
On a principle plane the magnitude of shear stress will be equal to ________.
Amaximum
Bminimum
Czero
Dinfinity
Answer is hidden
Question 1391 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which of the following stresses can be determined using Mohr's circle method?
ATorsional stress
BBending stress
CPrincipal stress
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1392 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In a Mohr circle, the shear stress τ1 on the plane of maximum obliquity is ________.
Aless than the maximum shear stress τmax
Bmore than the maximum shear stress τmax
Cequal to the maximum shear stress τmax
Dnumerically equal to (σ1 − σ3)/2
Answer is hidden
Question 1393 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If a bar of large length when held vertically and subjected to a load at its lower end, its own-weight produces additional stress. The maximum stress will be ________.
Aat the lower cross-section
Bat the built-in upper cross-section
Cat the central cross-section
Dat every point of the bar
Answer is hidden
Question 1394 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When a body is subjected to direct stresses in two mutually perpendicular directions, tangential stress across inclined plane will be maximum when ________.
Aθ = 0°
Bθ = 45°
Cθ = 90°
Dθ = 180°
Answer is hidden
Question 1395 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When a body is subjected to two tensile stresses of equal magnitude on two mutually perpendicular planes, the radius of Mohr circle will be ________.
Azero
Bmaximum
Cminimum
Dinfinity
Answer is hidden
Question 1396 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The stress produced by sudden load is ________ times that is produced by gradual load.
A1/2
B1
C2
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1397 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A beam has a solid circular section having diameter d. If a section of the beam is subjected to a shear force F, then maximum shear stress in the cross section is given by ________.
A4F/(3πd²)
B16F/(3πd²)
C8F/(3πd²)
D3F/(16πd²)
Answer is hidden
Question 1398 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The proof resilience per unit volume is called ________.
Astrain energy
Bmodulus of resilience
Cvolumetric strain
DPoisson's ratio
Answer is hidden
Question 1399 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The ratio of change in volume to the original volume is called ________.
Alinear strain
Blateral strain
Cvolumetric strain
DPoisson's ratio
Answer is hidden
Question 1400 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The load beyond which a body will have permanent set is ________.
Arigidity
Bproof resilience
Cproof load
Dproof stress
Answer is hidden
Question 1401 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The correct sequence of stress-strain curve is as ________.
AEL, PL, TP, breaking point
BPL, YP, EL, breaking point
CPL, EL, YP, breaking point
DFL, BL, breaking point, YP
Answer is hidden
Question 1402 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Limit of proportionality depends upon ________.
Aarea of cross-section
Btype of loading
Ctype of material
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1403 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Every material obeys Hooke's law within its ________.
Aelastic limit
Bplastic limit
Climit of proportionality
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1404 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The stress at which extension of a material takes place more quickly as compared to the increase in load is called ________.
Aelastic point
Bplastic point
Cbreaking point
Dyielding point
Answer is hidden
Question 1405 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which point on the stress-strain curve occurs after yield plateau?
Alower yield point
Bupper yield point
Cultimate point
Dbreaking point
Answer is hidden
Question 1406 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The slope of the stress-strain curve in the elastic deformation region is ________.
Aelastic modulus
Bplastic modulus
CPoisson's ratio
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1407 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The total elongation of a bar due to its self-weight is (where w, L and E are the specific weight, length, and Young's modulus of the bar respectively) ________.
AwL²/E
Bw²L/E
CwL²/(2E)
Dw²L/(2E)
Answer is hidden
Question 1408 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If the material has identical elastic properties in all directions, it is called ________.
Aelastic
Bisotropic
Cplastic
Dhomogeneous
Answer is hidden
Question 1409 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Highest value of stress for which Hooke's law is applicable for a given material is called ________.
Astress limit
Bstrain limit
Cproportional limit
Dsignificant limit
Answer is hidden
Question 1410 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The material in which large deformation is possible before absolute failure by rupture is called ________.
Aplastic
Belastic
Cbrittle
Dductile
Answer is hidden
Question 1411 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In a body loaded under plane stress conditions, what is the number of independent stress components?
A1
B2
C3
D6
Answer is hidden
Question 1412 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For an isotropic, homogeneous and elastic material obeying Hooke's law, the number of independent elastic constants is ________.
A2
B3
C6
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 1413 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What will be the elastic modulus of a material if the Poisson's ratio for that material is 0.5?
Aequal to its shear modulus
Bthree times its shear modulus
Cfour times its shear modulus
Dnot determinable
Answer is hidden
Question 1414 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The Poisson's ratio of a material is 0.3. What will be the ratio of Young's modulus to bulk modulus?
A1.4
B1.2
C0.8
D0.6
Answer is hidden
Question 1415 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What will be the ratio of Young's modulus to the modulus of rigidity of a material having Poisson's ratio 0.25?
A3.75
B3
C1.5
D2.5
Answer is hidden
Question 1416 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The outside diameter of a hollow shaft is twice its inside diameter. The ratio of its torque carrying capacity to that of solid shaft of the same material and the same outside diameter is ________.
A15/16
B3/4
C1/2
D1/16
Answer is hidden
Question 1417 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A circular shaft is subjected to a torsion, the stress at the center of shaft is ________.
Azero
Bmaximum
Cminimum
Dinfinite
Answer is hidden
Question 1418 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The shear stress at the outermost fibres of a circular shaft under torsion is ________.
Azero
Bminimum
Cmaximum
Dinfinity
Answer is hidden
Question 1419 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If in a planar system, only 2 reaction forces are acting, then the system is ________.
Aessentially unstable
Bessentially stable
Ccan't say
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1420 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If all the reactions acting on a planar system are concurrent in nature, then the system is ________.
Acan't say
Bessentially stable
Cessentially unstable
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1421 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If a system has more equations of equilibrium than number of forces, then the system is ________.
Aimproperly constrained
Bpartially constrained
Cstable
Dsolvable
Answer is hidden
Question 1422 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Maximum number of unknown forces that can be determined in concurrent force system under equilibrium is ________.
Azero
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1423 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
How many cases out of the following are improperly constrained? Parallel forces, concurrent forces, perpendicular forces, only moment.
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1424 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A beam of uniform strength can be obtained by ________.
Akeeping the width uniform and varying the depth
Bkeeping the depth uniform and varying the width
Cvarying the width and depth both
Dany one of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1425 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A beam is said to be of uniform strength if ________.
Athe shear stress is constant throughout the beam
Bthe extreme fibre stress is the same at every section
Cbending moment is constant throughout the length of the beam
Ddeflection is the same throughout the length of the beam
Answer is hidden
Question 1426 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The shear in a beam subjected to pure positive bending is ________.
Apositive
Bzero
Cnegative
Dintermediate
Answer is hidden
Question 1427 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Beyond elastic limit, tensile strain ________.
Aincreases more quickly
Bdecreases more quickly
Cincrease in proportion to stress
Ddecrease in proportion to stress
Answer is hidden
Question 1428 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If a material has identical elastic properties in all directions, it is said to be ________.
Ahomogeneous
Belastic
Cisotropic
Dvisco elastic
Answer is hidden
Question 1429 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a linearly elastic, isotropic and homogeneous material, the number of elastic constants required to relate stress and strain is ________.
Atwo
Bthree
Cfour
Dsix
Answer is hidden
Question 1430 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The number of independent elastic constants for a linear elastic isotropic and homogeneous material is ________.
A4
B3
C2
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 1431 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The deterioration of the properties of a material which is subjected to repeatedly applied stress is termed as ________.
Aisotropic
Bcreep
Celasticity
Dfatigue
Answer is hidden
Question 1432 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What is the shape of load-deformation curve for a linear elastic member?
AStraight line with constant slope
BStraight line with varying slope
CCurve
DSine wave
Answer is hidden
Question 1433 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What is the shape of load-deformation curve for a non-linear elastic member?
AStraight line with constant slope
BStraight line with varying slope
CCurve
DCircle
Answer is hidden
Question 1434 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What is the relation between work done and complementary work done?
AThey are unequal
BThey are equal
CCan't say
DDepends upon loading
Answer is hidden
Question 1435 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The unit of elastic modulus is the same as those of ________.
Astress, shear modulus and pressure
Bstrain, shear modulus and force
Cshear modulus, stress and force
Dstress, strain and pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 1436 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
How the elastic constants E and K are related?
AE = 2K(1 − 2μ)
BE = 3K(1 − 2μ)
CE = 2K(1 − μ)
DE = K(1 − 2μ)
Answer is hidden
Question 1437 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The relation between Young's Modulus (E), shear modulus (G) and Poisson's ratio (μ) is correctly given by the expression ________.
AG = E/[2(1 + μ)]
BE = G/[2(1 + μ)]
CG = E/[2(1 − μ)]
DE = G/[2(1 − μ)]
Answer is hidden
Question 1438 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
At yield point of test specimen, the material ________.
AObeys Hooke's law
Bbehaves in an elastic manner
Cregains its original shape
Dundergoes plastic deformation
Answer is hidden
Question 1439 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What is the limiting values of Poisson's ratio?
A−1 and 0.5
B−1 and −0.5
C−0.5 and 0
D0 and 0.5
Answer is hidden
Question 1440 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which of the following is true if the value of Poisson's ratio is zero?
AThe material is rigid
BThe material is perfectly plastic
CThe longitudinal strain in the material is infinite
DThe lateral strain in the material is zero
Answer is hidden
Question 1441 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
________ curve is formed due to bending of overhanging beams.
AElastic
BPlastic
CFlexural
DAxial
Answer is hidden
Question 1442 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Curvature of the beam is ________ to bending moment.
Aequal
Bdirectly proportional
Cinversely proportional
Dcoincides
Answer is hidden
Question 1443 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The term EI d²y/dx² represents ________.
Ashear force
Bbending moment
Cslope of bending moment diagram
Dmaxima/minima condition for deflection
Answer is hidden
Question 1444 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The resistance offered by a material to deformation when subjected to external load is ________.
Aresistivity
Bresilience
Cstress
Dstrain
Answer is hidden
Question 1445 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
________ is a property of a material by virtue of it, material regain original shape after removal of load.
Arigidity
Bplasticity
Celasticity
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1446 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The phenomenon of slow extension of materials with time under constant load is called ________.
Ayielding
Bcreep
Cbreaking
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1447 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What is the bulk modulus of elasticity?
AThe ratio of shear stress to shear strain
BThe ratio of direct stress to direct strain
CThe ratio of volumetric stress to volumetric strain
DThe ratio of direct stress to volumetric strain
Answer is hidden
Question 1448 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
At the neutral axis, bending stress is ________.
Aminimum
Bmaximum
Czero
Dconstant
Answer is hidden
Question 1449 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In the theory of simple bending, the bending stress in the beam section varies ________.
Alinearly
Bparabolic
Celliptically
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1450 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In a beam, effect of bending stress is ________ effect of shear stress.
Agreater than
Bless than
Cequal to
Dnegligible
Answer is hidden
Question 1451 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Area moment of inertia of the cross-section of the beam resist ________.
Athe applied normal force
Bboth the torque and bending moment
Cthe applied torque
Dthe applied bending moment of the beam
Answer is hidden
Question 1452 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A simply supported beam of uniform cross section is subjected to maximum bending moment of 2.25 t.m. If it has rectangular cross section, with width 15 cm and depth 30 cm, then maximum bending stress induced in the beam will be ________.
A50 kg/cm²
B100 kg/cm²
C150 kg/cm²
D225 kg/cm²
Answer is hidden
Question 1453 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The load on a spring per unit deflection is called ________.
Astiffness
Bproof resilience
Cproof stress
Dproof load
Answer is hidden
Question 1454 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Moment required to produce unit rotation is called ________.
Aflexibility
Bstiffness
Crigidity
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1455 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Two beam sections, one is circular and other square made from same materials and having same cross-sectional area, when subjected to bending ________.
Amoment of resistance for both beams is same
Bcircular section has higher M.R.
Csquare section has higher M.R.
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1456 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The flexural member beam is designed for ________.
Amaximum SF at center
Bminimum shear force at center
Cmaximum BM at center
Dminimum bending moment at center
Answer is hidden
Question 1457 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The equation of flexure is ________.
AM/I = σ/y = E/R
B1/I = σ/y = E/R
CI/M = y/σ = E/R
DM/I = σ/y = E/R
Answer is hidden
Question 1458 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
As per the Euler's theory, failure in column will be by ________.
Abuckling
Bcrippling
Ccrushing
Dcrippling and buckling
Answer is hidden
Question 1459 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Euler's formula is not valid, for mild steel column when slenderness ratio is ________.
Amore than 80
Bless than 80
Cmore than 120
Dmore than 30
Answer is hidden
Question 1460 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A column that fails due to direct stress is called ________.
Ashort column
Blong column
Cweak column
Dslender column
Answer is hidden
Question 1461 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The buckling load for a given column depends upon ________.
Across sectional area of column
Blength and least radius of gyration
Cmodulus of elasticity of column material
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1462 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The buckling load will be maximum for a column, if ________.
Aone end of column is clamped and other free
Bboth ends of the column are clamped
Cboth ends of the column are hinged
Done end of the column is hinged and other clamped
Answer is hidden
Question 1463 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The formula which can be used for column load to account combined effect of bending and direct stresses is ________.
AEuler's formula
BRankine's formula
CPerry's formula
DStraight line formula
Answer is hidden
Question 1464 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The load at which column just starts buckling is called ________.
Acrippling load
Bbuckling load
Ccritical load
Dany one of these
Answer is hidden
Question 1465 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Slenderness ratio of long column is ________.
Aarea of cross section divided by radius of gyration
Barea of cross section divided by least radius of gyration
Cradius of gyration divided by area of cross section
Dlength of column divided by least radius of gyration
Answer is hidden
Question 1466 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For long columns, the value of buckling load is ________ crushing load.
Aequal to
Bless than
Cmore than
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1467 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The direct stress induced in a long column is ________ as compared to bending stress.
Asame
Bmore
Cless
Dnegligible
Answer is hidden
Question 1468 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The nature of crippling load in a column is ________.
Atensile load
Bcompressive load
Clive load
Ddead load
Answer is hidden
Question 1469 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a long column with one end fixed and other end hinged, effective length is ________.
AL
BL/2
CL/√2
D2L
Answer is hidden
Question 1470 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Given that the unsupported length of the column with both ends fixed is L. What will be the unsupported length of an equivalent column with one end fixed and the other end free?
AL
BL/2
CL/4
DL/8
Answer is hidden
Question 1471 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The ratio of effective length to actual length of column with one end free and other end fixed is ________.
A2
B0.5
C0.33
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 1472 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The effective length of column of length L, fixed against rotation and translation at one end is ________.
A0.5L
B0.7L
C1.414L
D2L
Answer is hidden
Question 1473 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a circular column having its ends hinged, the slenderness ratio is 160. The L/d ratio of the column is ________.
A80
B57
C40
D20
Answer is hidden
Question 1474 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
An electric pole is 5 m high from the ground level. Its effective length for design purpose will be ________.
A2.5 m
B3.53 m
C5.0 m
D10 m
Answer is hidden
Question 1475 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If a column of length L is restrained against horizontal and vertical displacement and is free to rotate at both ends, its equivalent length will be ________.
A2L
BL
C0.5L
D0.707L
Answer is hidden
Question 1476 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What should be the effective length of compression members effectively held in position and restrained against rotation at both ends as per IS code?
A0.75L
B0.65L
C0.55L
D0.45L
Answer is hidden
Question 1477 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The effective length used in crippling load formula for a column with both ends fixed is ________.
AL/2
BL
C2L
DL/√2
Answer is hidden
Question 1478 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A column of length L is fixed at both ends. It is equivalent to another column with both ends hinged having length ________.
AL
B2L
CL/2
DL/√2
Answer is hidden
Question 1479 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When does Euler's buckling occur in a column?
AWhen the column is compressed beyond its yield strength
BWhen the column is subjected to torsional forces
CWhen the column is subjected to bending moments
DWhen the column is axially loaded and has a slenderness ratio above a critical value
Answer is hidden
Question 1480 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
P = π²EI/(4L²) is the equation of Euler's crippling load, if ________.
Aboth ends are fixed
Bboth ends are hinged
Cone end is fixed and other end is free
Done end is fixed and other end is hinged
Answer is hidden
Question 1481 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For the case of a slender column of length L and flexural rigidity EI built-in at base and free at top, Euler's critical load is ________.
Aπ²EI/L²
B2π²EI/L²
C3π²EI/L²
Dπ²EI/(4L²)
Answer is hidden
Question 1482 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Euler's equation for crippling load when both ends of column are hinged is ________.
Aπ²EI/L²
B4π²EI/L²
Cπ²EI/(4L²)
D2π²EI/L²
Answer is hidden
Question 1483 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When a column is fixed at both ends then corresponding Euler's critical load is ________.
Aπ²EI/L²
B4π²EI/L²
Cπ²EI/(4L²)
D2π²EI/L²
Answer is hidden
Question 1484 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The Euler's crippling load formula with one end fixed and other hinged is given by ________.
Aπ²EI/L²
B2π²EI/L²
C4π²EI/L²
Dπ²EI/(4L²)
Answer is hidden
Question 1485 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Euler's crippling load for column of one end fixed and other end free condition is ________.
Aπ²EI/L²
B2π²EI/L²
C4π²EI/L²
Dπ²EI/(4L²)
Answer is hidden
Question 1486 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Euler's crippling load of a square column cross section will be ________ if its side is doubled.
A1/2 times
B1/4 times
C2 times
D16 times
Answer is hidden
Question 1487 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The ratio of Euler's crippling load for column with both ends fixed to that of both ends hinged is ________.
A0.5
B1
C2
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1488 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The ratio of Euler's crippling load for column with both ends fixed and column with one end fixed and other hinged is ________.
A2
B0.5
C0.25
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1489 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which of the following is statically determinate structure?
AFixed beam
BContinuous beam
CTwo hinged arch
DDouble overhanging beam
Answer is hidden
Question 1490 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which of the following is an example for statically determinate structure?
ATwo hinged arch
BCantilever beam
CFixed beam
DContinuous beam
Answer is hidden
Question 1491 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which condition applies for statically indeterminate beams?
ANo. of equilibrium conditions are more than no. of reactions
BNo. of reactions are more than no. of equilibrium conditions
CNo. of reactions are equal to no. of equilibrium conditions
DNo. of reactions are more than no. of forces
Answer is hidden
Question 1492 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If the forces in the members of a structure as well as the reactions can be found by the conditions of equilibrium, then it is known as ________.
AStatically stable
BStatically unstable
CStatically determinate
DStatically indeterminate
Answer is hidden
Question 1493 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If 4 reactions are acting on a beam, then the system is ________.
AUnstable and indeterminate
BStable and indeterminate
CStable and determinate
DCan't say
Answer is hidden
Question 1494 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
How many compatibility equations should be written if we have n number of redundant reactions?
An - 1
Bn
Cn + 1
Dn + 2
Answer is hidden
Question 1495 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Static indeterminacy for rigid jointed plane frame is given by ________.
A(m + r) - 2j
B(m + r) - 3j
C(3m + r) - 3j
D(6m + r) - 6j
Answer is hidden
Question 1496 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Static indeterminacy for pin jointed plane frame is given by ________.
A(m + r) - 2j
B(m + r) - 3j
C(3m + r) - 3j
D(6m + r) - 6j
Answer is hidden
Question 1497 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If in a pin jointed plane frame (m + r) > 2j, then the frame is ________. Where 'm' is number of members, 'r' is reaction components and 'j' is number of joints.
AUnstable
BStable and statically indeterminate
CStable and determinate
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1498 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a statically indeterminate pin-jointed plane truss, the relation between number of members 'm' and number of joints 'j' is expressed as ________.
Am = 3j - 6
Bm > 2j - 3
Cm = 2j - 3
Dm > 3j - 6
Answer is hidden
Question 1499 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A rigid-jointed plane frame is stable and statically determinate if ________.
A(m + r) = 3j
B(3m + r) = 3j
C(m + 3r) = 3j
D(3m + r) < 2j
Answer is hidden
Question 1500 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A continuous beam has a fixed end at support A and roller support at B and C. What will be the degree of redundancy of the structure?
A3
B1
C2
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1501 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If a structure has 2j - r number of members, then it will be ________.
AStable
BUnstable
CDepends upon structure
DDepends upon magnitude of load
Answer is hidden
Question 1502 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If a structure has total 10 joints, then what should be the minimum number of joints in which equilibrium equations should be concurrently satisfied for stability?
A7
B8
C9
D10
Answer is hidden
Question 1503 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A plane truss has 11 members and 8 joints, how many additional members are needed to make the truss stable?
A0
B1
C2
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 1504 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The degree of static indeterminacy of a rigid-jointed plane frame having 15 members, 3 reaction components and 14 joints is ________.
A2
B3
C6
D8
Answer is hidden
Question 1505 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The number of independent displacement components at each joint of a rigid jointed space frame is ________.
A2
B4
C6
D8
Answer is hidden
Question 1506 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The degree of static indeterminacy of propped cantilever beam is ________.
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1507 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The propped cantilever beam is indeterminate by ________ degree.
A1
B2
C3
Dzero
Answer is hidden
Question 1508 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which of the following is indeterminate structure?
ATwo hinge arches
BThree hinge arches
CSimple supported beam
DCantilever beam
Answer is hidden
Question 1509 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The degree of kinematic indeterminacy of pin jointed plane frame is ________.
A2j - r
Bj - 2r
C3j - r
D2j + r
Answer is hidden
Question 1510 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The degree of Kinematic Indeterminacy (Dk) for pin jointed space frame if members are extensible is: Where, r = Number of reactions, j = Number of joints and m = Number of members (members whole, extension is neglected).
ADk = [3j - r]
BDk = [2j - (m + r)]
CDk = [2j - r]
DDk = [6j - r]
Answer is hidden
Question 1511 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Find the indeterminacy of given figure.
A0
B6
C4
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 1512 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Conservation of energy will be applicable only when ________.
AStatic load is applied
BDynamic load is applied
CCan be anything
DLarge load is applied
Answer is hidden
Question 1513 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Strain energy stored in a bar due to axial load P is ________.
AP²L/AE
BP²L/(2AE)
CPL/(2AE)
DP²L/(4AE)
Answer is hidden
Question 1514 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Interpret from the following which one is wrong with respect to strain energy method for finding deflection?
ADeflection can be found only in the direction of load
BDeflection can be found at any point in the desired direction
CDeflection can be found only at the loaded point
DStructure should be subjected to a single concentrated load
Answer is hidden
Question 1515 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The strain energy stored in a simply supported beam of span 'l' due to central point load 'w' is ________.
Aw²l³/(48EI)
Bw²l³/(48EI)
Cw²l³/(96EI)
Dw²l²/(96EI)
Answer is hidden
Question 1516 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The strain energy stored in a spring, when subjected to maximum load, without suffering permanent distortion, is known as ________.
AImpact energy
BProof resilience
CProof stress
DModulus of resilience
Answer is hidden
Question 1517 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The partial derivative of strain energy gives ________.
ADeflection
BSlope
CMoment
DRedundant force
Answer is hidden
Question 1518 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The ratio of strain energy stored in a body due to suddenly applied load and gradually applied load is ________.
A0.5
B1
C2
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1519 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Virtual work can be applied when ________.
AElastic limit is exceeded
BElastic limit is not exceeded
CDoesn't depend upon elastic limit
DCan't say
Answer is hidden
Question 1520 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Virtual work method can be applied when ________.
ASupports are moving
BSupports are not moving
CCan be applied in both case
DCan be applied in neither cases
Answer is hidden
Question 1521 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The principle of virtual work is used to satisfy ________.
AMechanism condition
BEquilibrium condition
CPlasticity condition
DNo condition is satisfied
Answer is hidden
Question 1522 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Virtual work is used to determine ________.
AYield load
BElastic load
CPlastic load
DCollapse load
Answer is hidden
Question 1523 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When a body is in equilibrium undergoes an infinitely small displacement, work imagined to be done is known as ________.
AImaginary work
BNegative work
CVirtual work
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1524 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If a rigid body is in equilibrium under a system of forces, the virtual work done by this system of forces during virtual displacement is zero. This principle is known as ________.
AWork energy principle
BMecaulay's principle
CBernoulli's principle
DCastigliano's principle
Answer is hidden
Question 1525 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Virtual work refers to ________.
AVirtual work done by virtual forces
BVirtual work done by actual forces
CActual work done by actual forces
DActual work done by virtual forces
Answer is hidden
Question 1526 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which of the following is important while designing Beam?
ASF at support
BBM at support
CSF at center
DBM at center
Answer is hidden
Question 1527 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The moment area method is not suitable for which type of beams?
ACantilevers beams
BContinuous beams
CSimply supported beams
DBeams fixed at both ends
Answer is hidden
Question 1528 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The maximum deflection of a fixed beam of length l carrying a central point load W is ________.
AWl³/(48EI)
BWl³/(96EI)
CWl³/(192EI)
DWl³/(384EI)
Answer is hidden
Question 1529 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The maximum deflection of a fixed beam carrying a central point load lies at ________.
AFixed ends
BCenter of beam
Cl/3 from ends
DAny of these
Answer is hidden
Question 1530 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The deflection at center of fixed beam with uniformly distributed load w per unit length over its length L is ________.
AwL⁴/(384EI)
BwL³/(384EI)
CwL⁴/(192EI)
DwL³/(192EI)
Answer is hidden
Question 1531 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The deflection at center of fixed beam with total load W (kN) applied uniformly over its length L is ________.
AWL⁴/(384EI)
BWL³/(384EI)
CWL⁴/(192EI)
DWL³/(192EI)
Answer is hidden
Question 1532 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In the case of a beam simply supported at both ends, if the same load instead of being concentrated at center is distributed uniformly throughout the length, then the deflection at center will get reduced by ________.
A1/2 times
B1/4 times
C5/8 times
D3/8 times
Answer is hidden
Question 1533 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A cantilever beam of length l carries a gradually varying load from zero at free end and w per unit length at fixed end. The maximum deflection lies at ________.
AFree end
BFixed end
CMid-span
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1534 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Deflection at mid span of simply supported beam subjected to couple M at both ends is ________.
AML²/(16EI)
BML²/(8EI)
CML³/(24EI)
DML/(2EI)
Answer is hidden
Question 1535 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The deflection of simply supported beam having point load W acting at its center is ________.
AWL³/(3EI)
BWL³/(12EI)
CWL³/(48EI)
D5WL³/(384EI)
Answer is hidden
Question 1536 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What will be the deflection of a cantilever beam subjected to a point load W at its free end?
AWL³/(3EI)
BWL⁴/(4EI)
CWL³/(6EI)
DWL²/(2EI)
Answer is hidden
Question 1537 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For simply supported beams, the maximum permitted deflection is ________.
A1/325 of the span
B1/300 of the span
C1/350 of the span
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1538 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If m₁ and m₂ are the two individual members of truss of a compound truss, the truss is determinate and static if ________.
Am = m₁ + m₂
Bm = m₁ + m₂ + 1
Cm = m₁ + m₂ + 2
Dm = m₁ + m₂ + 3
Answer is hidden
Question 1539 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The fixed support in a real beam becomes in the conjugate beam a ________.
AFixed support
BHinged support
CRoller support
DFree support
Answer is hidden
Question 1540 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The conjugate method falls in the category of ________.
AForce method
BDisplacement
CStiffness
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1541 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Bending moment at any section in a conjugate beam gives ________ in the actual beam.
ASlope
BDeflection
CCurvature
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1542 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The moment area method is not suitable for which type of beams?
ACantilevers beams
BContinuous beams
CSimply supported beams
DBeams fixed at both ends
Answer is hidden
Question 1543 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The relation, slope = area of BMD/EI, is given by ________.
AMohr's first theorem
BMohr's second theorem
CCastigliano's theorem
DMacaulay's theorem
Answer is hidden
Question 1544 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Shear force at any section in a conjugate beam gives ________ in the actual beam.
ASlope
BDeflection
CCurvature
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1545 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In the moment area method, the difference in slope between two sections of a beam is equal to the ________.
AArea of M/EI diagram between these two sections
BMoment of M/EI diagram between these two sections
C1/2 area of M/EI diagram between these two sections
D1/2 moment of M/EI diagram between these two sections
Answer is hidden
Question 1546 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In the moment area method, the deflection of point A from a tangent at B is equal to ________.
AArea of M/EI diagram between A and B
BMoment of M/EI diagram between A and B about A
CMoment of M/EI diagram between A and B about B
D1/2 area of M/EI diagram between A and B
Answer is hidden
Question 1547 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The theorem of three moments is applicable only when ________.
AThe beam is prismatic
BThe spans are equal
CThere is no discontinuity such as hinges within the span
DThere are at least 2 spans
Answer is hidden
Question 1548 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The fixed end of a continuous beam in Clapeyron's equation is replaced by an additional span of length ________.
AZero length
BInfinite length
CEqual to other span lengths
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1549 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In influence line diagrams (ILD) ________.
APoints remain fixed, position of load changes
BPoints change, position of loads remain fixed
CBoth of them change
DNeither of them changes
Answer is hidden
Question 1550 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Influence line is ________.
AThe line showing stress function due to unit moving load
BThe line showing stress function due to unit load
CThe line showing stress function due to UDL
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1551 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
ILD means ________.
AInfluence length diagram
BInfluence line diagram
CInfluence line distance
DInfluence line diagnosis
Answer is hidden
Question 1552 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Influence line diagram refers to ________.
ADoes not have any impact on position of loading
BPoints change, position of loads remain fixed
CNo consideration of loads
DPoints remain fixed, position of load changes
Answer is hidden
Question 1553 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which statement is correct for ILD?
AILD of statically determinate beams consist of straight lines
BILD of statically indeterminate beams consist of curved lines
CBoth of the above
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1554 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Influence lines are drawn for structures ________.
AIndeterminate
BDeterminate
CAny type
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1555 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
How is an influence line diagram constructed?
ABy plotting the shear force and bending moment diagrams for a structure
BBy plotting the distribution of forces in a structure
CBy plotting the deflection of a structure under a load
DBy plotting the load effect on a specific point in a structure as a function of the position of the load
Answer is hidden
Question 1556 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For drawing ILD, what value of test load is assumed?
A1 unit
BArbitrary
CDepends upon structure
D0
Answer is hidden
Question 1557 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Identify the incorrect statement about Muller Breslau principle.
AIt is applicable when the material is within the elastic limit and obeys Hooke's law
BIt gives analytical method to find influence line diagram
CIt is applicable only for indeterminate structures
DIt gives excellent experimental approach to determine the influence lines for indeterminate structures
Answer is hidden
Question 1558 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Muller Breslau principle in structural analysis is used for ________.
ADrawing influence line diagram for any force function
BWriting virtual work equation
CSuperposition of load effects
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1559 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Muller Breslau principle of influence line is applicable for ________.
ASimple beam
BContinuous beam
CRedundant truss
DAll of these
Answer is hidden
Question 1560 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
To draw ILD for statically indeterminate beams, principle used is ________.
AMaxwell
BMuller-Breslau
CCastigliano
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1561 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The line showing the variations of stress function at a given point due to a unit load moving on a span is known as ________.
ALoad line
BInfluence line
CCurve line
DStress function line
Answer is hidden
Question 1562 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The influence line for the structural function is used for obtaining maximum value because of: A. Uniformly distributed load B. Single point load C. Series of concentrated load.
AOnly A
BA and B
CB and C
DA, B and C
Answer is hidden
Question 1563 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What will be the shape of ILD curve for vertical reaction at point A (RAy)?
ATriangular
BCircular
CRectangular
DTrapezoidal
Answer is hidden
Question 1564 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The influence line diagram for reaction at the support of a cantilever will be ________.
ATriangle with zero ordinate at fixed end and unit ordinate at free end
BTriangle with unit ordinate at fixed end and zero ordinate at free end
CRectangle with ordinate 1/2
DRectangle with unit ordinate
Answer is hidden
Question 1565 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The influence line diagram for BM at a section of a simply supported beam will be a ______.
Atriangle with maximum ordinate at the section and zero at the support nearer to the two supports
Btriangle with maximum ordinate at the section and zero at the other support
Crectangle with unit ordinate
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1566 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The influence line diagram for BM at a section in a cantilever will be a triangle extending between the section and the ______.
Afixed end with maximum ordinate under the section
Bfixed end with maximum ordinate under the fixed end
Cunsupported end with maximum ordinate at the section
Dunsupported end with maximum ordinate at the supported end
Answer is hidden
Question 1567 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The influence line diagram for reaction at a support of a simply supported beam is ______.
Aa triangle with ordinate 1 at that support and zero at the other support
Ba triangle with ordinate 1
Ca rectangle with ordinate 1
Da rectangle with ordinate 1/2
Answer is hidden
Question 1568 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a simply supported beam AB of span L, if unit load is at x distance from A, then RB = ______.
A(L − x) / L
Bx / L
C(x − L) / L
DL / x
Answer is hidden
Question 1569 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a simply supported beam AB of span L, if unit load is at x distance from A, then RA = ______.
A(L − x) / L
Bx / L
C(x − L) / L
DL / x
Answer is hidden
Question 1570 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Equation to find ILD for member of Truss is ______.
Aa(L − a) / (Lh)
Ba(L − a) / L
Ca(L − a) / h
D(L − a) / (Lh)
Answer is hidden
Question 1571 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If on ILD analysis peak force comes out to be 2 kN, then what will be the peak force if loading is single point load?
A1 kN
B2 kN
C3 kN
D4 kN
Answer is hidden
Question 1572 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A single-rolling load of 8 kN rolls along a girder of 15 m span. The absolute maximum bending moment will be ______.
A60 kN-m
B40 kN-m
C20 kN-m
D30 kN-m
Answer is hidden
Question 1573 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A single rolling load of 40 kN rolls from left end along a simply supported girder of span 20 m. The absolute maximum positive and negative shear force, respectively, are ______.
A14 kN and −26 kN
B40 kN and −40 kN
C26 kN and −14 kN
D20 kN and −20 kN
Answer is hidden
Question 1574 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A UDL of 10 kN/m of length 5 m is moving from left to right support on a simply supported beam of span 10 m. The maximum bending moment at 4 m from the left support is ______.
A70 kN-m
B90 kN-m
C50 kN-m
D30 kN-m
Answer is hidden
Question 1575 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When a uniformly distributed load, shorter than the span of the girder, moves from left to right, the conditions for maximum bending moment at a section is that ______.
Athe head of the load reaches the section
Bthe tail of the load reaches the section
Cthe load position should be such that the section divides it equally on both sides
Dthe load position should be such that the section divides the load in the same ratio as it divides the span
Answer is hidden
Question 1576 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The maximum bending moment due to a train of wheel loads on a simply supported girder ______.
Aalways occurs at center of span
Balways occurs under a wheel load
Cnever occurs under a wheel load
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1577 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Influence line diagram for bending moment in a simply supported beam is a ______.
Astraight line
Bparabola
Ctriangle
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1578 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The ILD for reaction at fixed support of cantilever beam is ______.
A1 ordinate throughout the span
B1 ordinate at free end, 0 ordinate at fixed support
C1 ordinate at fixed support, 0 ordinate at free end
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1579 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
ILD for shear force at a section for a cantilever beam is ______.
Atriangle between free and fixed end
Btriangle between free and section
Crectangle between free and fixed end
Drectangle between free and section
Answer is hidden
Question 1580 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
ILD for the shear force at the support of the cantilever beam is ______.
Azero throughout the span
Btriangle with zero at free end
Crectangle throughout the span
Dtriangle with zero at fixed end
Answer is hidden
Question 1581 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The ILD of a three hinged arch of span L and rise h due to horizontal thrust H is ______.
Atriangle with maximum ordinate at center equals L/(24h)
Bsquare with its ordinate equal to L/(24h)
Csquare with its ordinate equal to L/(2h)
Dtriangle with its maximum ordinate at center equals L/(4h)
Answer is hidden
Question 1582 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which of the following are statically determinate beams?
AOnly simply supported beams
BCantilever, overhanging and simply supported
CFixed beams
DContinuous beams
Answer is hidden
Question 1583 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In two-hinged arch, how many unknown forces exist?
AOne unknown
BTwo unknowns
CThree unknowns
DFour unknowns
Answer is hidden
Question 1584 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What is the degree of indeterminacy of a two hinged arch?
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1585 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Identify the incorrect statement according to the hinged arches.
AThree hinged arch is a statically determinate structure
BTo analyze three hinged arch, equilibrium equations are sufficient
CFor three hinged parabolic arch subjected to UDL over the entire span, the bending moment is constant throughout the span
DFor two hinged parabolic arch subjected to UDL over the entire span, the bending moment is zero throughout the span
Answer is hidden
Question 1586 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In hinge less arch, it is supported to ______.
Astable
Bgeometrically unstable
C2nd degree
D3rd degree
Answer is hidden
Question 1587 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The masonry arches resist the external loads by ______.
Anormal thrust and shear
Bnormal thrust, radial shear and moment
Cbending moment and radial shear
Dthrust only
Answer is hidden
Question 1588 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
An arch can be treated as a curved beam ............
Awhose ends are restrained against horizontal movement
Bwhose ends do not provide any reaction
Cwhose ends are unsupported
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1589 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In arches and lintels, back is the ............
Ahighest point on the extrados of an arch
Bupper surface of an arch
Cunder surface of an arch
Douter curve of an arch ring
Answer is hidden
Question 1590 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The line of thrust of the linear arch is ............
Athe axis of the arch
Bthe imaginary line of thrust for a given set of loads
Cthe springing line
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1591 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The moments in the arch will be zero, if ............
Aends are hinged
Bends are fixed
Cthe arch axis coincides with the line of thrust
Dthe arch axis is parallel to the line of thrust
Answer is hidden
Question 1592 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The vertical reaction for the arch is [W load acting at 'a' distance from support with span 2l] ............
AWa/2l
BWl/a
CWa/l
DWa²/2l
Answer is hidden
Question 1593 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The vertical distance between the springing line and the highest point on the intrados is called ............ of the arch.
Adepth
Bextrados
Chaunch
Drise
Answer is hidden
Question 1594 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The top most part of an arch is called ............
Asoffit
Bcrown
Ccenter
Dabutment
Answer is hidden
Question 1595 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The normal thrust at any section along the tangent to the centerline of the arch is ............
AH cos θ + V sin θ
BV cos θ + H sin θ
CH cos θ − V sin θ
DV cos θ − H sin θ
Answer is hidden
Question 1596 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Radial shear in two hinged arch, tangent to the arch makes an angle theta with horizontal ............
AH cos θ + V sin θ
BV cos θ + H sin θ
CH cos θ − V sin θ
DV cos θ − H sin θ
Answer is hidden
Question 1597 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a two hinged arch, if one of the supports settles horizontally, then the horizontal thrust ............
Ais increased
Bis decreased
Cremains unchanged
Dbecomes zero
Answer is hidden
Question 1598 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In a two-hinged arch, the moment will be zero under which condition?
AWhen the arch span is equal to the rise
BWhen the arch is subjected to a uniform load
CWhen the thrust axis and the hinge axis coincide
DWhen the supports are fixed
Answer is hidden
Question 1599 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In a two hinged parabolic arch, an increase in temperature will ............
Adecrease the horizontal thrust
Bincrease the bending moment
Cincrease the horizontal thrust
Dmake no change in horizontal thrust
Answer is hidden
Question 1600 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The locus of the reaction of a two-hinged semi-circular arch is ............
Astraight line
Bparabola
Ccircle
Dhyperbola
Answer is hidden
Question 1601 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The ILD of horizontal thrust in a 2 hinge parabolic arch is ............
Aparabolic
Bcircular
Ctriangular
Dfunicular polygon
Answer is hidden
Question 1602 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a two hinged arch having constant EI, the horizontal thrust H at a point (x, y) on the arch, in terms of beam moment M is given by ............
A∫My(dy/dx) / ∫(y³ ds/EI)
B∫My(dy/dx) / ∫(y ds/EI)
C∫My²(dy/dx) / ∫(y² ds/EI)
D∫My(dy/dx) / ∫(y² ds/EI)
Answer is hidden
Question 1603 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For given two hinged semicircular arches A, B and C of radii 5 m, 7.5 m, and 10 m respectively and carrying concentrated crown load W, ratio of horizontal thrust at their support will be ............
A1 : 1 : 1
B1 : 1.5 : 2
C2 : 1.5 : 1
D2
Answer is hidden
Question 1604 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A parabolic two hinged arch is loaded with a concentrated load W at the crown. The horizontal thrust is equal to ............ [Where 'L' is the span and 'h' is the rise]
A54WL/128h
B25WL/128h
C50WL/128h
D36WL/128h
Answer is hidden
Question 1605 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Calculate the horizontal thrust for the two hinged semicircular arch loaded with point load at its crown.
AW/π
BW/(π sin² α)
C4RW/(3π)
DW/(2π)
Answer is hidden
Question 1606 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Calculate the horizontal thrust for the two hinged semicircular arch loaded uniformly throughout with distributed load.
AW/π
BW/(π sin² α)
C4RW/(3π)
DW/(2π)
Answer is hidden
Question 1607 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The horizontal thrust in a two hinged semi-circular arch subjected to UDL of w kN/m over left half span will be ............
A4wR/(3π)
BwR/2
CwR
D2wR/(3π)
Answer is hidden
Question 1608 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A three-hinged semi-circular arch of radius R carries a concentrated load W at the crown. Horizontal thrust acting on the arch at the hinge would be ............
AW/(2π)
BW/π
C2W/3
D4W/(3π)
Answer is hidden
Question 1609 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Calculate the horizontal thrust for the two hinged parabolic arch loaded uniformly throughout with distributed load.
AWL²/(32H)
BWL²/(16H)
CWL²/(8H)
DWL²/(2H)
Answer is hidden
Question 1610 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Calculate the horizontal thrust for the two hinged parabolic arch loaded with point load at its crown.
AW/π
BW/(π sin² α)
C4RW/(3π)
D25WL/(128H)
Answer is hidden
Question 1611 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The maximum shear force in three hinged parabolic arch usually occurs at ............
Aquarter span
Bcrown
Cspringings
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1612 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In three hinged arch, maximum hogging moment occurs when, the point load is at ............
Aspringing
Bcrown
Cquarter span
Dthe section itself
Answer is hidden
Question 1613 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A three-hinged arch is hinged at supports end ............
Aat one quarter span
Bat the crown
Canywhere in arch
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1614 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Shape of three hinged arch is always ............
Ahyperbolic
Bcircular
Cparabolic
Dcan be any arbitrary curve
Answer is hidden
Question 1615 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If a three hinged parabolic arch carries a uniformly distributed load on its entire span, every section of the arch resists ............
Acompressive force
Btensile force
Cshear force
Dbending moment
Answer is hidden
Question 1616 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The maximum bending moment due to concentrated load in three hinged parabolic arches having one of its hinges at the crown, occurs on either side of the crown at the distance ............
AL/4
BL/2
CL/(2√3)
DL/(3√2)
Answer is hidden
Question 1617 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The maximum ordinate under the crown hinge of influence line diagram for the horizontal thrust of three hinged arch is equal to where L is span of the arch and h is the height of the crown hinge.
AL/(4h)
BL/(8h)
CL/(2h)
DL/(6h)
Answer is hidden
Question 1618 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If the span of a three hinged arch is L, h is the rise and UVL with maximum ordinate 'w' acting over the entire span, the horizontal reaction at each support is given by:
AwL²/(8h)
BwL²/(10h)
CwL²/(16h)
DwL²/(4h)
Answer is hidden
Question 1619 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If 'L' is the span of a three hinged arch, 'h' is the rise and 'W' is the u.d.l. per unit length over the entire span, the horizontal reaction at each support is given by:
AWL²/(8h)
BWL²/(10h)
CWL²/(16h)
DWL²/(4h)
Answer is hidden
Question 1620 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Internal bending moment generated in a three hinged arch is always ............
A0
Binfinite
Cvaries
Dnon zero value but remains constant
Answer is hidden
Question 1621 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Internal shear force generated in a three hinged arch is always ............
A0
Binfinite
Cvaries
Dnon zero value but remains constant
Answer is hidden
Question 1622 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A three-hinged parabolic arch has a span of 30 m and the central rise is 5 m. It is subjected to a point load of 8 kN at a distance of 20 m from the right hinge. Calculate the vertical reaction component at its left support.
A35.35 kN
B40 kN
C13.13 kN
D26.67 kN
Answer is hidden
Question 1623 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In case of a symmetric, fixed parabolic arch of span L and rise h, elastic centre is at a depth ............ below the crown.
Ah/4
Bh/3
Ch/2
Dh
Answer is hidden
Question 1624 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Flexibility matrix method of analysis is basically ............
Aforce method
Bdisplacement method
Cequilibrium method
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1625 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Flexibility matrix is always ............
Asymmetric
Bnon-symmetric
Canti-symmetric
Ddepends upon loads applied
Answer is hidden
Question 1626 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Castigliano's theorem represents which one of the following methods?
Aequilibrium
Bflexibility
Cdisplacement
Dforce
Answer is hidden
Question 1627 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Castigliano's theorem fall under the category of ............
Adisplacement method
Bequilibrium method
Cforce method
Dstiffness method
Answer is hidden
Question 1628 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
According to Castigliano's first theorem partial derivative of strain energy U with respect to force P will give ............
Aslope
Bdeflection
Cmoment
Dshear force
Answer is hidden
Question 1629 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The Castigliano's second theorem can be used to compute deflections ............
Ain statically determinate structure only
Bat the point under the load
Cfor the beam and frame only
Dfor any type of structure
Answer is hidden
Question 1630 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The unit load method used in structural analysis is ............
Aapplicable only to statically determinate structures
Banother name of stiffness method
Can extension of Maxwell's reciprocal theorem
Dderived from Castigliano's theorem
Answer is hidden
Question 1631 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Maxwell's reciprocal theorem is valid for all ............
Astatically determinate structures
Bstructures
Celastic structures
Dstructures with linear force displacement relations
Answer is hidden
Question 1632 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The principle of least work is ............
ACastigliano's first theorem
BCastigliano's second theorem
CPrinciple of superposition
DMuller Breslau principle
Answer is hidden
Question 1633 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The systematic development of slope deflection method in the matrix form is known as ............
Astiffness matrix method
Bdisplacement matrix method
Cequilibrium method
Dall the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1634 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The fictitious method of finding slope and deflection of beam is ............
Aunit load method
BCastigliano's first theorem
CCastigliano's second theorem
Dconsistent deformation method
Answer is hidden
Question 1635 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Principle of superposition is applicable when ............
Adeflections are linear functions of applied forces
Bmaterial obeys Hooke's law
Cthe action of applied forces will be affected by small deformations of the structure
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1636 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The principle of superposition states that the total deflection of a structure under different sets of load is equal to the sum of deflections under each set of loads acting separately on the structure if the loads are within ............
Aelastic limit
Bplastic limit
Cbreaking point
Dyield point
Answer is hidden
Question 1637 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Force method is also called ............ as per structural analysis.
ASlope deflection method
BKani's method
CMoment distribution method
DColumn analogy method
Answer is hidden
Question 1638 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which one of the following methods is not classified as a force method?
AThe theorem of three moments
BThe moments distribution method
CThe method of consistent deformation
DCastigliano's theorem
Answer is hidden
Question 1639 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In column analogy method, the area of an analogous column for a fixed beam of span L and flexural rigidity EI is taken as ............
AL/EI
BL/2EI
CL/4EI
DL/8EI
Answer is hidden
Question 1640 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In slope deflection method, all the joints of the frame are assumed to be ............
AMoving
BSimply supported
CRigid
DRolling
Answer is hidden
Question 1641 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The slope and deflection at the center of a simple beam carrying a central point load are ............
AZero and zero
BMaximum and zero
CMaximum and maximum
DMinimum and maximum
Answer is hidden
Question 1642 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
For a simply supported beam subjected to uniformly distributed load, if the length of the beam is doubled, deflection becomes ............ times.
A4
B2
C16
D8
Answer is hidden
Question 1643 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In a simply supported beam of span L subjected to central concentrated load, the central deflection is 24 mm. Then the slope at supports is ............
A48/L radians
B36/L radians
C24/L radians
D72/L radians
Answer is hidden
Question 1644 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In a cantilever beam, slope and deflection is maximum at ............
AFree end
BFixed end
CCenter
DOne fourth of span
Answer is hidden
Question 1645 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In slope deflection method, the slope and deflection of joints are computed using ............
ARigidity of joint
BElasticity of joint
CEquilibrium of structure
DEquilibrium of joint
Answer is hidden
Question 1646 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
A cantilever beam of length L has flexural rigidity EI up to length L/2 from the fixed end and EI/2 for the rest. It carries a moment M at the free end. The slope at the free end is given by ............
AM/2EI
B3ML/2EI
C2ML/3EI
DML/2EI
Answer is hidden
Question 1647 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The theorem of three moments cannot be applied to ............
AContinuous beams with overhangs
BTrusses and frames
CSingle span fixed beams
DContinuous beams with sinking supports and rotating joints
Answer is hidden
Question 1648 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The simultaneous equations of slope deflection method can be solved by iteration in ............
AConjugate beam method
BConsistent deformation method
CMoment distribution method
DWilliot Mohr method
Answer is hidden
Question 1649 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Moment distribution method is introduced by ............
AHardy Cross
BKani
CMuller Breslau
DOtto Mohr
Answer is hidden
Question 1650 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The moment distribution method is best suited for ............
AIndeterminate pin jointed truss
BRigid frames
CSpace frames
DTrussed beam
Answer is hidden
Question 1651 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Carryover moment is defined as ............
AThe moment applied at one end to cause unit slope at the support
BThe additional moment applied at one end to completely resist the rotation caused due to external loading
CThe moment developed or induced at one end due to a moment at another end
DThe moment applied at one end to cause unit slope at another end
Answer is hidden
Question 1652 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The factor by which the applied moment is multiplied to obtain the end moment of any member is known as the ............
ADistribution factor
BCarryover factor
CRelative stiffness
DTotal relative stiffness
Answer is hidden
Question 1653 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The shape factor of cross section with diamond shape under flexure is ............
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1654 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
When a structural member of the uniform section is subjected to a moment at one end only, then the moment required so as to rotate that end to produce a unit slope, is called ............
AResistance of member
BStiffness of member
CCapacity of member
DPotential of member
Answer is hidden
Question 1655 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Stiffness matrix method is also called ............
AFlexibility method
BForce method
CDisplacement method
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1656 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The stiffness method in structural analysis is also known as ............
AUnit load method
BConsistent deformation method
CForce method
DDisplacement method
Answer is hidden
Question 1657 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If kᵢ is the stiffness of ith member at a joint, the distribution factor for the member is ............
Akᵢ
Bkᵢ/Σkᵢ
CΣkᵢ
DΣkᵢ - kᵢ
Answer is hidden
Question 1658 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
What is the stiffness factor for a beam simply supported at both ends?
A3EI/L
B4EI/L
C2EI/L
DEI/L
Answer is hidden
Question 1659 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Stiffness of the end A if the far end B is vertical guided roller is ............
AEI/L
B2EI/L
C3EI/L
D4EI/L
Answer is hidden
Question 1660 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The stiffness of end A if the farther end is hinged is ............
A0
BEI/L
C3EI/L
D4EI/L
Answer is hidden
Question 1661 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The stiffness for free end A if far end B is fixed is ............
A4EI/L
B3EI/L
C2EI/L
DEI/L
Answer is hidden
Question 1662 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The ratio of the stiffness of a beam at the near end when the far end is hinged to the stiffness of the beam at the near end when the far end is fixed ............
A1
B0.5
C1.33
D0.75
Answer is hidden
Question 1663 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
If point A goes down and point B goes up, then this will be ............
APositive rotation
BNegative rotation
CCan't say
DDepends upon magnitude
Answer is hidden
Question 1664 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Lowest plastic limit load is obtained when ............
AOnly equilibrium condition of plastic analysis is satisfied
BOnly equilibrium and mechanism condition of plastic analysis are satisfied
COnly mechanism condition of plastic analysis is satisfied
DEquilibrium, mechanism and plasticity condition of plastic analysis are satisfied
Answer is hidden
Question 1665 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The moment which makes all the fibers at the section to yield is known as ...............
AFlexural rigidity
BMoment of resistance
CPlastic moment capacity
DYield moment
Answer is hidden
Question 1666 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which load is obtained when equilibrium and mechanism conditions of plastic analysis are satisfied?
APlastic limit load
BUpper bound solution of true ultimate load
CLower bound solution of true ultimate load
DNo solution
Answer is hidden
Question 1667 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Which of the following relation is correct?
A-Mp ≥ M
BM > Mp
CM ≥ Mp
DM ≤ Mp
Answer is hidden
Question 1668 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The collapse load for a propped cantilever of span L subjected to a concentrated load W at mid-span is ...............
A2Mp/L
B3Mp/L
C4Mp/L
D6Mp/L
Answer is hidden
Question 1669 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Collapse load in a fixed beam of span L, carrying u.d.l. over entire span and having plastic moment capacity Mp is ...............
A6Mp/L
B8Mp/L
C8Mp/L²
D16Mp/L²
Answer is hidden
Question 1670 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The shape factor of a diamond shaped section for bending about its diametric axis is ...............
A1.2
B1.5
C2
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1671 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
The shape factor of a circular section with radius R is ...............
A4R/(3π)
B4R/π
C16R/(3π)
D8R/(3π)
Answer is hidden
Question 1672 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
In a plastic analysis of structures, the segment between any two successive plastic hinges is assumed to deform as ...............
AA plastic material
BA rigid material
CAn elastic material
DAn inelastic material
Answer is hidden
Question 1673 of 4146Ch 4 · Structural Mechanics
Plastic analysis is particularly suitable for the structures with ...............
AHigh redundancy and ductility
BLow redundancy and rigidity
CHigh redundancy and rigidity
DLow redundancy and ductility
Answer is hidden
Question 1674 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
Dead load in structural design refers to:
AVariable load from occupancy and use
BThe permanent self-weight of the structure and permanently fixed elements
CLoad induced by earthquakes only
DLoad from wind pressure only
Answer is hidden
Question 1675 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
Imposed (live) load values specified in design codes primarily depend on:
AThe structure's self-weight only
BThe occupancy/use type of the structure (e.g. residential, office, assembly)
CThe wind speed at the site only
DThe seismic zone only
Answer is hidden
Question 1676 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
Wind load on a structure is significantly influenced by all of the following EXCEPT:
ABasic wind speed at the site
BTerrain category and exposure
CBuilding height and shape
DThe structure's imposed (live) load magnitude
Answer is hidden
Question 1677 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
Earthquake (seismic) load on a structure is estimated using methods that account for:
AOnly the structure's total height
BSeismic zone, soil type, the structure's importance, and its ductility
COnly the dead load of the structure
DOnly the wind speed at the site
Answer is hidden
Question 1678 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
The primary reason design codes specify load combinations with partial safety factors, rather than simply summing full characteristic loads, is that: acceptably low probability of the design load being exceeded
AIt simplifies calculations with no technical basis
BIt is highly unlikely all loads act simultaneously at their full characteristic values, so factors are chosen for an
CPartial safety factors are only cosmetic and do not affect design
DCharacteristic loads are always conservative enough on their own
Answer is hidden
Question 1679 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
The load combination 0.9DL ± 1.5(WL or EL) is primarily used to check for:
AMaximum imposed load capacity
BPossible overturning or uplift, where dead load acts beneficially (stabilizing)
CMaximum dead load alone
DSnow load accumulation only
Answer is hidden
Question 1680 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
The characteristic load, as used in limit state design, is defined as:
AThe load a structure experiences on its very first day of use
BThe value of load with a defined (low) probability of being exceeded during the structure's design life
CThe average load over the structure's entire life
DA load value with no probabilistic basis
Answer is hidden
Question 1681 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
The design load used in limit state design calculations is obtained as:
AThe characteristic load divided by a partial safety factor
BThe characteristic load multiplied by the relevant partial safety factor for that load and limit state
CThe characteristic load with no modification
DAn arbitrary value independent of the characteristic load
Answer is hidden
Question 1682 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
Snow load on a structure's roof primarily depends on:
AThe structure's seismic zone only
BGround snow load, roof shape/slope, and exposure conditions
CThe structure's dead load only
DThe building's occupancy classification only
Answer is hidden
Question 1683 of 4146Ch 5 · Loads and Load Combinations
A typical limit-state load combination combining dead, live, and wind loads together (per IS 456/NBC-type codes) is:
A1.5(DL+LL) only, ignoring wind
B1.2(DL+LL±WL)
CDL alone with no factoring
DLL alone with no factoring
Answer is hidden
Question 1684 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
The principal design property of hardened concrete, determined via standard cube/cylinder testing at 28 days, is:
AWorkability
BCompressive strength
CTensile strength primarily
DSetting time
Answer is hidden
Question 1685 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
Workability of fresh concrete is most commonly measured using the:
ACompressive strength test
BSlump test
CRebound hammer test
DUltrasonic pulse velocity test
Answer is hidden
Question 1686 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
According to Abrams' law, the compressive strength of concrete is generally related to the water- cement ratio such that:
AStrength increases as water-cement ratio increases
BStrength is inversely related to the water-cement ratio (lower ratio gives higher strength)
CStrength is completely independent of water-cement ratio
DStrength depends only on aggregate size, not water-cement ratio
Answer is hidden
Question 1687 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
A nominal mix, as opposed to a design mix, is characterized by:
AA rigorous strength-based design procedure using material properties
BFixed proportions of cement:sand:aggregate (e.g. 1:2:4) without a rigorous strength-based design procedure
CBeing used exclusively for high-grade, high-strength concrete
DRequiring no cement at all
Answer is hidden
Question 1688 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
The characteristic strength of concrete, as used for quality control and design, is defined such that:
A100% of test results must exceed it
BNot more than 5% of test results are expected to fall below it
CIt equals the average of only the two highest test results
DIt is unrelated to statistical test result distribution
Answer is hidden
Question 1689 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
Non-destructive tests for assessing in-situ hardened concrete strength/quality include:
ASlump test and compaction factor test
BRebound hammer test and ultrasonic pulse velocity test
CCube crushing test only
DVee-Bee test only
Answer is hidden
Question 1690 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC), compared to Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC), typically differs by:
AContaining no cement at all
BIncorporating pozzolanic materials, often affecting strength development rate and durability characteristics
CBeing used only for road construction
DHaving no defined strength grade
Answer is hidden
Question 1691 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
Water used in concrete mixing must be free of harmful impurities such as organic matter and salts because these can:
AImprove the concrete's compressive strength
BAdversely affect the concrete's strength, durability, and setting behaviour
CHave no effect on concrete properties
DOnly affect the concrete's colour, nothing else
Answer is hidden
Question 1692 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
Admixtures used in concrete, such as plasticizers, retarders, and accelerators, are classified as:
AStructural reinforcement
BChemical admixtures, used to modify fresh or hardened concrete properties
CCoarse aggregate substitutes only
DA replacement for cement entirely
Answer is hidden
Question 1693 of 4146Ch 5 · Concrete Technology
Durability of concrete against environmental deterioration is influenced by all of the following EXCEPT:
AWater-cement ratio
BCover to reinforcement
CExposure condition
DThe colour of the aggregate used
Answer is hidden
Question 1694 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
The limit state method (LSM) of RC design, as used in modern codes like IS 456, differs from the working stress method (WSM) primarily by: collapse and serviceability
AUsing only a single overall factor of safety on service loads
BUsing separate partial safety factors on loads and material strengths, and checking distinct limit states of
CIgnoring material strength entirely
DApplying only to steel structures, not concrete
Answer is hidden
Question 1695 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
An under-reinforced RC beam section is designed to fail by:
ASudden crushing of concrete before steel yields
BYielding of tension steel first, giving warning (large deflection/cracking) before eventual concrete crushing
CSimultaneous failure of steel and concrete with no warning
DBond failure only, with no flexural failure
Answer is hidden
Question 1696 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
A doubly reinforced concrete beam includes compression reinforcement primarily because: capacity
AIt is required in every beam regardless of size
BThe beam's dimensions are restricted and a singly reinforced section would not provide sufficient moment
CIt eliminates the need for tension reinforcement
DIt is cheaper than adding more tension steel
Answer is hidden
Question 1697 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
A slab is classified as a one-way slab when: one direction
AIts length-to-breadth ratio is less than or equal to 2, supported on all four edges
BIts length-to-breadth ratio exceeds 2, or it is supported on only two opposite edges, spanning predominantly in
CIt has no supports at all
DIt is always circular in plan
Answer is hidden
Question 1698 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
At the limit state of collapse in flexure, the design of an RC section assumes that: neglected)
AConcrete carries significant tensile stress
BPlane sections remain plane, and tension is carried entirely by the reinforcement (concrete's tensile strength is
CSteel reinforcement carries no force at all
DThe stress block is triangular only, never rectangular
Answer is hidden
Question 1699 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
Shear reinforcement (stirrups) in an RC beam is required when:
AThe nominal shear stress is always zero
BThe nominal shear stress exceeds the concrete's design shear strength
CThe beam has no tension reinforcement
DThe beam is doubly reinforced only
Answer is hidden
Question 1700 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
Deflection control in routine RC beam/slab design (limit state of serviceability) is commonly achieved by:
AA detailed deflection calculation for every member, with no shortcuts
BUsing code-specified span-to-effective-depth ratios, modified for steel percentage and span type
CIgnoring deflection entirely, since it is not a design concern
DIncreasing only the shear reinforcement
Answer is hidden
Question 1701 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
Bond, in the context of reinforced concrete, refers to: them
AThe compressive strength of concrete alone
BThe interaction (shear stress) between reinforcement and surrounding concrete that transfers force between
CThe tensile strength of steel alone
DA type of admixture used in concrete
Answer is hidden
Question 1702 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
Development length (anchorage) for a reinforcement bar is defined as:
AThe total length of the beam
BThe embedded length required to develop the bar's full design stress through bond
CThe spacing between adjacent bars
DThe diameter of the reinforcement bar
Answer is hidden
Question 1703 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-1
Two-way slab design, compared to one-way slab design, requires: conditions
AReinforcement in one direction only
BReinforcement in both directions, using moment coefficients dependent on aspect ratio and edge/support
CNo reinforcement at all
DThe exact same design approach as a one-way slab, with no distinction
Answer is hidden
Question 1704 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
A long (slender) RC column, compared to a short column, requires additional design consideration for:
AOnly the axial load capacity, identical to a short column
BAdditional moments arising from lateral deflection under axial load (the P-Δ effect)
CNo additional consideration is ever needed
DOnly the concrete grade, not slenderness
Answer is hidden
Question 1705 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
Lateral ties (or spirals) in an RC column serve to:
BHold longitudinal bars in position, resist their buckling, and confine the concrete core, improving ductility
CProvide only architectural/aesthetic function
DEliminate the need for a footing
Answer is hidden
Question 1706 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
An isolated footing is designed by checking: bearing capacity
AOnly the bending capacity, ignoring shear entirely
BBending, one-way (beam) shear, and two-way (punching) shear, ensuring soil pressure does not exceed safe
COnly the safe bearing capacity of soil, with no structural design checks
DOnly two-way punching shear
Answer is hidden
Question 1707 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
A combined footing is typically used instead of separate isolated footings when: needs control
AColumns are very far apart with no site constraints
BIsolated footings would overlap, be too close to a property line, or differential settlement between columns
CThe soil has an extremely high bearing capacity
DOnly a single column exists on site
Answer is hidden
Question 1708 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
The fundamental principle of pre-stressed concrete is to: would develop under load
AAdd more tension reinforcement than in ordinary RC
BIntroduce an internal compressive stress before service loads are applied, counteracting tensile stresses that
CEliminate the use of concrete entirely
DIncrease the water-cement ratio to increase strength
Answer is hidden
Question 1709 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
In pre-tensioning, the sequence of construction is: gains sufficient strength
AConcrete is cast first, then tendons are stressed and anchored against the hardened concrete
BTendons are stressed and anchored before the concrete is cast around them, then released once the concrete
CTendons are never released after casting
DNo tendons are used at all in pre-tensioning
Answer is hidden
Question 1710 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
In post-tensioning, prestress is transferred to the concrete via: end anchorages
ABond alone, with no anchorages
BTendons stressed and anchored against the hardened concrete after it has gained sufficient strength, using
CDirect casting of steel into wet concrete with no subsequent stressing
DElastic shortening alone, with no active tendon stressing
Answer is hidden
Question 1711 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
Long-term losses in prestressed concrete are primarily caused by:
AElastic shortening of concrete only
BCreep and shrinkage of concrete, and relaxation of the steel tendon
CFriction in the duct only, occurring instantaneously
DAnchorage slip only
Answer is hidden
Question 1712 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
Friction losses in prestress are particularly relevant to:
APre-tensioning only, not post-tensioning
BPost-tensioning, where friction develops along the tendon-duct interface as the tendon is stressed
CNeither pre-tensioning nor post-tensioning
DOnly short, straight tendons with no curvature
Answer is hidden
Question 1713 of 4146Ch 5 · RCC Structures-2
A column subjected to axial load combined with uniaxial or biaxial bending (e.g. an edge or corner column) is typically designed using:
AA single allowable stress value with no interaction consideration
BInteraction diagrams relating axial load capacity to moment capacity
COnly the flexure formula developed for beams
DThe Euler buckling formula alone, ignoring axial-moment interaction
Answer is hidden
Question 1714 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
Built-up steel sections, as opposed to standard rolled sections, are primarily used when: offers are needed, often for longer spans/heavier loads
AA standard rolled section is always sufficient regardless of span/load
BSection properties (higher moment of inertia, greater capacity) beyond what a single standard rolled section
CCost must always be minimized regardless of structural requirements
DStandard sections are unavailable in any country
Answer is hidden
Question 1715 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
A bolted bearing-type connection transfers load primarily through:
AFriction between clamped plate surfaces only, with no bearing
BBearing between the bolt shank and the hole surface, along with shear in the bolt
CAdhesive bonding between plates
DWelding at the bolt location
Answer is hidden
Question 1716 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
High-strength friction grip (HSFG) bolted connections transfer load primarily through:
ABearing of the bolt against the hole only
BFriction between the clamped (faying) surfaces, due to pre-tensioning of the bolts
CDirect welding between the plates
DThe bolt threads engaging the hole threads
Answer is hidden
Question 1717 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
A fillet weld, as commonly used in steel connections, is typically applied to:
AButt-joint plate edges requiring full penetration
BThe corner formed between two surfaces, commonly in lap or tee joints
COnly circular members
DConnections with no load transfer requirement
Answer is hidden
Question 1718 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
A tension member (tie) in steel design is checked against design tensile strength governed by:
AOnly the gross cross-sectional area, ignoring bolt holes entirely
BYielding of the gross section or rupture of the net (effective) section, whichever is critical
COnly buckling, as in a compression member
DOnly the member's self-weight
Answer is hidden
Question 1719 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
Struts and axially loaded compression members in steel design are primarily checked against: curves
ATensile rupture only
BBuckling, using a design compressive stress based on the member's slenderness ratio and code buckling
CBond and anchorage, as in RC design
DBending only, with no axial consideration
Answer is hidden
Question 1720 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
The function of a column base (e.g. a slab base) in steel structures is to: concrete's permissible bearing stress
AIncrease the column's tensile strength
BDistribute the column's load onto the supporting foundation over a sufficiently large bearing area, within the
CReplace the need for a foundation entirely
DOnly resist wind load, with no gravity load function
Answer is hidden
Question 1721 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
Anchor bolts in a steel column base connection primarily serve to:
ACarry the entire gravity load of the column alone
BSecure the base plate to the foundation and resist uplift or moment at the base
CReplace the base plate entirely
DProvide fireproofing to the column
Answer is hidden
Question 1722 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
Compared to bolted connections, welded steel connections generally offer:
ALess rigidity and more slip
BA more rigid, continuous connection, but require skilled workmanship and quality control
CNo structural function at all
DIdentical behaviour to bearing-type bolted connections in every respect
Answer is hidden
Question 1723 of 4146Ch 5 · Steel Structures
HSFG (friction-type) bolted connections are often preferred over ordinary bearing-type bolted connections for:
AConnections with no load at all
BConnections subject to fatigue or reversal of load, due to their slip-resistant behaviour
COnly connections in timber structures
DConnections where slip is desired
Answer is hidden
Question 1724 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
Permissible (working) stresses used in timber design are derived by:
AUsing the timber's ultimate strength directly, with no reduction
BReducing characteristic strength values for factors such as load duration, moisture content, and safety
CIgnoring the timber species/grade entirely
DUsing only the compressive strength of steel as a reference
Answer is hidden
Question 1725 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
In timber beam design, which type of shear stress is often particularly critical, more so than in many other structural materials?
AVertical shear at the supports only
BHorizontal shear along the grain, due to timber's relatively low shear strength parallel to grain
CTorsional shear stress
DShear stress has no relevance in timber beam design
Answer is hidden
Question 1726 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
The Nepal Building Code's (NBC) mandatory rules of thumb for load-bearing masonry buildings are best described as: reinforcement, etc.) enabling safer construction without full engineering analysis
AA full, detailed engineering analysis procedure required for every building
Question 1727 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
Diagonal tension cracking in a masonry wall is a failure mode typically associated with:
APure vertical (gravity) compressive load only, with no lateral load
BIn-plane shear failure of the wall/pier under lateral (seismic) loading
COut-of-plane bending only
DExcessive mortar strength
Answer is hidden
Question 1728 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
Out-of-plane bending/overturning failure of a masonry wall is particularly critical for:
AReinforced concrete walls only, never masonry
BUnreinforced masonry walls under seismic or wind loading acting perpendicular to the wall
CWalls under pure axial gravity load only
DSteel-framed structures only
Answer is hidden
Question 1729 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
Sliding shear failure in masonry occurs when:
AVertical gravity load alone exceeds the unit's compressive strength
BIn-plane shear along a mortar bed joint exceeds the joint's shear (friction + bond) resistance
CThe mortar has excessive strength
DThe masonry unit itself has zero compressive strength
Answer is hidden
Question 1730 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
Among mud, lime, and cement mortar, which generally offers the lowest strength and durability?
ACement mortar
BLime mortar
CMud mortar
DAll three have identical strength and durability
Answer is hidden
Question 1731 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
Lime mortar, compared to cement mortar, is often noted for offering: heritage/traditional construction
AHigher strength than cement mortar in all cases
BSome self-healing (autogenous) capacity for small cracks, with moderate strength, commonly used in
CNo durability advantage over mud mortar
DFaster strength gain than cement mortar
Answer is hidden
Question 1732 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
Timber columns are designed against buckling based primarily on:
AThe timber's colour and grain pattern only
BThe column's slenderness ratio, with permissible compressive stress reducing as slenderness increases
CThe moisture content alone, with no reference to slenderness
DOnly the column's cross-sectional area, ignoring length
Answer is hidden
Question 1733 of 4146Ch 5 · Timber and Masonry Structures
Cement mortar is the standard choice for modern load-bearing and reinforced masonry construction primarily because it offers:
AThe lowest cost among all mortar types, with no other advantage
BThe highest strength and durability, and the fastest strength gain, among common mortar types
COnly aesthetic benefits, with no structural advantage
DProperties identical to mud mortar
Answer is hidden
Question 1734 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Load factor used for live load are ............ than that used for dead loads.
Asmaller
Blarger
Cdepends upon case
Ddepends upon loading
Answer is hidden
Question 1735 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is not included in imposed load classification?
AResidential load
BEarthquake load
CIndustrial load
DEducational load
Answer is hidden
Question 1736 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following building code is used for seismic design of buildings in Nepal?
ANBC 105
BNBC 10
CNBC 305
DNBC 205
Answer is hidden
Question 1737 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which one of the following standards describes wind loads?
ANBC 100
BNBC 104
CNBC 105
DNBC 106
Answer is hidden
Question 1738 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The Mandatory Rules of Thumb for reinforced concrete buildings with masonry infill is described in ............
ANBC 201
BNBC 200
CNBC 207
DNBC 208
Answer is hidden
Question 1739 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The National Building Code (NBC) for unit weight of material is ............
ANBC 102
BNBC 103
CNBC 104
DNBC 105
Answer is hidden
Question 1740 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The code which includes masonry rule of thumb is ............
ANBC 200
BNBC 201
CNBC 202
DNBC 204
Answer is hidden
Question 1741 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The guidelines for earthquake resistant building construction - low strength masonry is mentioned in ............
ANBC 200
BNBC 201
CNBC 204
DNBC 203
Answer is hidden
Question 1742 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The specification for ductile design and detailing of RCC is described in ............
AIS 13920
BIS 1392
CIS 139
DIS 13929
Answer is hidden
Question 1743 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Imposed load is also known as ............
Aspecial load
Blive load
Csnow load
Dwind load
Answer is hidden
Question 1744 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is considered as gravity load?
ADead load
BLive load
CWind load
DEarthquake load
Answer is hidden
Question 1745 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Imposed load is in which part of the IS Code?
AIS 875 Part I
BIS 875 Part II
CIS 865 Part II
DIS 865 Part I
Answer is hidden
Question 1746 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following IS code describes Dead Load?
AIS 875 Part I
BIS 875 Part II
CIS 875 Part III
DIS 875 Part IV
Answer is hidden
Question 1747 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following IS codes has provisions for live loads?
AIS 875 Part II
BIS 875 Part I
CIS 875
DIS 85 Part II
Answer is hidden
Question 1748 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The live load provision is made in ............
AIS 875 Part II
BIS 875 Part I
CIS 875
DIS 876 Part II
Answer is hidden
Question 1749 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which IS Code is used for designing an industrial building considering earthquake loads?
AIS 1893 (Part 2)
BIS 1893 (Part 1)
CIS 1893
DIS 1863 (Part 1)
Answer is hidden
Question 1750 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following relation is correct for design horizontal seismic coefficient?
AAh = ZISa / (2Rg)
BZISa x 2Rg
CZISa x Rg
DAh = ISa / (2Rg)
Answer is hidden
Question 1751 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
. For earthquake loads, axially loaded members have to resist ............
Atension only
Bcompression only
Cboth tension and compression
Dbending moment
Answer is hidden
Question 1752 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is characteristic load?
ASeismic load
BLoad which will be exceeded by certain probability during life of structure
CLoad which will not be exceeded by certain probability during life of structure
DPressure load
Answer is hidden
Question 1753 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Internal pressure coefficient in a building is positive if acting from ............ and external pressure coefficient in a building is positive if from ............
Aoutside to inside, inside to outside
Binside to outside, outside to inside
Coutside to inside, outside to inside
Dinside to outside, inside to outside
Answer is hidden
Question 1754 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Structures should be designed such that ............
AMinor and frequent earthquakes can collapse the structure
BModerate earthquakes can cause damage to the structure
CMajor earthquakes should not cause any damage and the structure should be functional
DMinor earthquakes should not cause any damage and the structure should be functional
Answer is hidden
Question 1755 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following factors does not influence earthquake resistance design?
AGeographical location of structure
BWind of location
CSite soil condition
DStrength of structure
Answer is hidden
Question 1756 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following assumption is correct for earthquake-resistant structure design?
AEarthquake will not occur simultaneously with wind
BEarthquake will occur simultaneously with maximum flood
CEarthquake will occur simultaneously with maximum sea waves
DEarthquake will occur simultaneously with wind
Answer is hidden
Question 1757 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The return period of earthquake E1 is ............
A2475 years
B475 years
C1475 years
D485 years
Answer is hidden
Question 1758 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is permanent action according to classification of actions by IS code?
ADue to self-weight
BDue to construction and service stage loads
CDue to accidents
DDue to earthquake loads
Answer is hidden
Question 1759 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is variable action according to classification of actions by IS code?
ADue to self-weight
BDue to accidents
CDue to construction and service stage loads
DDue to earthquake loads
Answer is hidden
Question 1760 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is structural response factor?
AFactor denoting the acceleration response spectrum of the structure subjected to earthquake ground vibrations
BFactor by which the actual base shear force is reduced
CFactor to obtain the design spectrum
DFactor used to obtain the design seismic force
Answer is hidden
Question 1761 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is P-Delta effect?
AEarthquake load
BSecond-order moments arising from joint displaced
CSecond-order moments arising from member deflection
DLoad due to shrinkage effect
Answer is hidden
Question 1762 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Imposed load taken for balconies of building is ............
A3 kN/m²
B3 kN/m
C3 N/m²
D3 kNm²
Answer is hidden
Question 1763 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Importance factor for hospital is ............
A1.8
B1.7
C1.5
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 1764 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The criteria for earthquake-resistant design of structures is described in ............
AIS 1893 (Part 1)
BIS 1893 (Part 2)
CIS 1893
DIS 1893 (Part 9)
Answer is hidden
Question 1765 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which types of forces are generated during earthquake?
AVertical shear
BHorizontal shear
CBending moment
DCombination of horizontal and vertical shear
Answer is hidden
Question 1766 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The proportion of earthquake forces transferred in the vertical structure is ............
A1/2
B1/4
C1/3
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 1767 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For designing masonry components of a structure, seismic forces provision in the design calculation is not necessary for buildings constructed in ............
AZone I only
BZone I and III
CZone I, II and III
DZone I, II, III and IV
Answer is hidden
Question 1768 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What percent of factored load is notional horizontal force?
A0.5%
B5%
C1.5%
D2.5%
Answer is hidden
Question 1769 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In an earthquake, which plane of the wall can resist shear forces most effectively?
AOut-of-plane
BBoth parallel and perpendicular to the plane of the wall
CPerpendicular to the plane of the wall
DParallel to the plane of the wall
Answer is hidden
Question 1770 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For buildings having a low permeability, the internal wind pressure acting normal to the wall and roof surfaces is taken as, where p is basic wind pressure:
A±0.2p
B±0.1
C±0.3p
D0
Answer is hidden
Question 1771 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Wind pressure at any height of structure does not depend on ............
Avelocity and density of air
Bangle of wind attack
Ctopography of ground surface
Dmaterial of structure
Answer is hidden
Question 1772 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following relation is correct for design wind speed (Vz) and basic wind speed (Vb)?
AVz ∝ Vb²
BVz ∝ 1/Vb
CVz ∝ Vb
DVz ∝ 1/Vb²
Answer is hidden
Question 1773 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which relation between design pressure (pz) and design wind speed (Vz) is correct?
Apz ∝ Vz²
Bpz ∝ 1/Vz²
Cpz ∝ Vz
Dpz ∝1/Vz
Answer is hidden
Question 1774 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The wind load is placed under which Nepal Standard code?
ANBC 102
BNBC 104
CNBC 103
DNBC 108
Answer is hidden
Question 1775 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The wind load is placed under which IS code?
AIS 875 Part 1
BIS 875 Part 2
CIS 875 Part 3
DIS 875 Part 4
Answer is hidden
Question 1776 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Wind pressure acting normal to individual element or cladding unit is ............
AF = (Ce - Ci)A/Pd
BF = (Ce + Ci)A/Pd
CF = (Ce - Ci)A Pd
DF = (Ce - Ci)/(A Pd)
Answer is hidden
Question 1777 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Calculate design wind speed for a site in a city with basic wind speed of 50 m/s, risk coefficient = 1, topography factor = 1, terrain height and structure size factor = 0.97.
A48.5 m/s
B48.5 m
C485 m/s
D8.5 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 1778 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Calculate design wind speed for a site in a city with basic wind speed of 50 m/s, risk coefficient = 1, topography factor = 1, height and structure size factor = 1.
A50 m/s
B50 m
C90 m/s
D70 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 1779 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The force experienced by a wall of area 100 m², if design wind speed is 50 m/s and coefficient of external and internal pressure are 0.6 and 0.2 respectively.
A60 kN
B6kN
C90 kN
D40 kN
Answer is hidden
Question 1780 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Calculate the design wind pressure if basic wind speed is 44 m/s, risk coefficient is 1, topography factor is 1, terrain factor is 1.
A116N/m²
B1161 N/m
C1161 N/m²
D111 N/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 1781 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
IS Code gives basic wind speed averaged over a short interval of ............
A10 seconds
B20 seconds
C5 seconds
D3 seconds
Answer is hidden
Question 1782 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The wind pressure on structure to be considered if design wind speed is 50 m/s.
A1.5 kPa
B1.5 kP
C1.5 Pa
D2.5 kPa
Answer is hidden
Question 1783 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Positive sign of pressure coefficient indicates ............
Apressure acting towards the surface
Bpressure acting away the surface
Cpressure acting above the surface
Dpressure acting below the surface
Answer is hidden
Question 1784 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Basic wind speed = 55 m/s and k1, k2, k3 are all 1. Then wind pressure is ............
A1815 N/m²
B1815 N/m
C2815 N/m²
D115 N/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 1785 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
How many wind zones are there in Nepal?
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1786 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The speed of wind in hilly area of Nepal above 3000 m is taken as ............
A55 m/s
B5 m/s
C95 m/s
D25 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 1787 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the minimum imposed load on roof trusses as per IS code?
A0.4 kN/m²
B0.5 kN/m²
C0.4 kN/m
D0.14 kN/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 1788 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For roof of slope 14°, the imposed load to be considered for non-accessible roof is ............
A0.67 kN/m²
B0.7 kN/m²
C0.97 kN/m²
D0.67 kN/m
Answer is hidden
Question 1789 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For roofs of slope greater than 10°, the imposed load is reduced by ............ for every degree rise in slope.
A0.02
B0.09
C0.05
D0.07
Answer is hidden
Question 1790 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The slope of roof for snow load not to be considered should be more than ............
A160°
B20°
C60°
D70°
Answer is hidden
Question 1791 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The load due to snow to be considered for roof of shape coefficient 0.75 is 1.5 kN/m². What load should be considered for roof of shape factor 0.6 in same locality?
A1.2 kN/m²
B12 kN/m²
C3.2 kN/m²
D5.2 kN/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 1792 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For access provided flat, sloping or curved roof with slope up to 10°, the design imposed load (UDL) as per IS 875 is ............
A15 kN/m²
B1.5 kN/m²
C1.5 kN/m
D1.7 kN/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 1793 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The live load for sloping roof with slope 15° where access is not provided to roof is taken as ............
A0.65 kN/m²
B0.65 kN/m
C0.65 kN
D0.95 kN/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 1794 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In roof truss, the value of snow load is taken as ............
A2.5 N/m²
B1.5 N/m²
C8.5 N/m²
D5.5 N/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 1795 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The snow load is calculated as ............
AS = μS0
BS = μS
CS = S0
DS = μ/S0
Answer is hidden
Question 1796 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following load combination is not possible for roof truss?
ADL + LL + WL
BDead load + Earthquake load
CDead load + Snow load
DDead load + Wind load
Answer is hidden
Question 1797 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the partial safety factor for live load in combination of DL + LL for limit state of strength, where DL = Dead load, LL = Imposed load?
A1.5
B1
C10
D2.5
Answer is hidden
Question 1798 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the partial safety factor for combination of DL + LL for limit state of strength, where DL = Dead load, LL = Imposed load?
A1.5
B1.9
C2.5
D15
Answer is hidden
Question 1799 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the partial safety factor for dead load in combination of DL + LL + WL/EL for limit state of serviceability?
A0.8
B1
C2
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 1800 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the partial safety factor for dead load in combination of DL + WL/EL for limit state of serviceability?
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1801 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the partial safety factor for imposed load in combination of DL + LL + AL, where DL = Dead load, WL = Wind load, AL = Accidental load?
A0.35
B0.3
C0.5
D1.35
Answer is hidden
Question 1802 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the partial safety factor for imposed load in combination of DL + LL + WL/EL for limit state of serviceability?
A0.8
B1
C8
D2
Answer is hidden
Question 1803 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following load combination is not possible?
ADead load + Imposed load + Wind load
BDead load + Imposed load + Earthquake load
CDead load + Wind load + Earthquake load
DDead load + Imposed load
Answer is hidden
Question 1804 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is the correct load combination?
ADead load + Imposed load + Wind load
BDead load + 1.5 imposed load + Earthquake load
C1.2 DL + 1.5 LL
D1.5 Dead load + 1.5 imposed load
Answer is hidden
Question 1805 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Load combinations are the loadings formed by the ............ of the independent loading conditions.
Alinear combination
Bnon-linear combination
Cexponential functions
Dbinary functions
Answer is hidden
Question 1806 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Purpose of load factors is to account for ............
Alapse in designing
Blapse in construction
Clapse in funding
Dlapse in predicting magnitudes of dead or live load
Answer is hidden
Question 1807 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
According to NBC 105, how many types of soil are classified in Nepal?
A5
B4
C3
D2
Answer is hidden
Question 1808 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is concrete?
AA mixture of homogeneous materials
BA mixture of material and hydrogen
CA mixture of cement and hydrogen sulphide
DA mixture of cement, water, and aggregates
Answer is hidden
Question 1809 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is concrete technology?
AConcrete Technology deals with the study of bricks
BConcrete Technology is the study of building materials
CConcrete Technology deals with the study of properties of concrete
DNone of the mentioned
Answer is hidden
Question 1810 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Concrete finds its application in ............
Ashotcreting
Bguniting
Cgrouting
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1811 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Reinforced cement concrete is equally strong in taking .........
Atensile and compressive stresses
Bcompressive and shear stresses
Ctensile, compressive and shear stresses
Dtensile and shear stresses
Answer is hidden
Question 1812 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
High strength concrete is defined purely on the basis of ............
Atensile strength
Bcompressive strength
Cgood aggregates
Dpoor aggregates
Answer is hidden
Question 1813 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which type of concrete is classified based on the design of concrete?
APlain
BReinforced
CPrestressed
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1814 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following stress can plain concrete endure?
AShear stress
BTensile stress
CCompressive stress
DTensile, compressive and shear stresses
Answer is hidden
Question 1815 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Unit weight of RCC is ............
A25 kN/m³
B5 kN/m³
C25 kN/m
D15 kN/m³
Answer is hidden
Question 1816 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The self-weight of plain cement concrete is ............
A24 kN/m³
B24 kN/m
C2kN/m³
D12 kN/m³
Answer is hidden
Question 1817 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The continuous strain which the concrete undergoes due to application of external loads is called ............
Aworkability
Bbleeding
Csegregation
Dcreep
Answer is hidden
Question 1818 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The cement concrete in which high compressive stresses are artificially induced before its actual use is called ............
Aplain cement concrete
Breinforced cement concrete
Cprestressed cement concrete
Dlime concrete
Answer is hidden
Question 1819 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The breaking up of cohesion in a mass of concrete is called ............
Aworkability
Bbleeding
Csegregation
Dcreep
Answer is hidden
Question 1820 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The ability of the material to resist stress without failure is called ..........
Astrength
Bhardness
Cstiffness
Dtoughness
Answer is hidden
Question 1821 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Permanent dimension changes due to loading of concrete is termed as ............
Astrain
Bextent
Ccreep
Dambit
Answer is hidden
Question 1822 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Creep increases when ............
Aw/c increases
Bcement content is high
Cloading occurs at early stage
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1823 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
As per IS 10262:2009, the standard deviation for M25 concrete is ............
A4 N/mm²
B1N/mm²
C2N/mm²
D5N/mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 1824 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
After curing of 3 days, the concrete gains strength up to ............
A10%
B20%
C40%
D50%
Answer is hidden
Question 1825 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
After curing of 28 days, the concrete gains strength up to .........
A10%
B20%
C100%
D50%
Answer is hidden
Question 1826 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Compaction of concrete helps in ............
Asegregation of aggregates
Bremoval of excess water
Cincrease of density
Daddition of required air voids
Answer is hidden
Question 1827 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
1% of voids in a concrete mix would reduce its strength by about ...........
A5%
B1%
C2%
D3%
Answer is hidden
Question 1828 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The removal of excess air after placing concrete helps in increasing the strength of concrete by ............
A15 to 20%
B20 to 30%
C20 to 40%
D10 to 30%
Answer is hidden
Question 1829 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In case of hand mixing of concrete, the extra cement to be added is ............
A20%
B30%
C10%
D60%
Answer is hidden
Question 1830 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following ratio is also known as water-cement ratio?
AWeight of water to the weight of aggregates
BDensity of cement to the density of cement
CWeight of water to the weight of cement
DVolume of cement to the volume of cement
Answer is hidden
Question 1831 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which property of a substance resists abrasion or scratching that causes penetration or indentation?
AHardness
BStiffness
CToughness
DStrength
Answer is hidden
Question 1832 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following increases the workability of concrete?
ADecreasing size of aggregates
BIncreasing flaky aggregates
CIncreasing size of aggregates
DIncreasing fine aggregates
Answer is hidden
Question 1833 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The lower water-cement ratio in concrete causes ............
Asmaller creep and shrinkage
Bimproved frost resistance
Cgreater density and permeability
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1834 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In order to obtain best workability of concrete the perfect shape of aggregate is ............
Arounded
Belongated
Cangular
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1835 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The workability of concrete used in tremie pipe concreting will be ............
Alow
Bmedium
Chigh
Dvery high
Answer is hidden
Question 1836 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is standard grade concrete?
AM10 - M20
BM25 - M60
CM60+
DALL
Answer is hidden
Question 1837 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) was evolved because plain concrete has ............
Ahigh tensile strength
Blow tensile strength
Ctensile strength
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1838 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What should be mean target strength to get M20 concrete?
A20 N/mm²
B21.65 N/mm²
C1.65 N/mm²
D26.60 N/mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 1839 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the total percentage of aggregates in concrete in terms of volume?
A65-80%
B60-75%
C60-65%
D30-75%
Answer is hidden
Question 1840 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The strength of cube after 28 days can be taken as ............
Afck
B1fck
C2fck
D3fck
Answer is hidden
Question 1841 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The nominal mix for M20 concrete is ............
A1:1.5:4
B1:1.8:3
C1:1.5:3
D2:1.5:3
Answer is hidden
Question 1842 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The concrete above which grade is considered to be high-grade concrete?
A10
B30
C50
D60
Answer is hidden
Question 1843 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Minimum grade of concrete to be used in reinforced concrete as per IS 456:2000 is ............
AM15
BM20
CM2
DM70
Answer is hidden
Question 1844 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Construction of RCC slabs, columns, beams, etc. the minimum recommended grade of concrete mix is ............
AM20
BM27
CM24
DM26
Answer is hidden
Question 1845 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Maximum water quantity per bag of cement for M20 grade concrete is ............
A34 L
B28 L
C18 L
D29 L
Answer is hidden
Question 1846 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
If the strength of concrete is 25 N/mm², then it will be classified as ............
Alow strength concrete
Bmedium strength concrete
Chigh strength concrete
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1847 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Harshness in concrete is due to the excess of ............
Awater
Bfiner particles
Cmiddle sized particles
Dcoarser particles
Answer is hidden
Question 1848 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For very stiff mixes, which method is suitable?
AHand rodding
BNeedle vibrator
CSurface vibrator
DVibrating table
Answer is hidden
Question 1849 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Flexural strength of M25 concrete is ............
A3.5 MPa
B4.5 MPa
C2.5 MPa
D1.5 MPa
Answer is hidden
Question 1850 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What happens if mineral oil is present in mixing for concrete?
AGives more slump
BImproves strength
CGives a smooth surface
DReduces strength
Answer is hidden
Question 1851 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The optimum number of revolutions over which concrete is required to be mixed in a mixer is ............
A10
B20
C30
D40
Answer is hidden
Question 1852 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Segregation in concrete results in ............
Ahoneycombing
Bporous layers
Csurface scaling
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1853 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Poisson's ratio for concrete ............
Aremains constant
Bincreases with richer mixes
Cdecreases with richer mixes
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1854 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The degree of plasticity of fresh concrete mortar is called ............
Aconsistency
Bworkability
Csegregation
Dgrouting
Answer is hidden
Question 1855 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Schmidt's Rebound Hammer technique is used to measure ............
Atensile strength
Bshrinkage limit
Cthickness of member
Dsurface hardness
Answer is hidden
Question 1856 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is used to test the standard consistency of cement?
ADuff Abrams apparatus
BSoundness meter
CVicat apparatus
DLe Chatelier apparatus
Answer is hidden
Question 1857 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is not a type of non-destructive testing?
AUltrasonic test
BEddy current testing
CCompression testing
DVisual testing
Answer is hidden
Question 1858 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
To determine the modulus of rupture, the size of test specimen used is ............
A150 x 150 x 150 mm
B150 x 10 x 700 mm
C150 x 150 x 700 mm
D10 x 150 x 700 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1859 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The size of cube to determine characteristic compressive strength of concrete is ............
A150 x 150 x 150 mm
B150 x 150 x 150 m
C15 x 150 x 150 mm
D150 x 10 x 150 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1860 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The tensile strength of concrete is approximately ............ of compressive strength.
A10-20%
B10-30%
C17-20%
D10-30%
Answer is hidden
Question 1861 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The ratio of direct tensile strength to that of modulus of rupture is ............
A0.5
B1
C2
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 1862 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The elastic modulus of elasticity of M25 concrete is ............
A25 MPa
B2500 MPa
C25 GPa
D2500 GPa
Answer is hidden
Question 1863 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The approximate ratio of strength of 15 x 30 cm concrete cylinder to that of 15 x 15 cm cube of same concrete is ............
A0.8
B0.2
C0.9
D0.6
Answer is hidden
Question 1864 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The approximate ratio between the strength of cement concrete at 7 days and 28 days is ............
A0.7
B0.8
C0.5
D0.9
Answer is hidden
Question 1865 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The approximate ratio of strength of 15 x 30 cm concrete cylinder to that of 15 x 15 cm cube of same concrete is ...........
A0.8
B0.2
C0.9
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 1866 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Tensile test can be performed on ............
Aimpact testing machine
Buniversal testing machine
CRockwell tester
DBrinell tester
Answer is hidden
Question 1867 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Size of test specimen for splitting tensile test is ............
Acube of side 15 cm
Bcylinder of diameter 15 cm and height 30 cm
Ccuboid of 15 cm x 15 cm x 50 cm
Dcuboid of 15 cm x 15 cm x 70 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 1868 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Cube is tested on which side?
ATop surface during casting
BThe face in touch of mould
CAny side of the cube
DBottom side
Answer is hidden
Question 1869 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
............ is measured by applying load along diameter of cylinder
AFlexural tensile strength
BCompressive strength
CSplit tensile strength
DDirect tensile strength
Answer is hidden
Question 1870 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
One sample consists of ............ number of specimens.
A2
B3
C4
D5
Answer is hidden
Question 1871 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Individual variation of test results should not be more than ............ % of the average of the specimens, otherwise test results of the sample are invalid.
A10
B12
C15
D25
Answer is hidden
Question 1872 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
How is creep related to the strength of concrete?
ADirectly proportional
BInversely proportional
CEqual
DSimilar
Answer is hidden
Question 1873 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The approximate value of shrinkage strain in concrete, is ..........
A0.0003
B0.003
C0.03
D0.3
Answer is hidden
Question 1874 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Half of the total shrinkage is assumed to occur in ............
A1 week
B1 month
C6 months
D1 year
Answer is hidden
Question 1875 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Shrinkage in concrete increases with ............
Aincrease in water ratio
Bincrease in cement content
Cdecrease in humidity
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1876 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum curing period as per IS 456 is ..........
A3 days
B6days
C7days
D8days
Answer is hidden
Question 1877 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The concrete should be cured at ............
A2°C
B7°C
C10°C
D27°C
Answer is hidden
Question 1878 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The process of hardening the concrete mixes by keeping its surface moist for a certain period is called ............
Acuring
Bfloating
Ctroweling
Dcompacting
Answer is hidden
Question 1879 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The levelling operation that removes humps and hollows and gives a true, uniform concrete surface is called ............
Ascreeding
Bfloating
Ctroweling
Dcompacting
Answer is hidden
Question 1880 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The form work is usually removed after ............ for walls, columns, and the vertical faces of all structural components.
A24 to 48 hours
B48 hours
C4 hours
D8 hours
Answer is hidden
Question 1881 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The final operation of finishing the concrete surface is called ............
Ascreeding
Bfloating
Ctroweling
Dcompacting
Answer is hidden
Question 1882 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum stripping time of soffit formwork to beams (props to be refixed immediately after removal of formwork) is ............
A1days
B2days
C3days
D4days
Answer is hidden
Question 1883 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
On increasing the grade of concrete, crushing strain ............
Aincreases
Bdecreases
Cremains same
Dany of the above is possible
Answer is hidden
Question 1884 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Characteristic strength of concrete is measured at ............
A28 days
B2days
C4days
D42days
Answer is hidden
Question 1885 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Compressive strength of concrete is ............ tensile strength.
Amore than
Bless than
Cequal
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1886 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Characteristic compressive strength of M20 concrete is ............
A20 N/mm2
B30 N/mm2
C10 N/mm2
D50 N/mm2
Answer is hidden
Question 1887 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The characteristic strength of concrete in the actual structure is taken as ............
A1.67 fck
B2.67 fck
C3.67 fck
D0.67 fck
Answer is hidden
Question 1888 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The design strength of a concrete member in a structure can be taken as ...........
Afck
B1fck
C0.446 fck
D0.45 fck
Answer is hidden
Question 1889 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The compressive strength of a beam in a structure can be taken as ............
A0.446 fck
B1.446 fck
C2.446 fck
D3.446 fck
Answer is hidden
Question 1890 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The tensile strength of concrete to be used in the design of reinforced concrete members is ............
Azero
B0.2 sqrt(fck)
C0.1sqrt(fck)
D0.3 sqrt(fck)
Answer is hidden
Question 1891 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum tensile stress for limit state design of R.C. beam is ............
A0.8fy
B0.87 fy
C0.7 fy
D0.27 fy
Answer is hidden
Question 1892 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The characteristic strength of concrete is defined as that strength below which not more than ............ of the test results are expected to fall.
A2percent
B3percent
C4percent
D5percent
Answer is hidden
Question 1893 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The shape of idealized stress-strain curve as prescribed by IS 456-2000 is ............
Arectangular
Bparabolic
Crectangular-parabolic
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1894 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The ratio of compressive strength of concrete in structure to the characteristic strength of concrete in cube is equal to ............
A1.67
B0.67
C0.2
D0.1
Answer is hidden
Question 1895 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The permissible bending compressive stress for M25 grade of concrete is 8.5 N/mm2. Its short-term and long-term modular ratios are, nearly ............
A8 and 11
B8 and 13
C8 and 2
D8 and 5
Answer is hidden
Question 1896 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The permissible stress in compression due to bending (sigmabc) for M20 as per IS 456 is ............
A2N/mm2
B3N/mm2
C4N/mm2
D7 N/mm2
Answer is hidden
Question 1897 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following method takes into account the serviceability requirement?
AWorking stress method
BUltimate load method
CLimit state method
DLoad factor method
Answer is hidden
Question 1898 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which method assumes that the structural material behaves in a linearly elastic manner?
AUltimate load method
BLimit state method
CWorking stress method
DMoment distribution method
Answer is hidden
Question 1899 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which equation expresses the working stress method for reinforced concrete?
AmuR > L
BmuR > 4L
CmuR > 4
DmuR > 2L
Answer is hidden
Question 1900 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is not a disadvantage of Working Stress Method?
AThis method is uneconomical
BThis method assumes that stress-strain relationship is constant
CThis method considers the modes of failure
DIn this method concrete does not have a definite modulus of elasticity
Answer is hidden
Question 1901 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is not an assumption for working stress design method?
ATensile strength of concrete is considered
BBond between steel and concrete is perfect within the elastic limit of steel
CConcrete is elastic
DA section which is plane before bending remains plane after bending
Answer is hidden
Question 1902 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is not a limit state of collapse?
APremature cracking
BLimit state in shear
CLimit state in torsion
DLimit state in flexure
Answer is hidden
Question 1903 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is modular ratio in Working stress method?
ARatio of modulus of elasticity of concrete and modulus of elasticity of steel
BRatio of modulus of elasticity of steel and modulus of elasticity of concrete
CProduct of modulus of elasticity of steel and modulus of elasticity of concrete
DSum of modulus of elasticity of steel and modulus of elasticity of concrete
Answer is hidden
Question 1904 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The term 'modular ratio' is the ratio of ............
Astress and strain
Bstrain and stress
Celasticity of two materials
Dchange in length to original length
Answer is hidden
Question 1905 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following IS Code has described about working stress design method?
AIS 456
BIS 4560
CIS 45
DIS 457
Answer is hidden
Question 1906 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Long term modulus of elasticity is given by ............
AShort term modulus of elasticity/(1 + Creep coefficient)
BShort term modulus of elasticity x (1 + Creep coefficient)
CShort term modulus of elasticity/Creep coefficient
DShort term modulus of elasticity x Creep coefficient
Answer is hidden
Question 1907 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Short term modulus of elasticity of M25 concrete is ............
A25 GPa
B20 GPa
C23 GPa
D28 GPa
Answer is hidden
Question 1908 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For M20 Grade of concrete, modular ratio would be ............
A11.56
B21.56
C31.56
D51.56
Answer is hidden
Question 1909 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the factor of safety?
AThe ratio of stress to strain
BThe ratio of permissible stress to ultimate stress
CThe ratio of ultimate stress to permissible stress
DThe ratio of longitudinal strain to stress
Answer is hidden
Question 1910 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In limit state method, factor of safety for load is ............
A1
B1.5
C2
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 1911 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is factor of safety for concrete in working stress method?
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1912 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is factor of safety for steel in working stress method?
A1.33
B2.33
C3.33
D4.33
Answer is hidden
Question 1913 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In limit state method, factor of safety for steel and concrete material is ............
A1.0 and 1.0
B2.0 and 1.0
C1.15 and 1.5
D1.5 and 1.6
Answer is hidden
Question 1914 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following equation expresses the modular ratio (m) for working stress method?
A290/(4 sigmabc)
B290/(3 sigmabc)
C290/(2 sigmabc)
D20/(4 sigmabc)
Answer is hidden
Question 1915 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
With a percentage increase of carbon in steel, decreases its ............
Astrength
Bhardness
Cbrittleness
Dductility
Answer is hidden
Question 1916 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In a doubly reinforced rectangular concrete beam, the distance between the centroids of compression and tension reinforcements is generally known as ............
Alever arm
Bneutral axis/depth
Cneutral arm
Dcritical axis depth
Answer is hidden
Question 1917 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Over reinforced section fails on ............
Atension part
Bcompression part
Cboth at same time
Dany part
Answer is hidden
Question 1918 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The main reinforcement on RCC continuous member is placed at ............
Atop fibre
Btop and bottom fibre
Cbottom fibre
Dside fibre
Answer is hidden
Question 1919 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
An additional longitudinal reinforcement in webs of beams should be placed if the depth of the web is more than 750 mm at ............
Atop fibre
Bbottom fibre
Ctop and bottom fibre
Dside fibre
Answer is hidden
Question 1920 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In the design of a cantilever beam, main steel reinforcement is provided along ............ face of the beam.
Atension
Bcompression
Ccentral
Dside
Answer is hidden
Question 1921 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
As per IS 456:2000, for the design of doubly reinforced beam, the area of compression reinforcement Asc is given by ............
AAsc = (Mu - Mu,lim)/(fsc(d - d'))
BAsc = (Mu,lim - Mu)/(fsc(d - d'))
CAsc = (Mu,lim - Mu)/(fsc(d + d'))
DAsc = (Mu,lim - Mu)/(fsc(d + d'))
Answer is hidden
Question 1922 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Side reinforcement should be provided for beam of depth more than ............
A150 mm
B250 mm
C750 mm
D50 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1923 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For simply supported beam of span 15 m, the minimum effective depth to satisfy the vertical deflection limits should be ............
Amore than 1 m
Bmore than 2m
Cmore than 3 m
Dless than 1 m
Answer is hidden
Question 1924 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum depth of neutral axis for beam of effective depth 500 mm is ............
A60 mm
B160 mm
C260 mm
D360 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1925 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Minimum cover in a beam should neither be less than the diameter of bar nor less than ............
A25 mm
B15 mm
C35 mm
D45 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1926 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The depth of neutral axis for use of singly reinforced section with 500 grade reinforcement should be less than ............
A0.53d
B1.53d
C2.53d
D3.53d
Answer is hidden
Question 1927 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum ratio of depth of neutral axis of balanced section to effective depth of beam is ............
A0.46
B0.48
C0.49
D0.44
Answer is hidden
Question 1928 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum tension reinforcement in beam should not be less than ............
A0.004%
B0.04%
C0.4%
D0.34%
Answer is hidden
Question 1929 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The limiting value for effective depth ratio for continuous two-way slab is ............
A35
B23
C34
D32
Answer is hidden
Question 1930 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The cracking of cement concrete occurs first in ............
Aover reinforced
Bunder reinforced
Cbalanced
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1931 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For two-way slab ............
Al/b >= 2
Bl/b < 2
Cl/b >2
Dnone
Answer is hidden
Question 1932 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Minimum spacing of main bars for 5-inch-thick RCC slab is ............
A10 mm
B25 mm
C50mm
D100 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1933 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Maximum spacing of distribution bars for 5-inch-thick RCC slab is ............
A100 mm
B2200 mm
C300 mm
D400 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1934 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Maximum diameter of bars used in 5-inch-thick slab is ............
A16 mm
B26 mm
C36 mm
D46 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1935 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Minimum cover in a slab should neither be less than the diameter of bar nor less than ............
A40 mm
B30 mm
C20 mm
D10 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1936 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The value of average bond stress taubd depends on ..........
Asteel strength and area of bar
Bconcrete strength and type of bar
Cconcrete strength and area of bar
Dconcrete strength and steel strength
Answer is hidden
Question 1937 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The distribution of shear intensity over a rectangular section of beam follows ............
Aa circular curve
Ba parabolic curve
Ca straight curve
Dan elliptical curve
Answer is hidden
Question 1938 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Shear reinforcement is provided in RC section to ............
Acounteract maximum BM
Bcounteract negative moment at support
Ccounteract crack and shear failure
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1939 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The shear reinforcement in RCC is mainly provided to resist ............
Adiagonal tension
Bdiagonal compression
Chorizontal shear
Dvertical shear
Answer is hidden
Question 1940 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Shear reinforcement in beam is provided in the form of ............
Avertical bars
Binclined bars
Cbent-up bars
Dany one of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1941 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When shear stress exceeds the permissible limit in a slab, then it is reduced by ............
Aincreasing the depth
Bincreasing shear strength steel
Cusing high strength steel
Dusing thinner bars but more in number
Answer is hidden
Question 1942 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The shear load resisted by vertical shear reinforcement is ............
A0.87fy(Asd/Sv)
B0.87fy(Asd/Sv)(sin alpha + cos alpha)
C0.87fy(Asv/Sv)
D0.87(Asd/Sv)(sin alpha + cos alpha)
Answer is hidden
Question 1943 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum shear reinforcement in beam should not be less than ............
A0.4b/(0.87fy)
B0.4/(0.87fy bSv)
C0.85/(0.87fy)
D0.85/(0.87fy bSv)
Answer is hidden
Question 1944 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Shear strength of concrete depends on ............
Alongitudinal reinforcement
Bgrade of concrete
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1945 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum spacing between vertical stirrups of effective depth 360 mm is ............
A170 mm
B370 mm
C270 mm
D470 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1946 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum spacing between inclined stirrups of effective depth 360 mm is ............
A150 mm
B250 mm
C350 mm
D450 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1947 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Deflection can be controlled by using the appropriate ............
Aaspect ratio
Bmodular ratio
Cspan/depth ratio
Dwater/cement ratio
Answer is hidden
Question 1948 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum permissible deflection in slab is ..........
AL/200
BL/20
CL/2
DL/100
Answer is hidden
Question 1949 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
If a beam fails in bond, then its bond strength can be increased most economically by ............
Aincreasing the depth of beam
Busing thinner bars but more in number
Cusing thicker bars but less in number
Dproviding vertical stirrups
Answer is hidden
Question 1950 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The average permissible stress in bond for plain bars in tension is ............
Aincreased by 25% for bars in compression
Bincreased by 20% for bars in compression
Cdecreased by 10% for bars in compression
Ddecreased by 20 % for bars in compression
Answer is hidden
Question 1951 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
According to IS 456, the anchorage value of a standard U-type hook shall be equal to X times the diameter of the bar, where X is ............
A12
B34
C13
D14
Answer is hidden
Question 1952 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
According to IS 456, the anchorage value of a standard 90-degree bend shall be equal to X times the diameter of the bar, where X is ............
A5
B6
C7
D8
Answer is hidden
Question 1953 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The development length for tension bars ............
A0.87fy(phi)/(4taubd)
B0.4fy(phi)/(4taubd)
C0.87fy(phi)/(4 x 1.25taubd)
D0.87fy(phi)/(4 x 1.6taubd)
Answer is hidden
Question 1954 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The development length for deformed bars in tension is ..........
A0.87fy(phi)/(4taubd)
B0.4fy(phi)/(4taubd)
C0.87fy(phi)/(4 x 1.25taubd)
D0.87fy(phi)/(4 x 1.6taubd)
Answer is hidden
Question 1955 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The lap length of reinforcement in compression shall not be less than where phi = diameter of bar.
A24phi
B14phi
C34phi
D44phi
Answer is hidden
Question 1956 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
As per IS 456:2000, the lap length of reinforcement in compression shall not be less than;
A30 x diameter of bar
B24 x diameter of bar
C20 x diameter of bar
D26 x diameter of bar
Answer is hidden
Question 1957 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum value of anchorage provided at the end of the RCC section is ............
A12phi
B22phi
C32phi
D42phi
Answer is hidden
Question 1958 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
As per IS 456, the maximum value of anchorage in a 135-degree bend is ............
A12phi
B22phi
C32phi
D42phi
Answer is hidden
Question 1959 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is not a compression member?
ATie
BStrut
CRafter
DBoom
Answer is hidden
Question 1960 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When a vertical member is carrying mainly axial loads, it is termed as a ______.
AStrut
BColumn
CTie
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1961 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When an inclined or horizontal member is carrying mainly axial loads, it is termed as a ______.
AStrut
BColumn
CTie
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1962 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
All R.C. columns must be designed for a minimum eccentricity of ______.
A50 l + 3 D
B30l + 500D
Cl/500 + D/30
D30l + 50D
Answer is hidden
Question 1963 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When a column is subjected to eccentric load ______.
AOnly direct stress is produced
BOnly bending stress is produced
CBoth direct stress and bending stress are produced
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1964 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum eccentricity to be considered for axially loaded RCC column of size 400 mm × 400 mm with unsupported length of 5 m is ______.
A23.3 mm
B23mm
C24mm
D56mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1965 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A column is regarded as a long column if the ratio of its effective length and lateral dimension exceeds ______.
A10
B12
C23
D24
Answer is hidden
Question 1966 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A compression member is termed as column or strut if the ratio of its effective length to the least lateral dimension is more than ______.
A1
B2
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 1967 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When the ratio of effective length of the column to its least lateral dimension does not exceed 12, it is termed as a ______.
ALong column
BShort column
CPlain column
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1968 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The 400 mm × 500 mm square column having both ends fixed has unsupported length 5 m. The column falls under ______ type.
AShort column
BIntermediate column
CLong column
DCannot say
Answer is hidden
Question 1969 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The design ultimate load on the short axially loaded column is computed by which equation?
A0.4 fck Ac + 0.67 fy Asc
B0.4 fck Ac + 0.6fy Asc
C0.47 fck Ac + 0.67 fy Asc
D0.2 fck Ac + 0.67 fy Asc
Answer is hidden
Question 1970 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Why circular column is generally not used?
AIt is uneconomical
BDifficult to connect to beam
CLow load carrying capacity
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1971 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement in an RCC column 400 mm × 400 mm shall not be less than ______.
A1280 mm
B1280 mm²
C180 mm²
D128 mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 1972 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum area of longitudinal reinforcement in an RCC column 400 mm × 400 mm shall not be less than ______.
A9600 mm
B960 mm²
C9600 mm²
D600 mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 1973 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
According to IS 456–2000, the maximum reinforcement in a column is ______.
A6%
B4%
C2%
D1%
Answer is hidden
Question 1974 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum number of longitudinal bars in rectangular column is ______
A2
B4
C6
D8
Answer is hidden
Question 1975 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum number of longitudinal bars in circular column in residential buildings is ______.
A6
B5
C4
D7
Answer is hidden
Question 1976 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The diameter of longitudinal bars in a column should not be less than _____
A22 mm
B12 mm
C32 mm
D42 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1977 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Spacing between two longitudinal bars should not be more than ______.
A100 mm
B200 mm
C300 mm
D400 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1978 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Maximum spacing of longitudinal bars measured along the periphery of the RC column shall not exceed ______.
A300 mm
B10 mm
C100 mm
D20 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1979 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A reinforced concrete column of size 400 mm × 400 mm is having the diameter of longitudinal bar as 20 mm. The pitch of lateral ties in such a case should be ______.
A320 mm
B320 m
C30 mm
D20 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1980 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A reinforced concrete column of size 400 mm × 400 mm is having the diameter of longitudinal bar as 12 mm. The pitch of lateral ties in such a case should be ______.
A192 mm
B12 mm
C22 mm
D42 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1981 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In an RCC column, the longitudinal reinforcement is provided to resist ______.
ATorsion
BShear
CCompression
DBending
Answer is hidden
Question 1982 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The clear cover for column having size greater than (200 × 200) mm shall be ______.
AMaximum of (maximum diameter or 40 mm whichever is greater)
BMinimum of (maximum diameter or 40 mm whichever is greater)
CMaximum of (minimum diameter or 40 mm whichever is greater)
D25 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1983 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The purpose of lateral ties in short reinforced concrete columns is to ______.
AFacilitate construction
BFacilitate compaction of concrete
CAvoid buckling of longitudinal bar
DIncrease the load carrying capacity of the column
Answer is hidden
Question 1984 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The spacing of transverse reinforcement of column is decided by the following consideration:
AThe least lateral dimension of the column
BSixteen times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal reinforcing rods in the column
CForty-eight times the diameter of transverse reinforcement
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1985 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
If the size of panel is 6 m × 6 m, then as per Indian Standards, width of column strips and middle strip ______.
A3.0 m and 3.0 m
B3.0 m and 7.0 m
C3.0 m and 8.0 m
D3.0 m and 9.0 m
Answer is hidden
Question 1986 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The permissible load in circular column shouldn't exceed the permitted load in ______ if equivalent cross-sectional area.
ASquare column
BRectangle column
CTrapezoidal column
DPrismoidal column
Answer is hidden
Question 1987 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The reinforced cement concrete column having helical reinforcement, should have bars of longitudinal reinforcement within its helical reinforcement .....
Atwo
Bfour
Csix
Deight
Answer is hidden
Question 1988 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The strength of the column with helical reinforcement shall be ..... times the strength of a similar column with lateral ties.
A2
B1.05
C3
D1.5
Answer is hidden
Question 1989 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following statement is correct?
AThe strap beam does not transfer any pressure to the soil
BA raft footing is a combined footing that covers the entire area beneath a structure.
CA pile foundation is used where the top soil is relatively weak.
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1990 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The self-weight of the footing, is .....
Anot considered for calculating the upward pressure on footing
Balso considered for calculating the upward pressure on footing
Cnot considered for calculating the area of the footing
Dboth (b) and (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 1991 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Depth of footing for isolated column is governed by .....
Amaximum bending moment
Bshear force
Cpunching shear
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1992 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum thickness of edge of footing is .....
A150 mm
B200 mm
C250 mm
D300 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1993 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
As per IS:456-2000 recommendations the thickness of footing edge on soils should not be less than .....
A100 mm
B150 mm
C200 mm
D300 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 1994 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The weight of footings is assumed as ..... of the weight transferred to the column.
A0.05
B0.1
C0.15
D0.2
Answer is hidden
Question 1995 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Reinforcement on combined footing is placed at .....
Abottom only
Btop only
Ctop and bottom
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 1996 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In designing rectangular combined footing ..... should be adopted as the design value.
Astress distribution
Bcompression index
Cmaximum bending moment
Dsafe bearing pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 1997 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The design of rigid rectangular combined footing consist in determining the .....
Apressure distribution
Blocation of center of gravity of column
Cshear force
Dsafe bearing pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 1998 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In a footing, it is used to assume that the maximum value of transverse bending will occur at a distance, equal to (measured from the face of the column) .....
Ahalf of effective depth
Beffective depth
Ctwice the effective depth
Dbreadth of column on each side
Answer is hidden
Question 1999 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The critical section for two-way shear of footing is at the .....
Aface of the column
Bdistance d from the column face
Cdistance d/2 from the column face
Ddistance 2d from the column face
Answer is hidden
Question 2000 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A pre-stressed concrete induces artificially ..... stresses in a structure before it is loaded.
Atensile
Bcompressive
Cshear
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2001 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The resultant stresses in prestress concrete at any section are obtained by the effect of .....
Aprestress and torsion stresses
Bprestress and shear stresses
Cprestress and flexural stresses
Dprestress and bending stresses
Answer is hidden
Question 2002 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The necessity of high strength concrete in prestressed concrete is due to .....
Aloading and unloading
Bcracking
Cbending
Dshear and bonding
Answer is hidden
Question 2003 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For the purposes of the design of reinforced concrete footings, pressure distribution is assumed to be .....
Alinear
Bparabolic
Chyperbolic
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2004 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In a pre-stressed concrete member .....
Ahigh strength concrete should be used
Blow strength concrete should be used
Chigh strength concrete and low tensile steel should be used
Dhigh strength concrete and high tensile steel should be used
Answer is hidden
Question 2005 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Cube strength of concrete to be used for pre-tensioned and post- tensioned work should not be less than .....
A30 MPa and 40 MPa
B40 MPa and 30 MPa
C40 MPa and 60 MPa
D60 MPa and 40 MPa
Answer is hidden
Question 2006 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The ultimate strength of the steel used for prestressing is nearly .....
A250 N/mm²
B415 N/mm²
C500 N/mm²
D1500 N/mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 2007 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The ultimate moment resisting capacity of a simple supported pre-stressed concreted beam is obtained by using .....
Aforce and moment equilibrium equations
Bstress-strain relationship of concrete and steel
Cmoment equilibrium and compatibility condition
Dforce equilibrium equation alone
Answer is hidden
Question 2008 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In a pre-stressed concrete structure .....
Adead load of structure is reduced
Bcracking of concrete is avoided
Cthe cost of supporting structure and foundation is reduced
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2009 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The soffit of the beam after the transfer of prestress to concrete will be under .....
Abondage
Bbreakage
Ccompression
Dtension
Answer is hidden
Question 2010 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following influence the deflections of prestressed concrete members?
AWall profile
BType of aggregates
CType of cement
DCable profile
Answer is hidden
Question 2011 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The cable for a prestressed concrete simply supported beam subjected to uniformly distributed load over the entire span should ideally be .....
Aplaced at the centre of cross section over the entire span
Bplaced at some eccentricity over the entire span
Cvarying linearly from the centre of cross section at the ends to maximum eccentricity at the middle section
Dparabolic with zero eccentricity at the ends and maximum eccentricity at the center of the span
Answer is hidden
Question 2012 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The approximate loss of pre stress due to creep in concrete in pre-stressed concrete is about .....
A1%
B3%
C6%
D10%
Answer is hidden
Question 2013 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Prestress loss results in .....
Adecrease in compressive strength
Bdecrease in tensile strength
Cdecrease in shear strength
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2014 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is an advantage of HSFG bolts over bearing type bolts?
AHigh strength fatigue
BJoints are not rigid
CLow static strength
DBolts are subjected to shearing and bearing stresses
Answer is hidden
Question 2015 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When the bolts are subjected to reversal of stresses, the most suitable type of bolt is .....
Ablack bolt
Bordinary unfinished bolt
Cturned and fitted bolt
Dhigh strength bolt
Answer is hidden
Question 2016 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the yield strength of bolt of class 8.8?
A800 N/mm²
B240 N/mm²
C650 N/mm²
D500 N/mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 2017 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Calculate strength in shear of 16mm diameter of bolt of grade 4.6 for lap joint .....
A50 kN
B40 kN
C29 kN
D59 kN
Answer is hidden
Question 2018 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The diameter of a bolt hole is taken as the nominal diameter of the bolt plus .....
A1.0 mm
B1.2 mm
C1.4 mm
D1.6 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2019 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Tensile strength of bolt is given by .....
A0.9 fub Aₙ / 1.1
B0.9 Aₙ / 1.1
C0.9 fub Aₙ / 1.25
D0.9 fu Aₙ / 1.25
Answer is hidden
Question 2020 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Proof stress for the minimum bolt tension is .....
A0.7 fub
B0.5 fub
C0.7 fy
D0.5 fy
Answer is hidden
Question 2021 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
M16 bolt of property class 8.8 will have an ultimate tensile strength of ..... MPa.
A640
B800
C160
D128
Answer is hidden
Question 2022 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum pitch for M16 bolt of grade 4.6 is .....
A18
B27
C40
D50
Answer is hidden
Question 2023 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum number of bolts of diameter 25 mm that can be accommodated in one row in a 200 mm wide flat are .....
A2
B3
C4
D5
Answer is hidden
Question 2024 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the efficiency of joint when the strength of the bolt per pitch length is 60kN and the strength of the plate per pitch length is 150 kN?
A0.25
B0.3
C0.35
D0.4
Answer is hidden
Question 2025 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
High strength bolt is used for .....
Ashear connection
Bslip-resistant connection only
Cbearing type connection only
Dboth slip-resistant and bearing type connection
Answer is hidden
Question 2026 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In a tension member if one or more than one rivet holes are off the line, the failure of the member depends upon .....
Apitch
Bgauge
Cdiameter of the rivet holes
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2027 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following relation is correct?
ANet area = Gross area / Deductions
BNet area = Gross area - Deductions
CNet area = Gross area × Deductions
DNet area = Gross area + Deductions
Answer is hidden
Question 2028 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the yield strength of a bolt of class 4.6?
A400 N/mm²
B240 N/mm²
C250 N/mm²
D500 N/mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 2029 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
As compared to field rivets, the shop rivets are .....
Astronger
Bweaker
Cequally strong
Dany of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2030 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Cold-driven rivets range from .....
A6 to 10 mm in diameter
B10 to 16 mm in diameter
C12 to 22 mm in diameter
D22 to 32 mm in diameter
Answer is hidden
Question 2031 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
If the thickness of the plate to be connected by a rivet is 16 mm, then the suitable size of rivet as per Unwin's formula will be .....
A16 mm
B20 mm
C24 mm
D27 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2032 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In case of staggered pitch, pitch may be increased by .....
A0.5
B0.2
C1
D0.3
Answer is hidden
Question 2033 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Maximum thickness of fillet weld at rounded edge of thickness t mm of a section is .....
At - 1.5
Bt
Ct / 4
D(3 * t) / 4
Answer is hidden
Question 2034 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The length of overlap of plates to be fillet welded in lap joint .....
Ashould not be less than 4 times the thickness of thinner part
Bshould be less than 4 times the thickness of thinner part
Cshould be less than 2 times the thickness of thinner part
Dshould not be less than 2 times the thickness of thinner part
Answer is hidden
Question 2035 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The effective length of fillet weld should not be less than .....
AS
B2S
C3S
D4S
Answer is hidden
Question 2036 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum size of fillet weld should .....
Anot be less than 3 mm
Bbe less than 3 mm
Cbe less than 2 mm
Dgreater than thickness of thinner part joined
Answer is hidden
Question 2037 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum size of fillet weld is obtained by .....
Aadding 1.5 mm to thickness of thinner member to be jointed
Badding 3 mm to thickness of thinner member to be jointed
Csubtracting 3 mm from thickness of thinner member to be jointed
Dsubtracting 1.5 mm from thickness of thinner member to be jointed
Answer is hidden
Question 2038 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A fillet weld whose axis is parallel to the direction of the applied load, is known as .....
Adiagonal filler weld
Bend fillet weld
Cside fillet weld
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2039 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The production of sound welds is not governed by .....
Atype of joint
Bchoice of electrode
Ctype of metal plate
Darc length
Answer is hidden
Question 2040 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The main type of butt joints is a double cover .....
Ashear riveted joint
Bchain riveted joint
Czig-zag riveted joint
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2041 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A butt weld is specified by .....
Aeffective throat thickness
Bplate thickness
Csize of weld
Dpenetration thickness
Answer is hidden
Question 2042 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The size of a butt weld is specified by the effective throat thickness which in the case of incomplete penetration, is taken as .....
A1/2 of the thickness of the thicker part
B5/8 of the thickness of the thinner part
Answer is hidden
Question 2043 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The purpose of reinforcement in pre-stressed concrete is .....
Ato provide adequate bond stress
Bto resist tensile stresses
Cto impart initial compressive stress in concrete
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2044 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In pre-tensioning pre-stressed member, tendons are tensioned .....
Abefore the concrete is placed
Bafter the concrete is placed
Csimultaneously while concreting
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2045 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What does pre-stress loss represent?
ALoss in compressive strength in concrete
BLoss in tensile strength of rebar or cable
CLoss in effective stress to induced stress
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2046 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following method is best for the design of steel structure?
AWorking stress method
BEarthquake load method
CLimit state method
DUltimate load method
Answer is hidden
Question 2047 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is a disadvantage of steel?
AHigh durability
BReusable
CHigh strength per unit mass
DFire and corrosion resistance
Answer is hidden
Question 2048 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is added to steel to increase resistance to corrosion?
ACopper
BCarbon
CManganese
DSulphur
Answer is hidden
Question 2049 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A structural member subjected to tensile force in a direction parallel to its longitudinal axis, is generally known as .....
Aa tie
Ba tie member
Ca tension member
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2050 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the minimum percentage of chromium and nickel added to stainless steel?
A10.5%, 0.5%
B0.5%, 10.5%
C30%, 50%
D2%, 20%
Answer is hidden
Question 2051 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A tension member, if subjected to possible reversal of stress due to wind load, the slenderness ratio of the member should not exceed .....
A180
B200
C300
D350
Answer is hidden
Question 2052 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The ratio of Young's modulus of structural mild steel to that of high tensile structural steel is about .....
A1
B1.5
C2
D0.5
Answer is hidden
Question 2053 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The thermal expansion coefficient α of steel is .....
A13 × 10⁻⁶/°C and closely resembles to α of concrete
B11 × 10⁻⁶/°C and differs widely from α of concrete
C12 × 10⁻⁶/°C and closely to α of concrete
D14 × 10⁻⁶/°C but nearly equal to α of concrete
Answer is hidden
Question 2054 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Steel tanks are mainly designed for .....
Aweight of tank
Bwind pressure
Cwater pressure
Dearthquake forces
Answer is hidden
Question 2055 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In rolled steel beams, shear force is mostly resisted by .....
Aweb only
Bflanges only
Cweb and flanges together
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2056 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A channel section consists of .....
Atwo webs
Btwo flanges
Ctwo web and two flanges
Done web and two flange
Answer is hidden
Question 2057 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Types of rolled steel section mainly used as structural members is .....
Arolled steel i-section
Brolled steel channel section
Crolled steel t-section
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2058 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The Indian standard code which deals with steel structures, is .....
AIS: 875
BIS: 800
CIS: 456
DIS: 1893
Answer is hidden
Question 2059 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Rolled steel angle sections are classified as .....
Aequal angles
Bunequal angles
Cbulb angles
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2060 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Lug angles .....
Aare used to reduce the length of connection
Bare unequal angles
Cincreases shear lag
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2061 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Rolled steel flats designated by 50 ISF 8 means that the flat is of .....
A50 mm length and 8 mm thick
B50 mm width and 8 mm thick
C50 mm thick and 8 mm length
D50 mm thick and 8 mm wide
Answer is hidden
Question 2062 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Rolled steel Channel ISMC300 means .....
A300 mm width
B300 mm depth
C15 mm thickness
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2063 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Elastic modulus of steel is .....
A1.5 × 10⁵ N/mm²
B2.0 × 10⁵ N/mm²
C2.0 × 10⁵ N/m²
D1.5 × 10⁵ N/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 2064 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is the property of high carbon steel?
AReduced strength
BHigh toughness
CReduced ductility and strength increases
DHigh strength
Answer is hidden
Question 2065 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In bolted moment end plate connection, bending moment, axial force, and shear force are transferred by .....
Atension only
Bcompression only
Ctension and compression
Dfriction
Answer is hidden
Question 2066 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Bolts are most suitable to carry .....
Ashear
Bbending
Caxial tension
Dshear and bending
Answer is hidden
Question 2067 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Strength of bolt is .....
Aminimum of shear strength and bearing capacity of bolt
Bmaximum of shear strength and bearing capacity of bolt
Cshear strength of bolt
Dbearing capacity of bolt
Answer is hidden
Question 2068 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When fillet welds are subjected to a combination of normal and shear stress, the equivalent stress is given by .....
A√(fₐ² + q²)
B√(fₐ² + 2q²)
C√(3fₐ² + q²)
D√(fₐ² + 3q²)
Answer is hidden
Question 2069 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the value of partial safety factor for shop fabricated welds?
A1.1
B1.2
C1.25
D1.5
Answer is hidden
Question 2070 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The effective throat thickness is K times the size of weld. What is the value of K when angle between fusion faces is 80°?
A0.5
B0.65
C0.7
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 2071 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When the thickness of the thicker plate is 20 mm, the minimum size of the weld is .....
A3 mm
B5 mm
C6 mm
D10 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2072 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Two structural steel plates of thicknesses 12 mm and 14 mm are to be welded together. What will be the maximum size of the fillet weld?
A6
B10.5
C13
D12.5
Answer is hidden
Question 2073 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following types of weld is most suitable for lap and T-joints?
AFillet weld
BGroove weld
CSlot weld
DPlug weld
Answer is hidden
Question 2074 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
What is the minimum pitch distance?
A2.0 × nominal diameter of the fastener
B3.0 × nominal diameter of the fastener
C1.5 × nominal diameter of the fastener
D2.5 × nominal diameter of the fastener
Answer is hidden
Question 2075 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Maximum pitch distance = .....
A16 × thickness of the thinner plate
B32 × thickness of the thinner plate
C40 × thickness of the thinner plate
D20 × thickness of the thinner plate
Answer is hidden
Question 2076 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Minimum edge distance and end distance for rolled, machine flame cut is .....
A1.7 × hole diameter
B1.2 × hole diameter
C1.5 × hole diameter
D2.0 × hole diameter
Answer is hidden
Question 2077 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Minimum edge distance and end distance for handmade flume is .....
A1.7 × hole diameter
B1.2 × hole diameter
C1.5 × hole diameter
D2.0 × hole diameter
Answer is hidden
Question 2078 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum edge and end distance from the centre of any hole to the nearest edge of a plate shall not be less than ..... times the hole diameter in case of sheared or hand-flame cut edges.
A1.7
B1.6
C1.5
D1.4
Answer is hidden
Question 2079 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Effective slenderness ratio of Batten plate column shall be .....
Aequal to the maximum slenderness ratio of column
B1.1 times the maximum slenderness ratio of column
C0.5 times the maximum slenderness ratio of column
D2 times the maximum slenderness ratio of column
Answer is hidden
Question 2080 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The overlap of batten plates with the main members in welded connections should be more than .....
A3t
B4t
C6t
D8t
Answer is hidden
Question 2081 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Thickness of double lacing member should be .....
Aless than (1/40) of the effective length for single lacing
Bnot less than (1/60) of the effective length for double lacing
Cless than (1/60) of the effective length for double lacing
Dless than (1/60) of the effective length for single lacing
Answer is hidden
Question 2082 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Position of splices should be ..... in normal practice.
Aat mid-height of columns
Bat three fourth height of column from the bottom of column
Cat three fourth height of column from the top of column
Djust above the floor level
Answer is hidden
Question 2083 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The thickness of the gusset plate for column base should not be less than .....
A6 mm
B8 mm
C12 mm
D40 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2084 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Intermediate vertical stiffeners in a plate girder need to be provided if the depth of web exceeds .....
A50t
B85t
C200t
D250t
Answer is hidden
Question 2085 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The most economical section for a column, is .....
Arectangular
Bsolid round
Cflat strip
Dtubular section
Answer is hidden
Question 2086 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A base plate in steel construction is used to .....
Aprovide a decorative finish at the base
Bconnect the steel column to the foundation
Csupport the floor slab
Ddistribute the load over a wider area
Answer is hidden
Question 2087 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The permissible bearing stress for column base in limit state method is .....
A0.25 fck
B0.25 √fck
C0.45 fck
D0.45 √fck
Answer is hidden
Question 2088 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Gantry girders are designed to resist .....
Alateral loads
Blongitudinal loads and vertical loads
Clateral, longitudinal and vertical loads
Dlateral and longitudinal loads
Answer is hidden
Question 2089 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
According to the IS code, the strength of the spliced portion ..... of the effective strength of the material spliced.
Ashould not be less than 50%
Bshould be less than 50%
Cshould not be less than 80%
Dshould be less than 80%
Answer is hidden
Question 2090 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Cold cracks can be prevented by .....
Auniform heating
Bby the use of low hydrogen electrode
Cfaster cooling
Dslower cooling
Answer is hidden
Question 2091 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Hot cracks can be prevented by .....
Afaster cooling
Bnon-uniform heating
Cpre-heating
Dslower cooling
Answer is hidden
Question 2092 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Generally purlins are placed at the panel points so as to avoid .....
Aaxial force in rafter
Bshear force in rafter
Cdeflection of rafter
Dbending moment in rafter
Answer is hidden
Question 2093 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum bending moment for design of purlins can be taken as .....
AWL / 6
BWL / 8
CWL / 10
DWL / 12
Answer is hidden
Question 2094 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Half lap joint is used on timber wood on .....
Aframe construction
Bfurniture construction
Ctable - chair construction
Droof rectifier
Answer is hidden
Question 2095 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The minimum spacing between two opening is .....
A0.6 m
B0.8 m
C0.5 m
D1.2 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2096 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The mode of failure of a very short masonry member having h/t ratio of less than 4 is by .....
Ashear
Bvertical tensile splitting
Cbuckling
Dany of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2097 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The setting speed of mortar can be increased using .....
Alime
Bsulphur
Cpozzolana
Dgypsum
Answer is hidden
Question 2098 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Rich cement mortars are more liable to cracking as compared to lean mortars because rich mortars have .....
Ahigh shrinkage
Bless strength
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2099 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The process of adding cement in order to increase the strength of lime mortar is called .....
Agauging
Bpiling
Cslaking
Dreinforcing
Answer is hidden
Question 2100 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The allowable length of masonry building of width 3 m is .....
A6 m
B8 m
C9 m
D12 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2101 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum distance between cross wall in masonry structure is .....
A3.0 m
B3.2 m
C4.0 m
D4.5 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2102 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The maximum possible floor area in a room of masonry structure .....
A10.0 m²
B12.5 m²
C13.5 m²
D15.0 m²
Answer is hidden
Question 2103 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The ratio of effective height to thickness of masonry walls should not be more than .....
A20
B30
C40
D50
Answer is hidden
Question 2104 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Minimum compressive strength in N/mm² for H₁ type mortar used for masonry is .....
A0.7
B3
C6
D10
Answer is hidden
Question 2105 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
How can you strengthen a wall of 50 m length and 5 m height built with brick masonry?
ABy constructing buttress
BBy using stronger brick
CBy using stronger grade of mortar
DIt can't be strengthened
Answer is hidden
Question 2106 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For masonry built in 1 : 1 : 6 cement-lime-sand mix mortar or equivalent, the horizontal shear stress permissible on the area of a mortar bed joint is .....
A0.075 MPa
B0.125 MPa
C0.100 MPa
D0.15 MPa
Answer is hidden
Question 2107 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the below joints is used for stone masonry in arches?
AButt
BTable
CRebated
DDowel
Answer is hidden
Question 2108 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The specification of Timber is described in .....
ANBC 109
BNBC 110
CNBC 111
DNBC 112
Answer is hidden
Question 2109 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The strength of timber .....
Ais maximum in a direction parallel to grain
Bis maximum in direction perpendicular to grain
Cis maximum in direction 45 degree to the grain
Dis same in all direction
Answer is hidden
Question 2110 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Tensile strength along grain of timber is ..... times the compressive strength in same direction.
A1
B2 to 4
C4 to 8
D8 to 10
Answer is hidden
Question 2111 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The Nepal standard code used for design of timber structures is .....
ANBC 110
BNBC 111
CNBC 112
DNBC 113
Answer is hidden
Question 2112 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The Indian standard code used for design of timber structures is .....
AIS 883
BIS 1905
CIS 800
DIS 456
Answer is hidden
Question 2113 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Minimum width of timber beam of span 4 m is .....
A50 mm
B80 mm
C100 mm
D230 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2114 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Minimum Width of beam should not be less than .....
A30 mm
B40 mm
C20 mm
D50 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2115 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Maximum depth of timber beam of width 7 cm without lateral stiffness is .....
A170 mm
B200 mm
C210 mm
D250 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2116 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following statement is true?
ATimber is anisotropic material
BCompression parallel to grain is for timber column design
CCompression perpendicular to grain is for timber beam design
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2117 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of following are classification of structural timber .....
Aselect grade
Bgrade I
Cgrade II
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2118 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For solid circular section which form factor is used?
AK₁
BK₂
CK₄
DK₅
Answer is hidden
Question 2119 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When does form factor K₁ is used in rectangular beam?
A< 30 cm
B> 30 cm
CNone of the above
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2120 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
There are ..... group of timber.
A1
B2
C3
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2121 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
There are ..... grades of timber.
A1
B2
C3
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2122 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Timber beam having depth of 250 mm then form factor is .....
A1
B0.98
C1.16
D2
Answer is hidden
Question 2123 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For Grade-II, permissible stress is ..... times of Grade I.
A0.95
B0.84
C0.5
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 2124 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The value of form factor for solid circular beam is .....
A0.81
B1
C1.18
D1.41
Answer is hidden
Question 2125 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The value of form factor for solid square beam when load is acting in direction of diagonal is .....
A0.81
B1
C1.18
D1.41
Answer is hidden
Question 2126 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Which of the following is true?
AForm factor for rectangular beam is K₁
BForm factor for solid circular section is K₅
CForm factor for box and I section is K₄
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2127 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Value of form factor for square section is .....
A1.2
B1.414
C1.5
D1.69
Answer is hidden
Question 2128 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Modulus of elasticity for Group A species of timber should be .....
Aabove 12.6 × 10³ N/mm²
Babove 9.8 × 10³ upto 12.6 × 10³ N/mm²
Cabove 5.6 × 10³ upto 9.8 × 10³ N/mm²
Dless than 5.6 × 10³ N/mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 2129 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Group A has modulus of elasticity as .....
A> 9.8 × 1000
B> 12.6 × 1000
C< 5.6 × 1000
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2130 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Permissible deflection for brittle material as per code is .....
A1/300
B1/240
C1/350
D1/360
Answer is hidden
Question 2131 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Permissible deflection for flexural members as per code is .....
A1/300
B1/240
C1/350
D1/360
Answer is hidden
Question 2132 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Permissible deflection for cantilever as per code is .....
A1/300
B1/240
C1/150
D1/360
Answer is hidden
Question 2133 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Maximum permissible stress on extrema fiber for group C species of timber should be .....
Aabove 18.0 N/mm²
Babove 12.0 upto 18.0 N/mm²
Cabove 8.5 upto 12.0 N/mm²
Dless than 8.5 N/mm²
Answer is hidden
Question 2134 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The permissible deflection for 2 m timber cantilever beam is .....
A5.55 mm
B8.33 mm
C11.11 mm
D22.22 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2135 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
The permissible deflection for 4 m timber beam is .....
A11.11 mm
B16.67 mm
C22.22 mm
D9.99 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2136 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
For u.d.l. deflection coefficient used in timber beam is .....
A1/48
B384/5
C5/384
Dnone of above
Answer is hidden
Question 2137 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
In case of timber structures, the simple bending formula M = f·z may be applied for .....
Arectangular beams up to 300 mm depth
Ball rectangular beams
Csolid circular beams only
Dall square cross-section beams
Answer is hidden
Question 2138 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
Value of fcp for timber solid column is 7 MPa, then for short column it is taken as .....
A7 MPa
B6 MPa
C5 MPa
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2139 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
If fcp value for solid sal wood is 7.6 and sal is of select grade timber then fcp taken is .....
A8.81
B9
C9.6
D10.7
Answer is hidden
Question 2140 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
A timber solid column has a length of 3 m and size of column as (450 × 400) mm, it is classified as .....
Ashort column
Bintermediate column
Clong column
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2141 of 4146Ch 5 · Design of Structures
When purlins are placed between panel points the principal rafter is to be designed for .....
Aaxial compression and tension
Baxial compression
Caxial compression and bending moment
Daxial tension and bending moment
Answer is hidden
Question 2142 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Sources, Water Quality and Water Demand
Compared to surface water sources, groundwater sources generally offer:
ALower quality due to lack of natural filtration
BBetter initial quality due to natural filtration through soil/rock, though often with higher mineral content
CNo risk of contamination ever
DIdentical treatment requirements to surface water
Answer is hidden
Question 2143 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Sources, Water Quality and Water Demand
Colloidal impurities in water are best described as:
ALarge visible particles that settle readily by gravity
BVery fine particles that do not settle by gravity alone, requiring coagulation for removal
CFully dissolved minerals and gases
DOnly bacteria and other living organisms
Answer is hidden
Question 2144 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Sources, Water Quality and Water Demand
Temporary (carbonate) hardness in water can be removed by:
ASimple filtration only
BBoiling, since it is caused by bicarbonates that decompose on heating
CIt cannot be removed by any method
DAdding more organic matter
Answer is hidden
Question 2145 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Sources, Water Quality and Water Demand
A disease such as malaria, transmitted by insects that breed in or near water, is classified as a:
AWaterborne disease
BWater-washed disease
CWater-based disease
DWater-vector disease
Answer is hidden
Question 2146 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Sources, Water Quality and Water Demand
Water-washed diseases are primarily linked to:
ADirect ingestion of pathogens in drinking water
BInadequate water quantity available for personal hygiene
CAn aquatic host stage of the pathogen's life cycle
DInsect vectors breeding in water
Answer is hidden
Question 2147 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Sources, Water Quality and Water Demand
Drinking water quality standards specify bacteriological parameters primarily by testing for:
ApH and hardness only
BColiform/E. coli count, as indicators of faecal contamination
COnly the water's colour
DOnly the water's taste
Answer is hidden
Question 2148 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Sources, Water Quality and Water Demand
Peak factors used in water demand estimation account for: adequately
AThe average daily demand only, with no variation
BVariation in demand (hourly and daily peaks relative to average demand), used to size supply components
COnly fire demand, ignoring all other uses
DA fixed value irrespective of population or usage pattern
Answer is hidden
Question 2149 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Sources, Water Quality and Water Demand
Alkalinity in water is primarily attributed to the presence of:
ASuspended silt and clay only
BBicarbonates, carbonates, and hydroxides
CPathogenic bacteria only
DDissolved oxygen only
Answer is hidden
Question 2150 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Sources, Water Quality and Water Demand
BLand-use planning/zoning, early warning systems, public awareness, and building codes/enforcement
COnly earthquake-resistant construction techniques
DOnly slope stabilization works
Answer is hidden
Question 2199 of 4146Ch 6 · Concept of Environmental Assessment
Effective disaster risk reduction generally requires:
AStructural measures alone, with no non-structural component
BNon-structural measures alone, with no structural component
CA combination of both structural and non-structural mitigation measures
DNo mitigation measures, relying solely on post-disaster response
Answer is hidden
Question 2200 of 4146Ch 6 · Concept of Environmental Assessment
A Brief Environmental Study (BES) is typically applied to:
AThe largest, most environmentally significant national projects
BProjects with limited anticipated environmental impact, typically smaller-scale interventions
CProjects requiring the most detailed alternatives analysis available
DOnly projects located in protected areas
Answer is hidden
Question 2201 of 4146Ch 6 · Concept of Environmental Assessment
The environmental assessment approval process in Nepal, under the governing Rules/Regulations, generally requires: implementation
ANo public consultation at any stage
BStudy preparation, public consultation, review, and approval by the competent authority before project
CApproval only after the project has already been completed
DNo review by any competent authority
Answer is hidden
Question 2202 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is a surface source of water?
AWells
BInfiltration wells
CStreams
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2203 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Most common surface water source is .............
Awell
Briver
Ctube well
Dinfiltration well
Answer is hidden
Question 2204 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following source gives underground water?
Aspring
Briver
Cpond
Dlake
Answer is hidden
Question 2205 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is not a subsurface source of water?
AInfiltration galleries
BSprings
CStorage reservoirs
DTube wells
Answer is hidden
Question 2206 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Infiltration wells are .............
Asurface sources
Bground sources
Crain water sources
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2207 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Shallow horizontal tunnels constructed along the river on its bank to intercept groundwater are called .............
Ainfiltration well
Binfiltration gallery
Ctube well
Dartesian well
Answer is hidden
Question 2208 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which is the following factors considered for the selection of a particular source of water?
AQuantity of water available
BElevation of the source
CDistance of the source of supply
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2209 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which water has a less chance of contaminated by bacteria?
ARiver
BLake
CSea
DInfiltration wells
Answer is hidden
Question 2210 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Water may not contain much impurities if its source is .............
Areservoirs
Bstream flowing in plains
Clake in lower regions
Dspring along hill slopes
Answer is hidden
Question 2211 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Ground water is usually free from .............
Asuspended impurities
Bdissolved impurities
Cboth suspended and dissolved
Dneither suspended nor dissolved
Answer is hidden
Question 2212 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The water which is not chemically pure but does not contain anything harmful to human being health is known as .............
Apure
Bwholesome
Cpolluted
Dcontaminated
Answer is hidden
Question 2213 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The maximum permissible limit of turbidity in drinking water as per Nepal Standard is ............. NTU.
A5
B10
C15
D20
Answer is hidden
Question 2214 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Department of water supply and sewerage (DWSS) was formally established in ............. AD.
A1945
B1952
C1962
D1972
Answer is hidden
Question 2215 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The new National Drinking Water Quality Standard (NDWQS) came into effect in ............. AD.
A2003
B2015
C2005
D2022
Answer is hidden
Question 2216 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Example of aquaclude is .............
Aunconsolidated gravel and sand
Bmud
Cgranite
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2217 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which aquifer is called water table aquifer?
AUnconfined aquifer
BConfined aquifer
CGround aquifer
DConnate aquifer
Answer is hidden
Question 2218 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Unconfined aquifer is known as .............
Aphreatic line
Bskyline
Cdrainage basin
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2219 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is the upper surface of water in a confined aquifer called?
APrimary layer
BSecondary layer
CFirst layer
DPiezometric layer
Answer is hidden
Question 2220 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A geological formation, which not only stores water but yields it in sufficient quantity is known as .............
Aaquifer
Baquifuge
Caquiclude
Daquitard
Answer is hidden
Question 2221 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
An aquifer confined at the bottom, and not at top is called ............. aquifer.
Aleaky
Bconfined
Cunconfined
Dperched
Answer is hidden
Question 2222 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
An artesian well is also known as ............. well.
Agravity
Bpressure
Ctube
Dshallow
Answer is hidden
Question 2223 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The minimum quantity of water that can be supplied from spring during driest period is known as ............. yield.
Adesign
Bsecondary
Cspring
Dsafe
Answer is hidden
Question 2224 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Storage capacity of a reservoir depends on .............
Aporosity of rocks
Binter-connections
Cquality of solidity of rocks
Dporosity and inter-connections
Answer is hidden
Question 2225 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A city supply does not include .............
Alivestock demand
Bdomestic
Ccommercial
Dloss and damage
Answer is hidden
Question 2226 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following statement is correct?
ARich class consumes less water
BIntermittent water supplies lead to less water consumption
CLoss of water is more if the pressure in the distribution system is less
DWater consumption is less in flush system
Answer is hidden
Question 2227 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which is the correct statement regarding per capita demand?
ADaily water required by an individual
BWater required for various purposes by a person
CWater required by an individual in a year
DAnnual average amount of daily water required by one person
Answer is hidden
Question 2228 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following causes a decreases in per capita consumption?
ABetter standard of livings
BGood quality of water
CHotter climate
DMetering
Answer is hidden
Question 2229 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Water lost in theft and waste contributes to how much % of total consumption?
A5
B10
C15
D20
Answer is hidden
Question 2230 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The unit of per capita demand is .............
Aliters/head/day
Bhead/day
Cdays/head/liters
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2231 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The per capita day demand of water is taken as an average value of over a period of .............
A1 day
B1 year
C1 month
D> 1 year
Answer is hidden
Question 2232 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The domestic demand in rural areas of Nepal is ............. lpcd.
A10
B45
C65
D112
Answer is hidden
Question 2233 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The livestock demand should not be more than ............. of domestic demand.
A10%
B20%
C40%
D100%
Answer is hidden
Question 2234 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
As per DWSS, fire demand in Nepal should not more than ............. lpcd.
A1 lpcd
B2 lpcd
C3 lpcd
D1.5 lpcd
Answer is hidden
Question 2235 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
As per DWSS guidelines, the fire demand in Nepal should not be more than ............. lpcd.
A1
B2
C3
D5
Answer is hidden
Question 2236 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The reserve of water for breakdown period is generally not more than ............. of total storage.
A15%
B25%
C30%
D50%
Answer is hidden
Question 2237 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
According to Buston's formula, fire demand in liters per minute for a population of P thousands, is .............
A3182 √P
B11365 (P/10 + 10)
C4637 √P (1 - 0.01 √P)
D5663 √P
Answer is hidden
Question 2238 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In water supply, the industrial demand should be .............
A10%
B10 to 15%
C15 to 20%
D20 to 25%
Answer is hidden
Question 2239 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
............. Is the water that does not form lather directly with the soap.
AHard water
BSoft water
CPartially hard water
DVery hard water
Answer is hidden
Question 2240 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When total hardness is more than alkalinity .............
Acarbonate hardness = alkalinity
Bcarbonate hardness = 0
Ccarbonate hardness = non carbonate hardness
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2241 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Hardness of water is conventionally expressed in terms of equivalent amount of .............
AH₂CO₃
BMgCO₃
CCaCO₃
DNa₂CO₃
Answer is hidden
Question 2242 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Select the incorrect statement from the following option.
AWater which does not form lather with soap and forms white scum is called hard water
BHard water contains dissolved calcium and magnesium salts in it
CIn hard water, cleansing quality of soap is depressed
DDue to the presence of dissolved hardness-producing salts, the boiling point of water is depressed
Answer is hidden
Question 2243 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Select the incorrect statement from the following option.
AThe taste of hard water is better than soft water
BThe dissolved calcium in hard water can help to produce strong teeth
CHard water coats the lead piping with a layer of insoluble calcium carbonate which prevents poisonous lead dissolving in water
DBoiler feed water should also be hard in nature
Answer is hidden
Question 2244 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Select the incorrect statement from the following option.
APermanent hardness is due to dissolved chlorides and sulphates of calcium and magnesium
Btemporary hardness can be removed by boiling of water
Ccarbonate hardness is also known as alkaline hardness
DThe difference between the total hardness and the alkaline hardness gives the non-alkaline hardness
Answer is hidden
Question 2245 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is not a unit of hardness?
AParts per million
BDegree centigrade
CDegree clarke
DDegree french
Answer is hidden
Question 2246 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Temporary hardness in water is caused by ............. of Ca and Mg.
Abicarbonates
Bsulphates
Cchlorides
Dnitrates
Answer is hidden
Question 2247 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Alkalinity in water is expressed as milligrams per liter in terms of equivalent .............
Acalcium carbonate
Bmagnesium carbonate
Csodium carbonate
Dcalcium hydroxide
Answer is hidden
Question 2248 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
If total hardness of water is greater than total alkalinity, the carbonate hardness will be equal to .............
Atotal alkalinity
Btotal hardness
Ctotal hardness - total alkalinity
Dtotal non-carbonate hardness
Answer is hidden
Question 2249 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When temporary hard water is boiled, one of the substances formed is .............
Acalcium bicarbonate
Bcalcium sulfate
Chydrogen chloride
Dcarbon dioxide
Answer is hidden
Question 2250 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
If total alkalinity of water sample is 100 mg/l and its total hardness is 300 mg/l, then its carbonate and non-carbonate hardness are respectively .............
A100 mg/l and 200 mg/l
B200 mg/l and 100 mg/l
C300 mg/l and 0 mg/l
D100 mg/l and 0 mg/l
Answer is hidden
Question 2251 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The pH value of water indicates .............
Aacidity
Balkalinity
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2252 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Water borne disease are also known as .............
Awater quality disease
Bwater borne disease
Cwater based disease
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2253 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Malaria, yellow fever are example of .............
Awater vector disease
Bwater borne disease
Cwater based disease
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2254 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Worm and viruses are also known as ............. organism present water.
Awater quality
Bvector
Cliving
Dmustard peer organism
Answer is hidden
Question 2255 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is not a water borne disease?
ATyphoid
BMalaria
CCholera
DDysentery
Answer is hidden
Question 2256 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Ascariasis is a ............. infection.
Abacterial
Bviral
Cworm
Dprotozoal
Answer is hidden
Question 2257 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Psychrophilic bacteria survive in between the temperature of ............. degree Celsius.
A10-20
B20-30
C40-60
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2258 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
An organism that survives at a moderate temperature range between 20 to 45°C is .............
Amesophilic
Bthermophiles
Chyperthermophilic
Dpsychrophilic
Answer is hidden
Question 2259 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The bacteria that more at high temperature 40° to 70° is called .............
Amesophilic
Bthermophilic
Chyper thermophilic
Dpsychrophilic
Answer is hidden
Question 2260 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
E-coli and coliform are known as .............
Awater quality disease
Bvector
Cindicator organism
Dmustard peer organism
Answer is hidden
Question 2261 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Coliform bacteria present in the water is an indication of .............
Aradioactive wastes
Bchemical fertilizer
Cdecaying animals and plants
Dhuman feces
Answer is hidden
Question 2262 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following can be designated as an intake structure?
ACulvert
BRiver
CDam
DReservoir
Answer is hidden
Question 2263 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
From high level water resource, the water supply system used in termed as .............
Apumping and storage system
Bpumping system
Cgravity system
Ddual system
Answer is hidden
Question 2264 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following intake structure is widely used in small work?
ASluiceways
BSimple submerged intakes
CWet intake towers
DDry intake towers
Answer is hidden
Question 2265 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The placement of intake is not optimal when it is placed in?
ANatural channel
BNavigation channel
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2266 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Intake in water supply system should not be located .............
Anear treatment plant
Bu/s of sewage disposal point
Cnavigation channel
Dmandering river
Answer is hidden
Question 2267 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The type of water supply system generally used in hilly region is .............
Apressure flow system
Bgravity flow system
Cmixed flow system
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2268 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
As compared to HDPE pipes, GI pipes are .............
Alighter
Bcheaper
Cstronger
Dsmoother
Answer is hidden
Question 2269 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is a disadvantage of Asbestos cement pipe?
AThey are light weight
BThey have smooth internal surface
CThey are anti corrosive
DThey are soft and brittle
Answer is hidden
Question 2270 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The tensile strength of Asbestos cement pipes is .............
A200 kg/cm²
B300 kg/cm²
C400 kg/cm²
D600 kg/cm²
Answer is hidden
Question 2271 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is the advantage of cast iron pipes?
AThey are subjected to tuberculation in certain water
BThey are fragile
CThey are heavier
DThey are resistant to corrosion
Answer is hidden
Question 2272 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is incorrect regarding cast iron pipes?
AThey are non-corrosive
BThey are durable
CThey can be produced by centrifugal process
DTheir length varies from 80-100 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 2273 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is the quantity of lead required for a 15 cm diameter cast iron pipe?
A5 kg
B10 kg
C15 kg
D20 kg
Answer is hidden
Question 2274 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which grade of concrete is used in Reinforced concrete pipes?
AM10
BM15
CM20
DM25
Answer is hidden
Question 2275 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is correct regarding Cement concrete pipes?
AThey are corrosive
BThe maintenance cost is high
CUnreinforced pipes are liable to tensile crack
DIt is easy to repair them
Answer is hidden
Question 2276 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The gate valves are made of ............. with brass mountings.
Acement concrete
Breinforced concrete
Ccast iron
Dgalvanized iron
Answer is hidden
Question 2277 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which type of joint is commonly used in cement concrete pipes for water supply and drainage systems?
AExpansion joint
BCollar joint
CLap joint
DWelded joint
Answer is hidden
Question 2278 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
To connect two lengths of pipe previously set in place, you should use a pipe .............
Anipple
Bunion
Ccoupling
Dtee
Answer is hidden
Question 2279 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In which of the following joint, pipes do not have sockets or spigots?
ATyton joint
BCoupled joint
CSpigot and socket joint
DExpansion join
Answer is hidden
Question 2280 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
For cement concrete pipes with plain ends, the joint commonly used is .............
ACement collar joint
BScrewed socket joint
CSpigot socket joint
DExpansion joint
Answer is hidden
Question 2281 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following joint is called run lead joint?
ATyton joint
BCoupled joint
CSpigot and socket joint
DFlanged joint
Answer is hidden
Question 2282 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following joint is highly influenced by temperature?
ATyton joint
BCoupled joint
CSpigot and socket joint
DExpansion joint
Answer is hidden
Question 2283 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The type of joints used in concrete pipes is .............
Acollar joint
Bspigot and socket joint
Cbandage joint
Dflush joint
Answer is hidden
Question 2284 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is also known as a check valve?
AScour valve
BPressure relief valve
CAltitude valve
DReflux valve
Answer is hidden
Question 2285 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is known as washout valve?
AScour valve
BSluice valve
CReflux valve
DAltitude valve
Answer is hidden
Question 2286 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is known as Shut off valve?
AAir relief valve
BSluice valve
CPressure relief valve
DAltitude valve
Answer is hidden
Question 2287 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Air relief valves are provided in water supply mains at .............
Alow points
Bsummits
Cpipe junctions
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2288 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Float valve fitted in .............
Aoverhead tank
Bflushing cistern
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2289 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Foot valve is at bottom of .............
Adelivery pipe
Bsuction pipe
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2290 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
This cock fitted before nylon connection of wash basin and flushing cistern .............
Abib cock
Bangle cock
Cstop cock
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2291 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Cock used in wash basin is .............
Apillar cock
Bbib cock
Cstop cock
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2292 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The spacing between the Sluice valves is .............
A10 m
B30 m
C80 m
D180 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2293 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
This valve protect the pipe line from bursting due to excess pressure .............
Asafety valve
Bair relief valve
Ccheck valve
Ddrain valve
Answer is hidden
Question 2294 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Pressure relief valves may help in .............
Areleasing the hydrostatic pressure
Bholding the hydrostatic pressure
Cincreasing the hydrostatic pressure
Dmay increase or decrease the hydrostatic pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 2295 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Scour valves are provided .............
Aat street corners to control the flow of water
Bat every depression and dead ends to drain out the waste water that may collect there
Cat the foot of rising main along the slope to prevent back running of water
Dat every summit of rising mains
Answer is hidden
Question 2296 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A scour valve, in a water distribution system, is provided at .............
Alow points
Bhigh points
Cjunction points
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2297 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The types of valves used in distribution system when two or more pipes joins at each other is .............
Areflux value
Bpressure relief value
Csluice valve
Dair valve
Answer is hidden
Question 2298 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
............. valves are used to discharge air from the water pipelines.
AAir relief valve
BSluice valve
CPressure relief valve
DAltitude valve
Answer is hidden
Question 2299 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In distribution system, the drain valves is provided at .............
Alow point
Bat junction
Ccenter
Dhigh point
Answer is hidden
Question 2300 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What type of fitting is used to connect pipe of different diameter?
AReducer
BUnion
CNipple
DSpigot
Answer is hidden
Question 2301 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The purpose of providing a balancing reservoir in a water supply distribution system is .............
Aequalize pressure in the distribution system
Bstore adequate quantity of water to meet requirement in case of breakdown of inflow
Cstore adequate firefighting reserve
Dtake care of fluctuations in the rate of consumption
Answer is hidden
Question 2302 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The appropriate diameter of a water main for supplying 1800 cu.m/hour with velocity of 1 m/s is .............
A0.4 m
B0.8 m
C1.2 m
D1.6 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2303 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The four major water supply distribution systems are .............
Adead end, trees, grid iron and reticulation
Bdead end, trees, grid iron and circular
Ctrees, grid iron, ring and radial
Dtree, reticulation, circular and ring
Answer is hidden
Question 2304 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The layout of the distribution system in which the water flows towards the periphery is ............. system.
Adead end
Bgrid iron
Cradial
Dring
Answer is hidden
Question 2305 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The suitable layout for a water supply distribution system, for a city of roads of rectangular pattern is .............
Adead end system
Bgrid iron system
Cring system
Dradial system
Answer is hidden
Question 2306 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The suitable layout for a water supply distribution system for an irregularly grown town is .............
Agrid iron system
Bdead end system
Cring system
Dradial system
Answer is hidden
Question 2307 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When in the completely opened position, which of the listed types of valve will offer the least resistance to flow?
Agate valve
Bglobe valve
Cdouble-seat poppet valve
Dreed valve
Answer is hidden
Question 2308 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which method of population forecast combines both arithmetical increase and geometrical increase method?
AArithmetical increase method
BGeometrical increase method
CIncremental increase method
DDecreased rate of growth method
Answer is hidden
Question 2309 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The layout of water distribution system generally found in an old city is .............
Aring system
Bradial system
Cgrid iron system
Ddead end system
Answer is hidden
Question 2310 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The best system for distribution of water in a randomly planned city is .............
Adead end system
Bgrid iron system
Cring system
Dradial system
Answer is hidden
Question 2311 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which method is accurate for forecasting population for sound and rapidly increasing city?
AArithmetical increase method
BGeometrical increase method
CIncremental increase method
DGraphical method
Answer is hidden
Question 2312 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Sewerage system is designed for .............
Amaximum flow only
Bminimum flow only
Caverage flow only
Dmaximum and minimum flow
Answer is hidden
Question 2313 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Grit particle is .............
Ainert matter of specific gravity 2.65
Bcolloidal matter of heavy specific gravity
Corganic matter of specific gravity nearer to 1
Dorganic and inert matter combined
Answer is hidden
Question 2314 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The minimum size of grit particles that can be removed in grit chamber is .............
A0.05 mm
B0.50 mm
C0.20 mm
D0.10 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2315 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is not generated in waste treatment processes?
ASludge
BAsh
COrganic solvents
DNoise
Answer is hidden
Question 2316 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Usually while designing what is the range of length of the aerated grit chamber assumed?
A7.5-20
B4-6 m
C25 m
D2-5 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2317 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The process of passing the water through beds of granular material is known as .............
Ascreening
Bsedimentation
Cfiltration
Daeration
Answer is hidden
Question 2318 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following processes are necessary for removing suspended solids from water?
ACoagulation
BFlocculation
CSedimentation
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2319 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is the opening spacing of bars in case of coarse screen?
A30 mm
B50 mm
C70 mm
D90 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2320 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is the typical size and spacing of a coarse screen inclined at 45° to 60°, generally used for filtration?
ABars of size 10-25 mm, with spacing of 20-100 mm
BBars of size 5-15 mm, with spacing of 15-50 mm
CBars of size 20-30 mm, with spacing of 25-75 mm
DBars of size 30-50 mm, with spacing of 50-150 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2321 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When impurities are separated by the gravitation of settling particles, the operation is called .............
Asedimentation with coagulant
Bplain sedimentation
Csecondary sedimentation
Ddisinfection
Answer is hidden
Question 2322 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
For plain sedimentation tank, the detention period is usually ............. hours.
A2-4
B4-8
C8-12
D12-24
Answer is hidden
Question 2323 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A sedimentation tank of 20 m × 5 m × 3 m receives a flow of 1200 cu.m/day continuously, the detention time will be ............. hours.
A8
B6
C4
D2
Answer is hidden
Question 2324 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The time period for which the water is stored in a sedimentation tank is called .............
Atime of flow
Bfrequency of flow
Csettling time
Ddetention period
Answer is hidden
Question 2325 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The ratio of discharge to plan area in continuous flow sedimentation tank is known as .............
Aoverflow rate
Bsurface loading
Csurface overflow rate
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2326 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is the time period for which the water is stored in fill and draw type of sedimentation tank?
A48 hours
B24 hours
C52 hours
D76 hours
Answer is hidden
Question 2327 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is the maximum permissible velocity in horizontal flow type sedimentation tank?
A0.2 m/s
B0.3 m/s
C0.5 m/s
D1 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 2328 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The overflow rate of plain sedimentation tank is about ............. cu.m/day/ sq. m.
A15-20
B30-40
C40-50
D50-60
Answer is hidden
Question 2329 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The tanks built with mechanical means for continuous removal of solids being deposited by sedimentation are called .............
Aclarifiers
Bsettling basins
Csedimentation tanks
Deco-ponds
Answer is hidden
Question 2330 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In which type of settling, sedimentation of discrete particles takes place?
AZone settling
BCompression settling
CHindered settling
DDiscrete settling
Answer is hidden
Question 2331 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is formed when coagulant is added to water?
AScum
BSoap
CBubbles
DFloc
Answer is hidden
Question 2332 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The amount of coagulant needed for coagulation of water increases with .............
Aincrease in turbidity as well as increase in temperature of water
Bincrease in turbidity but decrease in temperature of water
Cdecrease in turbidity as well as decrease in temperature of water
Ddecrease in turbidity but increase in temperature of water
Answer is hidden
Question 2333 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The most commonly used coagulant is .............
Achlorine
Balum
Cferrous oxide
Dferric oxide
Answer is hidden
Question 2334 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Why alum is preferred over other coagulants?
AIt is easy to dewater the sludge formed
BIt imparts corrosiveness to water
CIt reduces taste and odor in addition to turbidity
DThe time required for floc formation is less
Answer is hidden
Question 2335 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Alum acts as .............
Acoagulant
Bflocculent
Ccatalyst
Ddisinfectant
Answer is hidden
Question 2336 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The chemical composition of Alum is .............
AAl₂(SO₄)₃ · 18H₂O
BAl₂(SO₄)₃ · 8H₂O
CAl₂(SO₄)₃ · 10H₂O
DAl₂(SO₄)₃ · 12H₂O
Answer is hidden
Question 2337 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The optimum dosage of alum is determined by .............
Ahardness test
BpH test
Cjar test
Dturbidity test
Answer is hidden
Question 2338 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In a water treatment, the optimum time of flocculation is usually given as 30 minutes. In case the time of flocculation is increased beyond this value, the flocs will .............
Abecome larger
Bsettle faster
Cbreak up
Dremain unchanged
Answer is hidden
Question 2339 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Particle of around 1 micron is removed by .............
Afiltration
Bplain sedimentation
Cdisinfection
Dchemical coagulation
Answer is hidden
Question 2340 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The effective size of the sand particles used in the top layer of slow sand filter is in the range of .............
A0.45 to 0.70 mm
B0.40 to 0.60 mm
C0.20 to 0.30 mm
D0.35 to 0.55 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2341 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
During treatment of water, sedimentation is done .............
Abefore filtration
Bafter filtration
Csimultaneously with filtration
Dalong with chlorination
Answer is hidden
Question 2342 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is not commonly used as a filter material in the treatment of water?
ASand
BAnthracite
CCrushed rock
DGarnet sand
Answer is hidden
Question 2343 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The uniformity characteristics of sand expressed in terms of .............
Aeffective size
Beffective size and uniformity coefficient
Cuniformity coefficient
Dmean velocity
Answer is hidden
Question 2344 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The slow sand filter can remove bacteria as much as ............. %
A70-80
B80-90
C90-98
D98-99
Answer is hidden
Question 2345 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Consider the following statements regarding sand as filter material. i. It should be free from clay or silt ii. Organic matter should be present in the sand iii. It should be uniform. Which of the above statement is/are correct?
Ai, ii
Bi only
Cii, iii
Di, iii
Answer is hidden
Question 2346 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The cleaning of slow sand filter is done by .............
Abackwashing
Bpassing air
Cpassing solution of alum and lime
Dscraping off the top layers of sand and admitting water
Answer is hidden
Question 2347 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The organic impurities are converted into simple and harmless compounds in filtration due to .............
Amechanical action
Bsedimentation
Cbiological action
Delectrolytic action
Answer is hidden
Question 2348 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In slow sand filters, the turbidity of raw water can be removed only up to .............
A60 mg/l
B75 mg/l
C100 mg/l
D150 mg/l
Answer is hidden
Question 2349 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The rate of filtration in slow sand filter is of the order of ............. liters per hour per m².
A40 to 80
B100 to 200
C400 to 200
D3000 to 6000
Answer is hidden
Question 2350 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In rapid sand filter, the rate of filtration ranges from .............
A100 to 200 liter/hr/m²
B3000 to 6000 liter/hr/m²
C8000 to 15000 liter/hr/m²
D180 to 360 liter/hr/m²
Answer is hidden
Question 2351 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The hydraulic loading for a high rate trickling filter varies between ............. per hectare per day.
A110 to 330 ML
B50 to 60 ML
C500 to 600 ML
D11 to 33 ML
Answer is hidden
Question 2352 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is not used as a media for trickling filters?
ASand
BGeotextiles
CGravel
DPaper
Answer is hidden
Question 2353 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The thickness of filter media of slow sand filter is .............
A90 to 110 cm
B80 to 90 cm
C70 to 80 cm
D60 to 80 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 2354 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Zeolites can be regenerated by passing a solution of .............
Asugar
Bsalt
Clime
Dsoda ash
Answer is hidden
Question 2355 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Zeolite softening process removes .............
Aonly temporary hardness of water
Bonly permanent hardness of water
Cboth temporary and permanent hardness of water
Dthe dissolved gases in permanent hard water
Answer is hidden
Question 2356 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The chemical formula for zeolite is .............
ASiO₂·Al₂O₃·Na₂O
BSi₂O₃·Al₂O₃·Na₂O
CSiO₂·Al₂O₃·3Na₂O
DSiO₂·Al₂O₃·N₂O
Answer is hidden
Question 2357 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The treatment of water with bleaching powder is known as .............
Apre-chlorination
Bde-chlorination
Chypo-chlorination
Dsuper-chlorination
Answer is hidden
Question 2358 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Sterilization of water helps in killing of .............
Aonly pathogenic bacteria
Bonly non-pathogenic bacteria
Conly certain kind of microorganisms
Dall kinds of bacteria and micro-organisms
Answer is hidden
Question 2359 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Disinfection of water helps in .............
Aremoving hardness
Bremoving turbidity
Ckilling pathogenic bacteria
Dcomplete sterilization
Answer is hidden
Question 2360 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Chlorination of water does not remove .............
Aammonia
Binorganic materials
Corganic matter
Ddissolved oxygen
Answer is hidden
Question 2361 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The common methods used for disinfection in waste water treatment plants are .............
Achlorination
BUV light
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dphenolic solvent
Answer is hidden
Question 2362 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Infiltration, the amount of dissolved solid passing through the filters is .............
Adifference between total solid and suspended solid
Bsum of total solids and suspended solids
Cfree from suspended solids
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2363 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
At the break point chlorination, the residual chlorine is .............
Azero
Bmaximum
Cminimum
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2364 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Break-point chlorination of water involves addition of chlorine in and amount sufficient to .............
Akill giardia cysts
Breact with any ammonia and oxidisable organic matter
Creduce bacterial growth
Dreact with inorganic matter
Answer is hidden
Question 2365 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Chlorine demand of water is equal to .............
Aapplied chlorine
Bresidual chlorine
Csum of (a) and (b)
Ddifference of (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 2366 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The process in which chlorination is done beyond break point is known as .............
Apre-chlorination
Bpost-chlorination
Csuper-chlorination
Dde-chlorination
Answer is hidden
Question 2367 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Chlorine usage in the treatment of 30000 cubic meter of water per day is 15 kg/day. The chlorine dose is .............
A0.2
B0.3
C0.5
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 2368 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which chemical is used for dechlorination of water?
ASodium sulphite
BSodium bicarbonate
CCalcium carbonate
DHydrogen peroxide
Answer is hidden
Question 2369 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Use of chlorine in water does not reduce .............
Aammonia
Borganic matter
Ciron
Ddissolved oxygen
Answer is hidden
Question 2370 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The chlorine, which serves as a disinfectant is .............
Achlorine
Bfree residual chlorine
Cchlorine demand
Dresidual demand
Answer is hidden
Question 2371 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When adding a chlorine in a water it reduces the .............
Aammonia
Biron
Corganic matter
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2372 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The efficiency of disinfection by chlorine in water treatment, .............
Aincreased with pH
Bneither increases nor decreases
Cdecreases with pH
Dremains constant
Answer is hidden
Question 2373 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The permissible limit of free residual chlorine is .............
A0.02 ppm
B0.2 ppm
C1 ppm
D2 ppm
Answer is hidden
Question 2374 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is not significantly affected by chlorination in water?
APathogenic bacteria
BOrganic matters
CAlgae
DDissolved oxygen
Answer is hidden
Question 2375 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following statement is wrong regarding iron salt?
AIron salt produces less floc than alum
BDetention time for sedimentation by using Iron salt as coagulant is less
CHandling of Iron salt requires some skills
DIron removes H₂S taste and odor
Answer is hidden
Question 2376 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A method that is not used to remove iron and manganese from water is .............
Aoxidation with chlorine followed by filtration
Baeration
Csequestration
Dfiltration with manganese - greensand
Answer is hidden
Question 2377 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which chemical is not effective for removal of iron and manganese?
AChloramine
BChlorine dioxides
COzone
DPotassiumpermanganate
Answer is hidden
Question 2378 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Aeration of water is done to remove .............
Aodor
Bcolor
Cbacteria
Dturbidity
Answer is hidden
Question 2379 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
NTU is unit .............
Acolor
Bodor
Cturbidity
Dtaste
Answer is hidden
Question 2380 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Degree hazen is a unit of .............
Acolour
Bodour
Cturbidity
Dtaste
Answer is hidden
Question 2381 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Foul odor and bad taste of water is removed by treating with .............
Aalum
Bactivated carbon
Cbleaching powder
Dammonium sulphate
Answer is hidden
Question 2382 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In most cases, oxidation is best method suitable for .............
Adisinfection
Bremoving hardness
Cremoving odor
Daeration
Answer is hidden
Question 2383 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Activated carbon is used in water treatment for .............
Adisinfection
Bremoving hardness
Cremoving color
Dremoving corrosiveness
Answer is hidden
Question 2384 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Activated carbon removes from water .............
Aorganic matter
Biron
Cmanganese
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2385 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is the most toxic metal found in water?
ACalcium
BIron
CMagnesium
DArsenic
Answer is hidden
Question 2386 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which method is used to measure the color of water?
AGravimetric analysis
BChromatography
CTintometer method
DHydrometer analysis
Answer is hidden
Question 2387 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Storm water flow or run off is given by .............
ACIA/360
BCIA/3600
CCA/360
DCIA/36
Answer is hidden
Question 2388 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Factor affecting sanitary sewage are .............
Arate of water supply
Bpopulation
Cunauthorized connection
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2389 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The value of coefficient of runoff for paved areas is of the order of .............
A0
B0.5
C0.9
Dgreater than 1
Answer is hidden
Question 2390 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The water carried sewerage system removes .............
Aindustrial sewage
Bdomestic sewage
Cstorm sewage
Dall the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2391 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
............. is required to transport storm water runoff from roofs, parking lots, streets, and highways to a point of discharge.
ASanitary sewers
BStorm sewers
CWastewater sewers
DWater sewers
Answer is hidden
Question 2392 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
............. is additional flow through sewers available during rainy season?
ADry weather flow
BStorm water flow
CRapidly varied flow
DGradually varied flow
Answer is hidden
Question 2393 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Sanitary sewage is independent of .............
Arate of water supply
Bpopulation growth
Cinfiltration of groundwater
Drainfall
Answer is hidden
Question 2394 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The type of wastewater that originates from the bathroom, kitchen, washing places and wash basins is called .............
Asullage
Bsewerage
Cgarbage
Drubbish
Answer is hidden
Question 2395 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The most suitable sewer in combined sewerage system is .............
Acircular
Brectangular
Cparabolic
Degg shaped
Answer is hidden
Question 2396 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In which kind of cities are combined systems used?
ALess population
BHigh population
CHigh residences
DHigh storm
Answer is hidden
Question 2397 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When only one set of sewers are used to carry both sanitary sewage and storm water, it is called as ............. system.
Apartial
Bdirect
Ccombined
Dseparate
Answer is hidden
Question 2398 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When rainy season is confined to a few months, like in Nepal, the preferred sewerage system would be .............
Acombined system
Bseparate system
Cpartially separate system
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2399 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The suitable system for an area having uniformly distributed mild rains throughout the year, like in England is .............
Aseparate
Bcombined
Cpartially separate
Dpartially combined
Answer is hidden
Question 2400 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Two sets of sewers are laid in ............. system.
Apartial
Bseparate
Ccombined
Dpartially combined
Answer is hidden
Question 2401 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The treatment is costly in which of the following systems?
ACombined
BSeparate
CDirect
DPartial
Answer is hidden
Question 2402 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is an advantage of separate sewers?
ARivers are polluted
BSize of the sewers are small
CIt proves economical
DNuisance potential is reduced
Answer is hidden
Question 2403 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which one of the following options is true for combined system of sewerage system?
ASewage and rain water
BDry weather flow and rain water
CSewage and industrial waste
DIndustrial waste and rain water
Answer is hidden
Question 2404 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Sewerage system is usually designed for .............
A7 years
B5 years
C100 years
D25 years
Answer is hidden
Question 2405 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is the name of the sewer that collects water from a number of other large sewers or outlets?
AIntercepting sewer
BForce main
CBranch sewer
DCollecting sewer
Answer is hidden
Question 2406 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which one of the following options is true for combined system of sewerage system?
ASewage and rain water
BDry weather flow and rain water
CSewage and industrial waste
DIndustrial waste and rain water
Answer is hidden
Question 2407 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The egg shaped sewer is best preferred on .............
Acombined
Bseparate
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2408 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The sewer that carries sewage to a treatment plant or final disposal point is called .............
Aoutfall sewer
Bbranch sewer
Chouse sewer
Dlateral sewer
Answer is hidden
Question 2409 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Inverted syphon sewer is also called .............
Alateral sewer
Boutfall sewer
Cdepressed sewer
Dnormal sewer
Answer is hidden
Question 2410 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The sewer used to convey wastewater form one or more lateral sewer is .............
Amain sewer
Bintercepting sewer
Cbranch sewer
Doutfall sewer
Answer is hidden
Question 2411 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The equipment used for checking the levels of the sewer invert is .............
Aboning rod
Btheodolite
Cdumpy level
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2412 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Laying of sewers is usually done with the help of .............
Atheodolite
Bcompass
Cplane table
Dsight rules and boning rods
Answer is hidden
Question 2413 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
1/4 to 1/3 space is left vacant in the design of sewer pipes at maximum discharge due to .............
Apossible low estimates of maximum and average flows
Blarge scale possible infiltration of storm water
Cunexpected increase in population
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2414 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In a circular sewer of diameter D, if the depth of the flow is D/4, the wetted perimeter will be .............
AπD/4
BπD/2
CπD/3
DπD/5
Answer is hidden
Question 2415 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The internal diameter of the sewer should not be less than .............
A15 cm
B25 cm
C50 cm
D75 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 2416 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Minimum size of public sewer should not be less than .............
A10 cm
B20 cm
C13 cm
D15 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 2417 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
If sizes of the sewers are ............. choking problems are less.
Alarge
Bsmall
Cbig
Dminute
Answer is hidden
Question 2418 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
An egg shaped sewer in comparison to circular sewer is .............
Aeconomical
Bmore stable
Ceasier to construct
Dprovides better self-cleansing velocity at low discharges
Answer is hidden
Question 2419 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following test of the sewer is done by placing a mirror at one end?
AMirror test
BStraightness test
CAir test
DWater test
Answer is hidden
Question 2420 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Testing of sewer pipes may involve .............
Awater test
Bmirror test
Cball test
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2421 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Testing of sewer is done by which of the following methods .............
Astraightness test
Bobstruction test
Cair test
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2422 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Why is air gap left at the top of sewers?
ATo meet the fluctuation of sewage inflow
BTo maintain open channel flow condition
CTo provide space over sewage for ventilation
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2423 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The minimum diameter of sewer pipe is .............
A15 cm
B20 cm
C25 cm
D30 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 2424 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Sewers are designed for .............
Asum of peak factors × dry weather flow (DWF)
Bproduct of peak factors × dry weather flow (DWF)
Cwater supply and peak factors
Daverage daily flow only
Answer is hidden
Question 2425 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The slope of a sewer will be .............
Agiven in the direction of natural slope of ground
Bgiven in the direction opposite to natural slope of ground
Czero
Dsteeper than 1
Answer is hidden
Question 2426 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
To design sewer pipes of diameters 0.4 m to 0.9 m at maximum flow, the flow in sewer is running at .............
Afull depth
Bhalf full
Ctwo third full
Dthree fourth full
Answer is hidden
Question 2427 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The best sewer material to resist hydrogen sulphide corrosion is .............
ARCC
Bbrick masonry
Cglazed stoneware
Dasbestos cement
Answer is hidden
Question 2428 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A masonry or RCC chamber constructed at suitable intervals along the sewer lines, for providing access into them is called .............
Ainverted siphons
Bmanhole
Cflushing tanks
Dclean-outs
Answer is hidden
Question 2429 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The manhole covers are generally made circular .............
Afor architectural reason
Bto strengthen the cover
Cto prevent falling of cover into the manhole
Dto make the entry convinent
Answer is hidden
Question 2430 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The means of access for inspection and cleaning of sewer line is known as .............
Ainlet
Bmanhole
Ccatch basin
Ddrop manhole
Answer is hidden
Question 2431 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Manholes on sewer lines are provided for .............
Aperiodic cleaning
Bproviding air for oxidation
Cremoval of part of sewerage
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2432 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A drop manhole is provided if .............
Aa sewer drops from a height
Ba branch sewer discharges into the main sewer at a higher level
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2433 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Manholes are generally located .............
Aat all changes of direction of sewer
Bat all changes of gradient of sewer
Cat all junctions of different of sewer
Dall
Answer is hidden
Question 2434 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The drop manholes are provided in sewerage system when there is .............
Achange in alignment of sewer line
Bchange in size of sewers
Cchange in the elevation of ground level
Dchange from gravity system to pressure system
Answer is hidden
Question 2435 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
For very small sewers, the maximum manhole spacing, specified by Indian standards, is .............
A30 m
B45 m
C75 m
D100 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2436 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is the spacing of manholes for pipe diameter of greater than 2 m?
A90-150 m
B150-200 m
C300 m
D45-90 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2437 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The minimum diameter of a manhole cover should be .............
A25 cm
B50 cm
C75 cm
D100 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 2438 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
For large sewers, the maximum distance between manholes should be .............
A75 m
B150 m
C200 m
D300 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2439 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What are the manholes having a depth greater than 1.5 m called?
ANormal manholes
BDeep manholes
CShallow manholes
DStraight manholes
Answer is hidden
Question 2440 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The manhole is termed as shallow manhole if its depth is about .............
A0.7 to 0.9 m
B0.9 to 1.2 m
C1.2 to 1.5 m
D1.5 to 2.1 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2441 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The minimum depth of septic tank as per design consideration is .............
A1.8 m
B1 m
C1.2 m
D1.5 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2442 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When two pipes are connected to a manhole, how should their levels be arranged?
AThe inlet pipe should be at a higher level than the outlet pipe
BThe outlet pipe should be at a higher level than the inlet pipe
CBoth pipes should be at the same level
DLevels do not matter
Answer is hidden
Question 2443 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What are the structures that are constructed at suitable intervals along the sewerage system called?
AManholes
BCatch basins
CPumps
DSewer appurtenances
Answer is hidden
Question 2444 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A pipe used to carry discharge from sanitary fittings like bathrooms, kitchens, etc. is called .............
Awaste pipe
Bvent pipe
Csoil pipe
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2445 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The pipe through which liquid waste carrying human excreta flows, is called .............
Awaste pipe
Bvent pipe
Csoil pipe
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2446 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The sewage which transports the sewage to the point of treatment, is called .............
Ahouse sewer
Bmain sewer
Coutfall sewer
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2447 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Specific gravity of the sewage is generally .............
A1
B2
C1.001
D0.1
Answer is hidden
Question 2448 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The approximate % of water in sewage is .............
A0.9
B0.99
C0.999
D0.9999
Answer is hidden
Question 2449 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The specific gravity of sewage is .............
Azero
Bslightly less than 1
Cequal to 1
Dslightly more than 1
Answer is hidden
Question 2450 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In the process of finding fixed inorganic solid in a sludge sample, the temp is .............
A550° ± 50 for 15 minutes
B550° ± 50 for 1 hr
C105° ± 50 for 15 minutes
D105° ± 50 for 1 hr
Answer is hidden
Question 2451 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The process of finding fixed organic solid in sludge temp is .............
A550 ± 50°C for 1 hr
B550 ± 50°C for 15 minutes
C105 ± 50°C for 1 hrs
D105 ± 50°C for 15 minutes
Answer is hidden
Question 2452 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The value of ratio of BOD/COD of domestic wastewater before treatment is .............
A0.1 to 0.2
B0.2 to 0.5
C0.3 to 0.8
D0.8 to 1.5
Answer is hidden
Question 2453 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The ratio of COD to BOD of untreated sewage is .............
A1.25-2.5
B2.5-5
C5-10
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2454 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The standard BOD is taken as .............
A10 days BOD at 20 degree celsius
B20 days BOD at 20 degree celsius
C5 days BOD at 20 degree celsius
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2455 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The maximum efficiency of BOD removal is achieved in .............
Aaerated lagoons
Btrickling filters
Cdigestion tank
Doxidation ditch
Answer is hidden
Question 2456 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A BOD removal efficiency of 95% can be expected from .............
Aseptic tank
Bimhoff tank
Cstandard filter
Dactivated sludge plant
Answer is hidden
Question 2457 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Between BOD and COD, the greater will be .............
ABOD
BCOD
Cboth are same
Ddepends on the characteristic of sewage
Answer is hidden
Question 2458 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The BOD of drinking water should not be more than .............
A0
B5
C10
D20
Answer is hidden
Question 2459 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The standard 5-days BOD at 20 degree Celsius, when compared to ultimate BOD, is about .............
A58%
B68%
C98%
D100%
Answer is hidden
Question 2460 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The efficiency of biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) removal in trickling filter is .............
A98%
B65%
C56%
D85%
Answer is hidden
Question 2461 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
If 2% solution of a sewage sample is incubated for 5 days at 20°C and depletion of oxygen was found to be 5 ppm, BOD of the sewage is .............
A200 ppm
B225 ppm
C250 ppm
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2462 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following has minimum detention period?
AGrit chamber
BSedimentation tank
COxidation ditch
DOxidation pond
Answer is hidden
Question 2463 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Grit chambers of a sewage plant are usually cleaned after .............
A1 week
B1 day
C4 weeks
D2 weeks
Answer is hidden
Question 2464 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
For plain sedimentation tank, the detention period is usually .............
A2-4 hrs
B4-8 hrs
C18-24 hrs
D1-3 days
Answer is hidden
Question 2465 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The overflow rate of plain sedimentation tank is about ............. cu.m/day/ sq. m.
A15-20
B30-40
C40-50
D50-60
Answer is hidden
Question 2466 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
If sewage contains greases and fatty oils, they are removed in .............
Agrit chambers
Bsedimentation tanks
Cskimming tanks
Daeration tanks
Answer is hidden
Question 2467 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The discharge per unit plan area of a sedimentation tank, is generally called .............
Aover flow rate
Bsurface loading
Cover flow velocity
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2468 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The organic loading in a trickling filter is measured in .............
Am³/day
Bgm/m²/day
Ckg/hectare-meter/day
Dkg/hectare/day
Answer is hidden
Question 2469 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A trickling filter is primarily a .............
Astraining process to remove suspended solids from sewage
Bbiological oxidation process to remove BOD from sewage
Cstraining process to remove turbidity from water
Dstraining process to remove bacteria from water
Answer is hidden
Question 2470 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In trickling filter, what is the phenomenon of losing slime layer called .............
Asloughing
Bslugging
Csliming
Dslashing
Answer is hidden
Question 2471 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When a recirculation ratio in a high rate trickling filter is unity, then the recirculation factor is .............
A1
Bmore than 1
Cless than 1
Dzero
Answer is hidden
Question 2472 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Activated sludge is the .............
Aaerated sludge in the aeration unit
Bsludge settled in the humus tank
Csludge in the secondary tank after aeration and rich in microbial mass
Dsludge in secondary tank after aeration and rich in nutrients
Answer is hidden
Question 2473 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The dominating microorganisms in an activated sludge process reactor are .............
Aaerobic heterotrophs
Banaerobic heterotrophs
Cautotrophs
Dphototrophs
Answer is hidden
Question 2474 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Chlorine is sometimes used in sewage treatment .............
Ato avoid flocculation
Bto increase biological activated sludge
Cto avoid bulking of activated sludge
Dto help in grease separation
Answer is hidden
Question 2475 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In the activated sludge process .............
Aaeration is continued till stability
Baeration is done with an admixture of previously aerated sludge
Csludge is activated by constant stirring
Dwater is removed by centrifugal action
Answer is hidden
Question 2476 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In the oxidation ditch, the excess sludge is taken to .............
Aanaerobic digester
Baerobic digester
Cdrying beds
Dincinerator
Answer is hidden
Question 2477 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In an oxidation pond, the sewage is treated by .............
Aaerobic bacteria
Banaerobic bacteria
Cdual action of aerobic bacteria and algae
Dsedimentation
Answer is hidden
Question 2478 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
From amongst the following sewage treatment option, largest land requirements for a given discharge will be needed for .............
Aoxidation ditch
Boxidation pond
Caerobic pond
Danaerobic pond
Answer is hidden
Question 2479 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The minimum design depth of oxidation pond is ............. m.
A0.3
B0.5
C1
D1.5
Answer is hidden
Question 2480 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The detention period for oxidation ponds is usually kept as .............
A24 hours
B48 hours
C10-15 days
D3 months
Answer is hidden
Question 2481 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Factor affecting self-purifications are .............
Adilutions
Bcurrent
Caction of sunlight
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2482 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Sewage that has received no purification treatment is called .............
Araw sewage
Buntreated sewage
Ccrude sewage
Dfresh sewage
Answer is hidden
Question 2483 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
When wastewater is disposed off into a running stream, 4 zones are formed. In which of the following zones will the minimum level of dissolved oxygen be found?
Azone of degradation
Bzone of active decomposition
Czone of recovery
Dzone of clear water
Answer is hidden
Question 2484 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
If DO concentration falls down to zero in any natural drainage, it indicates the zone of .............
Adegradation
Bactive decomposition
Crecovery
Dcleaner water
Answer is hidden
Question 2485 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The DO level in natural unpolluted waters at normal temperature is found to be of the order of .............
A1
B10
C100
D1000
Answer is hidden
Question 2486 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
DO test is done by .............
Awinkers test
BHoffman test
Cwinkers David test
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2487 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The minimum DO in water bodies should be ............. to have aquatic life possible or survive.
A5 ppm
B4 ppm
C10 ppm
D3 ppm
Answer is hidden
Question 2488 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Winkler's method is used to determine .............
AMethane content of waste water
BBiological Oxygen Demand (BOD) of waste water
CChemical Oxygen Demand (COD) of waste water
DDissolved Oxygen (DO) content of waste water
Answer is hidden
Question 2489 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Anaerobic reaction depends upon .............
ADO content
BCO₂ content
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2490 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Anaerobic decomposition of sewage is carried out .............
Ain presence of oxygen
Babsence of oxygen
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2491 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Aerobic bacteria's .............
Aflourish in the presence of free oxygen
Bconsume organic matter as their food
Coxidize organic matter in sewage
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2492 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Identify the waste water treatment unit which use both aerobic and anaerobic mechanism for the removal of organic matter?
ATrickling filter
BActivated sludge process
COxidation ditch
DStabilization ponds
Answer is hidden
Question 2493 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
If a sewer drain carrying a discharge of 2 cumecs, outfalls into a river carrying a discharge of 10 cumecs, and having DO equal to 8.4 mg/l, the resultant DO of the mix will be equal to .............
A5 mg/l
B7 mg/l
C10.5 mg/l
D12 mg/l
Answer is hidden
Question 2494 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The gas, which is evolved in a sludge digestion tank, is mainly composed of .............
Anitrogen
Bammonia
Chydrogen sulphide
Dmethane
Answer is hidden
Question 2495 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The color of digested sludge is .............
Ablue
Bblack
Cbrown
Dgray
Answer is hidden
Question 2496 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Composting and lagooning are methods of .............
Afiltration
Bsedimentation
Csludge digestion
Dsewage disposal
Answer is hidden
Question 2497 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Leachate is the colored liquid, that comes out of .............
Aseptic tanks
Bsanitary landfills
Ccompost plants
Daerated lagoons
Answer is hidden
Question 2498 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The method of refuse disposal, involving burial in trenches, is called .............
Aincineration
Bpulverisation
Ccomposting
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2499 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Imhoff cone is used to measure ............. in sewage.
Atotal solids
Btotal organic solids
Ctotal inorganic solids
Dsettleable solids
Answer is hidden
Question 2500 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The diameter of vent pipe used in VIP latrine is .............
A70 mm
B90 mm
C60 mm
D50 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2501 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Septic tank is provided for .............
Asettling of incoming sewage
Bsettle sludge digestion
Cstorage of digested sludge
Dall these factors
Answer is hidden
Question 2502 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The minimum depth of septic tank as per design criteria is .............
A1.8 m
B1 m
C1.2 m
D1.5 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2503 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Out of the following sewage treatment units, which work on the anaerobic decomposition of organic matter .............
Aoxidation pond
Bseptic tank
Cactivated sludge plants
Dboth (b) and (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 2504 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The disposal of hazardous waste should not be done directly at .............
Alandfill
Bincineration
Cchemical oxidizer
Ddumping
Answer is hidden
Question 2505 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Sewage sickness occurs when .............
Asewage contains pathogenic bacteria
Bsewers get clogged due to accumulate of solid
Cvoids of soil get clogged due to continuous application of sewage on a piece of land
Dsewers enters the water supply system
Answer is hidden
Question 2506 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The phenomenon by virtue of which a soil is clogged with sewage matter, is called .............
Asewage farming
Bsewage sickness
Csewage bulking
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2507 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is EIA?
AEnvironmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is a method for promoting rapid project development without considering its potential impact on the environment.
BEIA stands for Economic Investment Appraisal, focusing on financial considerations rather than environmental effects.
CEnvironmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is a process that intentionally overlooks potential negative effects of a project on the surrounding ecosystem.
DEIA is a systematic process used to evaluate the environmental consequences of a proposed project or development, aiming to identify and mitigate potential adverse effects on the environment.
Answer is hidden
Question 2508 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
EIA is necessary because .............
Adevelopment is bad for the environment
Bthere is growing interest in sustainability
Cenvironmental impacts of developments are of public interest
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2509 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which one among the following is the correct order of steps taken during the process of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)?
AScoping, Screening, Public Hearing, EIA, Issue of Environmental Clearance
BScreening, Public Hearing, Scoping, EIA, Issue of Environmental Clearance
CScreening, Scoping, EIA, Public Hearing, Issue of Environmental Clearance
DPublic Hearing, Screening, Scoping, EIA, Issue of Environmental Clearance
Answer is hidden
Question 2510 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The full form of EIA is .............
Aenvironmental impact assessment
Benvironment impact assessment
Cenvironmental impact algorithm
Dinitial environmental impact assessment
Answer is hidden
Question 2511 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The EIA requires .............
Ascoping
Bpublic hearing
Cboth of above
Dany one of the above but doesn't require both
Answer is hidden
Question 2512 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The first step involving in EIA is .............
Ascoping
Bpublic hearing
CTOR
Dissue of environmental clearance
Answer is hidden
Question 2513 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Once EIA is complete .............
Athe EIA is submitted to competent authority
Bthe EIA is not submitted to competent authority
Cthe EIA is submitted to municipality chief
Dthe EIA is submitted to municipal administrative chief
Answer is hidden
Question 2514 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
How many stages are there in EIA?
A5
B3
C2
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 2515 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Scoping is important to the EIA process because .............
Ait decides from all the possible impacts which are the potentially significant ones
Bit saves the developer money
Cit ensures the environmental effects of the project are all considered in detail
Dit identifies all possible alternatives
Answer is hidden
Question 2516 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Why aren't all projects subject to EIA?
AIf all projects were subject to EIA, costs would be higher and overall benefits of EIA relatively lower
BIf all projects were subject to EIA, costs would be lower and overall benefits of EIA relatively higher
CIf all projects were subject to EIA, consultants and practitioners would not be able to cope with demand
DIf all projects were subject to EIA, wrong decisions would be made about a proportion of these projects
Answer is hidden
Question 2517 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Where a preliminary EIA is carried out during screening, which of the following should not be included?
AA description of the proposal
BReview of the degree of public concern and interest about the proposal
CA plan for mitigation measures
DReview of the potential impacts of the proposal and their likely significance
Answer is hidden
Question 2518 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The full form of BES is in environment study is .............
Abachelor of environmental science
Bbrief environment studies
Cbase environmental study
Dbureau of environmental study
Answer is hidden
Question 2519 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
IEE is done to .............
Aminimize the overall environmental impact and cost of the project
Bmaximize the overall environmental impact and cost of the project
Cminimize the overall positive environmental impact and cost of the project
Dmaximize the overall environmental impact and cost of the house
Answer is hidden
Question 2520 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is the difference between EIA and IEE?
AEIA requires both scoping and ToR
BEIA requires public hearings
CEIA requires recommendation from local bodies
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2521 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following environmental study is to be carried out for the roads of length less than 25 km?
ABES
BIEE
CEIA
DAny of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2522 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
If BES is required for a project of national pride, then the approval should be taken from .............
ABody prescribed by GoN
BTo the ministry of forest and environment
CThe body prescribed by the concerned local law
DTo the body of the provincial government prescribed by the provincial government
Answer is hidden
Question 2523 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A short-term environmental impact assessment EIA has a time period of .............
A2-5 years
B10-15 years
C5-10 years
D5-7 years
Answer is hidden
Question 2524 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
For a hydropower project of capacity > 50 MW ............. is required.
ABES
BIEE
CEIA
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2525 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The EIA report should be approved within ............. by the ministry.
A15 days
B25 days
C35 days
D45 days
Answer is hidden
Question 2526 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The BES and IEE report should be approved within ............. by the ministry.
A15 days
B25 days
C35 days
D45 days
Answer is hidden
Question 2527 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the elements of the EIA process does the following expression describe? Narrowing the application of EIA to those projects that may have significant environmental impacts .............
Ascreening
Bscoping
Cbaseline description
Dmitigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2528 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the elements of the EIA process does the following expression describe? Identifying at an early stage, from all a project's possible impacts, those that are the crucial, significant ones .............
Ascreening
Bscoping
Cbaseline description
Dmitigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2529 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the elements of the EIA process does the following expression describe? Establishing the present and future states of the environment in the absence of the project .............
Ascreening
Bscoping
Cbaseline description
Dmitigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2530 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Process for IEE and EIA is provided by ............. for development activities in Nepal.
ANepal environmental assessment guideline 1993
BNational environmental assessment guideline 1992
CNational environmental assessment guideline 1993
DNatural environmental assessment guideline 1993
Answer is hidden
Question 2531 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Administrative process for IEE and EIA is provided by ............. for approval, preparation and implementation.
AEPA 2077 and EPR 2078
BEPA 2076 and EPR 2077
CEPA 2076 and EPA 2077
DEPA 2076 and EPR 2078
Answer is hidden
Question 2532 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which schedule of the environment protection rules-2077 mentions about the projects that require EIA?
ASchedule 1
BSchedule 2
CSchedule 3
DSchedule 4
Answer is hidden
Question 2533 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which environmental principle best reflects the intent of EIA?
Apolluter pays
Bprevention is better than cure
Creduce reuse recycle
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2534 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following is never an acceptable outcome of the screening process?
AA full and comprehensive EIA is required
BEIA consideration is not required
CNo further level of EIA is required
DA more limited EIA is required
Answer is hidden
Question 2535 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
The primary reason for environmental impact assessment is to .............
Amitigate existing environmental impacts of development
Bpredict the size of impacts of developments
Cdescribe proposed developments
Didentify the environmental consequences of development in advance
Answer is hidden
Question 2536 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following best describes why public involvement is necessary and integral to EIA?
AWithout incorporating stakeholder views EIA cannot be expected to accurately record the impact significance of the project
BPublic acceptability is important to ensure that political proponents of the project are re-elected
CThe law requires that the public are notified of developments
DThe developer who does not undertake public consultation will be able to undertake the project more quickly
Answer is hidden
Question 2537 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What are the key factors which must be taken into account when determining whether a project requires EIA or not?
ASize of the project
BSize of the project and sensitivity of the surrounding environment
CSize of the project, sensitivity of the surrounding environment and effect on local communities
DSize of the project, sensitivity of the surrounding environment, effect on local communities and opinion of the developer
Answer is hidden
Question 2538 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What is the amount of fine to be paid by any individual if a proposal is executed without approval of IEE report?
AUpto 5 lakhs rupees
BUpto 10 lakhs rupees
CUpto 50 lakhs rupees
DUpto 1 crore rupees
Answer is hidden
Question 2539 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
In the case of a proposal relating to development, construction work or project pertaining to a matter falling under the jurisdiction of the Local Government, the EIA is approved by .............
Athe body prescribed by the concerned local law
Bto the body of the provincial government prescribed by the provincial government
Cto the ministry of forest and environment
Dto the office of the chief minister of the respective province
Answer is hidden
Question 2540 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
For a highway project passing through the national conservation area, which of the following is required?
ASocial impact evaluation
BPolitical impact assessment
CEnvironmental impact assessment
DInitial Environment examination
Answer is hidden
Question 2541 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Environmental impacts can of types .............
A3
B5
C4
D2
Answer is hidden
Question 2542 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
An Environmental Statement should examine the potential impacts of a development and present them from .............
Athe regulator's perspective
Bthe developer's view
Can unbiased view, minimizing subjectivity
Dthe environmental
Answer is hidden
Question 2543 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Which of the following are indirect impacts?
AVisual impact of a chimney in a power station project
BImpact of mining raw materials for building a new power station
CPredicted noise impact of a new road in operation
DImpact on air quality from trucking supplies of wood to a construction site
Answer is hidden
Question 2544 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Nepal ranks ............. in terms of flood risk.
A4th
B7th
C5th
D30th
Answer is hidden
Question 2545 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Nepal ranks ............. In terms of earthquake risk.
A4th
B11th
C20th
D6th
Answer is hidden
Question 2546 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Among the following types of hazard which one is more common?
ABiological
BPhysical
CErgonomic
DMechanical
Answer is hidden
Question 2547 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Slow occurrences and multi casual among the following natural disaster .............
Aconflict
Bearth quake
Cvolcano eruption
Doutbreak
Answer is hidden
Question 2548 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Natural disasters generally involve which of the following?
AEvents with a single clear-cut cause
BEvents that involve overlapping natural causes
CEvents wholly caused by the activities of man
DEvents that are unaffected by the activities of man
Answer is hidden
Question 2549 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
More frequent type of disaster in Nepal among the following:
ADrought
BOutbreak
CFlood
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2550 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
A disease which is widespread and can reach globally is termed as .............
Aepidemic
Bendemic
Cpandemic
Dhyper-endemic
Answer is hidden
Question 2551 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Construction of retaining walls comes under which of the following measures of mitigation of disasters?
AStructural measures
BNon-structural measures
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2552 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Commonly used type of epidemiological study design for disaster among the following:
ACohort
BExperimental
CCase control
DCross-sectional
Answer is hidden
Question 2553 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
Common cause of tsunami .............
Aundersea earthquake
Bfunnel-shaped air spirals
Cstrong winds accompanied by rain, snow and thunder
Dvolcanic eruption through magma
Answer is hidden
Question 2554 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
What should a man do after an earthquake if he is near the coastal area to be safe from tsunami?
AMove to the basement of house
BMove to the higher ground away from sea
CMove to the open space
DMove to the roof of the house
Answer is hidden
Question 2555 of 4146Ch 6 · Water Supply, Sanitation and Environment
All the primarily concerned and other categories' indirect impact of hazard among the following:
ASocial
BHealth
CEnvironment
DEconomic
Answer is hidden
Question 2556 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
Irrigation water requirement (IWR) is obtained from crop water requirement (CWR) by:
AAdding effective rainfall to CWR
BSubtracting effective rainfall and soil moisture/groundwater contribution from CWR, then accounting for losses
CMultiplying CWR by the culturable command area
DIWR is always identical to CWR with no adjustment
Answer is hidden
Question 2557 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
Culturable command area (CCA), compared to gross command area (GCA), refers to:
AThe same total area with no distinction
BThe portion of the GCA that is fit for cultivation, excluding unculturable land
COnly the area currently under irrigation this season
DLand located entirely outside the canal system
Answer is hidden
Question 2558 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
Irrigation intensity can exceed 100% of the culturable command area primarily because of:
AMeasurement errors only
BMultiple cropping, where more than one crop is grown on the same land within a year
CThe culturable command area always being underestimated
DIrrigation intensity can never exceed 100%
Answer is hidden
Question 2559 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
Duty, in irrigation engineering, is defined as: period
AThe total depth of water required by a crop over its base period
BThe area of land that can be irrigated by continuous flow of one cumec of water throughout the crop's base
CThe number of days from sowing to harvest
DThe peak instantaneous discharge in a canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2560 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
The relationship between delta (Δ), base period (B), and duty (D) is expressed as:
AΔ = 8.64B/D
BΔ = D/8.64B
CΔ = B/D only, with no constant
DΔ = 8.64/(BD)
Answer is hidden
Question 2561 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
Overall (project) irrigation efficiency is calculated as: path from source to crop root zone
AThe sum of conveyance and application efficiencies
BThe product of conveyance efficiency and application efficiency (and any other stage efficiencies) along the
CAlways exactly 100%, regardless of losses
DIndependent of conveyance losses
Answer is hidden
Question 2562 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
Effective rainfall, in the context of crop water requirement, refers to:
AThe total rainfall recorded at a station, with no adjustment
BThe portion of rainfall actually available to and used by the crop, excluding runoff and deep percolation losses
CRainfall that occurs only during the dry season
DRainfall that falls outside the crop's growing season
Answer is hidden
Question 2563 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
Field capacity, as a soil moisture concept, is defined as:
AThe moisture level below which plants wilt permanently
BThe maximum moisture the soil can hold against gravity after free drainage has occurred
CThe total pore space of the soil, including air-filled pores
DA fixed value identical for every soil type
Answer is hidden
Question 2564 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
A crop with a deep root system in a soil with high water-holding capacity typically requires:
AVery frequent, shallow irrigation applications
BLess frequent irrigation, applied at greater depth per application
CNo irrigation at all under any circumstances
DIrrigation only during the dry season, regardless of crop stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2565 of 4146Ch 7 · Water Demand Estimation
Design discharge for an irrigation canal is primarily determined based on:
AThe minimum possible crop water demand across the command area
BThe peak crop water demand across the command area, adjusted for conveyance losses
CThe total annual rainfall only, with no reference to crop demand
DA fixed discharge unrelated to the command area or cropping pattern
Answer is hidden
Question 2566 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
A canal aligned along a ridge (watershed) line is generally preferred because it:
ARequires more cross-drainage structures than other alignments
BCan command land on both sides by gravity and minimizes the number of cross-drainage structures needed
CCan only command land on one side
DAlways has a shorter length than a side-slope canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2567 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
The tractive force (tractive stress) approach to canal design primarily ensures that: the boundary material can resist
AThe canal's cost is minimized regardless of erosion risk
BThe shear stress exerted by flowing water on the bed and sides nowhere exceeds the critical tractive stress
CThe canal always uses a lined section
DThe canal's alignment always follows a ridge line
Answer is hidden
Question 2568 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
Kennedy's theory of canal design is based on the concept of:
ARegime channels in complete equilibrium of bed and sides
BCritical velocity, at which the canal neither silts nor scours, with silt kept in suspension by vertical eddies
CTractive stress distribution across the section
DWeighted creep length beneath the canal bed
Answer is hidden
Question 2569 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
In Kennedy's critical velocity formula, Vo = 0.55 m y0.64, the term 'm' represents:
AThe base period of the crop
BThe critical velocity ratio, a factor depending on the silt grade
CThe design discharge of the canal
DThe wetted perimeter of the channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2570 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
Lacey's regime theory differs from Kennedy's theory primarily in that it:
AConsiders only the canal bed, ignoring the sides entirely
BAssumes both the bed and sides of the channel are in a state of dynamic equilibrium (regime), not just the bed
CApplies only to lined canals
DDoes not use a silt-related factor at all
Answer is hidden
Question 2571 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
Lacey's formula for the wetted perimeter of a regime channel is given by:
AP = 4.75√Q
BP = 0.55Q
CP = Q/4.75
DP = 4.75Q²
Answer is hidden
Question 2572 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
A lined canal, compared to an unlined (earthen) alluvial canal, can generally be designed with:
AA lower permissible velocity and larger cross-section
BA higher permissible velocity, allowing a smaller cross-section for the same discharge
CIdentical velocity and cross-section in all cases
DNo relationship between velocity and cross-section
Answer is hidden
Question 2573 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
A key advantage of lining a canal, despite the higher initial construction cost, is:
AIncreased seepage losses over time
BSubstantially reduced seepage losses and generally lower long-term maintenance
CElimination of the need for any canal design calculations
DGuaranteed elimination of all future canal problems with zero maintenance
Answer is hidden
Question 2574 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
A side-slope canal alignment, as opposed to a ridge/watershed alignment, typically:
ACommands land on both sides with no cross-drainage needed
BCommands land on only one side and often requires cross-drainage works
CIs always shorter and cheaper than a ridge alignment
DNever crosses any natural drainage
Answer is hidden
Question 2575 of 4146Ch 7 · Design of Canals
The silt factor (f) used in Lacey's regime theory primarily reflects:
AThe canal's design discharge
BThe average particle size of the bed/boundary material
CThe base period of the crop being irrigated
DThe lining material's compressive strength
Answer is hidden
Question 2576 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
The undersluices at a diversion headwork primarily function to:
ADivert the entire river flow permanently away from the canal
BMaintain a deep clear-water channel near the canal head regulator and help flush sediment/pass low flows
CServe as the sole structure for raising the river's water level
DProvide the only route for fish migration
Answer is hidden
Question 2577 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
Bligh's creep theory for seepage beneath a hydraulic structure assumes that: vertical creep
AVertical creep is three times more effective than horizontal creep
BSeepage water loses head uniformly per unit length of creep path, without distinguishing horizontal from
CUplift pressure is determined using potential flow theory with elementary profiles
DNo seepage occurs beneath any impervious floor
Answer is hidden
Question 2578 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
Lane's weighted creep theory improves upon Bligh's theory by: effectiveness at dissipating head
AIgnoring vertical creep entirely
BGiving vertical creep a higher weight (roughly three times) than horizontal creep, reflecting its greater
CTreating horizontal and vertical creep identically, exactly as Bligh's theory does
DEliminating the need for any creep length calculation
Answer is hidden
Question 2579 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
Khosla's theory for seepage analysis beneath hydraulic structures is considered the most rigorous because it: gradient
AUses only a simple empirical creep coefficient
BApplies potential flow theory with elementary profiles to determine actual uplift pressure distribution and exit
CIgnores the impervious floor's thickness entirely
DWas developed before Bligh's and Lane's theories
Answer is hidden
Question 2580 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
A silt excluder, as a silt control structure at a headwork, is located: before entering the canal
ADownstream of the canal head regulator, inside the canal
BIn the river bed upstream of the canal head regulator, diverting silt-laden bottom layers back into the river
CAt the tail end of the main canal, far from the headwork
DOnly within the settling basin
Answer is hidden
Question 2581 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
A silt ejector, unlike a silt excluder, operates by: regulator, and returning it to the river via an escape channel
APreventing all silt from ever entering the canal
BExtracting silt-laden bottom flow that has already entered the canal, a short distance downstream of the head
CBeing located far upstream in the river, unrelated to the canal
DIncreasing sediment deposition throughout the canal length
Answer is hidden
Question 2582 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
The waterway (length) of a weir/barrage is commonly determined using:
ABligh's creep coefficient directly
BLacey's regime perimeter relationship
CThe crop's base period
DThe canal's duty value
Answer is hidden
Question 2583 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
The thickness of the impervious floor at a weir/barrage is designed primarily to resist: self-weight for resistance
AThe crop water requirement of the command area
BThe uplift pressure beneath the floor, as computed via seepage theory (e.g. Khosla's theory), using the floor's
COnly the wind load acting on the structure
DThe tractive stress on the canal bed downstream
Answer is hidden
Question 2584 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
Energy dissipators, such as a hydraulic-jump stilling basin, are provided downstream of a weir/barrage primarily to: channel
AIncrease the velocity of the outgoing flow further
BSafely dissipate the excess kinetic energy of high-velocity, supercritical flow before it re-enters the natural
CDivert silt away from the canal
DRaise the upstream pond level
Answer is hidden
Question 2585 of 4146Ch 7 · Diversion Headworks
The exit gradient, as determined by Khosla's theory, must be kept below a safe/critical value primarily to prevent: to wash away soil particles
AExcessive afflux upstream of the structure
BPiping failure, caused by seepage water exiting the ground at the downstream end with erosive force sufficient
CExcessive silt entry into the canal
DCorrosion of the impervious floor's reinforcement
Answer is hidden
Question 2586 of 4146Ch 7 · River Training Works
A braided river, as opposed to a straight or meandering river, is characterized by: erodible banks
AA single, perfectly straight channel with no sediment
BDivision into multiple interlacing channels separated by sand/gravel bars, typical of heavy sediment loads and
CThe complete absence of any channel migration
DOccurring only in rivers with very low sediment load
Answer is hidden
Question 2587 of 4146Ch 7 · River Training Works
River training works near a bridge or barrage are primarily needed to:
AIncrease the river's sediment load deliberately
BControl the river's course, confine flow within a defined waterway, and prevent outflanking of the structure
CEliminate the need for any guide bunds
DEnsure the river always meanders freely with no constraint
Answer is hidden
Question 2588 of 4146Ch 7 · River Training Works
A guide bund (guide bank) at a bridge or barrage is primarily designed to:
Question 2640 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The water which can be utilized by the crops from the soil is called .....
Afield capillary water
Bcapillary water
Chygroscopic water
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2641 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Superfluous water is also called .....
Acapillary water
Bgravitational water
Chygroscopic water
Dsaturation capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 2642 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Soil moisture deficiency is the difference between .....
Asaturation capacity and the existing soil moisture content
Bfield capacity and the existing soil moisture content
Cpermanent wilting point and the existing soil moisture content
Dtemporary wilting point and the existing soil moisture content
Answer is hidden
Question 2643 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The field capacity of an irrigation soil depends on .....
Aboth porosity and pore size
Bonly on porosity
Conly on pore size
Dporosity and depth of root zone
Answer is hidden
Question 2644 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which factor doesn't influence the root zone depth?
AType of soil
BType of crops grown
CSub-soil formation
DThe yield of the crop
Answer is hidden
Question 2645 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Irrigation can be defined as the science of .............
Aartificial application of water
Bartificial application of water to crops
Cconservation of rainwater for future use
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2646 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Irrigation is basically required in .............
Aarid region
Bsemi-arid region
Chumid region
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2647 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
When was Chandra canal constructed?
A1928 B.S.
B1979 B.S.
C1985 B.S.
D1994 B.S.
Answer is hidden
Question 2648 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which crop has highest water resistance?
AWheat
BRice
CMillet
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2649 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Irrigation water having SAR value of 12 is .............
Alow sodium water
Bmedium sodium water
Chigh sodium water
Dvery high sodium water
Answer is hidden
Question 2650 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
For irrigation purpose PH value of water should be .............
Abetween 3 and 6
Bbetween 6 and 8.5
Cbetween 8.5 and 11
Dmore than 11
Answer is hidden
Question 2651 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The crop which can withstand the maximum water table is .............
Arice
Bsugarcane
Cwheat
Dmaize
Answer is hidden
Question 2652 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which irrigation method is suitable on flat rolling land?
AFree flooding
BBorder strip
CCheck area flooding
DFurrow irrigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2653 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which irrigation method is suitable in permeable soil?
AFree flooding
BBorder strip
CCheck flooding
DSprinkler irrigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2654 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which irrigation method uses artificial rain to irrigate the field?
AFree flooding
BBorder strip
CDrip irrigation
DSprinkler irrigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2655 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which irrigation method is suitable for orchard farming?
AFree flooding
BBorder strip
CBasin flooding
DFurrow irrigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2656 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
For cereal crops the most commonly adopted method of irrigation, is .............
Afree flowing method
Bcheck method
Cfurrow method
Dsprinkling method
Answer is hidden
Question 2657 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The ratio of base period to delta is .............
Apalao
Bkor watering
Ccrop period
Dduty
Answer is hidden
Question 2658 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The duty of water at the outlet is also known as .............
Atime factor
Bcapacity
Cfull supply co-efficient
Doutlet factor
Answer is hidden
Question 2659 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
At which point in the entire canal system the duty of water will be more?
AHead of the water-course
BHead of the minor
CHead of the distributary
DHead of the branch
Answer is hidden
Question 2660 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The duty of the irrigation water for a given crop is maximum at .............
Aat the head of water course
Bon the field
Cat the head of a main canal
Dsame at all places
Answer is hidden
Question 2661 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Water availability for irrigation refers to ..............
Athe total annual precipitation in a region
Bthe amount of water that can be allocated for irrigation purposes
Cthe water demand of crops in an agricultural area
Dthe water quality parameters suitable for irrigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2662 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The ratio of the quantity of water stored in the root zone of the crops to the quantity of water actually delivered in the field is known as .............
Awater conveyance efficiency
Bwater application efficiency
Cwater use efficiency
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2663 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
How many days are generally taken to obtain field capacity after free gravity drainage?
A3-7
B5-8
C6-9
D2-5
Answer is hidden
Question 2664 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Effective rainfall for a crop is defined as .............
Athe portion of the rainfall which is utilized by crops
Bthe total rainfall
Cthe total rainfall minus the total run off
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2665 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Effective rainfall is considered for estimation of .............
Acrop water requirement
Bkor depth
Cnet irrigation requirement
Dgross irrigation requirement
Answer is hidden
Question 2666 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which efficiency value can be less than equal to or greater than 100%?
AWater conveyance efficiency
BWater application efficiency
CWater storage efficiency
DWater use efficiency
Answer is hidden
Question 2667 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Irrigation interval is determined by .............
Afield capacity to maximum crop water requirement
Birrigation capacity/irrigation efficiency
Cevapotranspiration rate
Dsoil infiltration rate
Answer is hidden
Question 2668 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the unit of frequency of irrigation?
Am/s
Bcumecs/hectare
Cday
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2669 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Irrigation frequency is a function of .............
Acrop only
Bsoil, crop and climate
Csoil, crop, climate and fertilizer
Dsoil and climate
Answer is hidden
Question 2670 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The frequency of irrigation refers to .............
Athe time duration of each irrigation event
Bthe number of irrigation events per year
Cthe time interval between successive irrigation events
Dthe water application rate during irrigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2671 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
During a particular stage of the growth of a crop, consumptive use of water is 2.8 mm/day. If the amount of water available in the soil is 25% of 80 mm depth of water, the frequency of irrigation is .............
A7 days
B21 days
C42 days
D60 days
Answer is hidden
Question 2672 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The interval of water supply of irrigation water depends on the types of .............
Acrop only
Bsoil and crop
Ccrop and climate
Dsoil, crop and climate
Answer is hidden
Question 2673 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The ratio of irrigated area under Rabi and Kharif crops is .............
A2
B0.5
C1
D3
Answer is hidden
Question 2674 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Crop ratio is defined as the ratio of area irrigated .............
Ain Rabi season to Kharif season
Bin Kharif season to Rabi season
Cunder perennial crop to non-perennial crops
Dunder perennial crop to total area
Answer is hidden
Question 2675 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the crop ratio of Kharif to Rabi crops?
A1:2
B1:4
C1:3
D2:1
Answer is hidden
Question 2676 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of canal is the farmer's responsibility?
AContour canal
BSide slope canal
CWatershed canal
DField channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2677 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of canal is most useful in hilly areas?
ASide slope canal
BContour canal
CWatershed canal
DField channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2678 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What type of canal necessitates construction of cross drainage works more than any other types?
ASide slope canal
BContour canal
CWatershed canal
DField channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2679 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
On flatlands what type of canal alignment is used?
ASide slope canal
BContour canal
CWatershed canal
DField channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2680 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of canal need syphons?
ASide slope canal
BContour canal
CWatershed canal
DField channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2681 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Single bank canal is the other name of .............
Aridge canal
Bcontour canal
Cside slope canal
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2682 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which canal is not considered to be used for irrigation?
AMain canal
BMajor distributary
CMinor distributary
DWatercourse
Answer is hidden
Question 2683 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Canal irrigation is generally preferred in .............
Anon-alluvial canal
Bnon-perennial canal
Cfeeder canal
Dalluvial canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2684 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A canal network refers to .............
Aa series of interconnected canals within an irrigation system
Bthe network of rivers and streams in a region
Cthe network of pipes used for water distribution
Dthe network of power transmission lines near canals
Answer is hidden
Question 2685 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the name given to the junction of two streams?
ARidge
BArea of mixture
CMerging
DArea of mingling
Answer is hidden
Question 2686 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Irrigation canals are generally aligned along ..............
Acontour line
Bwater shed
Cstraight line
Dvalley line
Answer is hidden
Question 2687 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
If a looping is present in the ridge line they how can that area be irrigated with?
ADistributary
BTributary
CWeir
DCanal
Answer is hidden
Question 2688 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The canal intake is preferred in ..............
Atrough stage
Bdelta stage
Crocky stage
Dboulder stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2689 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The tractive force in a canal is influenced by ..............
Awater flow rate and velocity
Bcanal slope and alignment
Cchannel roughness and shape
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2690 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What type of force is completely responsible for the bed load movement?
AForces of turbulence
BDrag force
CCapillary force
DGravity force
Answer is hidden
Question 2691 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
On which factor does the movement of bed load depend?
AVelocity of flow
BType of flow
CDepth of flow
DWidth of the river
Answer is hidden
Question 2692 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of force is needed for suspension of suspended load in flowing water?
ACapillary force
BDrag force
CForces of turbulence
DGravity force
Answer is hidden
Question 2693 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which one is well traded and is provided with permanent regulation and distribution works?
AInundation canals
BPermanent canals
CAlluvial canal
DNavigation canals
Answer is hidden
Question 2694 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which canal is not provided with any head works for diversion of river water?
APermanent canal
BFeeder canal
CPerennial canals
DInundation canals
Answer is hidden
Question 2695 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following combination is not correct?
AFeeder canal – no direct irrigation is carried out
BProtective canal – constructed as a relief work during the famine
CLined canal – provided with a lining of impervious material on its bed
DContour canal – provision of cross drainage works is not required
Answer is hidden
Question 2696 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A canal which when fully developed yields enough revenue to cover up its running cost is known as .............
Aprotective canal
Bproductive canal
Cpermanent canal
Dinundation canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2697 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What cause is prime responsible for the heavy movement of water from main canal to branch canal?
AExistence of favorable gradient
BVelocity of flow
CType of flow
DDepth of the canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2698 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Mathematically, depending on what factor we can say velocity increases the capacity of the canal?
ACoefficient of viscosity
BCoefficient of capillarity
CCoefficient of roughness
DCoefficient of resistance
Answer is hidden
Question 2699 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Capacity of an irrigation channel is fixed based on .............
ACultivable command area and water transmission losses
BDuty of water
CTime factor
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2700 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the problem in Nepal for artificial channels?
AFormation of depressions
BFormation of alluvial soil
CUntimely rains
DImproper usage of channels
Answer is hidden
Question 2701 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Balanced depth of cutting of canal is .............
Ahalf the total depth of a canal
Bhalf of full supply depth
Cthe maximum cut that an excavator can take
Dwhere volume of cutting is equal to volume of filling
Answer is hidden
Question 2702 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The types of triangular section lining are adopted when discharge in the channel is .............
A< 85 cumecs
B< 55 cumecs
C< 35 cumecs
D< 15 cumecs
Answer is hidden
Question 2703 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
If an irrigation channel has a side slope of 1 : S, width B, depth y and length L then total area of side slope is .............
A2L × y √(1 + S²)
B2L × B √(1 + S²)
CL × y √(1 + S²)
DL × B √(1 + S²)
Answer is hidden
Question 2704 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following statement is incorrect?
AThe seepage loss is very high in black cotton soils and heavy clay as compared to sandy porous soil
BThe seepage through a new canal is more than from a silted canal
CThe more the silt, the lesser are the losses
DThe more the velocity, the lesser will be the losses
Answer is hidden
Question 2705 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following factor do not affect seepage loss?
AUnderground water-table condition
BThe porosity of the soil
CPhysical properties of the canal water
DPrevailing wind velocity in the region
Answer is hidden
Question 2706 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In which of the following phenomenon there is a continuous direct flow between the canal and the underground water table?
AAbsorption
BSeepage
CPercolation
DBoth absorption and percolation
Answer is hidden
Question 2707 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Loss of canal discharge occurs mainly due to .............
ASeepage and percolation
BPercolation and absorption
CSeepage and evaporation
DSeepage and absorption
Answer is hidden
Question 2708 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following factor have no influence on evaporation loss?
AThe temperature of the region
BPrevailing wind velocity in the region
CArea of water surface exposed to the atmosphere
DThe porosity of the soil
Answer is hidden
Question 2709 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Kennedy's theory of alluvial canal design is based on .............
AThe tractive force approach
BThe sediment transport capacity
CThe water flow rate and velocity
DThe channel roughness and shape
Answer is hidden
Question 2710 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Kennedy's theory accounts for the effect of sediment transport by considering the .............
Adimensionless sediment concentration
Bhydraulic radius of the canal
Cshear stress acting on the canal bed
Dfriction factor of the flow
Answer is hidden
Question 2711 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to Kennedy, the critical velocity (V) in meters in a channel is the mean velocity which keeps the channel free from silting or scouring. Its value is given by [where m is critical velocity ratio and d is the depth of the channel.] .............
AV = 0.84 m d⁰.⁶⁴
BV = 0.84 m d⁰.⁵⁴
CV = 0.55 m d⁰.⁵⁴
DV = 0.55 m d⁰.⁶⁴
Answer is hidden
Question 2712 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to kennedy theory, eddies formed from .............
Abed only
Bsides only
Cwetted perimeter
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2713 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Garret's diagram gives the graphical method of designing a channel based on .............
AKennedy's theory
BLacey's theory
CGibbs theory
DKhosla's theory
Answer is hidden
Question 2714 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The critical velocity ratio was introduced in Kennedy's equation of critical velocity to take into account the effect of .............
Aroughness coefficient
Bsilt grade
Cchannel cross section
Dclimatic conditions
Answer is hidden
Question 2715 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Lacey's theory of alluvial canal design is primarily concerned with .............
Athe tractive force exerted by water flow
Bthe channel cross-sectional shape
Cthe lining material for the canal
Dthe flow rate and velocity of water
Answer is hidden
Question 2716 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Lacey's regime theory is valid for .............
Alined canal
Bunlined canal
Calluvial canal
Dnon-alluvial canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2717 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is Lacey's equation for fixing the approximate value of the required waterway for the drain?
AP = 4.75 Q
BP = 4.57 Q
CP = 4.75 Q^(1/2)
DP = 4.57 Q^(1/2)
Answer is hidden
Question 2718 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The maximum permissible reduction in the waterway from Lacey's perimeter is .............
A15%
B20%
C25%
D30%
Answer is hidden
Question 2719 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Garret's diagrams are used for graphical solution of design equations of a canal by .............
ALacey's theory
BKennedy's theory
CGibb's theory
DLindlay theory
Answer is hidden
Question 2720 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Lacey's equation for calculating flood discharge for river is .............
AV = 10.8 R^(1/2) S^(1/3)
BV = 10.8 R^(2/3) S^(1/2)
CV = 10.8 R^(2/3) S^(1/3)
DV = 10.8 R^(1/3) S^(2/3)
Answer is hidden
Question 2721 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In lacey's regime theory, flow velocity is proportional to .............
A(Qf²)^(1/2)
BQ / f
C(Qf²)^(1/6)
D(Qf²)^(1/3)
Answer is hidden
Question 2722 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In Lacey's regime theory, the velocity of flow is proportional to .............
Asilt factor, discharge
Bsilt factor, hydraulic radius
Cdischarge, hydraulic radius
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2723 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Lacey silt factor for 0.36 mm diameter particle .............
A1.05
B3.024
C2.08
D4.04
Answer is hidden
Question 2724 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following conditions is NOT applicable to a true regime?
AChannel can be scoured more easily than it can be deposited
BSilt grade is constant
CSilt charge is constant
DDischarge is constant
Answer is hidden
Question 2725 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to Lacey, depth of scour in a river depends upon the straightness of the reach. If 'D' is the depth of scour in regime flow in a right angled bend, then it is equal to .............
A1.25 D
B2.00 D
C1.75 D
D1.50 D
Answer is hidden
Question 2726 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Depending on what factor does the lining of a canal can increase the capacity of the canal?
AWidth of the canal
BType of flow
CVelocity
DSide slope
Answer is hidden
Question 2727 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What type of losses can be mainly avoided by lining the canals?
AEvaporation losses
BSeepage losses
CErosion of canal bed
DDischarge losses at branch canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2728 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following statement is wrong?
AA lined canal is not susceptible to erosion
BThe provision of adequate lining reduces the danger of breaches of channel
CThe lining does not reduce the money spent in removing weeds
DLining eliminates flood dangers
Answer is hidden
Question 2729 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What type of major dangers can the lining of canals extinguish?
ALeakages
BFloods
CWater-logging
DSeepage losses
Answer is hidden
Question 2730 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of lining is adopted when the channels have become stable and no danger of scouring is expected?
ABrick lining
BSingle burnt clay tile lining
CIn-situ cement concrete lining
DFlexible membrane lining in the bed and rigid lining on the sides
Answer is hidden
Question 2731 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In soil-cement lining the Portland cement is added to the soil up to the extent of .............
A4% to 5%
B2% to 8%
C0.1% to 5%
D> 10%
Answer is hidden
Question 2732 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the safe limiting velocity for cement concrete lining?
A1.5 m/s
B2.2 m/s
C2.7 m/s
D1.8 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 2733 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following statement is wrong?
AThe velocity varies inversely with the Manning's coefficient
BFor unlined channels in good condition, the value of Manning's coefficient is 0.015 for concrete
CFlatter slopes can be provided without silting on a lined channel
DThe lining does not help to bring high areas under the command
Answer is hidden
Question 2734 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is not a cause for the hydrostatic pressure on the lining?
ASeeping of the rainwater in the backfill
BWhen the water table remains below the canal bed
CThe backfill is of low drainage
DThe backfill is of high permeability (i.e., greater than 3 cm/sec)
Answer is hidden
Question 2735 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following statement is wrong about the requirement of good lining?
AThe lining should be able to withstand the differential sub-soil pressure
BBrick lining, concrete lining or precast slab lining can be easily repaired as compared to cast-in-situ concrete lining
CThe hydraulic efficiency generally reduces with time
DBrick tile lining may provide better abrasion resistance than cement concrete and boulder lining
Answer is hidden
Question 2736 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is NOT a component of headwork in an irrigation system?
AIntake structure
BCanal lining
CSpillway
DWater distribution network
Answer is hidden
Question 2737 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The purpose of an intake structure in head works is to .............
ARegulate the flow of water into the canal
BStore water for future irrigation needs
CControl sedimentation in the canal
DMonitor water quality parameters
Answer is hidden
Question 2738 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is used to separate the under sluice portion from main weir portion?
ADivide wall
BFish ladder
CMarginal bund
DCanal head regulator
Answer is hidden
Question 2739 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is not used as diversion headworks?
AFish ladder
BDrainage gallery
CCanal head regulator
DGuide bank
Answer is hidden
Question 2740 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the difference between a weir and a barrage?
ADischarge capacity
BNo Solid obstruction
CStorage capacity
DVelocity of flow
Answer is hidden
Question 2741 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the major differentiating point between weirs and barrages?
ASize of the structure
BSize of the water channel
CPresence of gates
DTheir usage/purpose
Answer is hidden
Question 2742 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
At which level, there is no provision of gates in head regulator?
AMin level
BNormal level
CMaximum level
DAt bed
Answer is hidden
Question 2743 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The structure at the head of regulator to remove silt is ..............
Asilt ejector
Bsilt excluder
Csilt extractor
Dall of the these
Answer is hidden
Question 2744 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The constructing of which structure help the fish in their migration ..............
AScouring sluices
BSilt excluder
CFish ladder
DDivide wall
Answer is hidden
Question 2745 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Fish ladder is provided on the side of ...............
Adivide wall
Bdiaphragm wall
Ccore wall
Dwing wall
Answer is hidden
Question 2746 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What can't you provide at head regulator?
ACanal aqueduct
BFish ladder
CDivide wall
DUnder sluice
Answer is hidden
Question 2747 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The structure that is used to separate the weir from under sluice is ..............
AGyrones
BDivide wall
CGuide bond
DMarginal bond
Answer is hidden
Question 2748 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Darcy's law is used to determine ...............
AThe hydraulic conductivity of soil
BThe flow rate of water through a porous medium
CThe evapotranspiration rate in an irrigation system
DThe sediment transport capacity in a canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2749 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Heave piping may occur on the ...............
Adownstream of sheet pile or cut off wall
Bupstream of sheet pile or cut off wall
Cbody of earth structure
Dbelow the foundation
Answer is hidden
Question 2750 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which one of the following purpose of providing the downstream sheet pile in a barrage?
ATo control failure due to piping by high value of exit gradient
Bto control failure due to scour
CTo stop failure due to Sliding
DTo stop failure due to uplift pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 2751 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The component of which force is to be counterbalanced so that the soil grains remain stable?
AUpthrust pressure forces
BForces due to velocity components
CPressure force
DSeepage water force
Answer is hidden
Question 2752 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
For a given discharge, efficiency of sedimentation tank can be increased by ..............
Aincreasing depth of basin
Bdecreasing depth
Cincreasing area of basin
Ddecreasing area of basin
Answer is hidden
Question 2753 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Bligh's seepage theory is commonly used for the analysis and design of ..............
Aearth dams
Birrigation canals
Cpumping stations
Dwater treatment plants
Answer is hidden
Question 2754 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the value of Bligh's coefficient for coarse-grained soil?
A15
B9
C12
D4521
Answer is hidden
Question 2755 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Consider the following statements about Bligh's Creep Theory. i. Creep length is the length of path traversed by percolating water ii. To increase the path of percolation vertical cut-off or sheet piles can be provided iii. Loss of head per unit creep length is hydraulic gradient iv. Bligh gave no criteria for the safety of weir against undermining Which of the following statements are correct?
A1, 2, 3
B2, 3, 4
C1, 3, 4
D1, 2, 3, 4
Answer is hidden
Question 2756 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to Bligh's creep theory, percolating water flows along ..............
Astraight path under the foundation of the dam
Bcircular path under the foundation of the dam
Cthe outline of the base of the foundation of the dam
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2757 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Bligh's theory of seepage assumes ..............
Aequal weightage to the horizontal and vertical creep
Bmore weightage to horizontal creep than vertical creep
Cless weightage to horizontal creep than vertical creep
Dloss of head follows the sine curve
Answer is hidden
Question 2758 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Calculate the Bligh's creep length in the hydraulic structure with u/s sheet pile of depth 5 m, length of the impervious layer is 54m and depth of d/s sheet pile is 8 m.
A44 m
B57 m
C80 m
D54 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2759 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
By using Bligh's theory for the design of the floor if the residual head at any section is 0.42 m and the specific gravity of a material is 2.4, what will be the thickness of the floor by providing F.O.S as 4/3?
A0.50 m
B0.40 m
C0.25 m
D0.30 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2760 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Lane's seepage theory is widely applied in the analysis of seepage through ..............
Asoil slopes
Bopen channels
Cgroundwater aquifers
Dretaining walls
Answer is hidden
Question 2761 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which method is evolved by Khosla for designing of hydraulic structures?
AMethod of gradients
BMethod of variables
CMethod of independent variables
DMethod of flow nets
Answer is hidden
Question 2762 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to Khosla's theory for seepage below a hydraulic structure the exit gradient in absence of a downstream sheet pile, is ..............
A0
B1
Cinfinite
Dnone of them
Answer is hidden
Question 2763 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Calculation of lanes creep length (u/s cutoff = 5 m, floor length = 54 m, d/s cutoff = 8 m) .............
A44 m
B57 m
C80 m
D54 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2764 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is used to separate the under sluice portion from main weir portion?
ADivide wall
BFish ladder
CMarginal bund
DCanal head regulator
Answer is hidden
Question 2765 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A channel in which neither silting nor scouring takes place is known as ..............
Anon-regime channel
Bscour channel
Ceconomic channel
Dregime channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2766 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In the design of impervious apron by khosla's theory for weirs, the horizontal length of the apron is founded by the consideration of?
ADesign discharge
Bscouring depth
Cvelocity of flow over weir
DPermissible exit gradient
Answer is hidden
Question 2767 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is not considered as river-training structure?
ASpur
BCanal bund
CLaunching apron
DMarginal guide bank
Answer is hidden
Question 2768 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the main aim of mean water training?
AEffective disposal of suspended and bed loads
BTo constant velocity
CFlood control
DProvide sufficient water depth
Answer is hidden
Question 2769 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which category of river training work deals with flood control?
ATraining for sediment
BLow water training
CTraining for depth
DTraining for discharge
Answer is hidden
Question 2770 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which category of river training work helps in navigation of the channels?
AMean water training
BTraining for depth
CTraining for discharge
DTraining for sediment
Answer is hidden
Question 2771 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The river training works are adopted on a river ..............
Ato pass high flood discharge safely and quickly through the reach
Bto direct and guide the river flow
Cto reduce bank erosion to a minimum
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2772 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Due to the unequal erosion of the river banks, the .............. section is developed in the river course.
Aattracting
Bmeandering
Cdeflecting
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2773 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The length of a meander is the distance along the river between the tangent point of one curve to the tangent point of ..............
Areverse curve
Bnext curve of the same order
Creverse curve plus the width of the river
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2774 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A river training work is generally required, when the river is ..............
Aaggrading type
Bdegrading type
Cmeandering type
Dstable type
Answer is hidden
Question 2775 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which river training structure is used to absorb the energy of flowing water and protect banks from degradation?
ASpur dikes
BRevetments
CGroynes
DRiprap
Answer is hidden
Question 2776 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The method used for training of rivers is ..............
Aguide bank
Bdyke or levee
Cgroyne
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2777 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Study the following statements: i) Levees are constructed parallel to river flow, ii) Spurs are constructed parallel to river flow, iii) Levees are constructed transverse to river flow, iv) Spurs are constructed transverse to river flow. The correct answer is ..............
A(i) and (ii)
B(i) and (iv)
C(ii) and (iii)
D(iii) and (iv)
Answer is hidden
Question 2778 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Levees are constructed ..............
Aparallel to river flow
Btransverse to river flow
Cat some inclination to river flow
Dsometimes parallel and sometimes transverse to river flow
Answer is hidden
Question 2779 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A levee on flood ..............
Aincreases the water surface elevation of the river at flood
Bdecreases the surface slope of the stream above the leeved portion
Cincreases the velocity and scouring action through leeved portion
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2780 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Levees in river training refer to ..............
Asmall dams constructed across the river
Bchannels constructed to divert flow away from settlements
Cstructures built to control sediment transport in the river
Draised embankments along the river to confine floodwaters
Answer is hidden
Question 2781 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Levees is also known as ..............
Agroyne
Bspur
Cbell bund
Dmarginal embankment
Answer is hidden
Question 2782 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Spur is also known as ..............
Agroyne
Bdyke
Cbell bund
Dleeves
Answer is hidden
Question 2783 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Spurs are constructed ..............
Aparallel to river flow
Btransverse to river flow
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2784 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Spurs are provided ..............
Ato train the flow of a river along a specified course
Bto confine width of river
Cto reduce peak flow
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2785 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Spurs should be designed for ..............
A10 years flood
B25 years flood
C50 years flood
D100 years flood
Answer is hidden
Question 2786 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The permeable temporary structure constructed on the river bank to protect it from erosion is known as ..............
Aspur
Bgroyne
Cguide bank
Drepelling groyne
Answer is hidden
Question 2787 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The earthen embankments constructed parallel to the river banks at some suitable distance for flood control, are known as ..............
Alevees
Bdykes
Criver walls
Dboth dykes and levees
Answer is hidden
Question 2788 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of following is correct about length of guide bank?
Au/s length is equal to d/s length
Bu/s length is lesser than d/s length
Cu/s length is greater than d/s length
Du/s length may be lesser or greater than d/s length
Answer is hidden
Question 2789 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Temporary spurs are also called ..............
Aweirs
Bcanals
Cbunds
Dbarrages
Answer is hidden
Question 2790 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A groyne ..............
Acontracts a river channel to improve its depth
Bsilts up the area in the vicinity by creating slack flow
Ctrains the flow along a certain course
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2791 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The purpose of constructing a 'Groyne' is to ..............
Aexpand a river channel to improve its depth
Bencourage meandering
Ctrain the flow along a certain course
Dreduce the silting in the river bed
Answer is hidden
Question 2792 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A repelling groyne is aligned ..............
Apointing upstream
Bpointing downstream
Cperpendicular to bank
Dparallel to bank
Answer is hidden
Question 2793 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to Khosla's theory, the exit gradient is given by ..............
Ad/(Hλ)
BH/d√(λ)
C\fracHπ√(λ)d
D(dλ)/H
Answer is hidden
Question 2794 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Find the % of independent variable as described in Khosla theory at the bottom of intermediate sheet pile of height 8m and impervious floor length 40 m.
A0.5
B0.2667
C0.16
D0.12
Answer is hidden
Question 2795 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to khosla, which of the following soil material has lowest safe exit gradient?
AShingle
BFine sand
CGravel
DSilt
Answer is hidden
Question 2796 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is not possible in an alluvial channel carrying sediments?
AMeandering
BDunes
CAnti-dunes
DRapids
Answer is hidden
Question 2797 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The safety of a hydraulic structure founded on a pervious foundation can be ensured by: i) Provision sufficient length of its concrete floor ii) Providing sufficient depth of its concrete floor, iii) Provision a downstream cutoff of some reasonable depth.
A1 and 2
B1 and 3
C2 and 3
D1, 2, 3
Answer is hidden
Question 2798 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the name of the gradient pressure at the exit end?
AGradient of pressure
BExit gradient
CStreamline gradient
DEquipotential gradient
Answer is hidden
Question 2799 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
For sand mixed with boulder and gravel and for loam soil, the safe hydraulic gradient should be ..............
A1/15 to 1/9
B1/5 to 1/9
C1/5 to 1/6
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2800 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A 20 m long horizontal concrete floor under a barrage on a permeable foundation retains % m head of water and has a 5 m deep downstream end pile. the exit gradient is..............
A1 in 4
B1 in 5
C1 in 6
D1 in 8
Answer is hidden
Question 2801 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Excluder structures are primarily designed to ..............
Aremove excess water from the canal
Bprevent the entry of silt and debris into the canal
Ccontrol the water level in the canal
Denhance the flow velocity in the canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2802 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Silt excluder is provided ..............
Ain the canal on the downstream of the head regulator
Bin the river on the downstream of the weir
Cin the river adjacent to the head regulator
Din the river far off from the weir on the upstream side
Answer is hidden
Question 2803 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Ejector structures are used to ..............
Aincrease the flow velocity in the canal
Bremove excess sediment from the canal
Cdivert water from the main canal to secondary canals
Dcontrol the water level in the canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2804 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The crest of undersluice potion of diversion headworks is kept ..............
Asame level as normal weir portion
Bat bed level of river
Cbelow bed level of river
Dslightly above bed level
Answer is hidden
Question 2805 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of weir is suitable for any type of foundation?
ASloping weir
BVertical drop weir
CParabolic weir
DMasonry sloping weir
Answer is hidden
Question 2806 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the main difference between a dam and weir?
AHeight and duration of storage
BCapacity of water
CMaterial used for construction
DLocation of the structure
Answer is hidden
Question 2807 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The following parameters relate to the design of weir on permeable foundations: 1. Scour Depth 2. Exit gradient 3. Uplift pressure 4. Unbalanced head ..............
A1 and 2
B1 and 4
C2 and 3
D3 and 4
Answer is hidden
Question 2808 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a barrage on pervious foundation, sheet piles are provided both upstream and downstream of the barrage to reduce uplift pressure and to prevent piping which one of the following statement is true in this regard?
ACompared to D/S sheet pile, the U/S pile is more effective in reducing uplift and piping
BCompared to U/S sheet pile, the D/s sheet pile is more effective in reducing uplift and piping
CD/s sheet pile is more effective in reducing uplift while u/s sheet pile is more effective in reducing piping
DU/S sheet pile is more effective in reducing uplift while D/S sheet pile is more effective in reducing piping
Answer is hidden
Question 2809 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The capacity of under sluices in a river barrage is usually equal to ..............
Atwo times the maximum discharge of the off-taking canal
Bmaximum winter discharge
C10 to 15 % of the maximum flood discharge
Dmaximum of a, b, and c
Answer is hidden
Question 2810 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is most efficient weir?
ABarrage
BVertical drop
CSloping
DParabolic
Answer is hidden
Question 2811 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The weir constructed such that the weight of structure is completely balanced by upward seepage force of water is ..............
Agravity weir
Bnon-gravity weir
Cglacis weir
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2812 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
When river flows through the plain terrain, then that stage is known as ..............
Adelta stage
Bboulder stage
Cthrough stage
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2813 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In which stage river velocity is maximum or very high?
Arocky stage
Bboulder stage
Calluvial stage
Ddelta stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2814 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
River trainings works generally done at ..............
Atrough stage
Bboulder stage
Cdelta stage
Drocky stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2815 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In which stage of river, head work of canal is suitable ..............
Arocky stage
Bboulder stage
Cdelta stage
Dtrough stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2816 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which one of the following stages does the river bed consist of a mixture of boulders, gravels, shingles and alluvial sand deposits created by itself?
ARocky stage
BIncised river stage
CBoulder river stage
DRivers in alluvial flood plains stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2817 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
An attracting groyne is the one which is ..............
Ainclined upstream
Binclined downstream
Cnormal to the bank
Dsame as repelling groyne
Answer is hidden
Question 2818 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A deflecting groyne in a river is ..............
Ainclined towards upstream
Bperpendicular to bank
Cinclined towards downstream
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2819 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A groyne with a curved head is known as ..............
Ahockey groyne
Bburmagroyne
Cdenehygroyne
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2820 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a deflecting groyne, the axis of the groyne with respect to the river flow direction makes ..............
Aan acute angle
Ban obtuse angle
Cright angle
Dan angle of 180 degree
Answer is hidden
Question 2821 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The angle of inclination of an attracting groyne with the bank may be in the range of ..............
A90° to 120°
B20° to 30°
C60° to 90°
D30° to 60°
Answer is hidden
Question 2822 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The spacing between adjacent spurs in river training work is generally kept between .............. times the spur length.
A1.5 to 2.5
B1 to 2
C2 to 2.5
D2.5 to 3.5
Answer is hidden
Question 2823 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The spacing of groynes at convex banks is .............. to the length of groynes.
Aequal
B1 to 1.5 times
C1.5 to 2.5 times
D2.5 to 3.5 times
Answer is hidden
Question 2824 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Guide banks are provided to ..............
Atrain the flow of a river along a specified course
Breduce the peak flood discharge
Cconfine the width of river
Dincrease the water way
Answer is hidden
Question 2825 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Length of upstream guidebank is .............. than downstream guidebank length.
Agreater
Blesser
Csame
Ddepends on site conditions
Answer is hidden
Question 2826 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to gales, the length of the u/s guide bank is taken as .............. according to the river discharge of 50,000 cumecs.
A0.25 L
B1.25 L to 1.5 L
C1.25 L
D1.5 L
Answer is hidden
Question 2827 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The length of the d/s guide bank is taken as .............. according to the river discharge of 20,000 cumecs.
A0.25 L
B1.25 L to 1.5 L
C1.0 L
D1.5 L
Answer is hidden
Question 2828 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The radius of d/s curve head in guide bank is kept equal to ..............
A0.225 L
B0.375 L
C0.45 L
D0.75 L
Answer is hidden
Question 2829 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
If D is scour depth measured below the bed, then the length of launching apron will generally be equal to ..............
A1D
B1.5D
C1.75D
D2D
Answer is hidden
Question 2830 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The thickness of stone pitching protected to withstand erosive action of the water currents in guide bank is ..............
A0.6 Q¹/3
B0.06 Q¹/3
C1.5 Q
D0.75 Q
Answer is hidden
Question 2831 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Launching apron is made of ..............
Astone masonry
Bbrick masonry
Cgabion
Dconcrete
Answer is hidden
Question 2832 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Where is the launching apron typically located in hydraulic structures?
AAt bed level
BAt a little distance below the surface
CAt canal bed
DAt the foundation level
Answer is hidden
Question 2833 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In guide bund, the depth of scour is severe in ..............
Anose
Bshank
Ctransition
Dtail
Answer is hidden
Question 2834 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Gabions are most commonly used in river training to ..............
Aregulate water flow
Benhance recreational activities
Cstore water for drinking purposes
Dprovide stability to the riverbed and banks
Answer is hidden
Question 2835 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Implementation of proper watershed practices will improve management ..............
Athe farm production
Bthe per-capita income
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2836 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The gated regulator, which is constructed in the parent canal near the site of an offtaking canal, is called a ..............
Acanal head regulator
Bdistributary head regulator
Ccross regulator
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2837 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A structure which is constructed at the head of the offtaking channel or distributary is called ..............
Acanal head regulator
Bdistributary head regulator
Ccross regulator
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2838 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The structure constructed at the head of canal offtake from a reservoir behind a weir or dam is ..............
Ahead regulator
Bcross regulator
Coff taking head regulator
Ddiversion headworks
Answer is hidden
Question 2839 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The supply passing down the parent channel is controlled by ..............
Ahead regulator
Bcross regulator
Cdistributary head regulator
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2840 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Canals taken off from ice fed rivers are ..............
Apermanent canal
Bperennial canal
Cnon-perennial canal
Dflood canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2841 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Canals taken off from rivers with or without regulators are ..............
Apermanent canal
Bperennial canal
Cnon-perennial canal
Dflood canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2842 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Canal head regulator ..............
Aregulates the supply of water entering the canal
Bcontrols the entry of silt in the canal
Cprevents the river flood from entering the canal
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2843 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A regulator is generally aligned at ..............
A90 degree to the weir
B90-110 degree to the weir
C110-120 degree to the weir
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2844 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Cross regulators are provided ..............
Ato rise the water level to its upstream during the periods of low discharge in parent channel
Bto maintain the head for flow in off taking canal
Cto help in closing the supply to downstream of the parent channel
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2845 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The function of cross regulator in irrigation ..............
Ato maintain the head for flow in off taking canal
Boverflow excessive flow water
Cregulate the water supplies in the distributaries
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2846 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
F.S.L. of a canal at its head with respect to parent channel is kept ..............
Aat the same level
B15 cm lower
C15 cm higher
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2847 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The depth of the crest of a scouring sluice below the crest of a head regulator, is generally kept ..............
A0.20 m
B1.20 m
C2.20 m
D3.20 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2848 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Regulators and escapes are designed to ..............
Aincrease the flow velocity in the canals
Bdivert water from the main canals to secondary canals
Ccontrol the water level in the canals
Dstore water for future use
Answer is hidden
Question 2849 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The structure provided to discharge extra water from canal is ..............
Acanal regulator
Bcanal fall
Ccanal outlet
Dcanal escape
Answer is hidden
Question 2850 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following canal structures is used to remove surplus water from a canal into a natural drain?
ACanal regulator
BCanal fall
CCanal outlet
DCanal escape
Answer is hidden
Question 2851 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Escapes in an irrigation system are designed to ..............
Aincrease the flow velocity in the canals
Bcontrol water diversion to different fields
Cprevent water seepage from the canals
Dsafely discharge excess water from the canals
Answer is hidden
Question 2852 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
For diversion of flood water of rivers, the type of canal constructed, is ..............
Aridge canal
Bperennial canal
Cinundation canal
Dcanal
Answer is hidden
Question 2853 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which hydraulic structure allows drainage to mix with the canal?
ACanal outlet
BCanal inlet
CModules
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2854 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
An outlet which maintains a constant discharge irrespective of fluctuation in the water levels of the supplying channel or water course, is known as ..............
Anon-modular outlet
Bsemi-modular outlet
Cflexible modular outlet
Drigid outlet/rigid module
Answer is hidden
Question 2855 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The sensitivity of a rigid module, is ..............
A2
B1.5
C1
Dzero
Answer is hidden
Question 2856 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
For proportionality, weir type outlets should be set at ..............
A0.3
B0.5
C0.6
D0.9
Answer is hidden
Question 2857 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A free pipe outlet is a ..............
Arigid module
Bflexible module
Cnon-modular module
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2858 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The type of irrigation module, which is usually considered as the best in our country, is ..............
Aadjustable orifice semi module
BPunjab open flume outlet
CKhanna's rigid module
DKennedy's gauge module
Answer is hidden
Question 2859 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Rate of change of discharge through an irrigation outlet becomes equal to the rate of change of water depth in the channel when its ..............
Aflexibility is 1
Bsensitivity is 1
Csetting is 1
Dsensitivity is 0
Answer is hidden
Question 2860 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Submerged pipe outlets are designed to ..............
Adischarge water above the water surface
Bdischarge water below the water surface
Cstore water within the pipe
Ddivert water from the main pipe
Answer is hidden
Question 2861 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A fall in a canal bed is generally provided, if ..............
Aground slope exceeds the designed bed slope
Bdesigned bed slope exceeds the ground slope
Cground slope is practically the same as the designed bed slope
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2862 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a Sarda type fall, the rectangular crest, may be used for discharge upto ..............
A6 cumecs
B10 cumecs
C14 cumecs
D20 cumecs
Answer is hidden
Question 2863 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In case of design of sarda type fall the length of crest is kept equal to ..............
Athickness of the canal
Bbed width of the canal
Cwater depth in the canal
Dhydraulic jump on the fall
Answer is hidden
Question 2864 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A straight glacis type fall with a baffle platform and a baffle wall is called ..............
Avertical dropfall
Bglacis fall
CMontague type fall
DInglis fall
Answer is hidden
Question 2865 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following can be used as a meter fall?
AVertical drop fall
BFlumed glacis fall
CUnflumed glacis fall
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2866 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following types of falls use parabolic glacis for energy dissipation?
AVertical drop fall
BGlacis fall
CMontague type fall
DInglis fall
Answer is hidden
Question 2867 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of canal requires cross drainage works?
AMain canal
BNavigation canal
CWatershed canal
DContour canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2868 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Cross drainage works can be avoided in ..............
Aridge canal
Bcontour canal
Cside slope canal
Dboth (a) and (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 2869 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Cross drainage works can't be avoided in ..............
Aridge canal
Bcontour canal
Cside slope canal
Dfeeder canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2870 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a syphon aqueduct ..............
Adrainage passes over the canal and F.S.L. of the canal is below the bottom of the drainage trough
Bdrainage passes over the canal and F.S.L. of the canal is above the bottom of the drainage trough
Ccanal passes over the drainage and H.F.L. of the drainage is above the bottom of the canal trough
Dcanal passes over the drainage and H.F.L. of the drainage is below the bottom of the canal trough
Answer is hidden
Question 2871 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What are cross drainage works carrying canal over natural drain called?
AAqueduct and syphon aqueduct
BCanal syphon and super passage
CAqueduct and super passage
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2872 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The canal and the natural drain meet each other at same level in ..............
Aaqueduct
Bsyphon
Clevel crossing
Dinlet and outlet
Answer is hidden
Question 2873 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
When a canal and a drainage approach each other at the same level, the structure so provided, is ..............
Aan aqueduct
Ba syphon
Ca level crossing
Dinlet and outlet
Answer is hidden
Question 2874 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The structure constructed to allow drainage water to flow under pressure through an inverted syphon below a canal, is called ..............
Asyphon
Bsuper passage
Csuper-aqueduct
Dsyphon aqueduct
Answer is hidden
Question 2875 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
When a canal flowing under pressure is carried below a natural drainage such that its F.S.L. touch the underside of the supporting structure, the structure so provided, is called ..............
Asyphon
Baqueduct
Csuper passage
Dsyphon-aqueduct
Answer is hidden
Question 2876 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The bed of the canal is lowered in case of ..............
Asyphon aqueduct
Bcanal syphon
Clevel crossing
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2877 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is correct?
AIn a level crossing, a crest with its top at the canal FSL is provided across the drainage at its u/s junction with canal.
BIn a level crossing, a regulator is provided across the drainage at its d/s
CIn a level crossing, a cross regulator is provided on the canal below the crossing
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2878 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a canal syphon, the flow is ..............
Aunder atmospheric pressure
Bpipe flow
Cwith critical velocity
Dunder negative pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 2879 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The velocity of drainage water in the barrels of a syphon-aqueduct is normally limited to ..............
A1-2 m/s
B2-3 m/s
C3-4 m/s
D4-5 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 2880 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In an aqueduct provided with a pucca bottom floor, the uplift will occur ..............
Aon the roof slab
Bon the bottom floor
Con both the roof slab as well as the bottom floor
Dnowhere, since the flow is free in the canal as well as in the drainage channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2881 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a syphon aqueduct, the worst condition of uplift on the roof occurs when ..............
Athe canal and drainage are flowing full
Bthe canal is flowing full and there is no drainage discharge
Cthe canal is empty and drainage is flowing full
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2882 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In case of aqueduct and syphon aqueduct, the maximum permissible reduction for piers width in waterway from Lacey's perimeter is ..............
A10%
B20%
C30%
D45%
Answer is hidden
Question 2883 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In canal system, outlet for the watercourse can't be provided at ..............
Amain canal
Bbranch canal
Cmajor distributary
Dminor distributary
Answer is hidden
Question 2884 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The minimum capacity of the escape channel is kept as .............. of the channel capacity.
A1/4
B1/3
C1/2
D2/3
Answer is hidden
Question 2885 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The drainage water is sometimes allowed to join the canal water to augment canal supplies through a hydraulic structure called ..............
Acanal outlet
Bcanal inlet
Cmodule
Dlevel crossing
Answer is hidden
Question 2886 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Water logging is a phenomenon in which ..............
Acrop patterns are rotated
Bsoil root zone becomes saturated due to over irrigation
Cerosion of soil
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2887 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Water logging is caused due to ..............
Ainadequate drainage facilities
Bover irrigation
Cpresence of impermeable strata
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2888 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following factor do not contribute to water-logging?
AInadequate drainage
BSeepage from unlined canals
CFrequent flooding
DExcessive tapping of groundwater
Answer is hidden
Question 2889 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What factor creates temporary and continuous waterlogging?
ASubmergence due to floods
BFlat topography
CImpervious obstruction
DExcessive rains
Answer is hidden
Question 2890 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
When a canal is considered, what factor causes its water logging?
ASeepage of water from high land
BSeepage through the canals
COver and intensive irrigation
DExcessive rain
Answer is hidden
Question 2891 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which factor depends upon the depressions of the terrain and causes water logging?
AIrregular topography
BImpervious obstruction
CInadequate surface drainage
DExcessive rains
Answer is hidden
Question 2892 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which factor leads to waterlogging due to obstruction?
AInadequate natural drainage
BFlat topography
CImpervious obstruction
DOver and intensive irrigation
Answer is hidden
Question 2893 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Water-logging of cropped land leads to reduced crop yields, due to ..............
Aill-aeration of root zone, causing lack of oxygen to plants
Bgrowth of water-loving plants interfering with the sown crop
Csurrounding of the root zone by the resultant saline water, which extracts, the good water from plant roots by osmosis
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2894 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which one is the affect of water-logging?
AReduce plant growth
BOxygen deficiency
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2895 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following doesn't prevent waterlogging?
AFrequent irrigation
BLining of canal
CSubsurface drainage installation
DReducing FSL of canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2896 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is a remedial measure for water-logging?
AControlling seepage from the canals
BBy lowering the F.S.L. of the canals
CQuick disposal of rainwater
DInstallation of lift irrigation systems
Answer is hidden
Question 2897 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which one of the following is not a remedial measure for waterlogging?
AGood drainage for irrigated land
BConjunctive use of water in the basin
CThe lining of canals and watercourses
DContour bunding
Answer is hidden
Question 2898 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Pick up the incorrect statement from the following:
AIntensive irrigation should be avoided in areas susceptible to water-logging
BExtensive irrigation should be adopted and in areas susceptible to water logging
CLift irrigation can help alleviate water-logging susceptibilities
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2899 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A recently reclaimed alkaline soil should preferably be sown with a salt resistant crop, like ..............
Awheat
Bbarseem
Ccotton
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2900 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Point out the incorrect statement, out of the following:
ASalinity is caused by water-logging
BWater logging is not caused by salinity
CSalinity subsides, when once the water logging is removed
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2901 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which factor is concerned with the growth of weeds?
AExcessive rains
BSubmergence due to floods
COver and intensive irrigation
DSeepage of water through the canals
Answer is hidden
Question 2902 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which one of the following deficiency cause the yellowing of leaves?
APhosphorus
BNitrogen
CPotasium
DIron
Answer is hidden
Question 2903 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The soil becomes practically infertile when its pH value is about ..............
A0
B7
C11
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2904 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The infertility of soil in water-logged areas is due to ..............
Adeath of bacteria causing nitrification
Bincrease of salinity
Cgrowth of weeds
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2905 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Soil becomes infertile when it is waterlogged due to ..............
Agrowing of weeds
Black of aeration between soil particles
Cexcessive nutrient availability
Dhigh soil pH
Answer is hidden
Question 2906 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Swampy land is ..............
Aill-aerated land
Bthe land where cultivation operations are impossible
Cland having deposition of alkali salts in the root zone of the crops
Dsaline land
Answer is hidden
Question 2907 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Alkaline soils are best reclaimed by ..............
Aleaching
Baddition of gypsum to soil
Cproviding good drainage
Daddition of gypsum to soil and leaching
Answer is hidden
Question 2908 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The operation, which washes out salts from the upper zone of the soil, is called ..............
Areclamation
Bleaching
Cefflorescence
Dsalinity
Answer is hidden
Question 2909 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A method used to determine the drainable surplus in an agricultural field is called ..............
Asoil salinity testing
Bsoil infiltration rate measurement
Cwater table monitoring
Ddrainage coefficient calculation
Answer is hidden
Question 2910 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Saline soil can be improved by ..............
Aleaching
Bpyrite application
Cgypsum application
Dlime application
Answer is hidden
Question 2911 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The method, which uses dead furrows on cropped farms for drainage of excess irrigation or rain water, is called ..............
Asurface inlet
Btile drainage
Cbedding
DFrench drain
Answer is hidden
Question 2912 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the cross sectional shape of shallow surface drains?
ATriangular shape
BCircular shape
CRectangular shape
DTrapezoidal shape
Answer is hidden
Question 2913 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What structure is constructed to carry back into the underground?
ALand grading
BRandom field drains
CSurface inlet
DOpen drains
Answer is hidden
Question 2914 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the name given to the drains used in depressions?
AShallow surface drains
BDeep surface drains
COpen drains
DDrains
Answer is hidden
Question 2915 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of open drains would be fully operative only in rainy season?
AShallow surface drains
BDeep surface drains
CFrench drain
DDrains
Answer is hidden
Question 2916 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of drains is used for small quantity of waters removal?
ABlind inlet
BShallow surface drains
CDeep surface drains
DOpen drains
Answer is hidden
Question 2917 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Pipe drains run ..............
Alongitudinally on the bed and transverse to the length of canal on the side slopes
Blongitudinally to the length of the canal on the side slopes and transverse to the bed
Clongitudinally to the length of the canal
Dtransverse to the bed
Answer is hidden
Question 2918 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a drainage system, the drain that intercepts and collects subsurface water is called ..............
Alateral drain
Bmain drain
Ccollector drain
Ddistributary drain
Answer is hidden
Question 2919 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The drainage provided to escape water from water logged area is ..............
Adrains
Bcanal
Coutlet
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2920 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of soils is benefited by using tile drainage?
ADry soils
BBlack soils
CWet soils
DRed soils
Answer is hidden
Question 2921 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Under what strata the tile drainage should not be placed?
AIn shallow depths
BMore pervious strata
CLess pervious strata
DPervious strata
Answer is hidden
Question 2922 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A tile drain is suitable for ..............
Adry soil
Bblack soil
Cwet soil
Dred soil
Answer is hidden
Question 2923 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
How can tile drainage help to increase crop yields?
AIncreases volume of soil
BIncreases water table level
CDecrease air circulation
DIncreases free gravity water
Answer is hidden
Question 2924 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In what chemical ways does tile drainage help in plant growth?
ADecreases alkalinity of soils
BIncreases salinity of soils
CIncreases nitrogen
DReduces and removes toxic substances
Answer is hidden
Question 2925 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What structure is surrounded around the tile drains when used in less pervious strata?
AEnvelope filters
BFrench drains
CBeehive grate
DSurface inlet
Answer is hidden
Question 2926 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
While growing crops in high water-table areas, open jointed drains, discharging into outlet drains, are sometimes laid below the cropped land to lower down the water-table and to remove the rain water effectively. These drains are called ..............
Atile drains
BFrench drains
Cgravity outlets
Dsurface
Answer is hidden
Question 2927 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of alternate layouts system for tile drainage has two mains?
AGrid iron system
BNatural system
CDouble main system
DHerring bone system
Answer is hidden
Question 2928 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A tile drain is laid below a cropped land to remove excess irrigation water, The Drainage Coefficient of this drain, is usually expressed as ..............
Acm of water depth removed from the drainage area per day
Bcum of water removed per second
Cpercentage of applied water, which is intercepted by this drain
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2929 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The spacing of tile drains to relieve water-logged land is directly proportional to the ..............
Adepth of drain below the water level
Bcoefficient of permeability of the soil to be drained
Cdepth of drain below the ground surface
Ddepth of impervious strata from the drain
Answer is hidden
Question 2930 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The tile drains are laid in longitudinal slope of ..............
A0.5 to 3%
B0.05 to 3%
C0.25 to 5%
D0.025 to 5%
Answer is hidden
Question 2931 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
How many duration of rainfall is recommended for the design of surface drainage in Hilly Region?
A24 hrs
B48 hrs
C12 hrs
D72 hrs
Answer is hidden
Question 2932 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In design of surface drainage in Terai region the initial water level in the field is assumed as ..............
A50 mm
B40 mm
C60 mm
D100 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2933 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
How many days of rainfall is recommended for the design of surface drainage in Terai Region?
A5 days
B6 days
C3 days
D4 days
Answer is hidden
Question 2934 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In design of surface drainage in Hilly region, the maximum water level is assumed as ..............
A100 mm
B200 mm
C300 mm
D400 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2935 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In design of surface drainage in Terai region the maximum water level persist for one day is assumed as ..............
A100 mm
B300 mm
C200 mm
D400 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 2936 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is not used as diversion headworks?
AFish ladder
BDrainage gallery
CCanal head regulator
DGuide bank
Answer is hidden
Question 2937 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the difference between a weir and a barrage?
ADischarge capacity
BNo Solid obstruction
CStorage capacity
DVelocity of flow
Answer is hidden
Question 2938 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the major differentiating point between weirs and barrages?
ASize of the structure
BSize of the water channel
CPresence of gates
DTheir usage/purpose
Answer is hidden
Question 2939 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
At which level, there is no provision of gates in head regulator?
AMin level
BNormal level
CMaximum level
DAt bed
Answer is hidden
Question 2940 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The structure at the head of regulator to remove silt is ..............
Asilt ejector
Bsilt excluder
Csilt extractor
Dall of the these
Answer is hidden
Question 2941 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The constructing of which structure help the fish in their migration ..............
AScouring sluices
BSilt excluder
CFish ladder
DDivide wall
Answer is hidden
Question 2942 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Fish ladder is provided on the side of ...............
Adivide wall
Bdiaphragm wall
Ccore wall
Dwing wall
Answer is hidden
Question 2943 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What can't you provide at head regulator?
ACanal aqueduct
BFish ladder
CDivide wall
DUnder sluice
Answer is hidden
Question 2944 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The structure that is used to separate the weir from under sluice is ..............
AGyrones
BDivide wall
CGuide bond
DMarginal bond
Answer is hidden
Question 2945 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Darcy's law is used to determine ...............
AThe hydraulic conductivity of soil
BThe flow rate of water through a porous medium
CThe evapotranspiration rate in an irrigation system
DThe sediment transport capacity in a canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2946 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Heave piping may occur on the ...............
Adownstream of sheet pile or cut off wall
Bupstream of sheet pile or cut off wall
Cbody of earth structure
Dbelow the foundation
Answer is hidden
Question 2947 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which one of the following purpose of providing the downstream sheet pile in a barrage?
ATo control failure due to piping by high value of exit gradient
Bto control failure due to scour
CTo stop failure due to Sliding
DTo stop failure due to uplift pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 2948 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The component of which force is to be counterbalanced so that the soil grains remain stable?
AUpthrust pressure forces
BForces due to velocity components
CPressure force
DSeepage water force
Answer is hidden
Question 2949 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
For a given discharge, efficiency of sedimentation tank can be increased by ..............
Aincreasing depth of basin
Bdecreasing depth
Cincreasing area of basin
Ddecreasing area of basin
Answer is hidden
Question 2950 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Bligh's seepage theory is commonly used for the analysis and design of ..............
Aearth dams
Birrigation canals
Cpumping stations
Dwater treatment plants
Answer is hidden
Question 2951 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the value of Bligh's coefficient for coarse-grained soil?
A15
B9
C12
D4521
Answer is hidden
Question 2952 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Consider the following statements about Bligh's Creep Theory. i. Creep length is the length of path traversed by percolating water ii. To increase the path of percolation vertical cut-off or sheet piles can be provided iii. Loss of head per unit creep length is hydraulic gradient iv. Bligh gave no criteria for the safety of weir against undermining Which of the following statements are correct?
A1, 2, 3
B2, 3, 4
C1, 3, 4
D1, 2, 3, 4
Answer is hidden
Question 2953 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to Bligh's creep theory, percolating water flows along ..............
Astraight path under the foundation of the dam
Bcircular path under the foundation of the dam
Cthe outline of the base of the foundation of the dam
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2954 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Bligh's theory of seepage assumes ..............
Aequal weightage to the horizontal and vertical creep
Bmore weightage to horizontal creep than vertical creep
Cless weightage to horizontal creep than vertical creep
Dloss of head follows the sine curve
Answer is hidden
Question 2955 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Calculate the Bligh's creep length in the hydraulic structure with u/s sheet pile of depth 5 m, length of the impervious layer is 54m and depth of d/s sheet pile is 8 m.
A44 m
B57 m
C80 m
D54 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2956 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
By using Bligh's theory for the design of the floor if the residual head at any section is 0.42 m and the specific gravity of a material is 2.4, what will be the thickness of the floor by providing F.O.S as 4/3?
A0.50 m
B0.40 m
C0.25 m
D0.30 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2957 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Lane's seepage theory is widely applied in the analysis of seepage through ..............
Asoil slopes
Bopen channels
Cgroundwater aquifers
Dretaining walls
Answer is hidden
Question 2958 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which method is evolved by Khosla for designing of hydraulic structures?
AMethod of gradients
BMethod of variables
CMethod of independent variables
DMethod of flow nets
Answer is hidden
Question 2959 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to Khosla's theory for seepage below a hydraulic structure the exit gradient in absence of a downstream sheet pile, is ..............
A0
B1
Cinfinite
Dnone of them
Answer is hidden
Question 2960 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Calculation of lanes creep length (u/s cutoff = 5 m, floor length = 54 m, d/s cutoff = 8 m) .............
A44 m
B57 m
C80 m
D54 m
Answer is hidden
Question 2961 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In lanes weighted creep theory, weightage factor for horizontal creep is given as ..............
A1
B2/3
C0.5
D1/3
Answer is hidden
Question 2962 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A channel in which neither silting nor scouring takes place is known as ..............
Anon-regime channel
Bscour channel
Ceconomic channel
Dregime channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2963 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In the design of impervious apron by khosla's theory for weirs, the horizontal length of the apron is founded by the consideration of?
ADesign discharge
Bscouring depth
Cvelocity of flow over weir
DPermissible exit gradient
Answer is hidden
Question 2964 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to Khosla's theory, the exit gradient is given by ..............
Ad/(Hλ)
BH/d√(λ)
C\fracHπ√(λ)d
D(dλ)/H
Answer is hidden
Question 2965 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Find the % of independent variable as described in Khosla theory at the bottom of intermediate sheet pile of height 8m and impervious floor length 40 m.
A0.5
B0.2667
C0.16
D0.12
Answer is hidden
Question 2966 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
According to khosla, which of the following soil material has lowest safe exit gradient?
AShingle
BFine sand
CGravel
DSilt
Answer is hidden
Question 2967 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is not possible in an alluvial channel carrying sediments?
AMeandering
BDunes
CAnti-dunes
DRapids
Answer is hidden
Question 2968 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The safety of a hydraulic structure founded on a pervious foundation can be ensured by: i) Provision sufficient length of its concrete floor ii) Providing sufficient depth of its concrete floor, iii) Provision a downstream cutoff of some reasonable depth.
A1 and 2
B1 and 3
C2 and 3
D1, 2, 3
Answer is hidden
Question 2969 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the name of the gradient pressure at the exit end?
AGradient of pressure
BExit gradient
CStreamline gradient
DEquipotential gradient
Answer is hidden
Question 2970 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
For sand mixed with boulder and gravel and for loam soil, the safe hydraulic gradient should be ..............
A1/15 to 1/9
B1/5 to 1/9
C1/5 to 1/6
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2971 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A 20 m long horizontal concrete floor under a barrage on a permeable foundation retains % m head of water and has a 5 m deep downstream end pile. the exit gradient is..............
A1 in 4
B1 in 5
C1 in 6
D1 in 8
Answer is hidden
Question 2972 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Excluder structures are primarily designed to ..............
Aremove excess water from the canal
Bprevent the entry of silt and debris into the canal
Ccontrol the water level in the canal
Denhance the flow velocity in the canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2973 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Silt excluder is provided ..............
Ain the canal on the downstream of the head regulator
Bin the river on the downstream of the weir
Cin the river adjacent to the head regulator
Din the river far off from the weir on the upstream side
Answer is hidden
Question 2974 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Ejector structures are used to ..............
Aincrease the flow velocity in the canal
Bremove excess sediment from the canal
Cdivert water from the main canal to secondary canals
Dcontrol the water level in the canal
Answer is hidden
Question 2975 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The crest of undersluice potion of diversion headworks is kept ..............
Asame level as normal weir portion
Bat bed level of river
Cbelow bed level of river
Dslightly above bed level
Answer is hidden
Question 2976 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of weir is suitable for any type of foundation?
ASloping weir
BVertical drop weir
CParabolic weir
DMasonry sloping weir
Answer is hidden
Question 2977 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What is the main difference between a dam and weir?
AHeight and duration of storage
BCapacity of water
CMaterial used for construction
DLocation of the structure
Answer is hidden
Question 2978 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The following parameters relate to the design of weir on permeable foundations: 1. Scour Depth 2. Exit gradient 3. Uplift pressure 4. Unbalanced head ..............
A1 and 2
B1 and 4
C2 and 3
D3 and 4
Answer is hidden
Question 2979 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a barrage on pervious foundation, sheet piles are provided both upstream and downstream of the barrage to reduce uplift pressure and to prevent piping which one of the following statement is true in this regard?
ACompared to D/S sheet pile, the U/S pile is more effective in reducing uplift and piping
BCompared to U/S sheet pile, the D/s sheet pile is more effective in reducing uplift and piping
CD/s sheet pile is more effective in reducing uplift while u/s sheet pile is more effective in reducing piping
DU/S sheet pile is more effective in reducing uplift while D/S sheet pile is more effective in reducing piping
Answer is hidden
Question 2980 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The capacity of under sluices in a river barrage is usually equal to ..............
Atwo times the maximum discharge of the off-taking canal
Bmaximum winter discharge
C10 to 15 % of the maximum flood discharge
Dmaximum of a, b, and c
Answer is hidden
Question 2981 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is most efficient weir?
ABarrage
BVertical drop
CSloping
DParabolic
Answer is hidden
Question 2982 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The weir constructed such that the weight of structure is completely balanced by upward seepage force of water is ..............
Agravity weir
Bnon-gravity weir
Cglacis weir
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2983 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
When river flows through the plain terrain, then that stage is known as ..............
Adelta stage
Bboulder stage
Cthrough stage
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2984 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In which stage river velocity is maximum or very high?
Arocky stage
Bboulder stage
Calluvial stage
Ddelta stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2985 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
River trainings works generally done at ..............
Atrough stage
Bboulder stage
Cdelta stage
Drocky stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2986 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In which stage of river, head work of canal is suitable ..............
Arocky stage
Bboulder stage
Cdelta stage
Dtrough stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2987 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which one of the following stages does the river bed consist of a mixture of boulders, gravels, shingles and alluvial sand deposits created by itself?
ARocky stage
BIncised river stage
CBoulder river stage
DRivers in alluvial flood plains stage
Answer is hidden
Question 2988 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The canal and the natural drain meet each other at same level in ..............
Aaqueduct
Bsyphon
Clevel crossing
Dinlet and outlet
Answer is hidden
Question 2989 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
When a canal and a drainage approach each other at the same level, the structure so provided, is ..............
Aan aqueduct
Ba syphon
Ca level crossing
Dinlet and outlet
Answer is hidden
Question 2990 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The structure constructed to allow drainage water to flow under pressure through an inverted syphon below a canal, is called ..............
Asyphon
Bsuper passage
Csuper-aqueduct
Dsyphon aqueduct
Answer is hidden
Question 2991 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
When a canal flowing under pressure is carried below a natural drainage such that its F.S.L. touch the underside of the supporting structure, the structure so provided, is called ..............
Asyphon
Baqueduct
Csuper passage
Dsyphon-aqueduct
Answer is hidden
Question 2992 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The bed of the canal is lowered in case of ..............
Asyphon aqueduct
Bcanal syphon
Clevel crossing
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2993 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following is correct?
AIn a level crossing, a crest with its top at the canal FSL is provided across the drainage at its u/s junction with canal.
BIn a level crossing, a regulator is provided across the drainage at its d/s
CIn a level crossing, a cross regulator is provided on the canal below the crossing
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2994 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a canal syphon, the flow is ..............
Aunder atmospheric pressure
Bpipe flow
Cwith critical velocity
Dunder negative pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 2995 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The velocity of drainage water in the barrels of a syphon-aqueduct is normally limited to ..............
A1-2 m/s
B2-3 m/s
C3-4 m/s
D4-5 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 2996 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In an aqueduct provided with a pucca bottom floor, the uplift will occur ..............
Aon the roof slab
Bon the bottom floor
Con both the roof slab as well as the bottom floor
Dnowhere, since the flow is free in the canal as well as in the drainage channel
Answer is hidden
Question 2997 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In a syphon aqueduct, the worst condition of uplift on the roof occurs when ..............
Athe canal and drainage are flowing full
Bthe canal is flowing full and there is no drainage discharge
Cthe canal is empty and drainage is flowing full
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 2998 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In case of aqueduct and syphon aqueduct, the maximum permissible reduction for piers width in waterway from Lacey's perimeter is ..............
A10%
B20%
C30%
D45%
Answer is hidden
Question 2999 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In canal system, outlet for the watercourse can't be provided at ..............
Amain canal
Bbranch canal
Cmajor distributary
Dminor distributary
Answer is hidden
Question 3000 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The minimum capacity of the escape channel is kept as .............. of the channel capacity.
A1/4
B1/3
C1/2
D2/3
Answer is hidden
Question 3001 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The drainage water is sometimes allowed to join the canal water to augment canal supplies through a hydraulic structure called ..............
Acanal outlet
Bcanal inlet
Cmodule
Dlevel crossing
Answer is hidden
Question 3002 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Water logging is a phenomenon in which ..............
Acrop patterns are rotated
Bsoil root zone becomes saturated due to over irrigation
Cerosion of soil
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3003 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Water logging is caused due to ..............
Ainadequate drainage facilities
Bover irrigation
Cpresence of impermeable strata
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3004 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which of the following factor do not contribute to water-logging?
AInadequate drainage
BSeepage from unlined canals
CFrequent flooding
DExcessive tapping of groundwater
Answer is hidden
Question 3005 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What factor creates temporary and continuous waterlogging?
ASubmergence due to floods
BFlat topography
CImpervious obstruction
DExcessive rains
Answer is hidden
Question 3006 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
When a canal is considered, what factor causes its water logging?
ASeepage of water from high land
BSeepage through the canals
COver and intensive irrigation
DExcessive rain
Answer is hidden
Question 3007 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which factor depends upon the depressions of the terrain and causes water logging?
AIrregular topography
BImpervious obstruction
CInadequate surface drainage
DExcessive rains
Answer is hidden
Question 3008 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which factor leads to waterlogging due to obstruction?
AInadequate natural drainage
BFlat topography
CImpervious obstruction
DOver and intensive irrigation
Answer is hidden
Question 3009 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Water-logging of cropped land leads to reduced crop yields, due to ..............
Aill-aeration of root zone, causing lack of oxygen to plants
Bgrowth of water-loving plants interfering with the sown crop
Csurrounding of the root zone by the resultant saline water, which extracts, the good water from plant roots by osmosis
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3010 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In what chemical ways does tile drainage help in plant growth?
ADecreases alkalinity of soils
BIncreases salinity of soils
CIncreases nitrogen
DReduces and removes toxic substances
Answer is hidden
Question 3011 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
What structure is surrounded around the tile drains when used in less pervious strata?
AEnvelope filters
BFrench drains
CBeehive grate
DSurface inlet
Answer is hidden
Question 3012 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
While growing crops in high water-table areas, open jointed drains, discharging into outlet drains, are sometimes laid below the cropped land to lower down the water-table and to remove the rain water effectively. These drains are called ..............
Atile drains
BFrench drains
Cgravity outlets
Dsurface
Answer is hidden
Question 3013 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
Which type of alternate layouts system for tile drainage has two mains?
AGrid iron system
BNatural system
CDouble main system
DHerring bone system
Answer is hidden
Question 3014 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
A tile drain is laid below a cropped land to remove excess irrigation water, The Drainage Coefficient of this drain, is usually expressed as ..............
Acm of water depth removed from the drainage area per day
Bcum of water removed per second
Cpercentage of applied water, which is intercepted by this drain
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3015 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The spacing of tile drains to relieve water-logged land is directly proportional to the ..............
Adepth of drain below the water level
Bcoefficient of permeability of the soil to be drained
Cdepth of drain below the ground surface
Ddepth of impervious strata from the drain
Answer is hidden
Question 3016 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
The tile drains are laid in longitudinal slope of ..............
A0.5 to 3%
B0.05 to 3%
C0.25 to 5%
D0.025 to 5%
Answer is hidden
Question 3017 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
How many duration of rainfall is recommended for the design of surface drainage in Hilly Region?
A24 hrs
B48 hrs
C12 hrs
D72 hrs
Answer is hidden
Question 3018 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In design of surface drainage in Terai region the initial water level in the field is assumed as ..............
A50 mm
B40 mm
C60 mm
D100 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3019 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
How many days of rainfall is recommended for the design of surface drainage in Terai Region?
A5 days
B6 days
C3 days
D4 days
Answer is hidden
Question 3020 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In design of surface drainage in Hilly region, the maximum water level is assumed as ..............
A100 mm
B200 mm
C300 mm
D400 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3021 of 4146Ch 7 · Irrigation and Drainage
In design of surface drainage in Terai region the maximum water level persist for one day is assumed as ..............
A100 mm
B300 mm
C200 mm
D400 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3022 of 4146Ch 8 · Planning of Hydropower Projects
Gross (theoretical) hydropower potential is best described as: consideration of losses or feasibility
AOnly the portion of potential that is currently economically viable
BThe total power theoretically available from all water resources, computed from total head and flow with no
COnly the potential already harnessed by existing plants
DA value that is always identical to economic potential
Answer is hidden
Question 3023 of 4146Ch 8 · Planning of Hydropower Projects
Economic hydropower potential, compared to technical potential, is: actual development planning
AAlways larger than technical potential
BGenerally the smallest of the three potential categories (gross, technical, economic), and most relevant to
CIdentical to gross potential in all cases
DUnrelated to prevailing cost and market conditions
Answer is hidden
Question 3024 of 4146Ch 8 · Planning of Hydropower Projects
The feasibility study stage of hydropower project development is characterized by:
AA broad, low-detail identification of potential sites using available maps only
BA detailed technical, economic, environmental, and social assessment of a specific site/scheme
COnly the construction phase of the project
DOnly the ongoing operation phase after commissioning
Answer is hidden
Question 3025 of 4146Ch 8 · Planning of Hydropower Projects
The correct general sequence of hydropower project development stages is:
Question 3040 of 4146Ch 8 · Power and Energy Potential Study
High-head hydropower plants (typically greater than 100 m) are generally most suited to:
ALow-head-specific turbine types only
BTurbine types suited to high head and typically lower discharge, such as Pelton turbines
CNo specific turbine type; all turbines perform identically regardless of head
DOnly pumped storage configurations
Answer is hidden
Question 3041 of 4146Ch 8 · Power and Energy Potential Study
Load factor, as used in power system/hydropower planning, is defined as:
APeak load divided by installed capacity
BAverage load divided by peak load
CInstalled capacity divided by peak load
DAverage power output divided by average load
Answer is hidden
Question 3042 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
A gravity dam resists water pressure primarily through:
AArch action transferring load to the valley sides
BIts own weight (self-weight)
CA series of buttresses supporting a sloping face
DReversible pump-turbine action
Answer is hidden
Question 3043 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
An arch dam requires which site condition to be structurally effective?
AA very wide, flat valley with weak abutments
BA narrow valley with strong, stable abutments/valley walls capable of resisting arch thrust
CNo specific valley shape requirement at all
DOnly a valley with no bedrock present
Answer is hidden
Question 3044 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
Piping failure in a dam refers to:
AOvertopping of the dam crest during a flood
BProgressive internal erosion along a seepage path within the dam or foundation
CFailure of the spillway gates to open
DA structural failure of the powerhouse only
Answer is hidden
Question 3045 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
In the stability analysis of a gravity dam, the check against overturning primarily ensures: overturning moments
AThe dam's total weight is minimized
BThe resultant of all forces remains within the base, with an adequate factor of safety on the ratio of resisting to
CThe dam has zero uplift pressure at its base
DThe spillway capacity exceeds the probable maximum flood
Answer is hidden
Question 3046 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
Forces considered in the stability analysis of a gravity dam include all of the following EXCEPT:
ASelf-weight of the dam
BUplift pressure beneath the base
CSilt pressure from sediment accumulation
DThe crop water requirement of a nearby irrigation command area
Answer is hidden
Question 3047 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
A grout curtain, as a seepage control measure in dam foundations, functions by:
AIncreasing the foundation's permeability deliberately
BForming a line of grouted boreholes that creates a low-permeability barrier within the foundation
CReplacing the need for any drainage galleries
DOnly being applicable to embankment dams, never gravity dams
Answer is hidden
Question 3048 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
Drainage galleries within a dam primarily serve to:
AIncrease uplift pressure beneath the dam
BRelieve uplift pressure by collecting and draining seepage before it builds up excessive pressure
CReplace the function of the spillway entirely
DProvide access for turbine installation only
Answer is hidden
Question 3049 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
An ogee (overflow) spillway is characterized by:
AA vertical drop with no curved profile
BA smoothly curved crest profile following the shape of the underside of a free-falling jet
CBeing used exclusively for underground powerhouses
DHaving no relationship to flood discharge capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 3050 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
A flip bucket (ski-jump) energy dissipator is particularly used for: plunge pool
ALow-head dams only, where energy dissipation is not a concern
BHigh-head dams, projecting the discharged jet away from the dam toe to dissipate energy in the air and at a
CIrrigation canal regulators exclusively
DReplacing the need for any spillway
Answer is hidden
Question 3051 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Storage Plants
Radial (tainter) gates and vertical lift gates are commonly used at:
AOnly the powerhouse draft tube
BSpillway crests and intakes, for discharge control
COnly within the settling basin of a run-of-river plant
DOnly at pumped storage lower reservoirs
Answer is hidden
Question 3052 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
The primary function of a gravel trap in a run-of-river (ROR) plant's headworks is to:
ARemove fine suspended sediment before the settling basin
BTrap coarser bed load particles that enter through the intake, before they reach the settling basin/headrace
CGenerate electrical power directly
DReplace the function of the diversion weir
Answer is hidden
Question 3053 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
A skimmer wall/sill at an ROR plant's intake is primarily used to:
AIncrease the entry of bed load and floating debris into the intake
BExclude bed load and floating debris from entering the intake
CReplace the function of the settling basin entirely
DOnly regulate the powerhouse's electrical output
Answer is hidden
Question 3054 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
The settling basin in an ROR plant is primarily designed to: the turbine
ATrap only very coarse bed load particles
BReduce flow velocity sufficiently to allow suspended particles above a design size to settle out before reaching
CIncrease flow velocity to flush all sediment downstream immediately
DGenerate electrical power directly
Answer is hidden
Question 3055 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
The concentration approach to settling basin design, compared to the practice (empirical) approach, bases the design on: efficiency and basin dimensions
AOnly past project experience, with no reference to downstream requirements
BThe allowable sediment concentration permitted downstream, working back to determine the required trapping
CThe crop water requirement of a nearby command area
DThe dam's stability analysis
Answer is hidden
Question 3056 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
The volume of sediment expected to accumulate in a settling basin over an operational period is estimated from:
AOnly the basin's physical dimensions, with no reference to sediment inflow
BThe expected sediment inflow rate and the basin's trapping efficiency for the relevant particle sizes
CThe turbine's specific speed
DThe dam's spillway capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 3057 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
Continuous flushing of a settling basin, as opposed to intermittent flushing, involves:
AA single, one-time flushing event with no repetition
BA small continuous flow maintained through flushing channels/conduits during normal operation
CFlushing only once every several years, regardless of sediment load
DNo flushing mechanism at all
Answer is hidden
Question 3058 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
Intermittent flushing of a settling basin, compared to continuous flushing, is characterized by: generation
AA constant, uninterrupted small flushing flow at all times
BPeriodic, often more thorough flushing operations that may require a brief interruption or reduction of power
CNever requiring any interruption to generation
DBeing unrelated to sediment accumulation rates
Answer is hidden
Question 3059 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
The flushing frequency for a settling basin is determined by comparing: performance drops below an acceptable level
AThe turbine's rated power against the generator's rated voltage
BThe rate of sediment accumulation against the basin's available sediment storage capacity before
CThe dam's height against its base width
DThe crop's base period against its delta
Answer is hidden
Question 3060 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
Bed load, as distinct from suspended load, refers to sediment that:
AIs carried in suspension throughout the full flow depth
BMoves along or near the riverbed, generally as coarser particles
CConsists entirely of dissolved minerals
DNever enters the intake under any circumstances
Answer is hidden
Question 3061 of 4146Ch 8 · Headworks of Run-of-River (ROR) Plants
Effective sediment management at an ROR plant's headworks (intake exclusion, gravel trap, settling basin, flushing) is primarily important because: not adequately excluded/removed
ASediment has no effect on turbine components
BAbrasive sediment particles can cause significant wear damage to turbine runners and other components if
CIt only affects the powerhouse's architectural appearance
DIt is relevant only to storage plants, never to ROR plants
Answer is hidden
Question 3062 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
Circular cross-sections are generally preferred for hydraulic tunnels operating under high internal pressure because they are:
AThe least hydraulically efficient shape available
BThe most hydraulically efficient and structurally sound shape for high-pressure conditions
COnly suitable for low-pressure, free-flow tunnels
DNever used in tunnel design
Answer is hidden
Question 3063 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
Tunnel lining in a hydropower water conveyance tunnel serves to:
AIncrease hydraulic friction losses deliberately
BProvide structural support, reduce friction losses, and help control seepage
CEliminate the need for any hydraulic design calculations
DOnly serve a decorative purpose with no functional benefit
Answer is hidden
Question 3064 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
The primary function of a forebay in a hydropower conveyance system is to: penstock intake
AGenerate electrical power directly
BProvide transition/buffer storage to accommodate flow fluctuations, allow sediment settling, and house the
CServe as the main dam structure
DReplace the need for a settling basin upstream entirely
Answer is hidden
Question 3065 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
A surge tank is provided on a pressure conduit system primarily to: the powerhouse
AIncrease the water hammer pressure rise deliberately
BAbsorb pressure fluctuations (water hammer) from rapid load changes, by providing a free water surface near
CReplace the function of the penstock entirely
DOnly function during normal, steady-state operation with no load changes
Answer is hidden
Question 3066 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
A restricted-orifice surge tank, compared to a simple surge tank, is characterized by:
AHaving no connection to the tunnel at all
BA throttled connection to the tunnel that damps pressure oscillations more quickly
CBeing identical in function to a simple surge tank with no distinguishing feature
DOnly being used for low-head plants
Answer is hidden
Question 3067 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
A pressure shaft, as used in hydropower conveyance systems, is best described as: pressure
AAn above-ground steel pipeline identical to a penstock in every respect
BA bored/excavated shaft or tunnel through rock, functionally similar to a penstock, often steel-lined at high
CA structure used only for sediment flushing
DA type of turbine, not a conveyance structure
Answer is hidden
Question 3068 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
Hydraulic transients (water hammer) in a penstock are caused by:
ASteady, unchanging flow conditions
BA rapid change in flow velocity, such as valve/gate closure or sudden turbine load rejection/acceptance
COnly the tunnel's lining material
DThe dam's spillway capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 3069 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
Water hammer analysis is a critical consideration in the design of:
AOnly the dam's spillway
BThe penstock/pressure shaft wall thickness and the sizing of the surge tank
COnly the crop water requirement of an irrigation command area
DOnly the settling basin's trapping efficiency
Answer is hidden
Question 3070 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
The penstock in a hydropower plant conveys water:
AFrom the river directly to the settling basin
BUnder pressure from the forebay/surge tank to the turbine
CFrom the tailrace back to the reservoir
DOnly during plant commissioning, never during normal operation
Answer is hidden
Question 3071 of 4146Ch 8 · Water Conveyance Structures
A chamber (gallery) surge tank, compared to a simple surge tank of the same height, offers:
AA smaller available surge volume
BA larger available surge volume, due to enlarged chambers at the top/bottom of the shaft
CNo difference in surge volume at all
DOnly reduced structural complexity, with a smaller footprint
Answer is hidden
Question 3072 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
A Pelton turbine is classified as an impulse turbine because: runner
AWater remains under pressure throughout its passage through the runner
BA jet of water impinges on bucket-shaped vanes at atmospheric pressure, with no pressure drop across the
CIt is used exclusively for low-head, high-discharge applications
DIt has no runner at all
Answer is hidden
Question 3073 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
A Francis turbine is generally best suited to:
AHigh head, low discharge applications only
BMedium head, medium discharge applications, with pressure dropping across the runner
COnly low-head, very high-discharge applications
DApplications with zero flow variation
Answer is hidden
Question 3074 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
A Kaplan turbine, suited to low head and high discharge, is distinguished by: over a range of flow conditions
AFixed, non-adjustable radial vanes only, with no axial flow component
BAxial flow through the runner with adjustable (or fixed, in a propeller variant) blades, allowing good efficiency
COperating exclusively at atmospheric pressure, like a Pelton turbine
DBeing used only for very high head applications
Answer is hidden
Question 3075 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
Specific speed (Ns) is used in turbine engineering primarily to: Pelton and high values suited to Kaplan turbines
ADetermine the dam's stability against overturning
BClassify and help select the appropriate turbine type for a given head and power, with low values suited to
CCalculate the settling basin's trapping efficiency
DDetermine the crop water requirement
Answer is hidden
Question 3076 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
A scroll case (spiral casing) in a reaction turbine installation functions to:
ARecover residual kinetic energy after the runner
BDistribute the incoming flow uniformly and smoothly around the runner's periphery
CRegulate the turbine's rotational speed directly
DGenerate electrical power directly, bypassing the runner
Answer is hidden
Question 3077 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
A draft tube, used with reaction turbines, primarily serves to: level while still recovering the head difference
AIncrease the velocity of water leaving the runner without any energy recovery
BRecover residual kinetic energy from water leaving the runner and allow the turbine to be set above tailwater
CReplace the function of the scroll case
DOnly function in Pelton turbine installations
Answer is hidden
Question 3078 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
Governors in a hydropower plant primarily function to: maintaining stable frequency
AIncrease the turbine's specific speed permanently
BRegulate turbine speed/output by adjusting gate or needle/deflector position in response to load changes,
CReplace the function of the generator entirely
DOnly operate during initial plant commissioning
Answer is hidden
Question 3079 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
Generators used in hydropower plants are typically:
AInduction generators exclusively, with no synchronous option
BSynchronous generators, rated by parameters including rated power, voltage, and power factor
CDevices that convert electrical energy into mechanical energy, the reverse of a generator's actual function
DUnrelated to the turbine's rotational output
Answer is hidden
Question 3080 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
An underground powerhouse, compared to a surface powerhouse, is generally chosen:
AOnly for very low-head schemes with minimal geological constraints
BFor very high head/large schemes or where surface siting is geologically or otherwise constrained
COnly when no turbine-generator equipment is required
DBecause it is always cheaper than a surface powerhouse in every case
Answer is hidden
Question 3081 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydro-electric Machines and Powerhouse
The overall dimensions of a powerhouse are primarily determined by: clearances
AThe crop water requirement of a nearby irrigation command area
BThe equipment's size and layout, crane requirements for installation/maintenance, and necessary operational
COnly the tunnel lining material used upstream
DThe settling basin's flushing frequency
Answer is hidden
Question 3082 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
As per water resources act 2049, the second priority for water use is .........................
Adomestic use
Birrigation
Canimal husbandries and fisheries
Dhydro-electricity
Answer is hidden
Question 3083 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The first hydroelectric power plant is .........................
AChandrajyoti hydroelectric plant [500 kW]
BVulcan Street Plant [12.5kW]
CSidrapong Hydroelectric Plant [2 x 65 kW]
DShilongha Hydropower Station [240 kW]
Answer is hidden
Question 3084 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The first hydropower of Nepal from private sector is .........................
ABudigandaki
BChameliya
CKhimti
DTrisuli 3B
Answer is hidden
Question 3085 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The third hydropower plant based on hydropower development in Nepal is .........................
AKhimti
BPharping, 250 kW
CPanauti
DKulekhani
Answer is hidden
Question 3086 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The First Hydropower of Nepal is ......................... having capacity of ......................... kW of each turbine.
APharping, 500
BPharping, 250
CPharping, 1000
DPharping, 100
Answer is hidden
Question 3087 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The date of construction and capacity of Pharping hydropower plant is .........................
A1911 AD, 500 KW
B1811 AD, 500 KW
C1911 AD, 100 KW
D1968 AD, 500 KW
Answer is hidden
Question 3088 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which province of Nepal has highest hydroelectric power production?
AKarnali
BGandaki
CKoshi
DBagmati
Answer is hidden
Question 3089 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The largest hydropower of Nepal has installed capacity of .........................
A1200 MW
B900 MW
C456 MW
D144 MW
Answer is hidden
Question 3090 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Based on capacity, the largest peaking hydropower plant of Nepal is .........................
AKaligandaki A
BMarsyangdi
CMiddle Marsyangdi
DUpper Tamakoshi
Answer is hidden
Question 3091 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is the type of canal drop hydropower project?
AChatar HPP [3.2 MW]
BFewa HPP [1 MW]
CGandak HPP [15 MW]
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3092 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
......................... is the second largest country in total installed capacity of hydropower plant.
AChina
BBrazil
CU.S.A.
DCanada
Answer is hidden
Question 3093 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The second largest hydropower project of the world is .........................
AXiluodu hydropower project
BBaihetan dam hydropower project
CItaipu dam hydropower project
DThree George dam hydropower project
Answer is hidden
Question 3094 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the right sequential order for Power development nowadays in case of Nepal?
APPA-survey license-testing and commissioning-financial closure
BSurvey license-PPA-financial closure-testing and commissioning
CFinancial closure-survey license-PPA-testing and commissioning
DPPA-financial closure-survey license-testing and commissioning
Answer is hidden
Question 3095 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
According to Nepal Electricity Authority (NEA) policy 2001, which of the following is the first priority of the policy?
ATo increase electricity generation through renewable energy sources.
BTo ensure reliable and affordable electricity supply to consumers
CTo promote foreign investment in the electricity sector
DTo develop hydropower projects for export-oriented purpose
Answer is hidden
Question 3096 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following was not good for hydropower development policy?
Ato develop hydroelectricity in cheapest rate
Bto develop hydro-electricity in adequate amount
Cto import electricity from one country to reduce loadshedding
Dto increase involvement of private sector in hydropower
Answer is hidden
Question 3097 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The objective of hydropower development policy is .........................
Ato generate electricity at low cost by utilizing the water resources
Bto extend reliable and qualitative electric service throughout nepal at a reasonable price
Cto render support for the development of rural economy
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3098 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The Nepal power system master plan aims to increase installed capacity by 2040 AD to .........................
A4000 MW
B1000 MW
C17000 MW
D23000 MW
Answer is hidden
Question 3099 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
For the development of hydropower project, developer need approval from .........................
A5 ministries and 13 departments
B5 ministries and 23 departments
C7 ministries and 13 departments
D7 ministries and 23 departments
Answer is hidden
Question 3100 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following acts was enacted in Nepal in 2041 BS?
AElectricity Act
BHydropower Act
CEnergy Act
DRenewable Energy Act
Answer is hidden
Question 3101 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
From when independent power producer [IPP] start to develop the hydropower project in Nepal?
A1990 AD
B1992 AD
C2001 AD
D2008 AD
Answer is hidden
Question 3102 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Electricity regulation is approved by .........................
AMinistry of Energy, Water Resources and Irrigation
BGovernment of Nepal
CNepal Electricity Authority
DDepartment of Electricity Development
Answer is hidden
Question 3103 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The survey license for the hydropower project is provided for the maximum period of .........................
A2 yrs
B3 yrs
C5 yrs
D15 yrs
Answer is hidden
Question 3104 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The transmission and distribution license for the hydropower project is provided for .........................
A5 yrs
B25 yrs
C30 yrs
D35 yrs
Answer is hidden
Question 3105 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The hydropower generation license provided in Nepal for domestic-market oriented project for .........................
A20 yrs
B25 yrs
C30 yrs
D35 yrs
Answer is hidden
Question 3106 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
NEA purchase the electricity from storage plant through PPA for wet and dry season for .........................
ANRS. 4.8 and NRS. 8.4 per unit
BNRS. 4.8 and NRS. 10.55 per unit
CNRS. 7.1 and NRS. 12.4 per unit
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3107 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
There is provision of negotiable rate of Royalty structure for hydropower project above .........................
A10 MW
B100 MW
C500 MW
D1000MW
Answer is hidden
Question 3108 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The rated capacity of hydropower projects to be eligible for foreign currency PPA for project above .........................
A1 MW
B25 MW
C100 MW
D250 MW
Answer is hidden
Question 3109 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A hydroelectric generating station is supplied from a reservoir of capacity 6 million m³ at a head of 170 m. Determine the potential energy stored in this water.
A10 × 10⁹ J
B10 × 10¹⁰ J
C10 × 10¹¹ J
D10 × 10¹² J
Answer is hidden
Question 3110 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A large hydropower station has a head of 324 metre and an average flow of 1370 m³/sec. The available hydraulic power from this station will be .........................
A4.35 GW
B4.15 GW
C4.47 GW
D4.73 GW
Answer is hidden
Question 3111 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A canal drop is 6m and discharge available through the turbine is 50 cumec. Find the electrical energy available.
A2352 KW
B2352 MW
C2.352 KW
D235.2 KW
Answer is hidden
Question 3112 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Calculate the power of the plant with following data : H = 423.5 m, head loss = 2.5 m, Q = 0.9 m³/s and η = 85% .........................
A3159.43 kW
B3159.45 W
C3159.45 MW
D3159.45 kW
Answer is hidden
Question 3113 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which factor determines the head available for power generation in a hydropower plant?
AThe difference in elevation between the water source and the turbine
BThe distance between the water source and the turbine
CThe size of the penstock
DThe diameter of the turbine blades
Answer is hidden
Question 3114 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The difference of head at the point of entry and exit of turbine is ..........
Adesign head
Bgross head
Ceffective head
Drated head
Answer is hidden
Question 3115 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
For reaction turbine, the effective head for the hydro-electric power plant is ..........
Ahead base level - tail race level
Bgross head - sum of all head losses
Cgross head - sum of all head losses + suction pressure head
Dgross head - sum of all head losses - suction pressure head
Answer is hidden
Question 3116 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In hydropower plant, the net head is ..........
Adifference between water level and tailrace
Bmaximum water level at reservoir
Cgross head - head losses
Dgross head + head losses
Answer is hidden
Question 3117 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
To ensure maximum overall plant efficiency, the rated head should be equal to ..........
Adesign head
Bgross head
Coperating head
Dnet head
Answer is hidden
Question 3118 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Flow duration curve is the graph drawn between ..........
Adischarge vs time
Bdischarge and the percentage of the time exceeded
Ccumulative rate of flow
Dcumulative volume of flow
Answer is hidden
Question 3119 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The flow duration curve at a given head of a hydroelectric plant is used to determine ..........
Aload-factor of the plant
Btotal units of energy available
Ctotal power available at site
Dmaximum rate of run-off during that period
Answer is hidden
Question 3120 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The area under a flow duration curve represents ..........
Atotal units of energy available
Btotal power available at site
Ctotal quantity of run-off during that period
Dmaximum rate of run-off during that period
Answer is hidden
Question 3121 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Mass curve is also known as ..........
Ademand curve
Bsupply curve
Crippl curve
Dflow duration curve
Answer is hidden
Question 3122 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A ROR type hydropower plant with 100 MW installed capacity and with Q₀ design flow can generate the full capacity at least for .......... days of a year.
A146 days
B245 days
C300 days
D365 days
Answer is hidden
Question 3123 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The power which is available only in periods of high flow in river is called ..........
Aprimary power
Bsecondary power
Cpower factor
Dplant capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 3124 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The net power continuously available from a plant to consumer at any time ..........
Aprimary power
Bsecondary power
Cpower factor
Dplant capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 3125 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The power continuously available from a plant to consumer is ..........
Afirm power
Bsecondary power
Cplant power
Dwater power
Answer is hidden
Question 3126 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The pondage in a hydropower station is ..........
Apond level
Btemporary storage to meet peak demands
Cexcess runoff to last for years
Dexcess runoff for a few hours only
Answer is hidden
Question 3127 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Power factor is ..........
Aapparent power - actual power
Bactual power / apparent power
Cactual power
Dapparent power
Answer is hidden
Question 3128 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The ratio of average output of a plant to plant capacity is ..........
Aload factor
Bcapacity factor
Cutilization factor
Dpower factor
Answer is hidden
Question 3129 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The value of diversity factor is always ..........
Aless than zero
Bless than 1
Cbetween 0 and 1
Dgreater than 1
Answer is hidden
Question 3130 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is a load factor?
AThe ratio of average to maximum demand
BThe ratio of maximum demand to average load
CThe product of maximum demand and average load
DThe ratio of average load to the plant capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 3131 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The demand factor of hydropower plant is ratio of ..........
Aconnected load to maximum load
Baverage load to maximum load
Cmaximum demand to connected load
Dmaximum load to plant capacity
Answer is hidden
Question 3132 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is the formula for plant capacity factor ..........
Aaverage demand / plant capacity
Bplant capacity / average demand
Cplant hours of use / station output
Dsum of individual maximum demand / maximum demand of plant
Answer is hidden
Question 3133 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Coincidence factor is the reciprocal of ..........
Atotal demand
Bload factor
Cdiversity factor
Dplant factor
Answer is hidden
Question 3134 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The load curve is the curve showing the .......... on the power station with respect to time.
Amaximum load
Bvariation of load
Cminimum load
Dconstant load
Answer is hidden
Question 3135 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In Nepal, the consumption of electricity is maximum during ..........
A5 AM to 11 PM
B11 PM to 5 AM
C5 PM to 11 PM
D11 PM to 5 AM
Answer is hidden
Question 3136 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
If installed capacity is equal to peak load, then the ratio of capacity factor to the load factor ..........
A0
B< 1
C> 1
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 3137 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In Nepal for project upto .......... the installed capacity is fixed based on Qo.
A100 kW
B1 MW
C25 MW
D100 Mw
Answer is hidden
Question 3138 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following method is utilized for fixing installed capacity of Hydropower plant?
ADemand supply approach
BRating curve approach
CMass analysis approach
DMarginal cost benefit approach
Answer is hidden
Question 3139 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which type of hydropower plant is designed to operate continuously, with little or no fluctuation in output?
AROR
BPumped-storage plant
CIntermediate load plant
DPeaking plant
Answer is hidden
Question 3140 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
When the operating cost of the power plant is high but it provides great flexibility then the plant used is ..........
ABase load plant
BPeak plant
CBase and peak plant
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3141 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In remote isolated area having only one micro hydropower, capacity of hydropower should be equivalent to?
AAverage load
BPeak load
CBase load
DMinimum load
Answer is hidden
Question 3142 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In context of Nepal, the installed capacity of mini-hydropower plant is ..........
Aless than 100 kW
Bless than 500 kW
C1-25MW
D100-1000 kW
Answer is hidden
Question 3143 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which type of hydropower plant is most commonly used for small-scale electricity generation in rural areas?
AMicro/hydropower plant
BReservoir plant
CPumped-storage plant
DTidal plant
Answer is hidden
Question 3144 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the most common type of hydropower facility in Nepal?
ARun-of-river
BReservoir
CPumped-storage plant
DWave
Answer is hidden
Question 3145 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The plants which regulate daily or weekly hydrograph of river is ..........
AROR plant
BPeak plant
CStorage plant
DPumped plant
Answer is hidden
Question 3146 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which type of hydropower plant uses a dam to create a reservoir to store water for electricity generation?
AROR plant
BRun-of-river plant
CPumped-storage plant
DReservoir plant
Answer is hidden
Question 3147 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which one is suitable to meet base load as well as peak load?
AReservoir plant
BROR without pondage
CROR with pondage
DPumped
Answer is hidden
Question 3148 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The hydropower plant which utilizes the minimum flow in river having no appreciable pondage on its upstream is ..........
AROR plants
BStorage plants
CPeak load only
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3149 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
If operating cost is high but the plant offers great flexibility, the plant is used for ..........
Abase load only
Bpeak load only
Cstorage plant
Dwe don't use such plant
Answer is hidden
Question 3150 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A hydropower plant developed at the site of a drop in an irrigation canal is of type ..........
Arun-of river plant
Bpeak run-off river plant
Cpumped storage plant
Dstorage plant
Answer is hidden
Question 3151 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is correct? (i) Diesel engine works as base load. (ii) Storage hydropower is used for peak time.
A(i)
B(ii)
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3152 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the name of the process where water is pumped back into a reservoir when electricity demand is low?
APumped storage
BTidal storage
CWave storage
DSolar storage
Answer is hidden
Question 3153 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The same water is utilized again and again in .......... type of hydropower plant.
AROR
Bstorage
Cpumped storage
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3154 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The reversible turbines and pumps are very suitable for ..........
AROR hydro-plant
Bpumped storage plant
Cwind power plant
Dtidal plant
Answer is hidden
Question 3155 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is hydro plant is PRoR type?
AKhimti
BBhotekoshi
CUpper-Tamakoshi
DKulekhani
Answer is hidden
Question 3156 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The volume of water that can be stored in the particular reservoir is called ..........
Areservoir capacity
Bcontrolled outflow
Ccatchment basin
Duncontrolled outflow
Answer is hidden
Question 3157 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The ratio of sediment deposited in the reservoir to the total volume of sediment carried by the river is ..........
Atrap efficiency
Bsedimentation
Ccapacity inflow ratio
Dlife of reservoir
Answer is hidden
Question 3158 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Trap efficiency is the function of ..........
Acapacity inflow ratio
Bcapacity outflow ratio
Cdischarge and sediment ratio
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3159 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The volume of water stored between normal reservoir level and maximum reservoir level is ..........
Asurcharg storage
Blive storage
Cuseful storage
Ddead storage
Answer is hidden
Question 3160 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is dead storage of storage reservoir?
Alevel between bed level and full reservoir level
Blevel between bed level and minimum pool level
Clevel between bed level and max water level
Dlevel between minimum pool level and full reservoir level
Answer is hidden
Question 3161 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
If 20% of the reservoir is marked for dead storage reservoir capacity 30 M cum. meter and the average silt decomposition in the reservoir is 0.1 M cumec, then the useful life of the reservoir will start reducing after ..........
A60 yrs
B90 yrs
C150 yrs
D30 yrs
Answer is hidden
Question 3162 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the utilization factor for the power plant of 100 MW installed capacity which supply 570000 KWH per day of energy with peak load of 95 MW.
A0.23
B0.95
C0.25
D0.6
Answer is hidden
Question 3163 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Energy consumed in a week is 5880000 kWhr and peak demand is 100 MW, determine load factor of this plant.
A0.35
B0.5
C0.588
D0.63
Answer is hidden
Question 3164 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Calculate the capacity factor of a plant with two turbines of each capacity 20 MW. The load duration hydropower plant varies from 10 MW to 35 MW.
A0.56
B0.51
C0.575
D0.63
Answer is hidden
Question 3165 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Calculate utilization factor if the maximum power utilized is 40,000 kW and two turbo generators installed each of capacity 23,000 kW.
A0.73
B0.87
C0.575
D0.63
Answer is hidden
Question 3166 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In a hydropower plant of installed capacity 100MW, 42GWh energy is produced in one month. What is the approx. capacity factor of that plant?
A0.56
B0.58
C0.6
D0.64
Answer is hidden
Question 3167 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A consumer consumes 600 kWh per day at a load factor of 0.5. Without increasing the maximum demand, if the consumer increases the load factor to 0.8, the consumption of energy in kWh would be ..........
A480
B960
C900
D300
Answer is hidden
Question 3168 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which dam is a better choice when the raw materials are not available and have to be transported from far off distances?
AEarthen dam
BRock-fill dam
CConcrete gravity dam
DHollow concrete dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3169 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The temporary dam constructed for dewatering the area to facilitates the execution of foundation work is known as ..........
Adetention dam
Bdiversion dam
Ccoffer dam
Dstorage dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3170 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the primary function of a cofferdam?
ATo store large volumes of water
BTo regulate water flow for irrigation purposes
CTo prevent flooding
DTo provide a dry work area during construction
Answer is hidden
Question 3171 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which structure is best suited to resist earthquake shocks without danger?
AEarthen dam
BConcrete gravity dam
CTimber dam
DBoth earthen and concrete gravity dams
Answer is hidden
Question 3172 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The type of dam suitable for low wide George is ..........
Aarch dam
BV-shaped dam
Cembankment dam
Dbuttress dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3173 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following earth dam is suitable only on impervious foundation?
AZoned embankment type
BHomogenous embankment type
CNon-homogenous type
DDiaphragm type
Answer is hidden
Question 3174 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
When gravel and sand are available in bed strata, the type of dam selected may be ..........
Amasonry dam
Bgravity dam
Cembankment dam
Dbuttress dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3175 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The process of laying and compacting earth in layer by power roller under OMC for construction of earthen dam is known as ..........
Arolled filled method
Bhydraulic fill method
COMC method
Dcompaction
Answer is hidden
Question 3176 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The construction materials which are transported and laying all done with agency of water is called ..........
Arolled filled earth dam
Bhydraulic fill earth dam
Chomogenous earth dam
Ddiaphragm type earth dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3177 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In diaphragm type earth dam, the thickness of this impervious material in central part is ..........
Aless than 2.5 m
Bless than 5.0 m
Cless than 10.0 m
Dgreater than 7.5 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3178 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Type of dam is preferred if spillway location is available separate from main dam.
AArch dam
BEarthen dam
COverlow concrete dam
DEarth dam and concrete gravity dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3179 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
When the reservoir is empty, the maximum vertical stress is equal to ..........
AW/B(1 + 6e/B) at heel and W/B(1 - 6e/B) at toe
B2W/B at heel and W/B = 0 at toe
C2W/B at heel = 0 and toe = 0
D2W/B at heel and toe = 0
Answer is hidden
Question 3180 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
When the reservoir is full, the maximum compressive force in a gravity dam is produced ..........
Aat the heel
Bat the heel and toe = 0
Cat the toe
Dat the centre of the base
Answer is hidden
Question 3181 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
When the middle third of the base is full, the maximum compressive stress in a gravity dam is produced ..........
Awithin the middle third of the base
Bat the heel
Cat the toe
Dpasses through 3rd middle rule
Answer is hidden
Question 3182 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the value of eccentricity for no tension condition in the dam?
Ae <= B / 6
Be > B / 6
Ce >= B / 3
De < B / 3
Answer is hidden
Question 3183 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The middle 3rd rule is used in ..........
Atension
Bcompression
Csliding
Dshear
Answer is hidden
Question 3184 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is not a potential failure mode for a dam?
AOvertopping
BSeismic activity
CErosion
DVolcanic eruption
Answer is hidden
Question 3185 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The resultant of the dam must lie at .......... in order to ensure that no tension developed.
Amiddle third of base
Bmiddle of base
Cthird middle of base
Danywhere
Answer is hidden
Question 3186 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The applicability of middle third rule used in the design of structures under combined direct and bending stresses is ..........
Afeasible to circular cross sections only
Bnot feasible
Cfeasible to square and circular cross sections only
Dfeasible to rectangular cross-sections only
Answer is hidden
Question 3187 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What should be done to avoid the Friction failure of dam?
ADecrease the base width
BProvide anchorage at the bottom, prism
CIncrease the base width, and prism
DProvide anchorage at the bottom, prism
Answer is hidden
Question 3188 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the recommended value of the shear friction factor against sliding?
AMore than unity
BLess than unity
CMore than 3 to 5
DLess than 3
Answer is hidden
Question 3189 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The structure which derives its stability due to self-weight is ..........
Asheet pile wall
Bbulk head
Ccantilever retaining wall
Dmasonry retaining wall
Answer is hidden
Question 3190 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The factor of safety against sliding shall be ..........
Aat least 1.5
Bmore than 3.0
Cbetween 2.5 and 3.0
Dequal to 1.0
Answer is hidden
Question 3191 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is a type of foundation treatment used in dam construction?
AGrouting
BPiling
CBlasting
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3192 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The type of foundation treatment for gravity dam is ..........
Apreparation of surface
Bprovide filter media
Cgrouting the foundation
Dboth (a) and (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 3193 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The bottom portion of a concrete or a masonry gravity dam is usually stepped in order to ..........
AIncrease the overturning resistance of the dam
BIncrease the shear strength
Cdecrease the shear strength
Dincrease the frictional resistance
Answer is hidden
Question 3194 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The uplift pressure on a dam can be controlled by i) constructing cutoff under upstream face ii) constructing drainage channels between the dam and its foundation iii) by pressure grouting in foundation The correct answer is ..........
Aonly (i)
Bboth (i) and (ii)
Cboth (i) and (iii)
D(i), (ii) and (iii)
Answer is hidden
Question 3195 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
When the factor of safety against sliding in retaining wall less than 1.5 to prevent the structure from sliding which of the following measure is used?
AProviding additional anchors
BIncreasing width of foundation
CCutoff in downstream
DIncreasing the friction angle of the soil behind the wall
Answer is hidden
Question 3196 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In concrete gravity dam with a vertical upstream face, the stabilizing force is provided by the ..........
AWeight of the dam
Buplift pressure
Cwater supported against the upstream slope
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3197 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The provision of drainage gallery in a gravity dam help in reducing ..........
Ahydrostatic pressure
Bseepage pressure
Cuplift pressure
Dboth hydrostatic pressure and seepage pressure
Answer is hidden
Question 3198 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A gravity dam is subjected to hydrodynamic pressure caused by ..........
Athe rising waves of the reservoir when a flood wave enters into it
Bthe rising waves in the reservoir due to high winds
Cthe increase in water pressure momentarily caused by horizontal earthquake acting towards the reservoir
Dthe increase in water pressure momentarily caused by the horizontal earthquake acting towards the dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3199 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In a concrete gravity dam with a vertical upstream face the stabilizing force is provided by the ..........
Aweight of the dam
Bthe water supported against the upstream slope
Cuplift pressure
Dwater pressure at the tail-end
Answer is hidden
Question 3200 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is Von Karman's formula for hydrodynamic force?
AFₑ = 0.73 × kₕ × γw × H²
BFₑ = 0.8 × kₕ × γw × H²
CFₑ = 0.555 × kₕ × γw × H²
DFₑ = 0.9 × kₕ × γw × H²
Answer is hidden
Question 3201 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The vertical component of the earthquake wave which produces adverse effects on the stability of a dam when is acting in ..........
Aupward direction
Bdownward direction
Cboth upward and downward direction
Dany direction
Answer is hidden
Question 3202 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The vertical downward earthquake acceleration av = 0.1 × g acting on a gravity dam will ..........
Aincrease the resisting weight of the dam by 10%
Bdecrease the resisting weight of the dam by 10%
Cincrease the uplift by 10%
Ddecrease the uplift by 10%
Answer is hidden
Question 3203 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
For wave action in dam, the height of free board is generally taken to be equal to ..........
A1.5 × hw
B0.75 × hw
C1 × hw
D1.5 × hw
Answer is hidden
Question 3204 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following method is the sediment controlling technique in reservoir?
AMechanical stirring
BDredging method
CRemoval of post flood water
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3205 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What type of failure occurs when the minimum stress exceeds the allowable compressive stress of the dam material?
AOverturning
BCrushing
CSliding
DDevelopment of tension
Answer is hidden
Question 3206 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The axis of a gravity dam is the ..........
Aline of the crown of the dam on the downstream side
Bline of the crown of the dam on the upstream side
Ccentre-line of the top width of the dam
Dline joining mid-points of the base
Answer is hidden
Question 3207 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
To enhance the Factor of Safety (FOS) against overturning moment for a dam with a low FOS, which measure is recommended?
AIncorporating shear keys
BIncreasing foundation depth
CAnchoring at the crest of the dam
DAnchoring at the base of the dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3208 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The recommended top width of low earthen dam is ..........
AH + 3
B0.2 H + 3
CH + 5
D0.2 H
Answer is hidden
Question 3209 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The shape of the phreatic line is ..........
AParabola
BStraight line
CCylindrical
DCircular
Answer is hidden
Question 3210 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The hydrostatic pressure on the phreatic line within a dam section is ..........
Agreater than atmospheric pressure
Bequal to atmospheric pressure
Cless than atmospheric pressure
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3211 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the importance of providing core in earthen embankment?
ATo increase stability
BTo control seepage
CFor aesthetic purposes
DTo enhance vegetation
Answer is hidden
Question 3212 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The central core of the zoned embankment type earth dam ..........
Aprevents piping
Bchecks the seepage
Cgives stability to the central impervious fill
Ddistribute the load over a large area
Answer is hidden
Question 3213 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the primary cause of dam failure due to overtopping?
AInadequate spillway capacity
BPoor design of the dam foundation
CNatural disasters such as earthquakes
DHuman error during construction or maintenance
Answer is hidden
Question 3214 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A rock toe and horizontal filter is provided on downstream base of an earthen dam in order to ..........
Aprevent piping action in the dam body
Bprevent piping action in the dam foundation
Creduce the seepage quality by blocking its flow
Dcollect and drain out the seepage flow
Answer is hidden
Question 3215 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What are the two main causes of failure of hydraulic structure on the pervious foundation?
ASeepage and over-turning
BUndermining and uplift
COver-turning and piping
DOverturning and uplift
Answer is hidden
Question 3216 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Sloughing is the process of ..........
Aprogressive erosion
Bsubsequent removal of soil grains from within the dam
Cuncontrolled seepage passage through the dam body
Dprogressive removal of soil from the d/s face
Answer is hidden
Question 3217 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
.......... helps to control seepage in earth dam.
AProviding the drainage filter
BImpervious cutoff
CRelief wall and drain trenches
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3218 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The spillway in reservoir is used for ..........
Ato withdraw the design discharge
Bto pass excess water d/s safely
Cto settle the suspended particles
Dto control the bed load
Answer is hidden
Question 3219 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In a hydro-electric plant, spillways are used ..........
Ato dissipate energy of surplus-water
Bto discharge surplus water on the downstream side of dam
Cwater is not available in sufficient quantity
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3220 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Spillway is an overflow section which allows to discharge ..........
Adisaster flood
Bsurplus flood
Cmaximum probable flood
Dnormal flood
Answer is hidden
Question 3221 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The safety valve of the dam is its ..........
Adrainage gallery
Binspection gallery
Cspillway
Doutlet sluices
Answer is hidden
Question 3222 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The supplementary structure constructed in conjunction with main spillway to divert and releases the flood in case of failure of main spillway is known as ..........
Aemergency spillway
Bauxiliary spillway
Cchute spillway
Dsecondary spillway
Answer is hidden
Question 3223 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A shaft spillway is provided ..........
Ainside the body of a gravity dam
Binside the downstream of reservoir
Cinside the upstream of reservoir
Don side flanks of the main dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3224 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Morning glory is the ..........
Aspecial flared inlet of the shaft spillway of a dam of very small height
Bspecial flared inlet of the shaft spillway of a large dam project
Ca horizontal tunnel constructed in a shaft spillway across the body of a gravity dam to carry surplus reservoir water to the d/s river
Da horizontal tunnel constructed in a shaft spillway across the body of an earthen dam through its foundation to carry surplus reservoir water to the d/s river
Answer is hidden
Question 3225 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In case of non-availability of space due to topography, the most suitable spillway is ..........
Astraight drop spillway
Bchute spillway
Cogee spillway
Dshaft spillway
Answer is hidden
Question 3226 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The spillway which can be adopted with ease on gravity as well as earthen dams is called ..........
Aogee spillway
Bside channel spillway
Cchute spillway
Dshaft spillway
Answer is hidden
Question 3227 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In a chute spillway, the flow is usually ..........
Acritical
Buniform
Csuper critical
Dsub-critical
Answer is hidden
Question 3228 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following spillway is least suitable for the earthen dam?
AChute spillway
BSide channel spillways
COgee spillways
DShaft spillway
Answer is hidden
Question 3229 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The device that does not help in energy dissipation at the bottom of a hydraulic structure over which water spills is ..........
Achute block
Bdentated sill
Cmorning glory
Dbaffle piers
Answer is hidden
Question 3230 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Energy dissipator provided if jump height is more than tail water depth.
ASloping apron
BSki jump
CRoller bucket
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3231 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Energy dissipation downstream of a sloping glacis is achieved by which of the following mechanisms?
AMorning glory spillway
BHydraulic jump
COgee spillway
DSpillway apron
Answer is hidden
Question 3232 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
If the height of the dam is 35 meters and specific gravity of concrete is 2.4 with no uplift pressure, what should be the minimum base width of dam by considering elementary profile of a dam, if the coefficient of friction is 0.7.
A20.33
B21.23
C35
D22.6
Answer is hidden
Question 3233 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the approx. height of the dam having elementary profile, without considering uplift, if the base width is 35 m and specific gravity of dam material is 2.45?
A22.36 m
B42.15 m
C54.78 m
D60 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3234 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In modern day, which type of gates are mostly used in hydraulic structures?
ASliding
BRoller
CFixed
DWheel
Answer is hidden
Question 3235 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The most commonly used vertical lift gates in modern days is ...........
Afixed wheel gate
Bsliding gate
Cfree-roller gates
Dslotted gates
Answer is hidden
Question 3236 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
River intake is usually situated on ...........
Aconvex side of curve
Bconcave side of curve
CD/S of sewer outfall
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3237 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The head works of ROR plants is considered upto ...........
Aintake
Bsettling basin
Cgravel trap
Dforebay
Answer is hidden
Question 3238 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Submerged intake is located at ...........
Abottom of river
Bfront of river
Cside of river
DU/S of river
Answer is hidden
Question 3239 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The side intake is suitable when the slope of the river is ...........
Asteep
Bmild
Chorizontal/flat
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3240 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The frontal intake is suitable when the slope of the river is ...........
Asteep
Bmild
Chorizontal/flat
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3241 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Settling basin is located in the canal at ...........
Aupstream of gravel trap
Bdownstream of gravel trap
Canywhere
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3242 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The settling basin are designed to settle ...........
Acoarse material - gravel trap
Bsuspended material
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3243 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The efficiency of a settling tank can be increased by ...........
Aincrease in surface area of tank
Bdecrease in surface area of tank
Cincrease in depth of tank
Ddecrease in depth of tank
Answer is hidden
Question 3244 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following design criteria are important for design of setting basin?
AOptimal removal of sediment
BEfficient flushing
CSettling capacity
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3245 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In which zone of settling basin, the transitions from canal to settling zone occurs ...........
Asettling zone
Binlet zone
Coutlet zone
Dtransition zone
Answer is hidden
Question 3246 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In which range, the gradual expansion of inlet gives smooth transition in settling basin?
A5° to 7°
B7° to 10°
C10° to 15°
D25° to 27°
Answer is hidden
Question 3247 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The length to breadth ratio of settling basin is generally taken as ...........
A5 to 7
B4 to 10
C10 to 15
D2 to 3
Answer is hidden
Question 3248 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The transitions in the outlet zone of settling basin can be ...........
Aless abrupt than inlet expansion
Bmore abrupt than inlet expansion
COutlet zone
DTransition zone
Answer is hidden
Question 3249 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which zone of settling basin is not necessary if settling basin is combined with fore bay?
ASettling zone
BInlet zone
COutlet zone
DTransition zone
Answer is hidden
Question 3250 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In micro-hydropower, the excess water during flood is removed from ...........
Asettling zone
Bforebay
Cpenstock
Dturbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3251 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
For BEIRI settling basin which of the following statement is false?
AIt is continuous type
BIt uses sensors
CIt is used in middle Marsyangdi
DPlant needs to be closed during flushing operation
Answer is hidden
Question 3252 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which one of the following statements is incorrect about the serpent sediment sluicing system in a hydropower project?
AImproves the efficiency of turbines by reducing sediment-related wear
BUtilizes high-velocity flow to remove sediments
CPrevents the accumulation of coarse bed load in front of the intake
DRelies entirely on mechanical dredging inside the active reservoir
Answer is hidden
Question 3253 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A tunnel is found more advantageous as compared to the alternate routes because it ..........
Aremains free from snow
Breduces the cost by reducing the route distance
Cavoids interference with surface rights
Dall the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3254 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Pick up the correct statement from the following during tunnel excavation.
AOxygen should not be less than 19.5%
BCarbon dioxide should not be more than 0.5%
CCarbon mono-oxide should not be more than 0.01%
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3255 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which one section of tunnel is most suitable for structural consideration?
ACircular section
BD-section
CHorse-shoe section
DEgg shaped section
Answer is hidden
Question 3256 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Circular section of tunnels is not suitable for ..........
Acarrying water
Bnon-cohesive soils
Ctunnels driven by shield method
Dplacement of concrete lining
Answer is hidden
Question 3257 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which shape of tunnel is suitable for the purpose of navigation?
ACircular shape
BD shape
CHorse-shoe shape
DRectangular shape
Answer is hidden
Question 3258 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The tunnels, the artificial underground passages are constructed for ..........
Ahighways
Brailways
Csewerage
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3259 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The method of draining in the tunnels, is generally known as ..........
Afore drainage
Bdewatering
Cpermanent drainage
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3260 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following drainage is not used in tunnel?
AFore drainage
BTunnel drainage
CPermanent drainage
DSide drainage
Answer is hidden
Question 3261 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
For highways, tunneling is preferred to if the open cut exceeds ...........
A10 metres depth
B15 metres depth
C20 metres depth
D25 metres depth
Answer is hidden
Question 3262 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Drifters can be used to drill ...........
Aonly up holes
Bonly down holes
Chorizontal or up holes
Dhorizontal, down or up holes
Answer is hidden
Question 3263 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Drift method of tunneling is used to construct tunnels in ...........
Asoft grounds
Brock
Cself-supporting grounds
Dbroken grounds
Answer is hidden
Question 3264 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In case of drift method of tunneling, the drift may be excavated at ...........
Athe center
Bthe top
Cthe side
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3265 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which one of the following methods of tunneling is used in hard rocks?
AFore poling method
BNeedle beam method
CShield tunneling method
DHeading and Benching method
Answer is hidden
Question 3266 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Fore poling method is used for ...........
Asoft ground
Bfirm rock
Chard rock
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3267 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is incorrect for settling basin?
AOperates continuously without affecting power production
BReduces the frequency of mechanical sediment removal
CUsed for removing silt
DBoth of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3268 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is incorrect for settling basin?
A1 H : 2 V for horizontal direction
B1 H : 5 V for vertical direction
CLaminar flow
DParticle approach
Answer is hidden
Question 3269 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following method is design process of settling basin?
AConcentration approach
BBoth without turbulence
CParticle approach
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3270 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The depth of setting basin is high for ...........
Aby considering without turbulence
Bby considering turbulence
Cboth of the above
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3271 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
For a given discharge, the efficiency of sedimentation basin can be increased by ...........
Aincreasing the depth of the basin
Bdecreasing the surface area of the basin
Cincreasing the surface area of the basin
Ddecreasing the depth of the basin
Answer is hidden
Question 3272 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In concentration approach ...........
Athe s/b is designed in such a way that desired trap efficiency is achieved
Bthe s/b is designed in such a way that the desired size of particle settled
Cboth of the above
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3273 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The methods which is adopted in sediment handling are ...........
Aremoving sediment inflow through watershed management and erosion control
Bremoval of deposit from reservoir
Cconstruction of settling basin
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3274 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the value of constant 'a' in T.R. Camp critical flow velocity formula, if the diameter of particle is less than 0.1 mm?
A0.36
B0.44
C0.51
D0.65
Answer is hidden
Question 3275 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Find the flow velocity if it is desired to remove sediment upto 0.25 mm.
A0.11 m/s
B0.22 m/s
C0.255 m/s
D0.07 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 3276 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Calculate the flow velocity in the settling basin with particle of grain size 0.33 mm.
A0.293 m/s
B0.252 m/s
C0.206 m/s
D0.80 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 3277 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
If Q is the discharge in m³/s, T is sediment emptying frequency in seconds and C is sediment concentration kg/m³ then sediment load can be computed from ...........
AS = Q × T × C
BS = T/(S × C)
CS = Q × Q × C
DS = C/(Q × T)
Answer is hidden
Question 3278 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Determine the surface area of the settling basin having trap efficiency of 99%. The flow of water is 10 m³/s and fall velocity 0.2 m/s.
A320 m²
B230 m²
C46 m²
D460 m²
Answer is hidden
Question 3279 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the volume of silt accumulated in a period of 10 days if the sediment conc. of the flow is 5 kg/m³ for a discharge of 25 cumecs and silt density of 2400 kg/m³ and a packing factor of 1.2?
A45000 m³
B37500 m³
C21000 m³
D250000 m³
Answer is hidden
Question 3280 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which one of the following statements is not correct for heading and benching method of tunnelling?
ADrilling and mucking can be done simultaneously
BBenching provides a platform for working on heading
CRemoval of muck from the heading is very easy
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3281 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The minimum size of the tunnel should be at least ..........
A2 m diameter
B3 m diameter
C4 m diameter
D1.5 m diameter
Answer is hidden
Question 3282 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
If D is the diameter of tunnel in m, then the empirical formula to calculate the thickness of tunnel in mm is ..........
A42 D
B82 D
C27 D
D108 D
Answer is hidden
Question 3283 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What parameter is commonly used to determine the diameter of a hydropower tunnel?
AWater pressure in tunnel
BLength of the tunnel
CFlow rate of water
DNumber of turbines in the powerhouse
Answer is hidden
Question 3284 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The following operations are required for tunneling in rock train: 1. Removing of foul gasses 2. Marking the tunnel profile 3. Setting up and drilling 4. Checking misfire 5. Mucking. The correct sequence is ...........
A1, 2, 3, 4, 5
B2, 3, 5, 4, 1
C4, 2, 1, 3, 5
D2, 3, 1, 4, 5
Answer is hidden
Question 3285 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following lining material is useful for shield driven tunnels in sub aqueous regions?
AStone masonry
BTimber
CCast iron
DCement concrete
Answer is hidden
Question 3286 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A channel or a free-flow tunnel leading water to the fore bay or a pressure tunnel leading the water to the surge tank is called as ..........
Apenstock
Bheadrace tunnel
Ctailrace tunnel
Ddiversion tunnel
Answer is hidden
Question 3287 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the primary purpose of a fore bay in a hydropower plant?
ATo store excess water during peak flow periods
BTo regulate the flow of water into the penstock
CTo generate electricity directly
DTo provide recreational activities for visitors
Answer is hidden
Question 3288 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What function does the fore bay serve in a hydropower scheme?
ATo store excess water for recreational purposes
BTo transition from open channel flow to pressure flow conditions
CTo directly generate electricity
DTo regulate the flow of water into the spillway
Answer is hidden
Question 3289 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In the hydel system, a fore bay is used at the junction of ..........
Apenstock and turbine
Bpower channel and penstock
Cpower channel and tailrace channel
Dheadrace channel and penstock
Answer is hidden
Question 3290 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The enlarged body of water at the entrance of penstock is of D = 1.55 m³ ..........
Areservoir
Bpond
Cforebay
Daqueduct
Answer is hidden
Question 3291 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the minimum submergence that should be provided for a fore bay of Q = 3.6 m³/s, D = 1.5 m?
A0.3
B1.3
C2.3
D3.3
Answer is hidden
Question 3292 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Pondage in a hydropower station is ..........
Apond level
Btemporary storage to meet peak demands
Cexcess runoff to last for years
Dexcess runoff for a few hours only
Answer is hidden
Question 3293 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The function of a surge tank is to ..........
Aproduce surge in the pipeline
Bminimize friction losses in pipe
Crelieve water hammer pressure in the penstock
Drelieve pressure due to water hammer
Answer is hidden
Question 3294 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The purpose of the surge tank in a pipeline is ..........
Asupply water at constant pressure
Bprevent occurrence of hydraulic jump
Csmoothen the flow of water
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3295 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A surge tank is provided for protection of ..........
Adam
Bpenstock
Cturbine
Ddraft tube
Answer is hidden
Question 3296 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The surge tanks controls the water when the load on the turbine is ..........
Aequal
Bdecreased
Cincreased
Dnot present
Answer is hidden
Question 3297 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which component prevents the penstock from water hammer phenomenon in a hydropower plant?
AValves and Gates
BDraft tubes
CSurge tank
DSpillway
Answer is hidden
Question 3298 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Location of a surge tank, in a hydroelectric power station is near ..........
Aturbine
Bdam
Ctail race
Dreservoir
Answer is hidden
Question 3299 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The correct sequence, in the direction of installation/location, of a hydropower plant is ..........
Areservoir, surge tank, turbine, penstock
Breservoir, surge tank, penstock, turbine
Creservoir, penstock, turbine, surge tank
Dreservoir, penstock, surge tank, turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3300 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The correct sequence, in hydropower plant, for the direction of the flow of water is ..........
Areservoir, surge tank, turbine, penstock
Breservoir, surge tank, penstock, turbine
Creservoir, penstock, surge tank, turbine
Dreservoir, penstock, turbine, surge tank
Answer is hidden
Question 3301 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which statement about surge tank is wrong?
AIdeal location of surge tank is near the turbine inlet
BA decrease in load demands cause a rise in water level in surge tank
CSurge tank are installed to close to avoid entry of unwanted object to penstock
DSurge tank are installed to reduce harm effect of water hammer phenomenon
Answer is hidden
Question 3302 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The main governing factor for safe design of surge tank is ..........
Aheight of surge tank
Bcross-sectional area of surge tank and theory
Cvelocity of flow entering the surge tank
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3303 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The maximum upsurge for sudden closure of valve (or for sudden 100% load rejection) is given by ..........
The maximum down surge for sudden opening of valve (or for sudden 100% demand) is given by ..........
AZmin = -1 - 0.125 × P₀
BZmin = -1 - 0.125 × P₀
CZmin = -1 + 0.125 × P₀
DZmin = -1 + 0.125 × P₀
Answer is hidden
Question 3305 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The hydro mechanical equipment is that equipment which convert ..........
Ahydraulic energy into mechanical energy
Bmechanical energy into hydraulic energy
Cmechanical energy into electrical energy
Deither (a) or (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 3306 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which principle is used in hydraulic turbines?
ABriggs law
BPascal's law
CFaraday law
DNewton's second law
Answer is hidden
Question 3307 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Impulse turbine and reaction turbine are classified based on ..........
Atype of energy at inlet
Bdirection of flow through runner
Chead at inlet of turbine
Dspecific speed of turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3308 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The turbine in which water entering possesses the kinetic as well as pressure energy is ..........
Aimpulse turbine
Breaction turbine
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3309 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The energy of water entering the reaction turbine is ..........
Afully the kinetic energy
Bfully the pressure energy
Cpartly the pressure energy and partly the kinetic energy
Dunpredictable
Answer is hidden
Question 3310 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is impulse turbine?
AFrancis turbine
BKaplan turbine
CPelton turbine
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3311 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The pressure energy of water is converted to kinetic energy through a nozzle provided next to runner blade in ..........
Aimpulse turbine only
Breaction turbine
Cboth (a) and (b)
DKaplan turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3312 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is an example of impulse turbine?
APelton turbine
BKaplan turbine
CPropeller turbine
DFrancis turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3313 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
If at the inlet, only kinetic energy is available, then name of the turbine is ..........
Aimpulse turbine
Blow specific speed turbine
Creaction turbine
Dmixed flow turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3314 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which kind of turbine is a Pelton wheel turbine?
ATangential flow turbine
BInward flow turbine
COutward flow turbine
DRadial flow turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3315 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In what type of turbine water enters in radial direction and leaves axial direction?
ARadial flow turbine
BInward flow turbine
CTangential flow turbine
DMixed flow turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3316 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The direction of flow in Kaplan turbine is ..........
Atangential flow
Bradial flow
Caxial flow
Dmixed flow
Answer is hidden
Question 3317 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The turbines suitable for head up to 15 m head with not load variations is ..........
Apropeller turbine
Bbulb turbine
CFrancis turbine
DKaplan turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3318 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The net head suitable for Francis turbine is ..........
A0-60 m
B60-350 m
C350-600 m
D500-2000 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3319 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Kaplan turbine is operated under ..........
Alow head and high discharge
Bhigh head and high discharge
Clow head and low discharge
Dmedium head and medium discharge
Answer is hidden
Question 3320 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which phenomenon in a pipe flow is termed as water hammer?
AThe rise of negative pressure
BThe zero pressure in pipe flow
CRise of pressure due to gradual closure of valve
DSudden rise of pressure in a long pipe due to sudden closure of valve
Answer is hidden
Question 3321 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The water hammer is developed in a ..........
Apipe of the pipe line
Bdraft tube
Csurge tank
Dpenstock
Answer is hidden
Question 3322 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The magnitude of water hammer does not depend upon ..........
Alength of the pipe line
Belastic properties of pipe material
Celastic properties of liquid
Ddiameter of the pipe line
Answer is hidden
Question 3323 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The water hammer in penstock pipe is caused by ..........
Asudden change in water level of reservoir
Bsudden change in discharge
Csudden change in temperature
Dgradual change in discharge
Answer is hidden
Question 3324 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The valve closure is said to be gradual if T is the interval of time taken for closing the valve, L is the length of pipe and C be the wave pressure.
AT > 2L/C
BT < L/C
CT < 2L/C
DT = C/2L
Answer is hidden
Question 3325 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A flow control valve at the end of a 1 km long pipe is closed gradually in 10 seconds. If the rise of pressure head due to water hammer is 20 meters of water. What the velocity of water before the valve closure?
A4 m/s
B8 m/s
C6 m/s
D2 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 3326 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Pen stocks are made up of ..........
Asteel
Bcast iron
Cmild steel
Dwrought iron
Answer is hidden
Question 3327 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Penstock in a hydroelectric power plant is ..........
Aa pipe connected to runner outlet -> draft tube
Bnozzle that release high pressure water on turbine blades
Ca pipe connecting surge tank to turbine
Da pipe connecting surge tank to dam
Answer is hidden
Question 3328 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In high head hydro power plant, the velocity of water in penstock is about ..........
A1 m/s
B4 m/s
C12 m/s
D12 m/s
Answer is hidden
Question 3329 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which parameter is crucial in determining the thickness of penstock?
AWater temperature
BNet head of the hydropower plant
CLength of the penstock
DAverage annual rainfall
Answer is hidden
Question 3330 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which factor is NOT considered in the design of a penstock for a high-head hydropower plant?
AHydrostatic pressure
BWater hammer effect
CSediment transport
DCorrosion resistance
Answer is hidden
Question 3331 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is of a high head turbine?
APelton turbine
BFrancis turbine
CPropeller turbine
DKaplan turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3332 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
High head turbine is ...........
A10-60 m
B60-350 m
C350-600 m
D> 250m
Answer is hidden
Question 3333 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The range of specific speed for Kaplan turbine is ...........
A10-50 rpm
B80-400 rpm
C300-1000 rpm
D1500 rpm
Answer is hidden
Question 3334 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The turbine having speed 60-300rpm is ...........
APelton
BFrancis
CKaplan
DPropeller
Answer is hidden
Question 3335 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Turbine having speed 600-900rpm is called ...........
APelton
BFrancis
CKaplan
DBulb
Answer is hidden
Question 3336 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Among the following which turbine has highest efficiency?
AKaplan turbine
BFrancis turbine
CPelton turbine
DPropeller turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3337 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which of the following is high speed turbine?
APelton turbine
BFrancis turbine
CImpulse
DBulb turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3338 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In which types of turbine in which blade are in action when in front of nozzle?
APelton turbine
BFrancis turbine
CPropeller turbine
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3339 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The value of jet ratio [D/d] for Pelton turbine is ...........
A4 to 6
B6 to 10
C10 to 12
D12 to 15
Answer is hidden
Question 3340 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The number of bucket in runner of Pelton turbine is ...........
A1.2
B15 - D/2
C15 + D/2
D15 + D/d
Answer is hidden
Question 3341 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The width of the bucket of Pelton wheel is generally ........... times the diameter of the jet.
A2 to 3
B5
C10
D15 to 25
Answer is hidden
Question 3342 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The hydraulic efficiency of Pelton turbine is maximum when velocity of wheel is ........... of the velocity of jet of water at inlet.
Ahalf
Bequal
Ctwice
Dthrice
Answer is hidden
Question 3343 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The maximum efficiency of Pelton turbine is given by ...........
A(1 - k \cos φ)/2
B1 - (1 - k \cos φ)/2
C(1 + k \cos φ)/2
D1 - (1 + k \cos φ)/2
Answer is hidden
Question 3344 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The formula used to calculate velocity of jet for Pelton turbine is ...........
Au + 0.5af
B√2gH
C2Cv √2gH
DCv √2gH
Answer is hidden
Question 3345 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The ratio of width of the wheel to diameter of Francis turbine is ...........
A0.1 to 0.4
B0.6 to 0.8
C1.0 to 1.5
D5
Answer is hidden
Question 3346 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The specific speed of a hydraulic turbine depends upon ...........
Aspeed and power developed
Bdischarge and power developed
Cspeed and head of water
Dspeed, power developed and head of water
Answer is hidden
Question 3347 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In a reaction turbine, when steam flows through the fixed blades, ...........
Apressure increases while velocity decreases
Bpressure decreases while velocity increases
Cpressure and velocity both increase
Dpressure and velocity both decrease
Answer is hidden
Question 3348 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
In a Francis turbine runner, the number of blades are generally between ...........
A2 to 6
B4 to 8
C8 to 16
D16 to 24
Answer is hidden
Question 3349 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Draft tubes have ........... shafts.
Ahorizontal
Bvertical
Can impulse turbine
Da Kaplan turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3350 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The draft tube is used for discharging water from the exit of ...........
Acircular
Ba Francis turbine
Cboth (b) and (c)
Dvertical
Answer is hidden
Question 3351 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the purpose of a draft tube?
ATo prevent flow separation
BTo prevent rejection of heat
CTo avoid pressure drag
DTo increase efficiency of plant by converting kinetic energy to pressure energy
Answer is hidden
Question 3352 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The use of draft tube in reaction turbine helps to ...........
Atemperature
Bpressure
Cvelocity
Ddensity
Answer is hidden
Question 3353 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Pressure at the inlet and outlet of the draft tube shouldn't be ...........
Aless than one-third of atmospheric pressure
Bgreater than one-third of atmospheric pressure
Cless than 1 atm
Dgreater than 1 atm
Answer is hidden
Question 3354 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The place where cavitation is most likely to occur in the hydraulic turbine is ...........
Ainlet of guide vane
Binlet of draft tube
Cinlet of turbine casing
Dinlet of turbine runner
Answer is hidden
Question 3355 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Draft tubes are not used in which of the following turbines?
AImpulse turbine
BReaction turbine
CBoth (a) and (b)
DKaplan
Answer is hidden
Question 3356 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the use of governor?
AIt controls acceleration
BIt controls the mean speed
CIt controls the temperature
DIt controls sediment
Answer is hidden
Question 3357 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The governor in a hydropower plant ...........
Aenables rapid closure of the nozzle of an impulse turbine to reduce rpm
Bregulates the flow rate of water striking the runner to control turbine rpm
Cis manually operated
Dis used to reduce the head of water fed to the turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3358 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
For the small variation, the power of the centrifugal pump is proportional to ...........
AD²
BD³
CD⁴
DD⁵
Answer is hidden
Question 3359 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
The centrifugal pump acts as the reverse of an ...........
Areaction turbine
Binward radial flow
Cinward mixed flow
Dinward tangential flow
Answer is hidden
Question 3360 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Power needed to uplift water can be calculated as ...........
AP = γ A H
BP = γ Q H
CP = γ Q H²
DP = (γ Q H)/(η)
Answer is hidden
Question 3361 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Sub-surface powerhouse is suitable ...........
Aif there is space restriction
Bwhen channel or George or valley structure are narrow
Cwhen there are frequent earth tremors or other physical surface hazard such as rock slides or snow avalanches
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3362 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Surface power house is suitable ...........
Awhen sound rock is available
Bif there is space restriction
Cwhen channel or George or valley structure are narrow
Dwhen there are frequent earth tremors or other physical surface hazard such as rock slides or snow avalanches
Answer is hidden
Question 3363 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Which is used to protect turbine and runner from damage?
ASurge tank
BFuel tank
CPower house
DPenstock
Answer is hidden
Question 3364 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
A turbine develops 2000 hp under a head of 150 m while running at 300 rpm. What is the specific speed?
A10-35
B35-60
C60-300
D300-1000
Answer is hidden
Question 3365 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
To generate 10,000 kW under a head of 81m while working at a speed of 500 rpm, the turbine of choice would be ...........
APelton turbine
BFrancis turbine
CKaplan turbine
DBulb turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3366 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
If Hₙₑₜ = 20 m, P = 20,000 HP, Nₛ = 600 rpm and N = 230 rpm, then the number of turbine will be ...........
APelton turbine
BFrancis turbine
CKaplan turbine
DBulb turbine
Answer is hidden
Question 3367 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Calculate the total number of poles of generator for a Francis turbine with synchronous speed of 461.54 rpm if f = 50 Hz.
A13
B21
C20
D6
Answer is hidden
Question 3368 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
If the total discharge of a Pelton wheel is 3.672 m³/s and discharge of one jet is 1.818 m³/s, the number of jets required is ...........
A8
B2
C6
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 3369 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
What is the number of buckets on the runner of a Pelton turbine if jet ratio is 12?
A8
B2
C6
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 3370 of 4146Ch 8 · Hydropower
Find the specific speed of the turbine if speed = 6000 rpm, power generation = 5 MW in total by 2 turbines under head of 20 m.
A6315 rpm
B8212.3 rpm
C2098 rpm
D8996.11 rpm
Answer is hidden
Question 3371 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
Road transport is the dominant mode of transport in Nepal primarily because: greatest flexibility
ANepal has extensive navigable inland waterways
BNepal's mountainous terrain limits rail and inland waterway development, while road transport offers the
CRail transport is cheaper than road transport in Nepal
DAir transport has fully replaced the need for roads
Answer is hidden
Question 3372 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
In Nepal's road classification hierarchy, national highways are best described as:
ARoads connecting only village-level local areas with minimal traffic
BStrategic roads connecting major regions and international border points
CRoads used exclusively within a single city
DThe lowest tier of the road classification hierarchy
Answer is hidden
Question 3373 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
The reconnaissance survey, as the first stage of highway route survey, primarily involves:
AFixing the exact final centreline of the road
BA broad, rapid survey to identify feasible general route corridors, ruling out clearly unsuitable options
CDetailed structural design of bridges along the route
DField compaction control testing
Answer is hidden
Question 3374 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
The final location survey, as the most detailed stage of highway route survey, is primarily used to:
AIdentify broad, general route corridors only
BFix the exact centreline of the chosen alignment, providing data for detailed design and construction
CCompare multiple alternative corridors at a preliminary level
DDetermine the region's overall traffic volume only
Answer is hidden
Question 3375 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
An 'obligatory point' in highway alignment planning refers to: area
AAny random point along the route with no particular significance
BA location the alignment must pass through or avoid, such as an existing bridge site, a town, or a protected
COnly the starting point of the road
DA point where traffic signals must be installed
Answer is hidden
Question 3376 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
When evaluating alternate highway alignments, engineers typically compare candidate routes based on:
AOnly the alignment's total length, ignoring all other factors
BConstruction cost, land acquisition requirements, environmental/social impact, traffic service level, and safety
COnly the color of the pavement surface
DOnly the number of traffic signs planned
Answer is hidden
Question 3377 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
Topography, as a controlling factor in highway alignment, primarily influences:
AThe color scheme of road markings
BThe feasible gradients and curvature of the alignment
COnly the traffic signal timing at intersections
DOnly the choice of binding material used in asphalt
Answer is hidden
Question 3378 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
The Road Standards of Nepal, issued by the Department of Roads, primarily serve to: type
ARegulate only vehicle registration procedures
BSpecify geometric design standards and technical requirements tailored to each road classification/terrain
CSet only the price of road construction materials
DApply only to urban roads, with no relevance to national highways
Answer is hidden
Question 3379 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
Feeder roads, in Nepal's road classification system, primarily function to:
AConnect international border points directly to each other, bypassing all other roads
BConnect district headquarters/local areas to the national highway network
CServe only as urban roads within Kathmandu
DReplace the need for any national highways
Answer is hidden
Question 3380 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Planning and Survey
A key general aim of highway alignment planning is to achieve a route that is:
AAs long as possible, to maximize construction contracts
BAs short, safe, and economical as practically possible, while meeting design standards
CEntirely independent of geological or drainage considerations
DDesigned without any regard for cost
Answer is hidden
Question 3381 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
Design speed, in highway geometric design, is significant because it: sight distance, and superelevation
AHas no relationship to curve radii or sight distance
BIs the single most important controlling parameter for most geometric design elements, including curve radii,
CIs determined only after the road is constructed
DApplies only to vertical curves, never horizontal curves
Answer is hidden
Question 3382 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
Camber (cross-slope) on a highway's straight sections is primarily provided to:
AIncrease centrifugal force on vehicles
BDrain surface water off the carriageway
CProvide additional pavement width on curves
DReplace the need for shoulders
Answer is hidden
Question 3383 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
Superelevation on a horizontal highway curve is provided to:
AIncrease the vehicle's stopping sight distance
BCounteract centrifugal force acting on a vehicle traversing the curve
CReduce the curve's radius
DEliminate the need for side friction entirely
Answer is hidden
Question 3384 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
The ruling gradient in highway design is defined as:
AThe steepest gradient ever recorded on any road worldwide
BThe maximum gradient normally adopted in design, selected according to terrain type
CA gradient used only on urban roads
DA gradient that is always zero, regardless of terrain
Answer is hidden
Question 3385 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
Stopping sight distance (SSD) is calculated as the sum of:
AOnly the vehicle's braking distance, with no reaction component
BThe distance travelled during the driver's reaction time and the braking distance required to stop the vehicle
COnly the design vehicle's total length
DThe road's total right-of-way width
Answer is hidden
Question 3386 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
Extra widening on a horizontal highway curve is provided primarily to account for: curves
AThe vehicle's headlight glare at night
BOff-tracking of a vehicle's rear wheels and the driver's tendency to steer away from the pavement edge on
CThe road's camber on straight sections
DThe design of the road's median only
Answer is hidden
Question 3387 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
Set-back distance on the inside of a horizontal curve is required to ensure:
AMaximum possible land acquisition cost
BAdequate sight distance around the curve, given any obstructions such as buildings or cut slopes
CThe curve has zero superelevation
DThe pavement has no camber at that location
Answer is hidden
Question 3388 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
A summit (crest) vertical curve connects:
ATwo gradients of exactly the same value with no change
BAn upward gradient to a downward gradient
CA downward gradient to an upward gradient
DTwo horizontal curves directly, with no gradient change involved
Answer is hidden
Question 3389 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
Hill road design requires special attention to all of the following EXCEPT:
AStability of cut and fill slopes
BHairpin bends to gain elevation over short horizontal distances
CEffective drainage management and avoidance of landslide-prone areas
DThe design of a large, at-grade urban intersection roundabout unrelated to the hill terrain
Answer is hidden
Question 3390 of 4146Ch 9 · Geometric Design of Highway
Road drainage structures, such as side drains and culverts, are sized based primarily on:
AThe road's design speed alone
BThe design storm runoff that must be safely conveyed away from the road
COnly the pavement's binding material type
DThe vehicle's stopping sight distance
Answer is hidden
Question 3391 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
Sieve analysis of aggregates is used to determine:
AThe aggregate's resistance to crushing load
BThe particle size distribution (gradation) of the aggregate
CThe bitumen's penetration value
DThe subgrade's CBR value
Answer is hidden
Question 3392 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
The Los Angeles abrasion test evaluates an aggregate's:
AParticle size distribution only
BResistance to abrasion/wear, combining impact and grinding action in a rotating drum
CBitumen content
DSubgrade CBR value
Answer is hidden
Question 3393 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
The aggregate soundness test primarily assesses:
AThe aggregate's resistance to crushing under gradual load
BThe aggregate's resistance to weathering/disintegration, often via sulphate solution cycles
CThe bitumen's ductility
DThe pavement's flexural strength
Answer is hidden
Question 3394 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
The penetration test on bitumen measures:
AThe distance a bitumen sample can be stretched before breaking
BThe consistency/hardness of bitumen, via the depth a standard needle penetrates it under specified conditions
CThe temperature at which bitumen ignites
DThe aggregate's gradation
Answer is hidden
Question 3395 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
The ductility test on bitumen measures: without cracking
AThe aggregate's resistance to abrasion
BThe distance a standard bitumen briquette can be stretched before breaking, indicating its ability to deform
CThe bitumen's flash point temperature
DThe subgrade's plastic limit
Answer is hidden
Question 3396 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
The softening point test on bitumen determines: susceptibility
AThe temperature at which bitumen ignites
BThe temperature at which the bitumen softens to a specified consistency, relevant to temperature-
CThe aggregate's crushing value
DThe subgrade's CBR value
Answer is hidden
Question 3397 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
The Marshall mix design method is used primarily to determine:
AThe subgrade's CBR value
BThe optimum bitumen content for an asphalt mix, based on stability, flow, density, air voids, and VMA
CThe aggregate's Los Angeles abrasion value
DThe bitumen's flash point
Answer is hidden
Question 3398 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
The California Bearing Ratio (CBR) test is primarily used to: thickness design
AMeasure the bitumen's viscosity
BMeasure subgrade soil strength relative to a standard crushed stone material, as a key input for pavement
CDetermine the aggregate's soundness
DMeasure the road's stopping sight distance
Answer is hidden
Question 3399 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
Atterberg limits (liquid limit, plastic limit) are used in highway engineering primarily to:
ACharacterize subgrade soil properties relevant to pavement performance
BMeasure the bitumen's ductility
CDetermine the aggregate's impact value
DMeasure traffic volume at an intersection
Answer is hidden
Question 3400 of 4146Ch 9 · Highway Materials
Flash and fire point tests on bitumen are primarily conducted to determine:
AThe bitumen's ability to stretch without breaking
BSafety-related temperature limits for handling and heating bitumen
CThe aggregate's particle size distribution
DThe subgrade's compaction characteristics
Answer is hidden
Question 3401 of 4146Ch 9 · Traffic Engineering and Safety
The PIEV process, relevant to driver reaction time in highway design, stands for:
AMajor structural overlay or reconstruction of the pavement
BMinor, frequent activities such as pothole patching, crack sealing, and drainage clearing
CComplete replacement of the subgrade
DOnly periodic resurfacing every several years
Answer is hidden
Question 3429 of 4146Ch 9 · Road Construction & Maintenance
Periodic maintenance of a road pavement, compared to routine maintenance, typically involves:
ADaily minor patching only
BLess frequent, more substantial activities such as resurfacing or resealing the pavement surface
CComplete reconstruction of the entire road
DNo maintenance activity at all
Answer is hidden
Question 3430 of 4146Ch 9 · Road Construction & Maintenance
Pavement rehabilitation, as distinct from routine or periodic maintenance, is applied when: major structural intervention
AThe pavement shows no signs of distress whatsoever
BThe pavement has deteriorated significantly beyond what routine/periodic maintenance can address, requiring
COnly minor potholes need patching
DOnly the road markings need repainting
Answer is hidden
Question 3431 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The movement of ........... from one place to another place with safe, easy, comfort, economical is known as transportation.
Apeople
Bgoods
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3432 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The main objective of transportation is ...........
Aeconomical transport of goods
Beconomical transport of passengers
Cto generate revenue
Dsafe economical and efficient transport of goods and passengers
Answer is hidden
Question 3433 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is the not disadvantage of road transport?
AMobility
BSafety
CAesthetics
DPollution
Answer is hidden
Question 3434 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The primary modes of transportation is ...........
Acable car
Birrigation canal
Cconveyor belts
Drailway
Answer is hidden
Question 3435 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The secondary modes of transportation is ...........
Aropeway
Bairport
CSTOL port
Drailway
Answer is hidden
Question 3436 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is fastest modes of transportation?
ARoadways
BWaterways
CAirways
DRailways
Answer is hidden
Question 3437 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is cheapest modes of transportation in Nepal?
ARoadways
BWaterways
CAirways
DRailways
Answer is hidden
Question 3438 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which modes of transportation provides door to door service?
ARoadways
BRailways
CWaterways
DAirways
Answer is hidden
Question 3439 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
For transportation purpose in Nepal, the first preference is given to ...........
AAirways
BWaterways
CRoadways
DRailways
Answer is hidden
Question 3440 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which is the most flexible kind of transportation?
Aairlines
Broadways
Crailways
Dwaterways
Answer is hidden
Question 3441 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is fixed facility?
ARailway
BRoadway
CWaterway
DAirway
Answer is hidden
Question 3442 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is flow entity?
ABus
BCar
CBoth (a) and (b)
DHighway
Answer is hidden
Question 3443 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which is not the fixed component?
AAirport
BHarbor
CRailroad track
DRailway
Answer is hidden
Question 3444 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The road foundation for modern highways construction, was developed by which of the following scientists?
ATelford
BMacadam
CTresguet
DBoth Telford and Macadam
Answer is hidden
Question 3445 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following types of roads are most preferred for highways?
ACement concrete roads
BGravel roads
CBituminous roads
DUnpaved surfaces
Answer is hidden
Question 3446 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What is the most reliable mode of transportation?
AWater transport
BRoad transport
CAir transport
DRailway transport
Answer is hidden
Question 3447 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The road foundation for modern highways construction was developed by ...........
ATelford
BMacadam
CTrezeguet and Telford simultaneously
DTelford and Macadam simultaneously
Answer is hidden
Question 3448 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The inventor of road making as a building science, was ...........
ASully
BTrezeguet
CTelford
DMacadam
Answer is hidden
Question 3449 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The Tresaguet method of laying roads was developed in ...........
A1764 A.D.
B1774 A.D.
C1800 A.D.
D1796 A.D.
Answer is hidden
Question 3450 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The Department of Road (DOR) was established in Nepal ...........
A2017 B.S.
B2027 B.S.
C2037 B.S.
D2007 B.S.
Answer is hidden
Question 3451 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following organization is responsible for road construction in Nepal?
ADOR
BDOTM
CCAAN
DMunicipality
Answer is hidden
Question 3452 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following organization is responsible for giving road permit in Nepal?
ADOR
BDOTM
CCAAN
DMunicipality
Answer is hidden
Question 3453 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following organization is responsible for giving air permit in Nepal?
ADOR
BDOTM
CCAAN
DMunicipality
Answer is hidden
Question 3454 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
According to administrative classification, which of the road has high mobility and least accessibility?
ANational highway
BDistrict network
CState highway
DLocal street and village road
Answer is hidden
Question 3455 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Roads in Nepal are classified as (Administrative) ...........
ANational highway
BFeeder roads
CUrban roads
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3456 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
National highways are represented by letter (NRS 2070) ...........
ANH followed by 2 digit number
BF followed by 3 digit number
CF followed by 2 digit number
DD followed by 2 digit number
Answer is hidden
Question 3457 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The main routes which passes through the length or breadth of the country is ...........
Aarterial road
Bnational road
Cfeeder road
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3458 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The main arterial routes pass through the length and breadth of the country ...........
Aarterial road
Bdistrict road
Cnational highway
Dfeeder road
Answer is hidden
Question 3459 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
A road within a city or town is called A ...........
Ahighway
Bfeeder road
Ccountry road
Dstreet
Answer is hidden
Question 3460 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
A road inside the city is called ...........
Astreet
Bring road
Ccountry road
Dtrunk road
Answer is hidden
Question 3461 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The number of National Highway, in current operation, in Nepal are ...........
A13
B18
C21
D80
Answer is hidden
Question 3462 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The first National Highway of Nepal is ...........
AMahendra highway
BTribhuvan highway
CAraniko highway
DPrithvi highway
Answer is hidden
Question 3463 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The longest national highway of Nepal is ...........
AMahendra highway
BPostal Highway
CPushpalal highway
DKathmandu-Terai expressway
Answer is hidden
Question 3464 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Highway code denoted by BP highway is ...........
ANH01
BNH03
CNH06
DNH13
Answer is hidden
Question 3465 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Feeders roads are represented by letter (NRS 2070) ...........
AH followed by 2 digit number
BF followed by 3 digit number
CF followed by 2 digit number
DD followed by 2 digit number
Answer is hidden
Question 3466 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per NRS 2070, the Right of Way (ROW) for feeder road is ...........
A15
B20
C30
D50
Answer is hidden
Question 3467 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The road connecting two towns is called A ...........
Aurban road
Bcountry road
Cnational highway
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3468 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
If the terrain cross slope is 5%, then the terrain is ...........
Arolling terrain
Bsteep terrain
Cplain terrain
Dmountainous terrain
Answer is hidden
Question 3469 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
A circumferential road, built around an urban area to enable free flow of traffic is called ...........
Aring road
Bloop road
Cmid strip
Dcircular road
Answer is hidden
Question 3470 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
How many types of terrain classification are as per NRS 2070?
AOne
BTwo
CThree
DFour
Answer is hidden
Question 3471 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per NRS 2070, the life of perpetual road is about ...........
A20 years
B30 years
C40 years
D10 years
Answer is hidden
Question 3472 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
NRS 2070, class I roads have ...........
AADT of 20,000 PCU or more in 20 yrs perspective period
BADT of 5000-20000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
CADT of 2000-5000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
DADT of less than 2000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
Answer is hidden
Question 3473 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
NRS 2070, class II roads have ...........
AADT of 20,000 PCU or more in 20 yrs perspective period
BADT of 5000-20000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
CADT of 2000-5000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
DADT of less than 2000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
Answer is hidden
Question 3474 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
NRS 2070, class III roads have ...........
AADT of 20,000 PCU or more in 20 yrs perspective period
BADT of 5000-20000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
CADT of 2000-5000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
DADT of less than 2000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
Answer is hidden
Question 3475 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
NRS 2070, class IV roads have ...........
AADT of 20,000 PCU or more in 20 yrs perspective period
BADT of 5000-20000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
CADT of 2000-5000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
DADT of less than 2000 PCU in 20 yrs perspective period
Answer is hidden
Question 3476 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The number of PCU and perspective period for the design of Class I road is ...........
A> 20000 at 20 years
B5000-2000 at 20 years
C2000-5000 at 20 years
D< 2000 at 20 years
Answer is hidden
Question 3477 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The type of roads can be utilized during monsoon is ...........
Aunpaved roads
Bgravel roads
Cbituminous roads
Dfair weather roads
Answer is hidden
Question 3478 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
If the average daily traffic of certain road is 10,000 PCU, then the type of road is ...........
AClass I road
BClass II road
CClass III road
DClass IV road
Answer is hidden
Question 3479 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The design speed of class-IV roads in Plain terrain is ...........
A40 kmph
B60 kmph
C80 kmph
D120 kmph
Answer is hidden
Question 3480 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The design speed of vehicle in 1st class road in plain terrian is ...........
A120 kmph
B100 kmph
C90 kmph
D80 kmph
Answer is hidden
Question 3481 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
For the design of Rural road, which standard is used?
ANRS
BIRC
CNRRS
DLocal standard
Answer is hidden
Question 3482 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is used for speed regulation?
A98th percentile cumulative frequency
B85th percentile cumulative frequency
C50th percentile cumulative frequency
D50th percentile cumulative frequency
Answer is hidden
Question 3483 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The traffic that is prepared based on 365 days of the year is called ...........
Ayearly traffic
Bannual average daily traffic
Caverage yearly traffic
Daverage daily traffic
Answer is hidden
Question 3484 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The type of the terrain with percentage cross slope 25-60 [14°-31°] falls under ...........
Aplain terrain
Brolling terrain
Csteep terrain
Dmountainous terrain
Answer is hidden
Question 3485 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The rolling terrain topography have cross slope of ...........
A0-10%
B10-25%
C25-60%
D> 60%
Answer is hidden
Question 3486 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The daily average traffic calculated based on 30 days' survey in 365 days is ...........
AAADT
BADT
CAAWT
DAWT
Answer is hidden
Question 3487 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The minimum width of a single lane road is ...........
A3.75 m
B7 m
C7.5 m
D10 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3488 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of following is not related to cross section of road?
ACamber
BSuperelevation
CLanes
DGradient
Answer is hidden
Question 3489 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
According to NRS-2070, the minimum shoulder width in class I road is ...........
A3.75 m
B2.50 m
C3.00 m
D2.00 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3490 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per NRS, the minimum shoulder width provided for class IV road in each side of carriageway is ...........
A2.0 m
B1.5 m
C1.0 m
D0.75 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3491 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The minimum width of footpath on each side as per NRS 2070 is ...........
A1.5 m
B0.75 m
C2.5 m
D3 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3492 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
If an ascending gradient meets with another descending gradient, then the curve formed is ...........
Asummit curve
Bvalley curve
Ctransition curve
Ddeviation angle
Answer is hidden
Question 3493 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The length of the summit curve is based on ...........
Acomfort
Bsight distance
Cconvexity
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3494 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The equation for L > OSD for summit curve is given by ...........
ANS² / (8H)
BNS² / (8H)
CNS² / (10H)
D12H
Answer is hidden
Question 3495 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Transition curve is introduced in ...........
Ahorizontal curve
Bcircular curve
Cbetween circular and horizontal curve
Dvertical curve
Answer is hidden
Question 3496 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The ideal shape of a transition curve is ...........
Aclothoid
Bcubic spiral
Ccubic parabola
Dlemniscate
Answer is hidden
Question 3497 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The type of transition curves generally provided on hill roads is ...........
Acircular
Bcubic spiral
Ccubic parabola
Dspiral
Answer is hidden
Question 3498 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The most preferred type of transition curve by IRC for highway is ...........
Aspiral
Blemniscate
Cparabola
Dcubic parabola
Answer is hidden
Question 3499 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The radius of transition curve at the junction of straight line is ...........
A0
BR
C2R
Dinfinity
Answer is hidden
Question 3500 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The main purpose of providing camber is ...........
Ato remove storm water from pavement
Bto maintain equilibrium
Cto follow IRC specifications
Dto follow geometric specifications
Answer is hidden
Question 3501 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The camber required depends on ...........
Arainfall
Btype of pavement and rainfall
Csuper elevation
Dcamber
Answer is hidden
Question 3502 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The most raised portion of the pavement is called ...........
Astraight line camber
Bsuper elevation
Ccrown
Dkerb
Answer is hidden
Question 3503 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is type of camber?
AStraight at edge and parabolic at crown
BStraight line camber
CParabolic
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3504 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The camber is not provided in which of the following shape is ...........
Aparabolic
Bstraight
Ccombination of straight and parabolic
Dcircular
Answer is hidden
Question 3505 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
On a pavement with parabolic camber, the angle of inclination of the vehicles will be ...........
Amore at the crown
Bsame at the edges as well at the crown
Cmore at the edges
Dbanking
Answer is hidden
Question 3506 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The raising of outer edge with respect to inner edge is known as ...........
Asuper-elevation
Bcant
Cbanking
Dall of above
Answer is hidden
Question 3507 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per NRS, the super-elevation provided for bituminous road in snow bounded hilly terrain is ...........
A2.5%
B4%
C7%
D10%
Answer is hidden
Question 3508 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The minimum super elevation on a road curve is equal to ...........
Aequal to camber slope
B5%
C10%
D4%
Answer is hidden
Question 3509 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The formula of super elevation is ...........
Ae = V² / (127 * R)
Be = V² / (254 * R)
Ce = 30 * R
De = V² / (60 * R)
Answer is hidden
Question 3510 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The ruling minimum radius in the curve is given by ...........
AR = V² / (147 * (e + f))
BR = V² / (127 * (e + f))
CR = V² / (147 * (e - 2))
DR = V² / (R - f)
Answer is hidden
Question 3511 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Any gradient on a road is said to be an exceptional gradient, if it is ...........
Amore than ruling gradient
Bless than average gradient
Cmore than floating gradient
Dless than minimum gradient or more than maximum gradient
Answer is hidden
Question 3512 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The SSD is based on ...........
Aspeed of vehicle
Bvoluntary action of brain
Cbreak reaction time
Dlength of vehicle
Answer is hidden
Question 3513 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The stopping sight distance does not depend on ...........
APIEV theory / reflex action of brain
Bspeed of vehicle
Cfriction
Dlength of vehicle
Answer is hidden
Question 3514 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The reaction time considered in SSD is ...........
A1.5 sec
B2 sec
C2.5 sec
D3 sec
Answer is hidden
Question 3515 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The reaction time of a driver assumed in OSD is ...........
A1 sec
B2 sec
C2.5 sec
D3 sec
Answer is hidden
Question 3516 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The length visible to driver at any instance of time is called ...........
Asight distance
Bvisibility limit
Chead light distance
Dovertaking sight distance
Answer is hidden
Question 3517 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The braking efficiency mainly depends on ...........
Asight distance
BPIEV theory
Cfriction
Dlength of the curve
Answer is hidden
Question 3518 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The relationship between SSD and ISD is ...........
ASSD = ISD
BSSD = 1.5 SSD
CISD = 2 SSD
DSSD = 2 SSD
Answer is hidden
Question 3519 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The desirable relationship between OSD and length of overtaking zone is ...........
Alength of overtaking zone = 2 OSD
Blength of overtaking zone = 3 OSD
Clength of overtaking zone = 5 OSD
Dlength of overtaking zone = 6 OSD
Answer is hidden
Question 3520 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
If the speed of overtaken vehicle is 80 kmph, then the design speed is ...........
A80 kmph
B100 kmph
C96 kmph
D106 kmph
Answer is hidden
Question 3521 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The design of horizontal and vertical alignments, super elevation, gradient is worst affected by ...........
Alength of vehicle
Bwidth of vehicle
Cspeed of vehicle
Dheight of vehicle
Answer is hidden
Question 3522 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The extra width of pavement is provided on ...........
Ahorizontal curve
Bwidth of pavement
Clength of pavement
Dsuper elevation
Answer is hidden
Question 3523 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Extra widening is equal to ...........
Asum of mechanical and psychological widening
Bpsychological widening only
Cmechanical widening only
Dhalf the sum of mechanical and psychological widening
Answer is hidden
Question 3524 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The mechanical widening of a track is given by where n is the number of tracks, l is the length of wheel base and R is the radius of track is ...........
Anl² / (2R)
Bnl² / (3R)
Cnl² / R
D3R
Answer is hidden
Question 3525 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The total value of extra widening required at a horizontal curve on a two lane hill road of radius 42 m for a design speed of 50 kmph and for vehicles with wheel base 6 m is ...........
A0.500 m
B0.589 m
C1.669 m
D0.089 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3526 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per NRS, the minimum setback provided on either side from road boundary in village road is ...........
A15 m
B6 m
C3 m
D7.5 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3527 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The excess water on shoulder in the dry region with a good drainage system causes ...........
Awater stagnation
Bfloods
Cdamage to pavement
Dincrease of initial cost
Answer is hidden
Question 3528 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The drainage structure parallel to the road provided to intercept rain in a hilly region is ...........
ACatch drain
BSide drain
CSloping drain
DCross drain
Answer is hidden
Question 3529 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The removal and diversion of surface water from the roadway is called ...........
Asub surface drainage
Bsurface drainage
Ccamber
Dcross slope
Answer is hidden
Question 3530 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which is the most preferred shape of road drainage?
ARectangular
BTrapezoidal
CTriangular
DCircular
Answer is hidden
Question 3531 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The longitudinal drain may be provided if the cross slope is more than ...........
A1%
B2%
C3%
D4%
Answer is hidden
Question 3532 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per NRRS 2071, the minimum gradient on roads with unlined side drains is ...........
A0.5%
B1%
C1.5%
D2%
Answer is hidden
Question 3533 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per NRRS-2071, the maximum gradient for hair pin bend in hill roads is ...........
A4%
B7%
C10%
D12%
Answer is hidden
Question 3534 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The minimum vertical clearance of overhanging cliffs or any other structure above the surface of a hill road, should be ...........
A3 m
B4 m
C5 m
D6 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3535 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The resisting length should be kept ...........
Aminimum
Bmaximum
Cdepends on gradient
Ddepends on rise and fall
Answer is hidden
Question 3536 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The materials not included in highway construction are ...........
Astone
Bdust
Csoil
Dpetrol
Answer is hidden
Question 3537 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which is the organic binding material used in road pavement?
AStone dust
BBitumen
CCement
DLime
Answer is hidden
Question 3538 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In water bound macadam roads, binding material, is ...........
Asand
Bstone dust
Ccement
Dbrick dust
Answer is hidden
Question 3539 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The maximum size of aggregate in surface course is ...........
A18.5 mm
B19.5 mm
C20.5 mm
D21.5 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3540 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Cyclopean aggregate has size more than ...........
A4.75 mm
B25 mm
C45 mm
D75 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3541 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The maximum size of aggregate in base course is ...........
A25 mm
B50 mm
C40 mm
D30 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3542 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The flaky aggregates should not exceed ...........
A1/2 of mean dimension
B3/5 of mean dimension
C5/8 of mean dimension
D4/5 of mean dimension
Answer is hidden
Question 3543 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The capability of aggregate to resist more weathering action and wheel load is called ...........
Ahardness
Btoughness
Cstrength
Ddurability
Answer is hidden
Question 3544 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The aggregates which do not have sufficient strength like waste bricks can be used in ...........
Abase
Bshoulder
Csurface
Dfootpath
Answer is hidden
Question 3545 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The aggregate sample used for crushing test is ...........
Apasses through 2.36 mm
Bpasses through 4.75 mm and retained on 2.36 mm
Cpasses through 7.5 mm and retained on 4.75 mm
Dpasses through 12.5 mm and retained on 10 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3546 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The fine aggregate are the natural or crushed stone that more than 50% ...........
Aretained in sieve size 4.75 mm
Bpasses through sieve size 4.75 mm but retained in 2.36 mm
Cpasses through sieve size 4.75 mm but retained in 0.075 mm
Dpasses through sieve size 2.36 mm but retained in 0.075 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3547 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The method used for gradation test of aggregate is ...........
Aabrasion test
Bflakiness index
Csieve analysis
Dsoundness
Answer is hidden
Question 3548 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The dividing and operating of aggregates into different sizes is called ...........
Asieve analysis
Bgap grading
Cgrading
Dhardness
Answer is hidden
Question 3549 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
If the aggregates are exceptionally strong then they are having impact value which is ...........
Aless than 10
Bless than 15
Cless than 30
Dgreater than 30
Answer is hidden
Question 3550 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Aggregates to be used for wearing course, the impact value shouldn't exceed ........... percent.
A30
B35
C40
D25
Answer is hidden
Question 3551 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The aggregate impact value of the aggregate used in ...........
Abuilding concrete is less than 45
Broad pavement concrete is less than 30
Crunway concrete is less than 30
Dall the options are correct
Answer is hidden
Question 3552 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Abrasion test of aggregate is conducted to find ...........
Ahardness
Btoughness
Cdurability
Dstrength
Answer is hidden
Question 3553 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
If 70% aggregates doesn't pass through the 2.36 mm sieve, then what would be the value of Aggregate impact value?
A0.3
B0.7
C0.4
D0.15
Answer is hidden
Question 3554 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The highest CBR number is required for ...........
Apavement
Bsub-grade
Csub-base
Dbase
Answer is hidden
Question 3555 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which test is used to measure weathering of aggregate?
Aimpact test
Bcrushing test
CSoundness test
DSolubility test
Answer is hidden
Question 3556 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The test carried out for toughness of stone or resistance to fracture under repeated load is ...........
Aabrasion test
Bcrushing test
Cimpact test
Dsoundness test
Answer is hidden
Question 3557 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which machine is preferred for abrasion test?
AVicat mould
BLos Angeles
CFlakiness Gauge
DElongation Gauge
Answer is hidden
Question 3558 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is commonly used as an organic binding material in road construction?
AStone dust
BBitumen
CLimestone
DSand
Answer is hidden
Question 3559 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The binding materials used for rigid pavement is ...........
AStone dust
Bpetroleum
CCement
DBitumen
Answer is hidden
Question 3560 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Bitumen is a by-product of ...........
Awood
Bpetroleum
Ckerosene
Dcoal
Answer is hidden
Question 3561 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Bitumen is obtained from ...........
Anatural organic base
Bsynthetic
Cpetroleum
Dcoal
Answer is hidden
Question 3562 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Bitumen extraction test is typically done at ...........
A1500 rpm at 160°C
B3600 rpm at 100°C
C1200 rpm at 140°C
D3600 rpm at 110°C
Answer is hidden
Question 3563 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The specific gravity of bitumen lies between ...........
A0.8 and 0.9
B0.95 and 0.97
C0.97 and 1.02
D1.02 and 1.05
Answer is hidden
Question 3564 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following test is used to determine the bitumen content?
AMarshall test
BPenetration test
CVee-Bee test
DDuctility test
Answer is hidden
Question 3565 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The bitumen is completely soluble in ...........
Acarbon monoxide
Bcarbon dioxide
Ccarbon disulphide
Dcarbon sulfide
Answer is hidden
Question 3566 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The grade of bitumen 80/100 means its ...........
Apenetration
Bductility
Cviscosity
Dsoftening point
Answer is hidden
Question 3567 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
If the penetration grade is 62, the penetration value is ...........
A62 mm
B6.2 mm
C0.62 mm
D620 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3568 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The temperature used in penetration test is ...........
A23
B27
C30
D25
Answer is hidden
Question 3569 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following grade of bitumen is harder?
A30
B60
C80
D100
Answer is hidden
Question 3570 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The insoluble material presence in the bitumen should preferably less than ...........
A0.4%
B1%
C2%
D4%
Answer is hidden
Question 3571 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
For testing loss in heating, the bitumen sample is heated at the temperature of ...........
A127°C
B150°C
C163°C
D200°C
Answer is hidden
Question 3572 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following test is used to determine the consistency and flow resistance of bitumen?
ADuctility test
BViscosity test
CSoftening point test
DPenetration test
Answer is hidden
Question 3573 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The ductility value of bitumen for suitability in road construction should not be less than ...........
A50 cm
B40 cm
C30 cm
D60 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 3574 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The rate of stretching bitumen in ductility test is ...........
A5 mm/min
B5 cm/min
C10 cm/min
D10 mm/min
Answer is hidden
Question 3575 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The solvent used in cutback bitumen is ...........
Akerosene
Boil
Cpetrol
Ddiesel
Answer is hidden
Question 3576 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The type of bitumen whose viscosity has reduced by addition of volatile solvent is ...........
Acut-back bitumen
Bbitumen emulsion
Croad tar
Dasphalt
Answer is hidden
Question 3577 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which bitumen does not need heating?
APavement grade
BBitumen emulsion
CModified bitumen
DCut-back bitumen
Answer is hidden
Question 3578 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What is the standard temperature for Marshall test specimen is ...........
A27°C
B25°C
C60°C
D40°C
Answer is hidden
Question 3579 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The number of blows in Marshalls test specimen is ...........
A25
B30
C55
D75
Answer is hidden
Question 3580 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The test used for detecting over heated or cracked bitumen is ...........
Aductility test
Bspot test
Csoftening point test
Dflash and fire point test
Answer is hidden
Question 3581 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What is the standard temperature taken for the rebound (benklemen beam) deflection calculation?
A27°C
B30°C
C33°C
D25°C
Answer is hidden
Question 3582 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The benklement beam deflection studies were carried out on a highway pavement at a temperature of 30°C. The rebound deflection was found to be 1.31 mm. What would be the corrected rebound deflection?
A1.33 mm
B1.35 mm
C1.40 mm
D1.36 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3583 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Benkelman beam deflection method is used for the design of ...........
Arigid overlay on rigid pavement
Bflexible overlay on flexible pavement
Cflexible overlay on rigid pavement
Drigid overlay on flexible pavement
Answer is hidden
Question 3584 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The benklement beam deflection studies were carried out on a highway pavement at a temperature of 30°C. The rebound deflection was found to be 1.05 mm. What would be the corrected rebound deflection?
A1.0 mm
B1.10 mm
C1.20 mm
D1.16 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3585 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In double lane road pavement, the deflection in benklement beam test is checked at the distance of ...........
A0.9 m from center
B0.6 m from edge
C0.9 m from center
D0.9 m from edge
Answer is hidden
Question 3586 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is not a category of traffic studies?
ADynamic studies
BInventories
CEconomic studies
DAdministrative studies
Answer is hidden
Question 3587 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is the most vulnerable part of the traffic?
ACattle
BPedestrians
CVehicles
DTraffic jam
Answer is hidden
Question 3588 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is not an objective of OD studies?
ATo determine the amount of by passable traffic that enters a town and thus establishes the need for diversion
BTo develop trip generation and trip distribution models
CTo determine the potential of the present highway system and plan for new facilities
DTo assess the pedestrian pattern
Answer is hidden
Question 3589 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is not a factor affecting traffic capacity?
ATraffic control devices
BGradient
CLateral clearance
DLane width
Answer is hidden
Question 3590 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following traffic study uses traffic models to analyze traffic?
AAccident studies
BCalibration studies
CTraffic volume studies
DParking studies
Answer is hidden
Question 3591 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The number of vehicles crossing a section of road in a unit time at any selected period is called ...........
Atraffic volume study
Btraffic density study
Ctraffic mass study
Dtraffic characteristic study
Answer is hidden
Question 3592 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Time mean speed (TMS) is ........... space mean speed (SMS).
Aslightly less than
Bnever less than
Cnever greater than
Dequal to
Answer is hidden
Question 3593 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is the primary disadvantage of Roadside interview method?
ARequires more manpower
BTraffic disruption
CHuge set of data
DSkilled surveyors
Answer is hidden
Question 3594 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is one of the uses of a collision diagram?
ADemarcating area for parking
BRecord of accident occurrence
CInterpreting traffic data
DRedesign of traffic lights
Answer is hidden
Question 3595 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which intersection has no conflict?
AClover leaf
BDiamond
CTrumpet
DChannelized
Answer is hidden
Question 3596 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
An intersection that is provided for different levels of the road is called ...........
Aintersection at grade
Bgrade-separated intersections
Cchannelized intersection
Drotary intersection
Answer is hidden
Question 3597 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The procedure of adopting medians and traffic island in an un-channelized intersection is called ...........
Achannelizing
Bdesigning
Cdividing
Ddesigning
Answer is hidden
Question 3598 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of these is INCORRECT in case of channelised intersection of roads?
Adividing
Bcrossing
Cchannelizing
DVery cheap to construct
Answer is hidden
Question 3599 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What is traffic engineering?
ATraffic engineering optimizes the performance and efficiency of the movement of people, goods, and transportation
BTraffic engineering mainly deals with improving traffic performance, traffic studies, and traffic networks
CThe main goal of traffic engineering is to reduce high-speed collisions
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3600 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The basic objective of traffic engineering is to achieve ...........
Aefficient, free and rapid flow of traffic with least priority given to accidents
Befficient, free and rapid flow of traffic with fewer accidents
Cefficient and rapid flow of traffic
Drapid flow of traffic
Answer is hidden
Question 3601 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which is the most important objective of traffic engineering?
ATo provide a high speed road without any other priority
BTo increase the traffic
CTo reduce the accidents
DTo consider pedestrians as obstruction
Answer is hidden
Question 3602 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The hearing, visibility and reaction time are covered in which type of factors?
APhysical
BMental
CPsychological
DEnvironmental
Answer is hidden
Question 3603 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is known as the time lost by traffic due to traffic friction and traffic control devices?
ASetback time
BDelay
CGreen time
DRed time
Answer is hidden
Question 3604 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What does PIEV mean?
APerception, imitation, environment and volition
BPerception, identification, environment and volition
Answer is hidden
Question 3605 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The best type of interchange can be provided with ...........
Arotary
Bdiamond
Cpartial cloverleaf
Dfull cloverleaf
Answer is hidden
Question 3606 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The process of leaving the vehicles and gaining either left or right of existing lane is called ...........
Adiverging
Bmerging
Ccrossing
Dweaving
Answer is hidden
Question 3607 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Longitudinal ridging due to the channelization of traffic is called ...........
Agrooving
Bshoving
Cridging
Dskidding
Answer is hidden
Question 3608 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The type of island used in Tinkune-Koteshwor ring road is ...........
Adivisional islands
Bchannelizing islands
Cpedestrian islands
Drotary island
Answer is hidden
Question 3609 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The capacity of an uncontrolled intersection is ...........
A1000 to 1200 vehicles/hour
B1100 to 1200 vehicles/hour
C1400 to 1600 vehicles/hour
D1200 to 1400 vehicles/hour
Answer is hidden
Question 3610 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What is the recommended speed limit for traffic in a rotary (roundabout) designed for urban areas?
A25 km/hr
B30 km/hr
C35 km/hr
D40 km/hr
Answer is hidden
Question 3611 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The maximum number of vehicles beyond which rotary intersection is not effective from ...........
A500 PCU/hr
B3000 PCU/hr
C5000 PCU/hr
D10000 PCU/hr
Answer is hidden
Question 3612 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The minimum weaving angle in the rotary section is ...........
A10°
B15°
C20°
D25°
Answer is hidden
Question 3613 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The most cost-effective/economical layout of lighting for narrow roads is ...........
Acentral
Bstaggered, on both side
Csingle side
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3614 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which factors to be considered in the design of road lighting?
ALuminaire distribution of light
BThe spacing of light units
CLighting layouts
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3615 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The factors that influence the night visibility ...........
Ashape and size of vehicle
Bbrightness of object
Cmore trucks are running on the roads
Dfewer pedestrians on the road section
Answer is hidden
Question 3616 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per IRC, the minimum horizontal clearance required for lighting poles for the road with raised kerbs is ........... from the edge of raised kerb.
A0.6 m
B0.5 m
C0.4 m
D0.3 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3617 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which type of road pavement provide greater night visibility?
ARigid pavement
BFlexible pavement
CWater bound madam
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3618 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which factors influence night visibility in highway?
ASize of objects
BBrightness of objects
CReflecting characteristics of the pavement surface
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3619 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The spacing of lighting units influenced by ...........
Aelectric distribution poles
Billumination
Croad layout
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3620 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
For the movement of vehicles at an intersection of two roads, without any interference, the type of grade separator generally preferred to, is ...........
Adelta
Btrumpet
Cdiamond interchange
Dclover leaf
Answer is hidden
Question 3621 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following traffic study determines total parking demand?
AParking studies
BTravel time studies
CAccident studies
DTraffic volume study
Answer is hidden
Question 3622 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is 'On street parking'?
AMulti-storey parking
BUnderground parking
CKerb parking
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3623 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The ill effects of parking are ...........
Acongestion
Bcrash
Cobstruction to the emergency vehicles
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3624 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The best type of angle parking is ...........
A30°
B45°
C60°
D90°
Answer is hidden
Question 3625 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The maximum number of vehicles can be parked with ...........
A30° angle parking
B45° angle parking
C60° angle parking
D90° angle parking
Answer is hidden
Question 3626 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The type of parking in which the vehicles are parked along the kerb is called ...........
Akerb parking
Boff-street parking
Cparallel parking
Dangle parking
Answer is hidden
Question 3627 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The maximum flow of traffic is obtained at ...........
Azero density
Bjam density
Chalf of jam density
Dquarter of jam density
Answer is hidden
Question 3628 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What is the purpose of a travel time and delay study?
ATo evaluate the traffic stream
BFor survey data
CTo assess the quality of traffic movement
DTo assess the time taken to travel by various vehicles
Answer is hidden
Question 3629 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per IRC: 67-2001, the shape and colour of a STOP sign is ...........
Atriangular in shape and black in colour with white border
Boctagonal in shape and red in colour with white border
Ccircular in shape and red in colour with white border
Dcircular in shape and black in colour with white border
Answer is hidden
Question 3630 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The background color of informatory sign is ...........
Ayellow
Bgreen
Cwhite
Dblue
Answer is hidden
Question 3631 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
'Give Way' is regulatory traffic sign with ...........
Atriangular
Bcircular
Coctagonal
Drectangular
Answer is hidden
Question 3632 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The background color of the informatory sign board is ...........
Ayellow
Bred
Cwhite
Dgreen
Answer is hidden
Question 3633 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is regulatory traffic sign?
AParking place
BRoad narrow on both sides
CStop and give way sign
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3634 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which one of the following is not a warning sign?
ACurve ahead
BNarrow bridge ahead
CU-turn
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3635 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The school ahead is the type of traffic sign of ...........
Ainformatory sign
Bcautionary sign
Cmandatory
Dboth informatory and cautionary
Answer is hidden
Question 3636 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The signs should be mounted on sign post painted alternatively with ...........
A10 cm yellow and black bands
B70 cm white and green bands
C25 cm black and white bands
D50 cm black and yellow bands
Answer is hidden
Question 3637 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The minimum thickness of base course is ...........
A15 cm
B25 cm
C20 cm
D30 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 3638 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Minimum thickness of the base of a flexible pavement, is ...........
A10 cm
B15 cm
C20 cm
D25 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 3639 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The thickness of bituminous carpet varies from ...........
A10-20 mm
B20-25 mm
C25-30 mm
D30-50 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3640 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is top most layer?
AWearing course
BBase course
CSub-base course
DSub-grade
Answer is hidden
Question 3641 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The dangerous types of failure is the failure of ...........
Awearing course
Bbase course
CSub-base course
DSub-grade
Answer is hidden
Question 3642 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is bottom most layer?
AWearing course
BBase course
CSub-base course
DSub-grade
Answer is hidden
Question 3643 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Flexible pavement consists of ........... course after sub-grade course.
Agrade course
Bbase course
Csub-base course
Dbinder course
Answer is hidden
Question 3644 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Rigid pavements are stiffer than flexible pavements due to ...........
Alow modulus of rigidity
Blow modulus of elasticity
Chigh modulus of rigidity
Dhigh modulus of elasticity
Answer is hidden
Question 3645 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The thickness of single layer bitumen bound macadam is ...........
A10-12 mm
B20-25 mm
C40-60 mm
D50-100 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3646 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What is the thickness of the binder course that is provided in the pavement?
A50-100 mm
B100-200 mm
C25-50 mm
D100-150 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3647 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The expansion joints are provided at an interval of ........... if the slab is laid in summer.
A4 to 5 m
B13 to 14 m
C50 to 60 m
D90 to 120 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3648 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
According to DOR, the maximum thickness of sub-base/premix pavement is ...........
A20
B25
C30
D35
Answer is hidden
Question 3649 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which premix is used in the base course?
AOtta seal
BBituminous concrete
CBituminous bound macadam
DSurface dressing
Answer is hidden
Question 3650 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the below is a type of empirical methods used for the design of flexible pavements?
AGroup index method
BBurmister's layer theory
CTriaxial test
DIRC method
Answer is hidden
Question 3651 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The design methods for flexible pavements are ...........
ABoussinesq theory
BBurmister's layer theory
CSemi-empirical method
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3652 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which temperature stress is generally ignored in the design?
AFrictional stress
BInterior stress
CEdge stress
DCorner stress
Answer is hidden
Question 3653 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Temperature variation produce heavy temperature stresses in ...........
Aflexible pavement
Brigid pavement
Csemi-rigid pavement
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3654 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The vertical ........... on top of the sub-grade controls the sub-grade rutting.
Atensile strain
Bcompressive strain
Ccompressive stress
Dtensile stress
Answer is hidden
Question 3655 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Temperature stresses in the pavement are caused due to the variation of temperature
Aslab
Bcement
Csub-grade
Dsub-base
Answer is hidden
Question 3656 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The length of the side of warning sign boards of roads is ...........
A40 cm
B30 cm
C45 cm
D50 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 3657 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What is the effect of using traffic signals?
AReduce right turn conflict us well as rear end collision
BReduce right turn but may increase rear end collision
CIncreases both
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3658 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following are the disadvantages of traffic signals?
AThe quality of the traffic flow improves
BTraffic handling capacity increases
CThe rear end collision increases
DProvide orderly moment at intersection
Answer is hidden
Question 3659 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The pedestrian may cross the road with care in ...........
Ared standing man
Bgreen walking man
Cflashing green man
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3660 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is not a parameter of traffic stream?
ASpeed
BPCU
CDensity of traffic
DFlow of traffic
Answer is hidden
Question 3661 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In pedestrian signal, "GO" represents ...........
Agreen walking man
Bgreen walking women
Cboth of the above
Dred standing man
Answer is hidden
Question 3662 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
'Clearance time' is indicated by ...........
Ared
Bgreen
Camber
Dwhite
Answer is hidden
Question 3663 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The types of traffic control devices are ...........
Asign and road marking
Bsignals and island
Croad light for night driving
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3664 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
When does shear stress occur in the pavement?
AFriction between pavement and tyre
BSeepage into sub-grade
CLoading exceeds capacity
DWeathering of the pavement surface
Answer is hidden
Question 3665 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The direct impact of vertical stress on the road pavement may cause ...........
Arutting
Bfatigue
Cshear
Ddeflection
Answer is hidden
Question 3666 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the below is not a type of stress that is commonly found in flexible pavements?
Anormal stress
Bshear stress
Cvertical stress
Dradial stress
Answer is hidden
Question 3667 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In ........... pavement, the transfer of the vertical or compressive stresses to the lower layer by grain to grain through point of contact in granular structure.
Arigid
Bflexible
Csemi-rigid
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3668 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Frost protection layer is provided in between which layers?
ASurface and base course
BSub-base and base course
CSub-grade and sub-base course
DSurface and sub-base course
Answer is hidden
Question 3669 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Frictional stresses are developed due to ...........
Arelative movement of the base
Brelative movement of the slab
Cdaily temperature variation
Dseasonal temperature variation
Answer is hidden
Question 3670 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What is the factor that the design of semi-rigid pavements is based on?
AStability
BCracks
CStress
DDeflections
Answer is hidden
Question 3671 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The load transfer to lower layers in flexible pavements is by ...........
Aconsolidation of sub-grade
Bgrain to grain contact
Csheet deformation
Dbending action of layers
Answer is hidden
Question 3672 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per DOR, the maximum thickness of premix carpet is ...........
A20 mm
B30 mm
C25 mm
D15 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3673 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per DOR, the minimum value of CBR for granular sub base is ...........
A10
B20
C25
D30
Answer is hidden
Question 3674 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
What are the type of stresses induced due to the temperature change in the pavement?
AFrictional stresses and thermal stress
BWarping stress and thermal stress
CWarping stress and frictional stress
DThermal stress and temporal stress
Answer is hidden
Question 3675 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
When does the warping of the cement concrete slab occur?
ADifferent temperature on layers
BTemperature differential exceeds 30
CSame temperature on layers
DTemperature differential is below 10
Answer is hidden
Question 3676 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
As per IRC, the maximum spacing of contraction joints is ........... in reinforced cement concrete slab of thickness 20 cm.
A4.5 m
B14 m
C45 m
D60 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3677 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The design factor not considered in CBR is ...........
Aweather
Btraffic
CVDF
Dgrowth rate
Answer is hidden
Question 3678 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Stresses are the response of ........... of the pavement.
Adeflection
Bweathering
Cloading
Dgrowth rate
Answer is hidden
Question 3679 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The axial load of the vehicle transfer wheel load from ...........
Awearing to base
Bbase to sub-base
Csub-base to sub-grade
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3680 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In Asphalt bitumen pavement, the wheel load of the vehicle transfer from which layer?
AAsphalt to base
BBase to sub-base
CBase to sub-grade
DSub-Base to sub-grade
Answer is hidden
Question 3681 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Load distribution from asphalt, base, subbase to sub-grade
Aabove the wearing course
Bbelow the sub-base course
Cabove the sub-base course
Dbelow the sub-grade
Answer is hidden
Question 3682 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Tie bars in rigid pavements provide across ...........
Acontraction joints
Bexpansion joints
Clongitudinal joints
Dconstruction joints
Answer is hidden
Question 3683 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The dowel bars are used in rigid pavements for ...........
Aresisting tensile stresses
Bresisting bending stress
Cresisting shear stresses
Dtransferring load from one portion to another
Answer is hidden
Question 3684 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Dowel Bars are placed along ........... of road.
ALongitudinal direction of traffic
Bperpendicular to direction of traffic
C45° to the direction of traffic
Dany direction
Answer is hidden
Question 3685 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following factors does NOT primarily influence the sub-grade capacity?
Aseismic activity
Bsoil type
Cmoisture content
Dtraffic loading
Answer is hidden
Question 3686 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The maximum spacing of contraction joints in rigid pavements is ...........
A2.5 m
B3.5 m
C4.5 m
D5.5 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3687 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the below is not a primary function of a pavement?
Awaterproofing
Bsmooth surface
Cskid resistance
Dreduce traffic
Answer is hidden
Question 3688 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In a CBR test, if the CBR value at 5 mm is greater than that at 2.5 mm ...........
Athe higher value should be chosen
Bthe test should be repeated
Caverage value of the two should be used
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3689 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In flexible pavement, rolling is done from ...........
Acenter to edges
Bedges to center
Cone edge to another edge
Ddiagonal
Answer is hidden
Question 3690 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
When the bituminous surfacing is done on one side then another cement concrete road, the type of treatment to be given is ...........
Atack coat
Bseal coat
Cspray of emulsion
Dprime coat
Answer is hidden
Question 3691 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
A high viscosity bituminous material applied to the relatively impervious surface such as existing bituminous pavement, concrete pavement, etc. is ...........
Atack coat
Bprime coat
Cseal coat
Dbituminous surfacing
Answer is hidden
Question 3692 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
A low viscosity liquid bituminous material applied to the existing pervious surface is ...........
Atack coat
Bprime coat
Cseal coat
Dbituminous surfacing
Answer is hidden
Question 3693 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The bitumen layer spread over old pavement to bind newer pavement layer together is ...........
Aseal coat
Bprime coat
Ctack coat
Dotta seal
Answer is hidden
Question 3694 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is not a type of rigid pavement failure?
AShrinkage cracks
BMud pumping
CWarping cracks
DRuts
Answer is hidden
Question 3695 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The failure of the pavement which is independent on the design is ...........
Ainferior materials
Bdelay of compaction
Csettlement
Doverloaded vehicles
Answer is hidden
Question 3696 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Warping of concrete pavement cause ...........
Areversal of stresses
Bfrictional of stresses
Cdirect compressive stresses
Ddirect tensile stresses
Answer is hidden
Question 3697 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The shear failure occurs in ...........
Aelastic deformation
Bconsolidated deformation
Cplastic deformation
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3698 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The shear failure of soil sub grade may be attributed to ...........
Ainadequate stability
Bexcessive stress
Cinadequate stability and excessive stress
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3699 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The Maintenance of road comes under ...........
Aroutine maintenance
Broutine maintenance
Cperiodic maintenance
Demergency maintenance
Answer is hidden
Question 3700 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Maintenance of asphalt is done at ...........
Arecurrent maintenance
Broutine maintenance
Cperiodic maintenance
Demergency maintenance
Answer is hidden
Question 3701 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Maintenance of earthen and gravel road comes under ...........
Aroutine maintenance
Brecurrent maintenance
Cperiodic maintenance
Demergency maintenance
Answer is hidden
Question 3702 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The bitumen overlay is type of ...........
Aroutine maintenance
Brecurrent maintenance
Cperiodic maintenance
Demergency maintenance
Answer is hidden
Question 3703 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Consists of a large bucket which is attached to a tractor.
ABulldozer
BScraper
CGrader
DEscalator
Answer is hidden
Question 3704 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
type of excavator is used for digging below, at or above operating level in a vertical range.
ASkimmer
BDragline
CClamshell
DBack trench
Answer is hidden
Question 3705 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Can be used on wet ground and in all conditions of weather.
Agrader
Bbulldozer
Cdragline
Dscraper
Answer is hidden
Question 3706 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
type of excavator carries Shovel at its lower end.
Apower shovel
Bdragline
Cclamshell
Descalator
Answer is hidden
Question 3707 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Among the following excavators, the most suitable excavator for dredging purposes will be ...........
Afront shovel
Bback hoe
Cdragline
Dscraper
Answer is hidden
Question 3708 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
.......... is very useful equipment and it can be used for construction work like to clear the site of work, to make the land level, etc.
Ascraper
Bgrader
Cexcavator
Dbulldozer
Answer is hidden
Question 3709 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
A process of transporting material from one place to another over a stationary structure in a continuous stream is known as ...........
Atransporting
Bhauling
Cconveying
Dhoisting
Answer is hidden
Question 3710 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following crushers is primarily used for shaping the aggregates?
AJaw crusher
BVertical shaft impactor
CCone crusher
DJaw crusher and cone crusher together
Answer is hidden
Question 3711 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Page testing machine is used for ...........
Astripping test
Battrition test
Cabrasion test
Dimpact test
Answer is hidden
Question 3712 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Bump integrator equipment is used to ...........
Ameasure pavement surface condition
Bfind pavement deflection
Cfix camber value
Dfind design speed
Answer is hidden
Question 3713 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Vibrating compactor is ideally suited for ...........
Amanual towing and compacting any type of soil with varying moisture content
Bcompacting fly ash masses with any moisture content
Ccompacting cohesionless less granular material with any moisture content
Dcompacting all fine grained materials having adequate moisture content
Answer is hidden
Question 3714 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following roller is used to compact the coarse grained soil?
ADrum roller
BPneumatic roller
CVibratory roller
DTamping roller
Answer is hidden
Question 3715 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The downtime of an equipment is ...........
Athe time when equipment shall have to be returned to the owner due to expiry of its lease period
Bthe period of time when equipment is idle for want of work
Cthe period of time that the equipment fails to provide or perform its primary function
Dthe time when contractor has to do the down payment before taking equipment on rent
Answer is hidden
Question 3716 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The loosening of the top surface of a road by mechanical or other means is called ...........
Apicking
Bpeeling
Cblistering
Dscarifying
Answer is hidden
Question 3717 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In the penetration macadam construction, the bitumen is ...........
Asprayed after the aggregates are spread and compacted
Bpremixed with aggregates and then spread
Csprayed before the aggregate are spread and compacted
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3718 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Maintenance operation done at interval of 6 months to 2 years is known as ...........
Aroutine maintenance
Brecurrent maintenance
Cperiodic maintenance
Demergency maintenance
Answer is hidden
Question 3719 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The pot hole maintenance in case of bituminous road is ...........
Aperiod maintenance
Brecurrent maintenance
Croutine maintenance
Dspecial maintenance
Answer is hidden
Question 3720 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which one of the following detects indicates progressive disintegration of bituminous premix carpet surfacing by loss of aggregates?
ARaveling
BPot holes
CEdge breaking
DRutting
Answer is hidden
Question 3721 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In the repair of potholes, a ........... portion of the pavement surrounding it is cut out.
Acircular
Brectangular
Csquare
Dirregular
Answer is hidden
Question 3722 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Fatigue cracking in flexible pavements is primarily caused by ...........
Atensile strain at the bottom of the asphalt concrete layer
Bcompressive strain at the top of the sub-grade layer
Cshear strain within the pavement structure
Dvertical strain at the surface of the pavement
Answer is hidden
Question 3723 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Rutting deformation in flexible pavements is primarily caused by ...........
Atensile strain at the bottom of the asphalt concrete layer
Bcompressive strain at the top of the sub-grade layer
Cshear strain within the pavement structure
Dvertical strain at the surface of the pavement
Answer is hidden
Question 3724 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The permanent deformation along the wheel path in flexible pavement is known as ...........
Afatigue cracking
Brutting
Cthermal cracking
Dfrost heave
Answer is hidden
Question 3725 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The longitudinal depression in the wheel path in bituminous pavements is ...........
Alongitudinal cracking
Brutting
Cshear failure
Dfrost heave
Answer is hidden
Question 3726 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Alligator or map cracking is the common type of failure in ...........
Abituminous surfacing
Bwater bound macadam (WBM)
Cconcrete pavements
Dgravel roads
Answer is hidden
Question 3727 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Map cracking is ...........
Aformation of irregular cracks of bituminous surfacing
Bformation of cracks followed with a depression
Cformation of cracks in the longitudinal direction
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3728 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Alligator cracking is ...........
Afatigue
Bfoundation failure
Cpoor sub-grade
Dexcessive bitumen
Answer is hidden
Question 3729 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In a bituminous pavement, alligator cracking is mainly due to ...........
Ainadequate bearing course
Binadequate thickness of sub-base course of pavement
Cuse of excessive bituminous material
Dfatigue causing from repeated stress application
Answer is hidden
Question 3730 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following failure occurs due to relative movement of flexible pavement layer materials?
AMap cracking
BShear failure
CFrost heaving
DLongitudinal cracking
Answer is hidden
Question 3731 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
A common type of failure which occurs due to the relative movement of pavement layer ...........
Aalligator cracking
Bshear failure
Cconsolidated of pavement layers
Dreflection cracking
Answer is hidden
Question 3732 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Reflection cracking is observed in ...........
Aflexible pavement
Brigid pavement
Cbituminous overlay over cement concrete surface
Drigid overlay over flexible pavement
Answer is hidden
Question 3733 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Stripping of asphalt pavement is primarily due to ...........
Aexcessive asphalt content in mixture
Bmoisture damage
Cfatigue damage
Duse of less tough aggregate
Answer is hidden
Question 3734 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In flexible pavement, rutting failure occurs at ...........
Atop surface course
Bbase course
Csub-base
Dany of them
Answer is hidden
Question 3735 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
One of the probable causes of rutting on flexible pavements is ...........
Aexcessive stripping of binder material from the wearing course
Buse of flaky aggregates in the wearing course
Cinadequate compaction of pavement layers
Dhigh wind speeds
Answer is hidden
Question 3736 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which one of the following causes raveling in bituminous pavement?
AUse of soft bitumen
BUse of open graded aggregates
CExcessive bitumen content
DLow bitumen content
Answer is hidden
Question 3737 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is not a flexible pavement failure?
ARuts
BPot holes
CFrost heaving
DMud pumping
Answer is hidden
Question 3738 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The thin hairline crack is also known as ...........
Abreaking
Bsizzling
Ccrazing
Dcracking
Answer is hidden
Question 3739 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The basic causes of sub-grade failure are ...........
Ainadequate stability
Binadequate stress application
Cinadequate stability and excessive stress
Dall the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3740 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which of the following is used in a regular pavement maintenance activity?
ATack coat
BPrime coat
CFog seal
DNone of the above are correct
Answer is hidden
Question 3741 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Which technique is primarily used for sealing cracks in asphalt pavement?
AFog sealing
BOverlay
CThermal sealing
DCrack filling
Answer is hidden
Question 3742 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
A road pavement should have which of the following features?
AYielding
BNon-yielding
CUndulation
DDeflection
Answer is hidden
Question 3743 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In mass haul diagram, if end is negative what does it mean?
ABalanced
BBurrow
CSurplus
DCannot be said exactly
Answer is hidden
Question 3744 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The maximum ordinate of mass haul diagram occurs ...........
Awhere cut and fill are balanced
Bat the end of an embankment
Cat the end of a cutting
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3745 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
In mass haul diagram the negative sign represents ...........
Acutting
Bfilling
Cborrow pit
Dhaulage distance
Answer is hidden
Question 3746 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The positive mass haul diagram represents ...........
Afirst cut and then fill
Bfirst fill and then cut
Ccut
Dfill
Answer is hidden
Question 3747 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
The slope of a mass haul diagram gives the ...........
Aaverage earthwork volume per unit length
Brate of change of earthwork volume over distance
Cmaximum permissible gradient for hauling
Defficiency of equipment utilization
Answer is hidden
Question 3748 of 4146Ch 9 · Transportation
Find the economical haul distance, if the cost of borrow (including excavation and hauling) is Rs. 6 per m³ per m and the cost of tipping and overhauling is Rs. 0.04 per m³ per m.
A100 m
B120 m
C150 m
D180 m
Answer is hidden
Question 3749 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
The area of an A0 drawing sheet is:
A0.25 m²
B1 m²
C2 m²
D0.5 m²
Answer is hidden
Question 3750 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
The size of an A4 sheet is:
A148 × 210 mm
B297 × 420 mm
C420 × 594 mm
D210 × 297 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3751 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
The title block of a drawing sheet is normally placed at the:
ACentre of the sheet
BTop-right corner
CTop-left corner
DBottom-right corner
Answer is hidden
Question 3752 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
In the unidirectional system of dimensioning, dimension figures are:
ARead from the right side only
BAll read from the bottom of the sheet
CPlaced inside the object always
DParallel to the dimension lines
Answer is hidden
Question 3753 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
A drawing made to a scale of 1 : 50 has a representative fraction of:
A50
B5/1
C1/50
D1/5
Answer is hidden
Question 3754 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
A scale that can show three units such as metre, decimetre and centimetre is a:
AScale of chords
BComparative scale
CPlain scale
DDiagonal scale
Answer is hidden
Question 3755 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
In first-angle projection, the top view is placed:
ABelow the front view
BBehind the front view
CAbove the front view
DTo the left of the front view
Answer is hidden
Question 3756 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
The true shape of an inclined surface is obtained from a/an:
APerspective view
BIsometric view
CAuxiliary view
DFront view
Answer is hidden
Question 3757 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
In isometric projection, lengths along the isometric axes are reduced to about:
A50% of true length
B82% of true length
C70.7% of true length
D100% of true length
Answer is hidden
Question 3758 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
The angle between any two isometric axes is:
A30°
B120°
C90°
D45°
Answer is hidden
Question 3759 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
In cabinet oblique projection, the receding lines are drawn:
ATo full scale
BConverging to a vanishing point
CTo half scale
DTo isometric scale
Answer is hidden
Question 3760 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Drawings and Their Concepts
Which of the following is NOT sectioned (hatched) when cut along its axis?
ACasting body
BHub of a pulley
CShaft
DFlange of a coupling
Answer is hidden
Question 3761 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
Rs 10,000 is deposited at 10% compound interest per year. Its value after 2 years is:
ARs 12,210
BRs 12,000
CRs 12,100
DRs 11,000
Answer is hidden
Question 3762 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
The effective annual interest rate for 12% per year compounded monthly is about:
A12%
B1%
C12.68%
D13.5%
Answer is hidden
Question 3763 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
The factor used to find the equal annual payment needed to repay a present loan is the:
ACompound amount factor (F/P)
BCapital recovery factor (A/P)
CSinking fund factor (A/F)
DPresent worth factor (P/F)
Answer is hidden
Question 3764 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
The present worth of a perpetual annual income of Rs 1,000 at 10% interest is:
AInfinite
BRs 100
CRs 1,000
DRs 10,000
Answer is hidden
Question 3765 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
A project is economically acceptable by the NPV method when:
ANPV ≥ 0 at the MARR
BNPV is negative
CIRR is less than MARR
DNPV equals the initial investment
Answer is hidden
Question 3766 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
The internal rate of return is the discount rate at which:
ANPV is maximum
BNPV equals zero
CB/C ratio equals zero
DPayback is minimum
Answer is hidden
Question 3767 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
Compared with the simple payback period, the discounted payback period:
AIs always shorter
BConsiders cash flows after payback
CConsiders the time value of money
DIgnores all cash flows
Answer is hidden
Question 3768 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
MARR is best described as:
AThe inflation rate only
BThe minimum acceptable rate of return set by the investor
CThe rate at which NPV is maximum
DThe maximum rate charged by banks
Answer is hidden
Question 3769 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
For comparing alternatives with unequal lives, the most convenient method is:
AAnnual worth (equivalent uniform annual) method
BComparing first costs only
CSimple payback
DComparing total undiscounted costs
Answer is hidden
Question 3770 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
A machine costs Rs 60,000 with salvage Rs 10,000 after 5 years. Straight-line annual depreciation is:
ARs 12,000
BRs 50,000
CRs 10,000
DRs 14,000
Answer is hidden
Question 3771 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
The standard rate of Value Added Tax in Nepal is:
A15%
B10%
C13%
D18%
Answer is hidden
Question 3772 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Economics
Under Nepal's Income Tax Act 2058, depreciation of assets is calculated using:
ASinking fund method
BPool-based declining balance method
COnly straight-line method
DUnits-of-production method only
Answer is hidden
Question 3773 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
A project is best defined as:
AA permanent organisation
BAny repetitive production activity
CA continuous routine operation
DA temporary endeavour undertaken to create a unique product, service or result
Answer is hidden
Question 3774 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
The phase of the project life cycle in which the feasibility study is carried out is:
AExecution phase
BInitiation/concept phase
CMonitoring phase
DClosure phase
Answer is hidden
Question 3775 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
The hierarchical decomposition of the total project scope into work packages is called:
ALogical framework
BGantt chart
CCritical path
DWork Breakdown Structure (WBS)
Answer is hidden
Question 3776 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
A major limitation of a bar (Gantt) chart is that it:
ADoes not clearly show interdependencies between activities
BCannot show activity durations
CIs difficult to understand
DCannot show a time scale
Answer is hidden
Question 3777 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
In an activity-on-arrow network, a dummy activity:
AHas zero duration and shows logical dependency only
BConsumes resources
CIs always on the critical path
DHas the longest duration
Answer is hidden
Question 3778 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
The critical path of a project network is the:
APath with maximum float
BShortest path through the network
CLongest path, with zero total float
DPath with the most activities
Answer is hidden
Question 3779 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
An activity has ES = 5, EF = 9, LS = 8, LF = 12. Its total float is:
A0
B7
C3
D4
Answer is hidden
Question 3780 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
In PERT, with to = 2, tm = 5 and tp = 14 days, the expected time is:
A21 days
B5 days
C6 days
D7 days
Answer is hidden
Question 3781 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
PERT is most suitable for:
AMass production lines
BRepetitive construction with known durations
CResearch and development projects with uncertain durations
DRoutine maintenance only
Answer is hidden
Question 3782 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
While crashing a project, the activity crashed first is the critical activity with the:
ALowest cost slope
BLongest duration
CMaximum float
DHighest cost slope
Answer is hidden
Question 3783 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
Rescheduling activities within their available float without changing the project completion date is called:
AFast-tracking
BResource smoothing
CCrashing
DResource levelling
Answer is hidden
Question 3784 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning and Scheduling
In earned value management, a cost performance index (CPI) of 0.8 means the project is:
AAhead of schedule
BOver budget
CUnder budget
DExactly on budget
Answer is hidden
Question 3785 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
The number of communication channels among 6 stakeholders is:
A30
B36
C6
D15
Answer is hidden
Question 3786 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
Buying insurance against a project risk is an example of risk:
AAvoidance
BTransfer
CMitigation
DAcceptance
Answer is hidden
Question 3787 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
Changing the project plan to eliminate a threat entirely is risk:
AAcceptance
BAvoidance
CTransfer
DExploitation
Answer is hidden
Question 3788 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
A reserve kept for identified risks ('known unknowns') is the:
AManagement reserve
BRetention money
CSinking fund
DContingency reserve
Answer is hidden
Question 3789 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
A quantitative risk analysis technique that uses repeated random sampling of uncertain variables is:
AChecklist analysis
BMonte Carlo simulation
CSWOT analysis
DBrainstorming
Answer is hidden
Question 3790 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
In a BOT arrangement, the private party:
AOnly designs the project
BBuilds, operates for a concession period and then transfers the facility
COnly supplies labour
DBuys the project from government permanently
Answer is hidden
Question 3791 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
Project finance on a non-recourse basis means lenders are repaid mainly from:
AGovernment taxes
BThe sponsor's other assets
CThe project's own cash flows
DPersonal guarantees of engineers
Answer is hidden
Question 3792 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
Public procurement in Nepal is governed by the:
ALabour Act 2074
BCompany Act 2063 only
CPublic Procurement Act 2063
DContract Act 2025
Answer is hidden
Question 3793 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
The security submitted with a bid, forfeited if the bidder withdraws the bid during its validity, is the:
ABid security
BAdvance payment guarantee
CRetention money
DPerformance security
Answer is hidden
Question 3794 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
A contract in which payment is made on the basis of measured quantities of work and quoted unit rates is a/an:
ACost-plus contract
BTurnkey contract
CLump-sum contract
DItem-rate (unit-rate) contract
Answer is hidden
Question 3795 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
A contract in which one contractor is responsible for design, procurement, construction and commissioning is a:
APercentage-rate contract
BLabour contract
CItem-rate contract
DTurnkey (EPC) contract
Answer is hidden
Question 3796 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Management
A pre-agreed amount payable by the contractor for delay in completion is called:
ALiquidated damages
BMobilisation advance
CVariation
DRetention money
Answer is hidden
Question 3797 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
According to engineering codes of ethics, an engineer's foremost obligation is to:
AObey all instructions of the client
BMaximise the employer's profit
CHold paramount the safety, health and welfare of the public
DComplete work at minimum cost
Answer is hidden
Question 3798 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
An engineer asked to design work outside his/her area of expertise should:
AAsk a junior to do it
BAccept to gain experience
CSign the drawings anyway
DDecline or engage a competent specialist
Answer is hidden
Question 3799 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
The ethical theory that seeks the greatest good for the greatest number is:
AVirtue ethics
BUtilitarianism
CEgoism
DDeontology
Answer is hidden
Question 3800 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
An engineer who has a financial interest in a supplier recommended to a client should:
AReject all other suppliers
BDisclose the conflict of interest to the client
CKeep it secret
DAccept a commission from the supplier
Answer is hidden
Question 3801 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
Signing and sealing drawings not prepared or supervised by oneself is:
AA normal professional courtesy
BUnethical
CAcceptable if paid
DRequired by law
Answer is hidden
Question 3802 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
Whistle-blowing is generally justified when:
AIt brings personal benefit
BThe engineer dislikes the manager
CSerious public harm is involved and internal channels have been exhausted
DNo evidence is available
Answer is hidden
Question 3803 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
The seismic design provisions for buildings in Nepal are contained in:
ANepal National Building Code (NBC 105)
BLabour Act
CPublic Procurement Act
DElectricity Act
Answer is hidden
Question 3804 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
The law that sets out environmental assessment requirements (IEE/EIA) for projects in Nepal is the:
AArbitration Act 2055
BNepal Engineering Council Act 2055
CEnvironment Protection Act 2076
DCompany Act 2063
Answer is hidden
Question 3805 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
The Nepal Engineers' Association was established in:
A2055 BS (1998 AD)
B2019 BS (1962 AD)
C2046 BS (1990 AD)
D2072 BS (2015 AD)
Answer is hidden
Question 3806 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
The Nepal Engineers' Association is best described as:
AA voluntary professional association of engineers
BA government ministry
CA contractors' federation
DThe statutory regulatory body that registers engineers
Answer is hidden
Question 3807 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
In the hierarchy of controls for occupational safety, the last line of defence is:
AEngineering controls
BElimination
CPersonal protective equipment
DSubstitution
Answer is hidden
Question 3808 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Professional Practice
A leading cause of fatal accidents on construction sites is:
ANoise exposure
BFalls from height
CPoor lighting in offices
DEye strain
Answer is hidden
Question 3809 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
The Nepal Engineering Council was established under the:
APublic Procurement Act 2063
BNepal Engineering Council Act 2055 (1998)
CCompany Act 2063
DBuilding Act 2055
Answer is hidden
Question 3810 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
The Nepal Engineering Council Regulations were issued in:
A2074 BS
B2055 BS
C2063 BS
D2057 BS
Answer is hidden
Question 3811 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
The Nepal Engineering Council is best described as:
AA trade union
BA voluntary association of engineers
CA statutory body regulating the engineering profession
DA private consulting firm
Answer is hidden
Question 3812 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
A person who wants to practise as an engineer in Nepal must:
AOnly hold a trade licence
BRegister with the Company Registrar
CBe registered with the Nepal Engineering Council
DOnly be a member of NEA
Answer is hidden
Question 3813 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
Recognition of engineering educational programmes and institutions in Nepal is a function of the:
ADepartment of Industry
BNepal Engineering Council
CPublic Procurement Monitoring Office
DNepal Engineers' Association
Answer is hidden
Question 3814 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
A disciplinary action the Nepal Engineering Council can take for serious professional misconduct is:
ACancellation of the engineer's registration
BRevoking citizenship
CConfiscation of property
DImprisonment without trial
Answer is hidden
Question 3815 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
The official who maintains the register of engineers at NEC is the:
AChief Justice
BRegistrar
CAuditor General
DCompany Registrar
Answer is hidden
Question 3816 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
According to the NEC code of conduct, an engineer should:
ASign drawings prepared by others without checking
BAccept any work offered
CShare confidential client data freely
DUndertake only work within his/her competence
Answer is hidden
Question 3817 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
Obtaining work by paying a bribe is:
AA violation of the code of conduct
BAllowed if disclosed later
CAcceptable in competitive markets
DRequired for public contracts
Answer is hidden
Question 3818 of 4146Ch 10 · Engineering Regulatory Body: Nepal Engineering Council
Which statement about NEC and NEA is correct?
ABoth are voluntary
BNEC registration is compulsory to practise; NEA membership is voluntary
CBoth are government ministries
DNEA registration is compulsory; NEC membership is voluntary
Answer is hidden
Question 3819 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The approval of design, drawing before the construction of a building in the city area of Nepal is done by ............
Avillage development committee
Bdistrict development committee
Cmunicipality
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3820 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The width of the standard A-series drawing paper such as A₄, A₃, A₂, ...... is ............
A1/3 times the length of the paper
B1/√2 times the length of the paper
C1/2 times the length of the paper
D1/√3 times the length of the paper
Answer is hidden
Question 3821 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The area of A₀ size paper is ............[cite: 15]
A0.25 m²
B0.5 m²
C0.75 m²
D1 m²
Answer is hidden
Question 3822 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The standard size of drawing board of designation D₁ is (in mm) ............[cite: 15]
A1000 × 700 × 25
B100 × 75 × 25
C1500 × 750 × 25
D1500 × 700 × 25
Answer is hidden
Question 3823 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Paper is designated by which letter?[cite: 15]
AA
BB
CC
DD
Answer is hidden
Question 3824 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Title block gives information about ............[cite: 15]
Atitle of the drawing
Bscale used for the drawing
Cserial number of the drawing
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3825 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not included in title block of drawing sheet?[cite: 15]
ASheet number
BScale
CMethod of projection
DSize of sheet
Answer is hidden
Question 3826 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
As per BIS, the size of title block in drawing sheet is ............[cite: 15]
A25 mm × 10 mm
B100 mm × 25 mm
C65 mm × 185 mm
D185 mm × 65 mm
Answer is hidden
Question 3827 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The length: width in case of an arrow head is ............[cite: 15]
A1:1
B2:1
C3:1
D4:1
Answer is hidden
Question 3828 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is the inclination of inclined lettering?[cite: 15]
A75 degree
B65 degree
C45 degree
D85 degree
Answer is hidden
Question 3829 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The aspect ratio of a letter refers to the ratio of its ............[cite: 15]
Aheight to its width
Bwidth to height
Clength to width
Dwidth to length
Answer is hidden
Question 3830 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The size of the letter means the ............ of the letter.[cite: 15]
Athickness
Bheight
Clength
Dwidth
Answer is hidden
Question 3831 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The dimension system is unidirectional if ............[cite: 15]
Adimensions in the drawing sheet can be read from anywhere on the drawing sheet
Bdimensions in the drawing sheet can be read from the bottom edge of the drawing sheet
Cdimensions in the drawing sheet can be read from the bottom and right-hand edge of the drawing sheet
Ddimensions cannot be read
Answer is hidden
Question 3832 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In aligned system of dimensioning, the dimensions may be read from ............[cite: 15]
Abottom or right hand edges
Bbottom or left hand edges
Conly from bottom
Donly from left side
Answer is hidden
Question 3833 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Maps are drawn in which scale?[cite: 15]
AEnlarging
BReducing
CBalanced
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3834 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A full scale technical drawing will have a scale factor of ............
A1:1
B1:2
C2:1
D1:4
Answer is hidden
Question 3835 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following represent reducing scale?
A1:1
B1:25
C2:1
D10:1
Answer is hidden
Question 3836 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is enlarging scale?
A1:5
B1:2
C5:1
D1:2
Answer is hidden
Question 3837 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Given representative factor as 4/50 and maximum length is 100 cm. Find the length of scale.
A8 cm
B10 cm
C9.7 cm
D12 cm
Answer is hidden
Question 3838 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A line of 1 meter is shown by 1 cm on a scale; its representative factor (RF) is ............[cite: 16]
A1
B100
C1/100
D1/50
Answer is hidden
Question 3839 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Freehand sketching can be done only when one has ............[cite: 16]
Aproper proficiency
Bgood practice
Cgood intuition
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3840 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The techniques for free hand sketch to drawing circle is ............[cite: 16]
Afixing a fixed point and are
Bfixing the perimeter
Cfixing the radius only
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3841 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The type of line that projects from an object for the express purpose of locating a dimension is a ............[cite: 16]
Avisible line
Bhidden line
Cextension line
Ddimension line
Answer is hidden
Question 3842 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which the following is represented by a dotted line?[cite: 16]
AHidden edges
BProjection line
CVisible outlines
DHatching line
Answer is hidden
Question 3843 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following line is used for dimension lines?[cite: 16]
AContinuous thick
BContinuous thin
CChain thin
DShort zig-zag line
Answer is hidden
Question 3844 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following line is used for visible outlines?[cite: 16]
AContinuous thick
BContinuous thin
CChain thin
DShort zig-zag line
Answer is hidden
Question 3845 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The hidden line are drawn as ............[cite: 16]
Adashed narrow lines
Bdashed wide lines
Clong-dashed dotted wide line
Dlong-dashed double dotted wide line
Answer is hidden
Question 3846 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The hidden line represent ............[cite: 16]
Afeatures that can be seen in the current view
Bextension line or leader line
Cfeatures that cannot be seen in the current view
Daxis of symmetrical parts
Answer is hidden
Question 3847 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following lines are used to show that the object is cut and then viewed?[cite: 16]
AHidden lines
BLeader lines
CCentre lines
DHatching lines
Answer is hidden
Question 3848 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
T square is used alone to draw ............[cite: 16]
Avertical line
Binclined line
Chorizontal line
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3849 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
French curves are used to draw ............[cite: 16]
Aregular curves
Bcircle
Cirregular curves
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3850 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The hardness of pencil lead increases as the numeral letter H ............[cite: 16]
Aincreases
Bremains constant
Cdecreases
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3851 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not a pencil?[cite: 16]
AHB
B2B
Cdrafter
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3852 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is additional 3rd view on orthographic projection in general for simple objects?
AFront view
BTop view
CSide view
DView at 45° perpendiculars to horizontal plane
Answer is hidden
Question 3853 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The isometric projection of a circle is a ............[cite: 14]
Acircle
Bellipse
Chyperbola
Dparabola
Answer is hidden
Question 3854 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A technical drawing of an object that shows the relationship or order of assembly of various parts is known as ............[cite: 14]
Aorthographic projection
Bexploded view drawing
Ccompacted view drawing
Daxonometric drawing
Answer is hidden
Question 3855 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
All the axonometric projections are single-plane ............ projection.[cite: 14]
Aorthographic
Bperspective
Cisometric
Doblique
Answer is hidden
Question 3856 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
............ type of axonometric drawing has equal foreshortening along two axis directions and a different amount on the third axis.[cite: 14]
ADiametric
BMulti view
CIsometric
DTrimetric
Answer is hidden
Question 3857 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The principle views associated with orthographic projection are ............[cite: 14]
Afront view
Bright side view
Ctop view
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3858 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The principle reason for using an auxiliary view is ............[cite: 14]
Ato eliminate hidden lines
Bto create a true projection plane from an inclined plane in one of the primary views
Cto show cylinders as ellipses
Dto locate center marks
Answer is hidden
Question 3859 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
............ is the plane upon which the top view is projected.[cite: 14]
AHorizontal
BFrontal
CProfile
DBase
Answer is hidden
Question 3860 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The isometric projection of a sphere is a ............[cite: 14]
Acircle
Bellipse
Chyperbola
Dparabola
Answer is hidden
Question 3861 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In isometric drawing ............[cite: 14]
Aall axes are equally inclined
Btwo axes are equally inclined
Cnone of the axes are equally inclined
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3862 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The value of the ratio of isometric projection length to true length is ............[cite: 14]
A0.141
B0.372
C0.815
D0.642
Answer is hidden
Question 3863 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What type of sketch shows the front in true shape?[cite: 14]
AIsometric
BPerspective
COblique
DAxonometric
Answer is hidden
Question 3864 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If an isometric drawing is made use of an isometric scale, then the drawings are called ............[cite: 14]
Aisometric projection
Bisometric view
Cperspective projection
Dorthographic view
Answer is hidden
Question 3865 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
When using an isometric view, you line up the drawing along three axis that are separated by ............ from each other.[cite: 14]
A180-degree
B90-degree
C120-degree
D60-degree
Answer is hidden
Question 3866 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The development of cylinder is a ............[cite: 14]
Arectangle
Bcircle
Cellipse
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3867 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The following is the method for development of a right regular prism.[cite: 14]
AParallel line method
BRadial line method
CTriangulation method
DApproximate method
Answer is hidden
Question 3868 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The solid which is generated by the revolution of a right-angle triangle about one of its perpendicular sides which remains fixed is called ............[cite: 14]
Aa prism
Ba pyramid
Ca cylinder
Da cone
Answer is hidden
Question 3869 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
When a pyramid or cone is cut by a cutting plane parallel to its base, the remaining portion thus obtained after removing the top portion is called ............[cite: 14]
Aa prism
Bfrustum
Ca cylinder
Da cone
Answer is hidden
Question 3870 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The side view of an object is drawn in ............ faces.[cite: 14]
Avertical plane
Bhorizontal plane
Cprofile plane
Dany of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3871 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A tetrahedron has four equal ............ faces.[cite: 14]
Asquare
Brectangular
Ctriangular
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3872 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Hatching lines are drawn at ............ degree to reference line.[cite: 14]
A30
B45
C60
D90
Answer is hidden
Question 3873 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In a cash flow series ............
Auniform gradient signifies that an income or disbursement changes by the same amount in each interest period
Beither an increase or decrease in the amount of a cash flow is called the gradient
Cthe gradient in the cash flow may be positive or negative
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3874 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which item comes under financial activities in cash flow?
ARedemption of preference share
BIssue of preference share
CInterest paid
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3875 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Cash flow example from a financing activity is ............
Apayment of dividends
Breceipt of dividend on investment
Ccash received from customers
Dpurchase of fixed asset
Answer is hidden
Question 3876 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The statement of cash flow clarifies cash flows according to ............
Aoperating and non-operating flows
Binflow and outflow
Cinvesting and non-operating flows
Doperating, investing, and financing activities
Answer is hidden
Question 3877 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Cash flow example from an investing activity is ............
Aissue of debenture
Brepayment of long-term loan
Cpurchase of raw materials for cash
Dsale of investment by non-financial enterprise
Answer is hidden
Question 3878 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Heterogeneous cash flows can be made comparable by ............
Adiscounting technique
Bcompounding technique
Ceither (a) or (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3879 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Time value of money supports the comparison of cash flows recorded at different time period by ............
Adiscounting all cash flows to a common point of time
Bcompounding all cash flows to a common point of time
Cusing either (a) or (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3880 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is the element of total cost?
AMaterial and labor cost
BLabor and fuel cost
CFuel and machine cost
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3881 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Statement of cash flows includes ............
Afinancing activities
Boperating activities
Cinvesting activities
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3882 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Material cost is concerned with ............
Adirect cost
Bindirect cost
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3883 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In cash flows, when a company invests in fixed assets and short-term financial investments results in ............
Aincreased liabilities
Bincreased equity
Cincreased cash
Ddecreased cash
Answer is hidden
Question 3884 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If desired rate of return is minimum by actual rate of return, then it is classified as ............
Afuture cash flows
Bpresent cash flow
Cpositive cash flows
Dnegative cash flows
Answer is hidden
Question 3885 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The given symbol in a drawing represents ............
Aperspective projection
Bthird angle projection
Cfirst angle projection
Doblique projection
Answer is hidden
Question 3886 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The side view of given orthographic projection is ............
Aa
Bb
Cc
Dd
Answer is hidden
Question 3887 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The top view of given figure is ............
Aa
Bb
Cc
Dd
Answer is hidden
Question 3888 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In cash flow diagram, which of the following is true?
ATime 1 is considered to be the end of time period 1
BA vertical arrow pointing up indicates a positive cash flow
CAn arrow pointing downward indicates a negative cash flow
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3889 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Payback period is counted only after ............
Atendering for the project
Bstarting of the construction of the project
Ccompletion of the construction of the project
Dcommissioning of the project
Answer is hidden
Question 3890 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Time value of money indicates that ............
Aa unit of money obtained today is worth more than a unit of money obtained in future
Ba unit of money obtained today is worth less than a unit of money obtained in future
Cthere is no difference in the value of money obtained today and tomorrow
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3891 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Pick up the correct statement from the following:
AThe change in the amount of money over a given time period is called 'time value of money', a most important concept in engineering economy
BThe manifestation of the time value of money is termed as interest
CInterest on borrowing = Present amount owed - Original loan
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3892 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If the nominal rate of interest is 10% per annum and there is quarterly compounding, the effective rate of interest will be ............
A10% per annum
B10.10% per annum
C10.25% per annum
D10.38% per annum
Answer is hidden
Question 3893 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
How long will it take money to double itself if invested at 5% compounded annually?
A13.7 years
B14.7 years
C14.2 years
D15.3 years
Answer is hidden
Question 3894 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Equal payment series sinking fund factor is ............
A(A/F, i, n)
B(F/P, i, n)
C(A/P, i, n)
D(P/A, i, n)
Answer is hidden
Question 3895 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In a project equal investment is done on regular basis for replacement of the property, then it is called ............
Afuture investment
Bcapital recovery
Csinking fund
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3896 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Sinking fund is ............
Athe fund for rebuilding a structure when its economic life is over
Braised to meet maintenance costs
CNPV = 0
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3897 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The term (1 + i)ⁿ is called ............
Asingle payment discount amount factor
Bsingle payment compound amount factor
Cannual compound amount factor
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3898 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is the expression for the capital recovery amount?
AP [i(1+i)ⁿ / ((1+i)ⁿ - 1)]
BP [(1+i)ⁿ / ((1+i)ⁿ - 1)]
CP [i(1-i)ⁿ / ((1-i)ⁿ - 1)]
DP [(1-i)ⁿ / ((1-i)ⁿ - 1)]
Answer is hidden
Question 3899 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If a is the base amount expenditure, b is the increase in the operation cost each year over a period of n years, the total cost of maintenance is ............
Aa + (n-1)b
Ba + x (n-1)b
Ca x (n-1)b
DDiscounted payback
Answer is hidden
Question 3900 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which method is not mostly adopted for selection of project?
APayback
BDiscounted payback
CIRR
DB/C
Answer is hidden
Question 3901 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The cash flow is either increasing or decreasing with equal amount every period, the type of series is ............
Auniform payment series
Bgeometric payment series
Clinear gradient series
Dirregular payment series
Answer is hidden
Question 3902 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The additional money received from selling one specified level of output is ............
Anormal cost
Bmarginal revenue
Caverage revenue
Dequivalent revenue
Answer is hidden
Question 3903 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If production is less than breakeven point, the product will be ............
Alesser than consumption
Bequal to consumption
Cgreater than consumption
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3904 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The actual profitability of any project is best analyzed from .........
AIRR
BDiscounted payback period
CARR
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3905 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The decision rule for project acceptance is that .........
Aif IRR > 0
Bif IRR > MARR
Cif IRR < MARR
Dif IRR = 0
Answer is hidden
Question 3906 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following factors does not depend on the time value of money?
AB/C ratio
BAccounting rate of return
CNPV
DIRR
Answer is hidden
Question 3907 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If a seller recovers his capital along with accumulated compensating interest not in one single lump-sum payment but in periodical equal payments, over time ............
Acapital recovery annuity is availed
Bpresent worth annuity is availed
Csinking fund annuity is availed
Dfuture worth annuity is availed
Answer is hidden
Question 3908 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Depreciation is charged on ............
Afixed assets
Bcurrent assets
Cboth fixed and current assets
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3909 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following asset generally assumed not to depreciate?
AMachinery
BBuilding
CLand
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3910 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Under the diminishing balance method, the amount of depreciation is calculated on ............[cite: 15]
Athe written-down value of the asset
Bthe market value of the asset
Cthe original cost of the asset
Dthe expected realizable value of the asset
Answer is hidden
Question 3911 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If the percentage fall in quantity demanded is more than the percentage rise in price charged, ............[cite: 15]
Athe revenue will rise
Bthe revenue will fall
Cis not related with discount rate
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3912 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The estimated value of depreciable assets after its useful life is called ............[cite: 15]
Aactual value
Breplacement value
Cdisposal (residual) value
Dcurrent value
Answer is hidden
Question 3913 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If there is no inflation during a period, then the money cash flow would be equal to ............[cite: 15]
Apresent value
Breal cash flow
Creal cash flow + present value
Dreal cash flow - present value
Answer is hidden
Question 3914 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is the limit of annual income for an unmarried individual upto which only 1% income tax is levied?[cite: 15]
A5 lakhs
B6 lakhs
C5.5 lakhs
D7 lakhs
Answer is hidden
Question 3915 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
IRR is calculated ............[cite: 15]
Awhen NPV is less than zero
Bwhen NPV more than zero
Cwhen NPV equal to 0
Dwhen NPV equal to MARR
Answer is hidden
Question 3916 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The time value of money is primarily related to .........[cite: 15]
Atime and money
Btime and interest
Cmoney and valise
Dinterest and inflation
Answer is hidden
Question 3917 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Salvage value is defined as ............[cite: 15]
Avalue of dismantled materials at the end of its utility period
Bestimated value of a built-up property at the end of its useful life without being dismantled
Cvalue of the property shown in the account book in that particular year
Dpresent value of a property considering it to be replaced at the current market rates
Answer is hidden
Question 3918 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The minimum value of benefit-cost ratio for the selection of any project should be ............[cite: 15]
Aless than one
Bone
Cgreater than one
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3919 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The benefit cost ratio is ............[cite: 15]
Adirectly proportional to discount rate
Binversely proportional to discount rate
Cno array relation with discount rate
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3920 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The project contractor relies on the cost of the estimate ............[cite: 15]
Afor submission of a competitive bid for a lump-sum contract
Bfor a unit price contract
Cfor preparation of a definitive estimate to help negotiate contract
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3921 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Both architect and engineer make use of the cost estimate of the project ............[cite: 15]
Afor site selection
Bfor designing of the project
Cfor choosing alternatives
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3922 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The most unpredictable cost of a project is ............[cite: 15]
Aenvironment management cost
Bunderground construction cost
Ctransportation cost
Dsocial management cost
Answer is hidden
Question 3923 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The ratio of current assets to current liabilities is known as ............[cite: 15]
Aliquidity ratio
Bcurrent ratio
Cacid-test (or quick) ratio
Ddebts ratio
Answer is hidden
Question 3924 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The more critical (or severe) test of the firm's liquidity can be judged by ............[cite: 15]
Aliquidity ratio
Bcurrent ratio
Cacid-test (or quick) ratio
Ddebts ratio
Answer is hidden
Question 3925 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Current assets less inventories divided by current liabilities is known as ............[cite: 15]
Aliquidity ratio
Bcurrent ratio
Cacid-test (or quick) ratio
Ddebts ratio
Answer is hidden
Question 3926 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The purchase value of assets over its serviceable life is categorized as ............[cite: 15]
Aappreciated liabilities
Bappreciated assets
Cdepreciation
Dappreciation
Answer is hidden
Question 3927 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Excessive spending power of consumers that pulls prices up is called ............[cite: 15]
Ademand-pull inflation
Bcost-pull inflation
Ccost-push inflation
Dcost-push inflation
Answer is hidden
Question 3928 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Book value means ............[cite: 15]
Aexpected sale price
Bcurrent market price if purchased now
Cvalue as shown in the books of account
Doriginal acquisition price
Answer is hidden
Question 3929 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Pokhara Regional International Airport is an example of ............[cite: 13]
Aloan projects
Bgrant projects
Cprivate sector projects
Dprocess oriented projects
Answer is hidden
Question 3930 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The process each manager follows during the life of a project is known as ............[cite: 13]
Aproject management
Bmanager life cycle
Cproject management life cycle
Dall of the mentioned
Answer is hidden
Question 3931 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The type of projects in which investment in project is repaid by the government to donors agencies is called ............[cite: 13]
Aprivate sector projects
Bgovernment sector projects
Cgrant projects
Dloan projects
Answer is hidden
Question 3932 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Who typically offers financial resources to fund a project?[cite: 13]
ADonor
BSponsor
CProject manager
DStakeholder
Answer is hidden
Question 3933 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If part of contract work is assigned to another party, it is called ............[cite: 13]
Asub-contracting
Bjoint venture
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3934 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not a phase of project management?[cite: 13]
AProject planning
BProject scheduling
CProject controlling
DProject being
Answer is hidden
Question 3935 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The project scope statement furnishes the basis for ............[cite: 13]
Aa way to provide updated information to the accounting department
Bprovides links to the client's functional management groups
Callowing the project to move to the next phase
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3936 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The main principle of an organization, is ............[cite: 13]
Aunity of command and coherency
Beffective control at all level
Cdelegation of authority
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3937 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The main advantage of line organization is ............[cite: 13]
Aeffective command and control
Bdefined responsibilities at all levels
Cability to quick decision at all level
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3938 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Ensuring that performance meets established standards that worker's activities occur as planned and that the organization process is called ............[cite: 13]
Acontrolling
Bplanning
Cleading
Dorganizing
Answer is hidden
Question 3939 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In which of the following project phases is the project schedule developed?[cite: 13]
AConceptual
BPlanning
CImplementation
DDesign
Answer is hidden
Question 3940 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The process of communication contains four major parts. Which part is the vehicle or method used to convey the message?[cite: 13]
ACommunicator
BMessage
CMedium
DRecipient
Answer is hidden
Question 3941 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In bar charts, which colour is used to show the actual progress?[cite: 13]
ARed
BBlack
CBlue
DGreen
Answer is hidden
Question 3942 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which method of project planning was invented first?[cite: 13]
ABar chart
BMilestone chart
CCPM
DPERT
Answer is hidden
Question 3943 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
CPM is based on ............[cite: 13]
Aprobabilistic
Bdeterministic
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dany of (a) or (b)
Answer is hidden
Question 3944 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
CPM is the ............[cite: 13]
Aactivity oriented
Bevent oriented
Ctarget oriented
Dtime oriented
Answer is hidden
Question 3945 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is a critical path?[cite: 13]
AIt is a path that operates from the starting node to the end node.
BIt is a mixture of all the paths
CIt is the longest path
DIt is the shortest path
Answer is hidden
Question 3946 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What happens when a project is scheduled by CPM?[cite: 13]
AA project is divided into various activities
BRequired time for each activity is established
CA sequence of various activities is made according to their importance
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3947 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
When was CPM method introduced?[cite: 13]
A1880
B1900
C1957
D1958
Answer is hidden
Question 3948 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
For an activity in a CPM analysis, the early finish time is 13 and the late finish time is 13. Which of the following statements is true?[cite: 13]
AThe early start is 6
BThe duration of the activity is 13
CThe slack of this activity is 13
DThe activity is on the critical path
Answer is hidden
Question 3949 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Completion of an activity on CPM network diagram, is generally known ............
Aevent
Bnode
Cconnector
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3950 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In an AOA (activity on arrow) diagram, what does the arrow represent?
Aevent
Bactivity
Cslack
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3951 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is true about dummy?
AIt doesn't consume resources
BIt doesn't have head and tail event
CIt can be added anywhere in the network
DIt simplifies the network
Answer is hidden
Question 3952 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Dummy is used for ............
Agrammatical purpose
Blogical purpose
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3953 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which one of the following is captured in the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)?
AThe life cycle phases
BThe logical order of tasks
CThe scope of the project
DProject costs
Answer is hidden
Question 3954 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In project crashing, rent and overheads are treated as ............
Asignificant cost
Binsignificant costs
Cdirect costs
Dindirect costs
Answer is hidden
Question 3955 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Project crashing is the method for ............
Ashortening the project duration by reducing the time of one or more critical activities
Badding resources at critical points
Cdoing technical analysis of the finished work for review
Dadding duration to each activity
Answer is hidden
Question 3956 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The time with which direct cost does not reduce with the increase in time is known as ............
Acrash time
Bnormal time
Coptimistic time
Dstandard time
Answer is hidden
Question 3957 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The time corresponding to minimum total project cost is ............
Acrash time
Bbetween normal time and crash time
Coptimistic time
Dnormal time
Answer is hidden
Question 3958 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is a project scheduling method that can be applied to software development?
APERT
BCPM
CCMM
DBoth PERT and CPM
Answer is hidden
Question 3959 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
PERT (Project Evaluation and Review Technique) analysis is based on ............
Aoptimistic time, pessimistic time and most likely time
Bpessimistic time, optional time, maximum time
Coptimistic time, efficient time, most likely time
Dminimax time, optimistic time and harmonic time
Answer is hidden
Question 3960 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The full form of PERT is ............
Aprogram evaluation and rate technology
Bprogram evaluation and robot technique
Cprogram evaluation and robot technology
Dprogram evaluation and review technique
Answer is hidden
Question 3961 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is PERT analysis based on?
AOptimistic time
BPessimistic time
CMost likely time
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3962 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In PERT (Project Evaluation and Review Technique) method expected time (Te) is ............
ATo + Tp + 4Tm / 6
BTo + Tp + 2Tm / 6
CTo + 4Tp + Tm / 6
DTm + 4Tp + To / 6
Answer is hidden
Question 3963 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If PERT network consists of 5 activities with standard deviation of 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9. Then, the standard deviation of the entire project is ............
A255
B7
C√255
D49
Answer is hidden
Question 3964 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The shortest possible time in which an activity can be achieved under ideal circumstances is known as ............
Aexpected time estimate
Boptimistic time estimate
Cpessimistic time estimate
Dthe most likely time estimate
Answer is hidden
Question 3965 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The relation between jobs of a particular type and various durations they have consumed completion is expressed by curve ............
Anormal distribution curve
Bfrequency distribution
Cdistribution curve
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3966 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The optimistic, most likely and pessimistic time estimates of an activity are 6, 8, 10 days, what are the expected time and standard deviation?
A8, 0.5
B8, 2
C6, 0.67
D8, 0.67
Answer is hidden
Question 3967 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
According to the time estimates made by the PERT planners, the maximum time that would be needed to complete an activity is called as ............
Athe most likely time estimate
Boptimistic time estimate
Cexpected time estimate
Dpessimistic time estimate
Answer is hidden
Question 3968 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the options is not a notable challenge while scheduling a project?
ADeadlines exist
BIndependent activities
CToo many workers may be required
DCostly delay
Answer is hidden
Question 3969 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In which phase of the project most of the money and manpower are required?[cite: 14]
Ainitiation phase
Bplanning phase
Cexecution phase
Dclosing phase
Answer is hidden
Question 3970 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which is the first stage in a project formulation?[cite: 14]
APlanning
BSetting objectives
CControlling
DEvaluating
Answer is hidden
Question 3971 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following involves continuous betterment in planning and detailing with time?[cite: 14]
AProject enhancement
BProgressive elaboration
CProgressive rehabilitation
DContinuous improvement
Answer is hidden
Question 3972 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
in resource levelling which of the following is constraint?[cite: 14]
ATime
BMoney
CResources
DBoth time and money
Answer is hidden
Question 3973 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which term describes the utilization of resources in a project without altering the project duration?[cite: 14]
AResource smoothing
BResource leveling
CCritical path method
DFast tracking
Answer is hidden
Question 3974 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Resource smoothing is ............[cite: 14]
Aan optimization and economical utilization of resources
Ban adjustment of resources without affecting project duration
Ca gradual increase in resources
Da gradual decrease in resources
Answer is hidden
Question 3975 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Cost variance (CV) is which of the following equations?[cite: 14]
ACV - BCWP - ACWP
BCV = BCWP - ACWP
CCV = BCWS
DBoth (a) and (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 3976 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A technique for performing quantitative analysis of progress is known as ............[cite: 14]
ABCWS
BEVA
CBAC
DCBSE
Answer is hidden
Question 3977 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A schedule performance index (SPI) of 0.76 means ............[cite: 14]
Ayou are over budget
Byou are ahead of schedule
Cyou are only progressing at 76 percent of the rate originally planned
Dyou are only progressing at 24 percent of the rate originally planned
Answer is hidden
Question 3978 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A cost performance index (CPI) of 0.89 means ............[cite: 14]
Aat this time, we expect the total project to cost 89 percent more than planned
Bwhen the project is completed we will have spent 89 percent more than planned
Cthe project is only progressing at 89 percent of the rate planned
Dthe project is only getting 89 cents out of every dollar invested
Answer is hidden
Question 3979 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Capital budgeting is ............[cite: 14]
Areversible
Bunimportant
Cirreversible
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3980 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In which of the following cases project is in better shape?[cite: 14]
ABoth CPI and SPI are less than 1
BWhen CPI is more than 1 and SPI is less than one
CWhen CPI is less than one and SPI is more than one
DWhen both CPI and SPI are more than one
Answer is hidden
Question 3981 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The budgeted cost for all the activities in a project with the help of Earned Value Method is ............[cite: 14]
Aactual cost
Bbudget at completion
Cbudget for completion
Destimate at completion
Answer is hidden
Question 3982 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Cost budgeting can be best described by which of the following?[cite: 14]
AThe process of developing the future trends along with the assessment of probabilities, uncertainties, and inflation that could occur during the project
BDefinitive
COrder of magnitude
DConceptual
Answer is hidden
Question 3983 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The technique for establishing and maintaining priorities among the various jobs of a project, is known ............[cite: 14]
Aevent flow scheduling technique
Bcritical ratio scheduling
Cslotting technique for scheduling
Dshort interval scheduling
Answer is hidden
Question 3984 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The flow of information through MIS is ............[cite: 14]
Aneed dependent
Borganization dependent
Cinformation dependent
Dmanagement dependent
Answer is hidden
Question 3985 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The information of MIS comes from the ............[cite: 14]
Ainternal source
Bexternal source
Cboth internal and external source
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3986 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is NOT an objective of MIS?[cite: 14]
AFacilitate the decisions-making process
BProvide requisite information at each level of management
CSupport decision-making
DRecruit people for system
Answer is hidden
Question 3987 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The back bone of any organization is ............[cite: 14]
Ainformation
Bemployee
Cmanagement
Dcapital
Answer is hidden
Question 3988 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Feasibility study determines ............[cite: 14]
Awhether the project is possible with resources
Bcomparing the project with world class manufacturing norms
Ccalculate the cost crashing each unit
Dadd duration to each unit
Answer is hidden
Question 3989 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In project management when does planning take place?
ABefore the project
BDuring the project execution
CAt the start of the project
DAfter the project
Answer is hidden
Question 3990 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What process involves deciding how to approach and plan the risk management activities for the project?
APerforming qualitative risk analysis
BPlanning risk management
CPerforming quantitative risk analysis
DIdentifying risks
Answer is hidden
Question 3991 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not considered as a risk in project management?
ASpecification delays
BProduct competition
CTesting
DStaff turnover
Answer is hidden
Question 3992 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Risk event graph is having following on X axis ............[cite: 15]
AGantt chart
Bwork break down structure
Cproject life cycle
Dsplitting
Answer is hidden
Question 3993 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Project performance consists of ............[cite: 15]
Atime
Bcost
Cquality
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3994 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
For a financial institution the most important study of a project to be taken for risks management is ............[cite: 15]
Aappraisal
Benvironmental and social
Ctechnical
Dfinancial and economical
Answer is hidden
Question 3995 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Project Manager must ensure that it develops appropriate trade offs as ............[cite: 15]
Atime, cost and performance
Bmoney, cost and return on investment
Cmen, materials and machines
Dtime, value and performance
Answer is hidden
Question 3996 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which stage of project management life cycle requires the maximum time of completion ............[cite: 15]
Aconceptualization
Bplanning
Cexecution
Destimation
Answer is hidden
Question 3997 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
To be successful in a functional organization, the PM must rely on ............[cite: 15]
Areferent power
Bformal authority
Cinformal power structure
Dboth (a) and (c)
Answer is hidden
Question 3998 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If employee does wrong in work, employer have to take responsibility of it, this is known ............[cite: 15]
Ajoint liability
Bvicarious liability
Cconcurrent liability
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 3999 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In a payback period method of project evaluation and appraisal the project with ............ equal to cut off period will be accepted.[cite: 15]
Amore than
Bless than
Cpositive
Dnegative
Answer is hidden
Question 4000 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Real rate of return is equal to ............[cite: 15]
ANominal rate + Inflation rate
BNominal rate * Inflation rate
CNominal rate - Inflation rate
DNominal rate / Inflation rate
Answer is hidden
Question 4001 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The most successful project manager usually ............[cite: 15]
Aworks their way up from assistants in the project office to full-fledged project managers.
Bsupplementing that experience with formal education
Ccomes right from Harvard's MBA program into managing large projects.
Dis considered the technical expert of their field
Answer is hidden
Question 4002 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Risk management is one of the most important jobs for a ............[cite: 15]
Aclient
Binvestor
Cproduction team
Dproject manager
Answer is hidden
Question 4003 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Risk management is responsibility of the ............[cite: 15]
Acustomer
Binvestor
Cdeveloper
Dproject team
Answer is hidden
Question 4004 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Newspaper, magazine, radio, television are examples of ............[cite: 15]
Astoring information
Bretrieving information
Ccommunication information
Dacquiring information
Answer is hidden
Question 4005 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Outsourced projects are susceptible to conflicts as ............[cite: 15]
Apeople get less pay in these projects and work is more
Bmore work pressure and less time horizon
Cthese projects are away from home location
Dpeople are unaccustomed to working together and have different values
Answer is hidden
Question 4006 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Conflict occurrence in projects is ............[cite: 15]
Aunavoidable
Bdepend on type of project
Cavoidable
Ddepends on culture
Answer is hidden
Question 4007 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What assesses the risk and your plans for risk mitigation and revise these when you learn more about the risk?[cite: 15]
ARisk planning
BRisk identification
CRisk monitoring
DRisk analysis
Answer is hidden
Question 4008 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following risk is the failure of a purchased component to perform as expected?[cite: 15]
AProduct risk
BProject risk
CBusiness risk
DProgramming risk
Answer is hidden
Question 4009 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following risks are derived from the organizational environment where the software is being developed?[cite: 15]
APeople risks
BTechnology risks
CEstimation risks
DOrganizational risks
Answer is hidden
Question 4010 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which risk is connected to the circumstance outside the project that may influence the scope of work and the performance of the organization?[cite: 15]
AOperational risk
BFinancial risk
CStrategic risk
DContextual risk
Answer is hidden
Question 4011 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not the part of risk control?[cite: 15]
AExecution of the risk response-strategy
BMonitoring of triggering events
CInitiating contingency plans
DNot watching for new risks
Answer is hidden
Question 4012 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following strategies means that the impact of the risk will be reduced?[cite: 15]
AAvoidance strategies
BMinimization strategies
CContingency plans
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4013 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
When do you perform risk identification?[cite: 15]
AAt the beginning of a project
BDuring project planning
CDuring the whole lifetime of a project
DDuring project execution
Answer is hidden
Question 4014 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The project manager has the most authority in the ............ type of organization.[cite: 16]
Aproject expediter
Bmatrix
Cprojectized organization
Dfunctional
Answer is hidden
Question 4015 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The successful project managers spend most of their time ............[cite: 16]
Aplanning with their personnel
Bplanning with the top management
Ccommunication with the project team
Dstudying project results
Answer is hidden
Question 4016 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not project management goal?[cite: 16]
AKeeping overall costs within budget
BDelivering the software to the customer at the agreed time
CMaintaining a happy and well-functioning development team
DAvoiding customer complaints
Answer is hidden
Question 4017 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The decision to request an increase the resources for a project is the responsibility of the ............[cite: 16]
Afunctional manager
Bproject manager
Cdirector of project management
Dcustomer
Answer is hidden
Question 4018 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Net present value of a machine is ............[cite: 16]
APV of cash inflows less cost of investment
BPV of cash inflows + cost of investment
CPV of net profit after tax less cost of investment
DPV of cash inflows less average cost of investment
Answer is hidden
Question 4019 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Capital structure of a company related with ............[cite: 16]
Ashareholders' funds
Blong term debts, preference share capital and equity capital
Cdebentures and loans
Dtotal assets less liabilities
Answer is hidden
Question 4020 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A company that issues stocks and bonds to raise funds results in ............[cite: 16]
Adecrease in cash
Bincrease in cash
Cincrease in equity
Dincrease in liabilities
Answer is hidden
Question 4021 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The bond issued without any collateral is called ............[cite: 16]
Apreference share
Bequity share
Cdebenture
Ddebt capital
Answer is hidden
Question 4022 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Debenture is ............[cite: 16]
Aunsecured bond
Bbond without collateral
Csource of capital budgeting
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4023 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A debenture ............[cite: 16]
Ais a long-term loan
Bdoes not require security
Cis a short-term loan
Dreceives dividend payments
Answer is hidden
Question 4024 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is unsafe share?[cite: 16]
APreference shares
BPrimary shares
CDebentures
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4025 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The average cost incurred in supplying a particular benefit over the entire life time of the project is called ............[cite: 16]
Aproject cost
Baverage life cycle cost
Cmaintenance cost
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4026 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The profit of the company is shared in form of dividend but has no voting rights in ............[cite: 16]
Aequity share
BPreference share
Cordinary share
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4027 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Point out the false statements ............[cite: 16]
Aa firm can buy its own debentures and shares
Ba company can issue convertible debentures
Ctender assessment
Dcontract assessment
Answer is hidden
Question 4028 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If two parties enter into an agreement for performing or not performing any work, then it is known as ............[cite: 16]
Acontract
Btender
Cprocurement
Dadjudication
Answer is hidden
Question 4029 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The procurement of works, goods or services by the entity itself is called ............[cite: 16]
Aforce account
Bdirect procurement
Cseal quotation
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4030 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
For the formation of user's committee, members are selected ............[cite: 16]
Aamong the people of whole district
Bamong the beneficiaries of the project
Cby nomination by the chief district officer of the district
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4031 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The project usually completed by user committee's are ............[cite: 16]
Alabor intensive projects
Bcapital intensive projects
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4032 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The projects can be carried out out by user committee with cost estimate upto ............[cite: 16]
A10 Millions
B20 Millions
C50 Millions
D500 Millions
Answer is hidden
Question 4033 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
For procurement of works upto 2 million, buy which of the following method is to be considered?[cite: 16]
Asealed tender
Bby direct negotiation
Cby bidding
Dby direct labor or direct negotiation
Answer is hidden
Question 4034 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The bid validity period for bid having estimated cost upto 100 million is ............[cite: 17]
A45 days
B60 days
C90 days
D105 days
Answer is hidden
Question 4035 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In project management, what percentage of the total project cost is typically estimated for office management expenses?[cite: 17]
A2.5%
B4%
C10%
D12%
Answer is hidden
Question 4036 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Nepal Government handed over the fast-track project to Nepal Army. After handing in, what type of contract was it?[cite: 17]
ABOT
BBOOT
Cbuild and design
Dbuild, design, procurement, subcontracting and all works
Answer is hidden
Question 4037 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The relation between contract and agreement is ............[cite: 17]
Asynonym
Baptonym
Call contract are agreement but all agreement are not contract
Dall agreement are contract but not all contract are agreement
Answer is hidden
Question 4038 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The ultimate method of resolving any dispute with a contractor is ............[cite: 17]
Anegotiation
Bmediation
Carbitration
Dlitigation
Answer is hidden
Question 4039 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The damages caused due to delay in work are termed as ............[cite: 17]
Aliquidated damage
Bunliquidated damage
Cdirect damages
Dtangible damages
Answer is hidden
Question 4040 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Technical proposal during tendering is included in ............[cite: 17]
Asingle stage single envelope system
Bsingle stage double envelope system
Cdouble stage single envelope system
Ddouble stage double envelope system
Answer is hidden
Question 4041 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The aim of ............ is to do whatever possible to avoid any kind of harm or accident.[cite: 13]
Aminimalist
Breasonable care
Cbeyond one's duty
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4042 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
It is important to be at work ............ every day and on time unless you are sick or have a family emergency.[cite: 13]
Aappearance
Battendance
Cattitude
Drespect
Answer is hidden
Question 4043 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
............ is the rules and standards that govern the decisions and actions of an engineer as a professional.[cite: 13]
ADoctor in Ethics
BDoctor in Ethics
CEthics
DEngineering Ethics
Answer is hidden
Question 4044 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
............ can help engineers make correct decisions and become better professionals.[cite: 13]
AStudy of English
BStudy of Math
CStudy of Ethics
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4045 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
One of the most important issues faced by the world is that ............[cite: 13]
Acomputer ethics
Bconfidentiality
Cenvironmental deterioration
Dconflict of interest
Answer is hidden
Question 4046 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The prime responsibility of any professional is ............[cite: 13]
Aconfidentiality
Bconflict of interest
Cenvironmental ethics
Dcomputer ethics
Answer is hidden
Question 4047 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which one does fall under computer ethics?[cite: 13]
AComputers can be used for robbery, crime and blackmailing others
BHacking is used to access private information
CLeak of such information of individual leads to harassments in terms of repeated phone calls
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4048 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Fundamental principle of professional engineering ethics is ............[cite: 13]
Auploading and advancing engineering profession
Bmaintain high level of ethical conduct
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4049 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Engineering profession needs cooperation with the profession of ............[cite: 13]
Amedical professional
Baccountant
Clawyer
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4050 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Professionalism of engineers is lost due to ............[cite: 13]
Ahonesty
Bdignity
Cbribery
Ddiscipline
Answer is hidden
Question 4051 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
For the fulfillment of his/her professional duties engineer should ............[cite: 13]
Aparamount the health of the public
Bparamount the safety of the public
Cwelfare of the public
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4052 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Engineer shall act in such a manner as to uphold and enhance the honor and dignity of engineering profession and shall act with ............ for bribery, fraud and corruption.[cite: 13]
Atolerance
Ba penchant
Ca predilection
Dzero tolerance
Answer is hidden
Question 4053 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Engineers shall build their professional reputation on the ............ of their services and shall not compete unfairly with others.[cite: 13]
Apublicity
Bbasis
Cmerit
Dreputation
Answer is hidden
Question 4054 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Engineers shall not disclose, without ............ confidential information coming the business affairs of technical process of any present or former or employer, or public body on which they serve.[cite: 13]
Aediting
Bgetting paid
Cremuneration
Dconsent
Answer is hidden
Question 4055 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not a characteristic of a profession?[cite: 13]
Ait enjoys a high level of public trust and confidence
Bit is organized into associations
Cthere are published authoritative performance and ethical standards
DAll of the above are characteristics of a profession
Answer is hidden
Question 4056 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
............ skills such as writing, speaking and body language are important work ethics so that you can be clear in your messages to others.[cite: 13]
ACommunication
BCooperation
CHonesty
DIntegrity
Answer is hidden
Question 4057 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
You are a person with a high level of ............ if you stand by your values even if others put pressure on you to do something that is wrong or if they make fun of you.[cite: 13]
Acommunication
Bcooperation
Chonesty
Dintegrity
Answer is hidden
Question 4058 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If you don't have ............ you can really get in trouble for lying, cheating or deceiving others.[cite: 13]
Acommunication
Bcooperation
Chonesty
Dintegrity
Answer is hidden
Question 4059 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If you have ............ you will be a trusted person because they will see that you are committed to your company.[cite: 13]
Acommunication
Borganizational skills
Cloyalty
Drespect
Answer is hidden
Question 4060 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following an engineer should not follow?[cite: 13]
AAct as faithful agent for client
BAccept compensation from more than one party for same service without the consent of all
CIndicate client the adverse consequences if judgment is over ruled
DUndertake only these assignments for which he is qualified
Answer is hidden
Question 4061 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
is based on personal belief, values and individual's conscience rather than reasoning.[cite: 13]
AMoral
BEthics
CBoth (a) and (b)
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4062 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If you can keep things at work in order and have a neat workplace, then you have great ............[cite: 13]
Aproductivity
Bcooperate
Corganizational skills
Drespect
Answer is hidden
Question 4063 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
It is always important to ............ yourself, others and the place where you work because you don't always agree with them.[cite: 13]
Aappearance
Bcooperate
Ccommunicate
Drespect
Answer is hidden
Question 4064 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Some jobs cannot be done alone and some can be done much better and faster if you possess the quality of ............[cite: 13]
Ahonesty
Bcooperation
Cteamwork
Dintegrity
Answer is hidden
Question 4065 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Strong ............ means you have a high sense of moral and ethical behavior that earns respect of others.[cite: 13]
Aresponsibility
Brespect
Cconfidence
Dcharacter
Answer is hidden
Question 4066 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
A personality measure of the strength of a person's convictions is called ............[cite: 13]
Alocus of control
Battitude
Cego strength
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4067 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In ............ a professional assumes full responsibilities and if anything wrong happens he/she sees their own responsibility.[cite: 13]
Aminimalist
Breasonable care
Cbeyond one's duty
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4068 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
moves beyond the minimal view's concern.[cite: 13]
AMinimalist
BBeyond one's duty
CReasonable care
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4069 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not concerned with the authority of engineers?[cite: 14]
AExpress an opinion on engineering matter
BGood behavior with client
CConscious with his profession
DDivulge the confidential matter
Answer is hidden
Question 4070 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not considered a professional quality of an engineer?[cite: 14]
AGood behavior with clients
BHonesty
CBias towards political parties
DStrong technical skills
Answer is hidden
Question 4071 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The environment which has been modified by human activities is called ............[cite: 14]
AAir pollution
BSoil pollution
CSoil erosion
DWater pollution
Answer is hidden
Question 4072 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The environment which has been modified by human activities is called ............[cite: 14]
Anatural environment
Banthropogenic environment
Cmodern environment
Durban environment
Answer is hidden
Question 4073 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Is the effect of undesirable changes in our surroundings that have harmful effects on plants, animals and human beings.[cite: 14]
APollution
BDegradation
CDeforestation
DClimate change
Answer is hidden
Question 4074 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.[cite: 14]
ASustainable development
BHuman development
CEconomic development
DSocial development
Answer is hidden
Question 4075 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
According to labor act, employers must conduct periodic health and safety inspections and maintain records of these inspections.[cite: 14]
AAt least once in a year
BAt least twice in a year
CAt least thrice in a year
DAt least 4 times in a year
Answer is hidden
Question 4076 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
According to Labor Act, the remuneration for over time is ............[cite: 14]
A2 times the regular pay
B1.75 times the regular pay
C1.5 times the regular pay
D1.25 times the regular pay
Answer is hidden
Question 4077 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The government of Nepal has enforced concepts of occupational safety and health through its ............[cite: 14]
ALabor Act 1992
BLabor Act 1994
CLabor Act 1995
DLabor Act 1995
Answer is hidden
Question 4078 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Engineers day is celebrated on ............[cite: 14]
AShrawan 3
BShrawan 4
CAsar 3
DAsar 4
Answer is hidden
Question 4079 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
As per labor law, workers are not allowed to work continuously for more than ............[cite: 14]
A3 hours
B5 hours
C8 hours
D12 hours
Answer is hidden
Question 4080 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
According to labors act, the maximum working hour for a labor per week should be ............[cite: 14]
A42 hrs
B45 hrs
C48 hrs
D53 hrs
Answer is hidden
Question 4081 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
As per labor law, how many hours workers are allowed to work in a day?[cite: 14]
A3 hours
B5 hours
C8 hours
D12 hours
Answer is hidden
Question 4082 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Nepal engineer's association is ............[cite: 14]
Agovernment body to support NEC
Bindependent organization of Nepalese engineers
Cprivate body which works for betterment of engineers
Dnon-government organization
Answer is hidden
Question 4083 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Nepal engineers association was established in ............ B.S.[cite: 14]
A2010
B2019
C2024
D2034
Answer is hidden
Question 4084 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
NEA is registered under the ............[cite: 14]
ASocial Service Act
BNEC Act
CCivil Service Act
DCo-operatives Act
Answer is hidden
Question 4085 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The objectives of NEA are ............[cite: 14]
ATo promote development of the engineering science and technology in Nepal.
BTo promote fellowship goodwill and cooperation assistance among the Nepalese engineers and safeguard their rights and interests.
CBy utilizing, to the highest extent possible, the participation of the positional of the national engineering manpower of the country in the national development activities of Nepal, make effort towards ending foreign dependency in this regard
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4086 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
NEA is governed by an elected executive council of ............ members.[cite: 14]
A25
B18
C21
D17
Answer is hidden
Question 4087 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The number of executive members in NEA's Provincial committee is ............[cite: 14]
A25 and 15
B21 and 15
C15 and 25
D25 and 16
Answer is hidden
Question 4088 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The number of member directly elected for council from Nepal engineering association ............[cite: 14]
A7
B21
C25
D10
Answer is hidden
Question 4089 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The types of membership issued by NEA are ............[cite: 14]
Ageneral membership
Blife time membership
Cboth of the above
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4090 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
NEA is ............ of Nepalese engineers.[cite: 14]
Aindependent nonprofit organization
Bprofitable organization
Cbroker organization
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4091 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which is not a professional engineering body?[cite: 14]
ANepal Engineering Association (NEA)
BSociety of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Association (SEEN)
CSociety of Public Health Engineers Nepal (SOPHEN)
DSociety of Consulting Architectural and Engineering Firms (SCAEF)
Answer is hidden
Question 4092 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
CAAN, NEC, NTA, etc. are examples of ............[cite: 14]
Aregulatory body
Bcommercial sectors
CNGOs
DINGOs
Answer is hidden
Question 4093 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
How many categories of NEA memberships are there?[cite: 14]
A4
B5
C7
D2
Answer is hidden
Question 4094 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is the tenure of an executive member of NEA?[cite: 14]
A4 year
B2-year
C3 year
D1 year
Answer is hidden
Question 4095 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Nepal engineering council is an autonomous in under NEC act ............
A2056 B.S.
B2055 B.S.
C2054 B.S.
D2060 B.S.
Answer is hidden
Question 4096 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Nepal Engineering Council [NEC] is ............
Agovernment and autonomous body
Bprivate body
Cnon-profit organization
Dgovernment body
Answer is hidden
Question 4097 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following is not the function of NEC?
APrepare and implement the policy, plan and programmes
BRecognize the academic institutions
COpening the college
DTo prescribe the basic conditions of student admission
Answer is hidden
Question 4098 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which one is not concerned with the NEC?
AAccreditation of academic certificate
BAppointment of teacher
CAuthority of opening engineering garage
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4099 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
When was Nepal engineering council established?
A2054 B.S.
B2055 B.S.
C2056 B.S.
D2057 B.S.
Answer is hidden
Question 4100 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
NEC contacts the GoN through ministry of ............
Afinance
Bphysical infrastructure and transportation
Chome affairs
Dlocal development
Answer is hidden
Question 4101 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The decisions of NEC are authenticated by ............
Apresident
Bvice president
Cregistrar
Dmember nominated by president
Answer is hidden
Question 4102 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
NEC does not approach for ............
Aengineer
Boverseer to engineer
Cminimum degree BE
Dall of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4103 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The number of section in NEC act 2055 is ............
A18
B28
C38
D48
Answer is hidden
Question 4104 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The academic qualification of the chief of NEC is ............
Amaster's degree in engineering
Bmaster's degree in economics
Cmaster's degree in finance
Dbachelor's degree in engineering in engineering
Answer is hidden
Question 4105 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The general experience required for nomination of chairperson of NEC is ............
A10 yrs
B15 yrs
C20 yrs
D25 yrs
Answer is hidden
Question 4106 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is the requirement for being chairman of NEC?
ABachelor Degree and Engineering experience of 10 years
BBachelor Degree and Engineering experience of 15 years
CMaster Degree and Engineering experience of 15 years
DMaster Degree and Engineering experience of 10 years
Answer is hidden
Question 4107 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Who appoints the chairman of NEC?
AThe Government of Nepal
BThe President of Nepal
CMinistry of home affairs
DThe supreme court
Answer is hidden
Question 4108 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Who is the first president of NEC?
AEr. Shiv Mangal Giri
BProf. Dr. Padam Bahadur Shahi
CEr. Ram Babusharma
DNone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4109 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
What is the minimum qualification of vice president of the NEC?
AMasters in Engineering and 15 years' experience
BBachelors in Engineering and 15 years' experience
CMasters in Engineering and 10 years experience
DBachelors in Engineering and 10 years experience
Answer is hidden
Question 4110 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
An American engineer willing to work in Nepal may apply for registration under ............[cite: 16]
ACategory A
BCategory B
CCategory C
DCategory D
Answer is hidden
Question 4111 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following category of engineer is not mention in engineering council rule?[cite: 16]
ACharted engineer
BProfessional engineer
CGeneral engineer
DAll of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4112 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Book of foreign engineers is maintained in ............[cite: 16]
ANepali
BEnglish
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4113 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
NEC publishes the name of registered engineers each year as well as every fourth year. The name of foreigner engineers publishes ............[cite: 16]
Aeach year
Bevery fourth year
Cboth (a) and (b)
Dnone of the above
Answer is hidden
Question 4114 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
NEC has classified an engineers in to ............ categories.[cite: 16]
A2
B3
C4
D5
Answer is hidden
Question 4115 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Registration charge of general engineers for students studied in foreign universities is ............[cite: 16]
ARs. 3000
BRs. 4000
CRs. 10000
DRs. 15000
Answer is hidden
Question 4116 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Total number of registration category of engineer in NEC is ............[cite: 16]
A3
B4
C5
D6
Answer is hidden
Question 4117 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The min qualification required for engineer practices in Nepal is ............[cite: 16]
ABE
BBE + register in NEC
CME
DME + register in NEC
Answer is hidden
Question 4118 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The interval of surveillance of colleges registered under NEC is ............[cite: 16]
Aevery 2 years
Bonce in every 3 years
Ctwice in 4 years
Dthrice in every 5 years
Answer is hidden
Question 4119 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
In general, Nepal engineering council meeting per year should be held ............[cite: 16]
A2 times
B3 times
C4 times
D5 times
Answer is hidden
Question 4120 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Minimum .......... of the members should be present in a meeting to fulfil the quorum of NEC.[cite: 16]
A0.25
B0.5
C0.75
D1
Answer is hidden
Question 4121 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
If a motion submitted to a meeting of council to remove the name from the book on charge of violating professional code of conduct is passed by ............ majority of council, the name of the engineer is removed from the book.[cite: 16]
Atwo third
Bgeneral
Cthree - fourth
Dfull
Answer is hidden
Question 4122 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
Which of the following reasons caused desolution of NEC by GON?[cite: 16]
ACommittee of NEC work against the act and regulations
B50% of the member are bankrupt
CCollege recognition is given without fulfilling the criteria of NEC regulations
DFormation of new government of Nepal
Answer is hidden
Question 4123 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
The minimum time period allocated by GoN for formation of new council after the dissolution of current NEC like is ............[cite: 16]
A3 months
B6 months
C9 months
D1 year
Answer is hidden
Question 4124 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
For temporary affiliation, the supervision of college conducted by NEC for ............[cite: 16]
Aone time in a year
Bonce in two year
Ctwice times in a year
Dthree times a year
Answer is hidden
Question 4125 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
For permanent affiliation, the supervision of college conducted by NEC for ............[cite: 16]
Aone time in a year
Bonce in two year
Ctwice times in a year
Dthree times a year
Answer is hidden
Question 4126 of 4146Ch 10 · Project Planning, Design and Implementation
How much % college should score at least in average to get permanent affiliation for new college from NEC?[cite: 16]